0% found this document useful (0 votes)

295 views345 pages

ATV LIFT Programming Manual EN BBV19478 04 PDF

Uploaded by

ApexBD01

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

295 views345 pages

ATV LIFT Programming Manual EN BBV19478 04 PDF

Uploaded by

ApexBD01

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 345

2354235 11/2008

Altivar LIFT
Variable speed drive
for synchronous and asynchronous lift motors

Programming Manual
(Software V5.4)

11/2011
BBV19478

www.schneider-electric.com
Table of contents

Before you begin _____________________________________________________________________________________________ 4

Documentation structure _______________________________________________________________________________________ 5
Software enhancements _______________________________________________________________________________________ 6
Presentation _________________________________________________________________________________________________ 7
Standard EN81-1 certification ___________________________________________________________________________________ 8
Vocabulary __________________________________________________________________________________________________ 9
Setup procedure_____________________________________________________________________________________________ 10
Factory configuration _________________________________________________________________________________________ 11
Setup - Preliminary recommendations ____________________________________________________________________________ 12
Graphic terminal_____________________________________________________________________________________________ 14
Description of the terminal _______________________________________________________________________________ 14
Description of the graphic screen__________________________________________________________________________ 15
First power-up - [5. LANGUAGE] menu _____________________________________________________________________ 18
Subsequent power ups _________________________________________________________________________________ 19
Programming: Example of accessing a parameter ____________________________________________________________ 20
Quick navigation_______________________________________________________________________________________ 21
Integrated display terminal _____________________________________________________________________________________ 24
Functions of the display and the keys ______________________________________________________________________ 24
Accessing menus _____________________________________________________________________________________ 25
Accessing menu parameters _____________________________________________________________________________ 26
[2. ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC-)____________________________________________________________________________________ 27
Structure of the parameter tables________________________________________________________________________________ 30
Interdependence of parameter values ____________________________________________________________________________ 31
Finding a parameter in this document ____________________________________________________________________________ 32
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-) _____________________________________________________________________________________________ 33
[International unit] (SIU) ________________________________________________________________________________ 119
[1.2 MONITORING] (SUP-) ___________________________________________________________________________________ 124
[1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-)_______________________________________________________________________________________ 133
[1.4 MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-)________________________________________________________________________________ 145
[1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I-O-) ___________________________________________________________________________ 173
[1.6 COMMAND] (CtL-) ______________________________________________________________________________________ 203
[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-) ____________________________________________________________________________ 216
[1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT] (FLt-) _____________________________________________________________________________ 269
[1.9 COMMUNICATION] (COM-) _______________________________________________________________________________ 291
[1.10 DIAGNOSTICS] _______________________________________________________________________________________ 295
[1.11 IDENTIFICATION]______________________________________________________________________________________ 298
[1.12 FACTORY SETTINGS] (FCS-) ____________________________________________________________________________ 299
[1.13 USER MENU] (USr-)____________________________________________________________________________________ 302
[1.14 CONTROL. INSIDE CARD] (PLC-)_________________________________________________________________________ 303
[3 OPEN/SAVE AS] _________________________________________________________________________________________ 304
[4. PASSWORD] (COd-) _____________________________________________________________________________________ 306
[6 MONITORING CONFIG.]___________________________________________________________________________________ 308
[7 DISPLAY CONFIG.] _______________________________________________________________________________________ 312
[MULTIPOINT SCREEN] _____________________________________________________________________________________ 317
Maintenance_______________________________________________________________________________________________ 318
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting_______________________________________________________________________________ 319
User settings tables _________________________________________________________________________________________ 325
Index of functions ___________________________________________________________________________________________ 327
Index of parameter codes ____________________________________________________________________________________ 328

BBV19478 11/2011 3
Before you begin

Read and understand these instructions before performing any procedure using this drive.

DANGER
HAZARDOUS ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
• Read and understand the Installation Manual before installing or operating the ATV LIFT drive. Installation,
adjustment, repair, and maintenance must be performed by qualified personnel.

• The user is responsible for compliance with all international and national electrical standards in force concerning
protective grounding of all equipment.

• Many parts in this variable speed drive, including printed wiring boards, operate at line voltage. DO NOT TOUCH.
Use only electrically insulated tools.

• DO NOT touch unshielded components or terminal strip screw connections with voltage present.

• DO NOT short across terminals PA/+ and PC/- or across the DC bus capacitors.

• Install and close all the covers before applying power or starting and stopping the drive.

• Before servicing the variable speed drive

- Disconnect all power.
- Place a “DO NOT TURN ON” label on the variable speed drive disconnect.
- Lock the disconnect in the open position.
• Disconnect all power including external control power that may be present before servicing the drive. WAIT
15 MINUTES to allow the DC bus capacitors to discharge. Then follow the DC bus voltage measurement procedure
given in the Installation Manual to verify that the DC voltage is less than 42 Vdc. The drive LEDs are not accurate
indicators of the absence of DC bus voltage.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION
DAMAGED EQUIPMENT
Do not operate or install any drive that appears damaged.
Failure to follow this instruction can result in injury and/or equipment damage.

4 BBV19478 11/2011
Documentation structure

The following Altivar LIFT technical documents are available on www.schneider-electric.com

Installation manual
This describes how to assemble and connect the drive.

Programming Manual
This describes the functions, parameters and use of the drive terminal (integrated display terminal and graphic display terminal).
The communication functions are not described in this manual, but in the manual for the bus or network used.

Communication parameters manual

This manual describes:

• The drive parameters with specific information for use via a bus or communication network.

• The operating modes specific to communication (state chart).

• The interaction between communication and local control.

Manuals for Modbus®, CANopen®, Ethernet™, Profibus®, INTERBUS, Uni-Telway

and Modbus® Plus, etc.
These manuals describe the assembly, connection to the bus or network, signaling, diagnostics, and configuration of the communication-
specific parameters via the integrated display terminal or the graphic display terminal.
They also describe the communication services of the protocols.

BBV19478 11/2011 5
Software enhancements

Since the Altivar LIFT was first launched, it has benefited from the addition of several new functions. The software version has been
updated to V5.4.
Although this documentation relates to version V5.4, it can still be used with earlier versions.

Enhancements made to version V5.4 in comparison to V5.3

New parameters and functions

Menu [1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

• New parameter [Preset speed selec] (PSEn) (see page 42)
• New parameter [Stop type ISP] (SttL) (see page 97)
• New parameter [Delay Thermal fault] (dth) (see page 106)
• New parameter [International unit] (SIU) page 119
• New parameters for the rescue mode : (see page 101)
- [Opt. rescue mode] (OrM): Optimized rescue mode.
- [Acc. time rescue] (rACC): Acceleration time during rescue.
- [Resc max current ] (rCLI): Current limitation during rescue.
- [Calc. rescue power] (PMC): This is the power needed by the drive only during evacuation.
- [Cust. rescue speed] (OrSP): Maximum optimized rescue speed,
• New methods of assigning logic output (see page 43 [OUTPUTS] (OUt-))
- [Rescue dir.] (Opt): Optimized direction for rescue mode.
- [Rdy to run] (rdYr): The drive is ready to start or already started.
• New methods of assigning [Encoder usage] (EnU)
- [Slip Comp.] (COr):The encoder provides speed feedback for speed correction and monitoring. (see page 46)
• New methods of assigning [Thermal alarm stop] (SAt) (see page 106)
- [No] (nO): Function inactive
- [Th. mot drv] (tH): Defered stop on drive thermal alarm or motor thermal alarm
- [PTC] (PtC): Defered stop on PTC alarm
- [ALL] (ALL): Defered stop on drive thermal alarm, motor thermal alarm or PTC alarm
• New factory setting for [Dis. operat opt code] (dOtd) (see page 137)
- [Freewheel] (nSt) to [Ramp stop] (rMp)

Menu [1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)

• New parameter [Stop type ISP] (SttL). (see page 264)
• New parameters for the rescue mode: (see page 265)
- [Opt. rescue mode] (OrM): Optimized rescue mode.
- [Acc. time rescue] (rACC): Acceleration time during rescue.
- [Resc max current ] (rCLI): Current limitation during rescue.
- [Calc. rescue power] (PMC): This is the power needed by the drive only during evacuation.
- [Cust. rescue speed] (OrSP): Maximum optimized rescue speed,
• New parameter [Delay Thermal fault] (dth) (see page 278)

6 BBV19478 11/2011
Presentation

ATV LIFT has been specially developed for lift applications and therefore meets the requirements of lift installers:
• Quick, simple drive setup via a dedicated LIFT menu.
• Drive performance that offers optimum comfort.
• Integrated LIFT functions: special lift ramp, inspection function, rollback management, optimization of "half floors", UPS evacuation,
etc.

ATV LIFT can only be used with lifts.

WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL

The speed loop implemented in the ATV LIFT is specifically adapted to lift applications.
It must only be used in a lift application.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury and/or equipment damage.

The following options are compatibles with ATV LIFT from a minimum version:
- graphic display terminal from the version V1.1IE24,
- universal encoder interface card (VW3A3409) from the version V1.2IE01.

ATV LIFT selection has been simplified: the sizing of the ATV LIFT is done with the nominal current
of the motor. This new policy adapts ATV LIFT references with synchronous motors. Maximum transient current has changed.
It was 1.5 In with ATV71L and is now 1.36 In with ATV LIFT.

When migrating a lift application from ATV71L to ATV LIFT, you have to check that the drive does not
reach [current Limitation] (CLI) state during acceleration or deceleration.
In case of current limitation, adapt the drive parameters if necessary:
- Increase [Acceleration time] (ACt)
- Decrease [Lift Leveling time] (LLt)

To improve the comfort in the lift, you have also the possibility to use the notch filter function.

• The previous ATV71L references not listed are no longer available. You have to take the higher power rating drive for substitution.
• Commercial reference construction: ATV71LDxxyyZ where:
- xx : Maximum continuous current at 380 Vac for N4 products and 230 Vac for M3 products.
- yy : Three phase supply voltage M3 = 230V & N4 = 380V.

Power Current Catalog part number Mechanical Size

Rating Rating ATV71L ATV LIFT ATV71L ATV LIFT
3-phase supply voltage : 200...240V
5,5kW 27A ATV71LU55M3Z ATV71LD27M3Z 175*295*161 230*400*187

7,5kW 33A ATV71LU75M3Z ATV71LD33M3Z 210295187 230400187

11kW 54A ATV71LD11M3XZ ATV71LD54M3Z 230400187 240420210

15kW 66A ATV71LD15M3XZ ATV71LD66M3Z 230400187 240420210

3-phase supply voltage : 380...480V

4kW 10A ATV71LU40N4Z ATV71LD10N4Z 155*260*161 175*295*161

5,5kW 14A ATV71LU55N4Z ATV71LD14N4Z 175295161 175295161

7,5kW 17A ATV71LU75N4Z ATV71LD17N4Z 175295161 210295187

11kW 27A ATV71LD11N4Z ATV71LD27N4Z 210295187 230400187

15kW 33A ATV71LD15N4Z ATV71LD33N4Z 230400187 230400187

22kW 48A ATV71LD22N4Z ATV71LD48N4Z 240420210 240550230

Note: the transfer from the graphic display terminal to the drive is possible from ATV71L to ATV LIFT.
The transfer from ATV LIFT to ATV71 L is not possible.
See [3 OPEN/SAVE AS] page 304 for a complete description of configuration transfer.

BBV19478 11/2011 7
Standard EN81-1 certification

EUROPEAN STANDARD EN 81-1 (Ref. No. EN 81-1:1998 E)

The ATV LIFT drive is now compliant with European Standard EN81-1 12.7.3 b) 2) and 3)

12 Lift machine
12.7 Stopping the machine and checking its stopped condition
12.7.3 A.C. or D.C. motor supplied and controlled by static elements
b) a system consisting of :
1) a contactor interrupting the current at all poles.
The coil of the contactor shall be released at least before each change in direction. If the contactor does not release, any further movement
of the lift shall be prevented, and
2) a control device blocking the flow of energy in the static elements, and
3) a monitoring device to verify the blocking of the flow of energy each time the lift is stationary.
If, during a normal stopping period, the blocking of the flow of energy by the static elements is not effective, the monitoring device shall
cause the contactor to release and any further movement of the lift shall be prevented.

Safety Chain LIFT COMMAND CONTROL CARD Safety Chain LIFT COMMAND CONTROL CARD
Circuit Circuit
Control device Monitoring device Control device Monitoring device
Command Feedback Command Feedback

K01 K01 K01 K01

K1
K1

R1C
L1 L2 L3 PWR +24
K1 K1
K1 ATV LIFT R1 = RDY
RdY or rdYr
U1 V1 W1

R1B
K2 K2 K2 K2
K2 K2

U V W U V W

M M
3 ~ 3 ~

The ATV LIFT is in place of the power contactor K1.

- The contactor interrupting the current at all poles is K2

- The control device blocking the flow of energy in the static elements is the drive ATV LIFT trough Power Removal safety function input
- The monitoring device to verify the blocking of the flow of energy each time the lift is stationary is the output drive relay R1 and the auxiliary
contact of K2 contactor.

8 BBV19478 11/2011
Vocabulary

Lift command
Electronic card integrating the lift application intelligence: call management, step displays.
The lift command card monitors the slowdown and stop indicators and controls the drive.

Slowdown indicator
Sensor placed at a precise distance (slowdown length) above and below each step.
When the car passes in front of this sensor, the lift command card removes the high speed command (travel speed) and commands a low
speed (lift leveling speed).

Stop indicator
Sensor placed at a precise distance (stop length) above and below each step.
When the car passes in front of this sensor, the lift command card removes the run command. The car should then stop comfortably within
the [Stop length] (StL).

Rollback
Movement of the car when the brake is released. In gearless applications where the inertia at the motor is large, the brake release must be
specially controlled to cancel this rollback (using an external weight sensor or the rollback management function).

Jerk
Jerk is a measurement of variations in acceleration. It is often related to comfort (comfort is improved as the jerk is reduced).

machine sheave
control panel overspeed detection
machine room
traction cables
inspection box on lift car roof
opening/closing system
automatic lift car door
lift car control panel
base
safety catch
shaft

guide rails

counterweight guide

counterweight

well
buffers

BBV19478 11/2011 9
Setup procedure

INSTALLATION
v 1 Consult the Installation Manual

PROGRAMMING
Procedure applicable if the factory configuration, page 11, and use of the
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-) menu only are sufficient for the application.

b 2 Power up without run command

v If you are using a separate control power
supply, follow the instructions on page 12.

b 3 Select the language, if the drive

has a graphic display terminal

b 4 Configure the menu

[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)
Tips:
• Before you start programming, complete b 5 Start
the user setting tables, page 325.

• Perform an auto-tuning operation to

optimize performance, page 54.

• If you get lost, return to the factory

settings, page 301.

.
Note: Check that the wiring of the
drive is compatible with its
configuration.

10 BBV19478 11/2011
Factory configuration

Drive factory settings

The Altivar LIFT is factory-set for the most common operating conditions:
• Motor frequency: 50 Hz
• Normal stop mode on deceleration lift ramp
• Stop mode in the event of a trip: Freewheel
• Deceleration ramp with leveling speed step.
• Motor thermal current = rated drive current
• Standstill injection braking current = 0.7 x rated drive current, for 0.5 seconds
• No automatic starts after a trip
• Switching frequency 8 kHz.
• Logic inputs:
- LI1: forward, LI2: reverse (2 operating directions), 2-wire control on transition
- LI3: Inactive (not assigned)
- LI4: Lift speed
- LI5: Inspection mode
- LI6: Not assigned
• Analog inputs:
- AI1: Speed reference 0 +10 V
- AI2: 0-20 mA, inactive (not assigned)
• Relay R1: no
• Relay R2: Brake control
• Analog output AO1: dO1 (logic output)

If the above values are compatible with the application, the drive can be used without changing the settings.

Option card factory settings

The option card inputs/outputs are not factory-set.

BBV19478 11/2011 11
Setup - Preliminary recommendations

Turning on and configuring the drive

DANGER
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
• Before turning on and configuring the Altivar LIFT, check that the PWR (POWER REMOVAL) input is deactivated
(at state 0) in order to prevent unintended operation.
• Before turning on the drive, or when exiting the configuration menus, check that the inputs assigned to the run
command are deactivated (at state 0) since they can cause the motor to start immediately.

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION
INCOMPATIBLE LINE VOLTAGE
Before turning on and configuring the drive, ensure that the line voltage is compatible with the supply voltage range shown
on the drive nameplate. The drive may be damaged if the line voltage is not compatible.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Separate control section power supply

When the drive control section is powered independently of the power section (P24 and 0V terminals), whenever an option card is added
or replaced, only the power section must be supplied with power next time the drive is powered up.
By default the new card would not be recognized and it would be impossible to configure it, thereby causing the drive to lock in fault mode.

Power switching via line contactor

CAUTION
• Avoid operating the contactor frequently (premature ageing of the filter capacitors).
• Cycle times < 60 s can result in damage to the precharge resistor.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

User adjustment and extension of functions

• The display unit and buttons can be used to modify the settings and to extend the functions described in the following pages.
• Return to factory settings is made easy by the [1.12 FACTORY SETTINGS] (FCS-) menu, see page 299.
• There are three types of parameter:
- Display: Values displayed by the drive
- Adjustment: Can be changed during operation or when stopped
- Configuration: Can only be modified when stopped and no braking is taking place. Can be displayed during operation.

DANGER
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
• Check that changes made to the settings during operation do not present any danger.
• We recommend stopping the drive before making any changes.

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

12 BBV19478 11/2011
Setup - Preliminary recommendations

Starting
Important:
• In factory settings mode, the motor can only be supplied with power once the “forward”, “reverse” and “DC injection stop” commands
have been reset:
- On power-up or a manual detected fault reset or after a stop command.
If they have not been reset, the drive will display "nSt" but will not start.
• If the automatic restart function has been configured ([Automatic restart] (Atr) parameter in the [1.8-FAULT MANAGEMENT] (FLt-)
menu, see page 273), these commands are taken into account without a reset being necessary.

Test on a low power motor or without a motor

• In factory settings mode, [Output Phase Loss] (OPL) detection page 276 is active (OPL = YES). To check the drive in a test or
maintenance environment without having to switch to a motor with the same rating as the drive (particularly useful in the case of high
power drives), deactivate [Output Phase Loss] (OPL = nO).

CAUTION
RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE EQUIPMENT

Motor thermal protection will not be provided by the drive if the motor current is less than 0.2 times the rated drive current.
Provide an alternative means of thermal protection.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Use of the LIFT menu

WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
• Identify the precise values of [Nominal car speed] (CSP) and payload [Capacity of the lift] (LCA).

• Check the [Nominal car speed] (CSP) by calculation (See menu [1.1 LIFT] (LIF-), submenu [LIFT DATA] (LdA-)) or
by measurement.
If the values of [Nominal car speed] (CSP) or [Lift capacity] (LCA) are incorrect, the stop lengths ([Deceleration length]
(dEL) and [Stop length] (StL) will not be adhered to.
The speed loop preset will not be adapted to the application (risk of instability and lift car slipping).

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

BBV19478 11/2011 13
Graphic terminal

The graphic terminal is optional. The graphic terminal is removable and can be located remotely (on the door of an enclosure, for example)
using the cables and accessories available as options (see catalog).

Description of the terminal

1 Graphic display

2 Function keys
F1, F2, F3, F4,
see page 15.
7 ESC key: Aborts a value, a
3 STOP/RESET parameter or a menu to return
button to the previous selection

6 Button for reversing the direction

4 RUN button of rotation of the motor

5 Navigation button:
• Press (ENT): - To save the current value
- To enter the selected menu or parameter
• Turn CW/ - To increment or decrement a value
CCW: - To go to the next or previous line
- To increase or decrease the reference if control via
the display terminal is activated

Note: Buttons 3, 4, 5 and 6 can be used to control the drive directly, if control via the display terminal is activated.

14 BBV19478 11/2011
Graphic terminal

Description of the graphic screen

1 RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A

2 1 DRIVE MENU 6
1.1 LIFT
1.2 MONITORING

3 1.3 SETTINGS
1.4 MOTOR CONTROL
1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG

4 Code << >> Quick 5

F1 F2 F3 F4

1. Display line. Its content can be configured; the factory settings show:
• The drive state (see page 16)
• The active control channel:
- Term: Terminals
- HMI: Graphic terminal
- MDB: Integrated Modbus
- CAN: Integrated CANopen
- NET: Communication card
- APP: Controller Inside card
• Frequency reference
• Current in the motor

2. Menu line. Indicates the name of the current menu or submenu.

3. Menus, submenus, parameters, values, bar charts, etc., are displayed in drop-down window format on a maximum of 5 lines.
The line or value selected by the navigation button is displayed in reverse video.

4. Section displaying the functions assigned to the F1 to F4 keys and aligned with them, for example:

• Code F1 : Displays the code of the selected parameter, i.e., the code corresponding to the 7-segment display.

• HELP F1 : Contextual help

• << F2 : Navigate horizontally to the left, or go to previous menu/submenu or, for a value, go to the next digit up, displayed
in reverse video (see the example on page 17).

• >> F3 : Navigate horizontally to the right or go to next menu/submenu (going to the [2 ACCESS LEVEL] menu in this
example) or, for a value, go to the next digit down, displayed in reverse video (see the example on page 17).

• Quick F4 : Quick navigation, see page 21.

The function keys are dynamic and contextual.

Other functions (application functions) can be assigned to these keys via the [1.6 COMMAND] menu.

5. Indicates that there are no more levels below this display window.
Indicates that there are more levels below this display window.

6. Indicates that this display window does not scroll further up.
Indicates that there are more levels above this display window.

BBV19478 11/2011 15
Graphic terminal

Drive state codes:

- ACC: Acceleration
- CLI: Current limitation
- CTL: Controlled stop on input phase loss
- DCB: DC injection braking in progress
- DEC: Deceleration
- FLU: Motor fluxing in progress
- FST: Fast stop
- NLP: No line power (no line supply on L1, L2, L3)
- NST: Freewheel stop
- OBR: Auto-adapted deceleration
- PRA: Power Removal function active (drive locked)
- RDY: Drive ready
- RUN: Drive running
- SOC: Controlled output cut in progress
- TUN: Auto-tuning in progress
- USA: Undervoltage alarm
- ASA: Measurement of the phase-shift angle in progress

16 BBV19478 11/2011
Graphic terminal

Example configuration windows:

RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A When only one selection is possible, the selection made is indicated by .
5 LANGUAGE E.g. Only one language can be chosen.
English
Français
Deutsch
Español
Italiano
<< >> Quick
Chinese
Russian
Turkish

PARAMETER SELECTION When multiple selection is possible, the selections made are indicated by .
1.3 SETTINGS E.g. A number of parameters can be chosen to form the [USER MENU].
Ramp increment
Acceleration
Deceleration
Acceleration 2
Deceleration 2
Edit

Example configuration window for one value:

RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A

Acceleration Acceleration

>>
9.51 s 9.51 s
Min = 0.01 Max = 99.99 Min = 0.01 Max = 99.99
<< >> Quick << >> Quick

The << and >> arrows (keys F2 and F3) are used to select the digit to be modified, and the navigation button is rotated to increase or
decrease this number.

BBV19478 11/2011 17
Graphic terminal

First power-up - [5. LANGUAGE] menu

The first time the drive is powered up, the user will automatically be guided through the menus as far as the [1.1. LIFT] submenu.
The parameters in this submenu must be configured and auto-tuning performed before the motor is started up.

ATV71LD10N4Z Display for 3 seconds following power-up

10A 380/480V
Config. n°1

3 seconds

5 LANGUAGE
English Automatically switches to [5 LANGUAGE]
Français
menu 3 seconds later.
Deutsch
Select the language and press ENT.
Español
Italiano

Chinese
Russian
Turkish

RDY Term 0.00m/s 0.0A

2 ACCESS LEVEL Switches to [2 ACCESS LEVEL] menu
Basic (see page 27)
Standard
Select the access level and press ENT.
Advanced
Expert

RDY Term 0.00 m/s 0.0 A

1.1 LIFT Switches to [1.1 LIFT]
International unit (see page 23)
LIFT CONFIGURATION
LIFT OPTIMIZATION
LIFT FUNCTIONS
MONITORING
Code << >> Quick

ESC
ESC

RDY Term 0.00 m/s 0.0 A

MAIN MENU Press ESC twice to return to [MAIN MENU]
1 DRIVE MENU
2 ACCESS LEVEL
3 OPEN / SAVE AS
4 PASSWORD
5 LANGUAGE
Code Quick

18 BBV19478 11/2011
Graphic terminal

Subsequent power ups

ATV71LD10N4Z
10A 380/480V
Config. n°1

3 seconds

RDY Term 0.00 m/s 0.0 A

1.1 LIFT
LIFT CONFIGURATION
LIFT OPTIMIZATION Switches to [1.1. LIFT] 3 seconds later.
LIFT FUNCTIONS
MONITORING
International unit
Code << >> Quick

10 seconds

RDY Term 2.00 m/s 0.0 A

Elevator Speed

If no operator inputs are made, switches to "Display"

2.00 m/s automatically 10 seconds later (the display will vary
depending on the selected configuration).
Min=0.00 Max=327.67
Quick

ENT or ESC

RDY Term 0.00 m/s 0.0 A

MAIN MENU
1 DRIVE MENU
2 ACCESS LEVEL
3 OPEN / SAVE AS
Users can return to [MAIN MENU] by pressing
4 PASSWORD
5 LANGUAGE
ENT or ESC.
Code Quick

BBV19478 11/2011 19
Graphic terminal

Programming: Example of accessing a parameter

RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A

1 DRIVE MENU 1.1 LIFT LIFT CONFIGURATION
1.1 LIFT ENT LIFT CONFIGURATION ENT I/O ASSIGNMENT ENT
1.2 MONITORING LIFT OPTIMIZATION ENCODER DATA
1.3 SETTINGS LIFT FUNCTIONS MOTOR DATA
1.4 MOTOR CONTROL ESC MONITORING ENT or LIFT DATA ENT or
1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG International unit
Code << >> Quick Code << >> Quick ESC Code << >> Quick ESC

RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A

LIFT DATA Nominal car speed
Nominal car speed 1.00 m/s ENT
Capacity of the lift 400 kg
Car weight Auto
ENT or
1.50 m/s
Counterweight Auto
Max. Acceleration 0.5 m/s² Min = 0.01 Max = 10.00
Code << >> Quick ESC << >> Quick

Accessing the nominal car speed

Note:

• To select a parameter:
- Turn the navigation button to scroll vertically.

• To modify a parameter:
- Use the << and >> keys (F2 and F3) to scroll horizontally and select the digit to be modified (the selected digit changes to white
on a black background).
- Turn the navigation button to modify the digit.

• To cancel the modification:

- Press ESC.

• To save the modification:

- Press the navigation button (ENT).

20 BBV19478 11/2011
Graphic terminal

Quick navigation
If the "Quick" function is displayed above the F4 key, you can gain quick access to a parameter from any screen.

E.g.

RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A

1.4 MOTOR CONTROL
Standard mot. freq: 50Hz IEC
Motor control type: SVC U
Max frequency: 60 Hz
Output Ph rotation: ABC
Sinus filter: no
Code << >> Quick

Press F4 to access the Quick screen, which contains

4 selection options.
• [HOME]: Return to [MAIN MENU].

RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A

QUICK NAVIGATION MAIN MENU
RETURN TO MAIN MENU
ENT 1 DRIVE MENU
DIRECT ACCESS TO... 2 ACCESS LEVEL
10 LAST MODIFICATIONS 3 OPEN / SAVE AS
GOTO MULTIPOINT SCREEN 4 PASSWORD
5 LANGUAGE
Code Code Quick

• [DIRECT ACCESS TO...] : Opens the direct access window, which

See page 317 will contain the text "1". The function keys << and >> (F2 and F3)
can be used to select each of the numbers and the navigation
button to increment or decrement the numbers: 1.3 in the example
below.

RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A

DIRECT ACCESS TO... 1.3 SETTINGS
ENT Ramp increment: 01
1.3 Acceleration 9.51 s
Deceleration: 9.67 s
SETTINGS Acceleration 2: 12.58 s
Deceleration 2 : 13.45 s
<< >> Code << >> Quick

• [10 LAST MODIFICATIONS]: Opens a window in which the last

10 parameters modified can be accessed directly.

RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A

10 LAST MODIFICATIONS Rated mot. current
Acceleration: 10 s
ENA prop.gain: 1.2 ENT
Rated mot. current: 15 A 15.0 A
Preset speed 4: 20 Hz
Preset speed 5: 30 Hz ESC
Code << >>

BBV19478 11/2011 21
Graphic terminal

[MAIN MENU] - Menu mapping

RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A

MAIN MENU RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A
1 DRIVE MENU 1 DRIVE MENU
2 ACCESS LEVEL 1.1 LIFT
3 OPEN / SAVE AS 1.2 MONITORING
4 PASSWORD 1.3 SETTINGS
5 LANGUAGE 1.4 MOTOR CONTROL
Code Quick 1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG
6 MONITORING CONFIG. Code << >> Quick
7 DISPLAY CONFIG. 1.6 COMMAND
8 International unit 1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.
1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT
1.9 COMMUNICATION
1.10 DIAGNOSTICS
1.11 IDENTIFICATION
1.12 FACTORY SETTINGS
1.13 USER MENU
1.14 CONTROL. INSIDE CARD

Content of [MAIN MENU] menus

[1 DRIVE MENU] See next page

[2 ACCESS LEVEL] Defines which menus can be accessed (level of complexity)
[3 OPEN / SAVE AS] Can be used to save and retrieve drive configuration files
[4 PASSWORD] Provides password protection for the configuration
[5 LANGUAGE] Language selection
[6 MONITORING CONFIG.] Customization of information displayed on the graphic display terminal during operation
[7 DISPLAY CONFIG.] • Customization of parameters
• Creation of a customized user menu
• Customization of the visibility and protection mechanisms for menus and parameters
[8 International unit] • Provides the possibility to work with metric units or with imperial units for lift parameters.
See page 119.

22 BBV19478 11/2011
Graphic terminal

[1 DRIVE MENU]

RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A

Content of [1. DRIVE MENU] menus:

[1.1 LIFT]: Lift menu

[1.2 MONITORING]: Visualization of current, motor and input/output values
[1.3 SETTINGS]: Accesses the adjustment parameters, which can be modified during operation
[1.4 MOTOR CONTROL]: Motor parameters (motor nameplate, auto-tuning, switching frequency, control algorithms, etc.)
[1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG]: I/O configuration (scaling, filtering, 2-wire control, 3-wire control, etc.)
[1.6 COMMAND]: Configuration of command and reference channels (graphic display terminal, terminals, bus, etc.)
[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] : Configuration of application functions (e.g., preset speeds, PID, brake control, etc.)
[1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT]: Configuration of fault management
[1.9 COMMUNICATION]: Communication parameters (fieldbus)
[1.10 DIAGNOSTICS]: Motor/drive diagnostics
[1.11 IDENTIFICATION]: Identifies the drive and internal options
[1.12 FACTORY SETTINGS]: Access to configuration files and return to factory settings
[1.13 USER MENU]: Specific menu set up by the user in the [7. DISPLAY CONFIG.] menu
[1.14 CONTROL. INSIDE CARD]: Configuration of optional Controller Inside card

BBV19478 11/2011 23
Integrated display terminal

Altivar LIFT features an integrated display terminal with a 7-segment 4-digit display. The graphic display terminal described on the previous
pages can also be connected to this drive as an option.

Functions of the display and the keys

• 2 Modbus status LEDs

• Four 7-segment • 2 CANopen status LEDs

displays

• Exits a menu or parameter,

• Returns to the previous or aborts the displayed
menu or parameter, or value to return to the
increases the previous value in the
displayed value memory
• Goes to the next menu
• Enters a menu or a
or parameter, or
parameter, or saves the
decreases the
displayed parameter or
displayed value
value

Note: • Pressing or does not store the selection.

• Press and hold down (>2 s) or to scroll through the data quickly.

Save and store the selection: ENT

The display flashes when a value is stored.

Normal display, with no detected fault present and no startup:

- 43.0: Display of the parameter selected in the SUP menu (default selection: Lift speed).
- CLI: Current limitation.
- CtL: Controlled stop on input phase loss.
- dCb: DC injection braking in progress.
- FLU: Motor fluxing in progress.
- FSt: Fast stop.
- nLP: No line power (no line supply on L1, L2, L3).
- nSt: Freewheel stop.
- Obr: Auto-adapted deceleration.
- PrA: Power Removal function active (drive locked).
- rdY: Drive ready.
- SOC: Controlled output cut in progress.
- tUn: Auto-tuning in progress.
- USA: Undervoltage alarm.
- ASA: Measurement of the phase-shift angle in progress.

The display flashes to indicate the presence of a detected fault.

24 BBV19478 11/2011
Integrated display terminal

Accessing menus
Turn on

XXX Displays the state of the drive

ENT

ENT
ESC

LIF- LIFT (page 33) Lift menu

ESC

ENT
ESC (page 124) Visualization of current, motor and input/output
SUP- MONITORING values
ESC

ENT
ESC (page 133) Adjustment parameters, can be modified during
SEt- SETTINGS
ESC operation
ESC
ENT
(page 145) Motor parameters (motor nameplate, auto-tuning,
drC- MOTOR CONTROL switching frequency, control algorithms, etc.)
ESC

ENT
ESC
(page 173) I/O configuration (scaling, filtering, 2-wire control,
I-O- INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG
ESC 3-wire control, etc.)
ENT
ESC (page 203) Configuration of command and reference channels
CtL- COMMAND (graphic display terminal, terminals, bus, etc.)
ESC
Menus
ENT
ESC
(page 216) Configuration of application functions (e.g., preset
FUn- APPLICATION FUNCT.
ESC speeds, brake control, etc.)
ENT
ESC

FLt- FAULT MANAGEMENT (page 268) Configuration of fault management

ESC

ENT
ESC

CON- COMMUNICATION (page 291) Communication parameters (fieldbus)

ESC

ENT
ESC (page 299) Access to configuration files and return to factory
FCS- FACTORY SETTINGS settings
ESC

ENT
ESC
(page 302) Specific menu, set up by the user using the graphic
USr- USER MENU
ESC display terminal.
ENT
ESC
(page 303) Menu for the Controller Inside card, if present.
PLC- CONTROL. INSIDE CARD
ESC

ENT
ESC

COd- PASSWORD (page 306)

ESC

ENT
ESC
(page 27)
LAC- ACCESS LEVEL
ESC

A dash appears after menu and submenu codes to differentiate them from parameter codes.
Examples: FUn- menu, ACC parameter.

The grayed-out menus may not be accessible depending on the control access (LAC) configuration.

BBV19478 11/2011 25
Integrated display terminal

Accessing menu parameters

ENT
Save and store the displayed selection:

Menu Parameter Value or assignment The display flashes when a value is stored.

SEt- ACC 15 0
ENT ENT

.
ESC
1 flash
ESC ESC (save)
dEC 26 0.
ENT
26 0.

(Next parameter)

All the menus are "drop-down" type menus, which means that after the last parameter, if
you continue to press , you will return to the first parameter and, conversely, you can
ENT
Menu 1st switch from the first parameter to the last parameter by pressing .
ESC

nth

last

Selection of multiple assignments for one parameter

E.g. List of group 1 alarms in [INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I-O-)
menu
ENT
A number of alarms can be selected by "checking" them as
I-O-
follows.
ESC

Alarm not selected

The digit on the right indicates: selected,

Alarm selected not selected.

The same principle is used for all multiple selections.

26 BBV19478 11/2011
[2. ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC-)

With graphic display terminal

Basic
Access to 5 menus only, and access to 6 submenus only in the
[1. DRIVE MENU] menu.
A single function can be assigned to each input.

RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A

2 ACCESS LEVEL MAIN MENU 1. DRIVE MENU
Basic 1 DRIVE MENU 1.1 LIFT
Standard 2 ACCESS LEVEL 1.2 MONITORING
Advanced 3 OPEN / SAVE AS 1.3 SETTINGS
Expert 4 PASSWORD 1.11 IDENTIFICATION
5 LANGUAGE 1.12 FACTORY SETTINGS
<< >> Quick Code << >> Quick Code << >> Quick
8 International unit 1.13 USER MENU

Standard
This is the factory-set level. Access to all menus.
A single function can be assigned to each input.

RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A

MAIN MENU 1 DRIVE MENU
1 DRIVE MENU 1.1 LIFT
2 ACCESS LEVEL 1.2 MONITORING
3 OPEN / SAVE AS 1.3 SETTINGS
4 PASSWORD 1.4 MOTOR CONTROL
5 LANGUAGE 1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG
Code Quick Code << >> Quick
6 MONITORING CONFIG. 1.6 COMMAND
8 International unit 1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.
1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT
Advanced 1.9 COMMUNICATION
Access to all menus and submenus. 1.10 DIAGNOSTICS
Several functions can be assigned to 1.11 IDENTIFICATION
each input. 1.12 FACTORY SETTINGS
1.13 USER MENU
1.14 CONTROL. INSIDE CARD
RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A
MAIN MENU
1 DRIVE MENU
2 ACCESS LEVEL
3 OPEN / SAVE AS
4 PASSWORD
5 LANGUAGE
Code Quick
6 MONITORING CONFIG.
7 DISPLAY CONFIG.
8 International unit

Expert
Access to all menus and submenus as for [Advanced] level, and access to
additional parameters.
Several functions can be assigned to each input.

RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A

MAIN MENU
1 DRIVE MENU
2 ACCESS LEVEL
3 OPEN / SAVE AS
4 PASSWORD
5 LANGUAGE
Code Quick
6 MONITORING CONFIG.
7 DISPLAY CONFIG.
8 International unit

BBV19478 11/2011 27
[2. ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC-)

With integrated display terminal:

Turn on

XXX Displays the state of the drive

ENT

ESC

LIF-

ESC

COd-
ENT
ESC

LAC- ACCESS LEVEL

ESC

Code Name/Description Factory setting

LAC- Std
bAS • bAS: Limited access to SIM, SUP, SEt, FCS, USr, COd and LAC menus. A single function can be assigned to each
input.
Std • Std: Access to all menus on the integrated display terminal. A single function can be assigned to each input.
AdU • AdU: Access to all menus on the integrated display terminal. Several functions can be assigned to each input.
Epr • EPr: Access to all menus on the integrated display terminal and access to additional parameters. Several functions
can be assigned to each input.

28 BBV19478 11/2011
[2. ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC-)

Comparison of the menus that can be accessed on the graphic display terminal/inte-
grated display terminal

Graphic terminal Integrated Display Terminal Access Level

[2 ACCESS LEVEL] LAC- (Access level)

[3 OPEN/SAVE AS] -
[4 PASSWORD] COd- (Password)

[5 LANGUAGE] -

Basic bAS
[1 DRIVE MENU] [1.1 LIFT] LIF- (Lift)

[1.2 MONITORING] SUP- (Monitoring)

[1.3 SETTINGS] SEt- (Settings)

Standard Std (factory setting)

[1.11 IDENTIFICATION] -
[1.12 FACTORY SETTINGS] FCS- (Factory settings)

[1.13 USER MENU] USr- (User menu)

Advanced AdU
A single function can be assigned to each input. A single function can be assigned to
each input.
[1.4 MOTOR CONTROL] drC- (Motor control)

Expert EPr
[1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] I-O- (I/O configuration)

[1.6 COMMAND] CtL- (Command)

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] FUn- (Application functions)

[1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT] FLt- (Fault management)

[1.9 COMMUNICATION] COM- (Communication)

[1.10 DIAGNOSTICS] -
[1.14 CONTROL. INSIDE CARD] (1) PLC- (Controller Inside card) (1)
[6 MONITORING CONFIG.] -
A single function can be assigned to each input. A single function can be assigned to
each input.
[7 DISPLAY CONFIG.] -
Several functions can be assigned to each input. Several functions can be assigned
to each input.
Expert parameters Expert parameters
Several functions can be assigned to each input. Several functions can be assigned
to each input.

(1) Can be accessed if the Controller Inside card is present.

BBV19478 11/2011 29
Structure of the parameter tables

The parameter tables in the descriptions of the various menus can be used with both the graphic display terminal and the integrated display
terminal. They therefore contain information for these two terminals in accordance with the description below.

E.g.

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-) 6

2 Code Name/Description Adjustment range: Factory setting

rEF- [REFERENCE SWITCH.]

3 rCb M [Ref 1B switching] 7 [ch1 active]
(Fr1)

4
Fr1 v [ch1 active] (Fr1): No switching, [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) active
Fr1b v [ch1B active] (Fr1b): No switching, [Ref.1B channel] (Fr1b) active
8

1. Name of menu on 4-digit 7-segment display. 5. Name of menu on graphic display terminal.

2. Submenu code on 4-digit 7-segment display. 6. Name of submenu on graphic display terminal.

3. Parameter code on 4-digit 7-segment display. 7. Name of parameter on graphic display terminal

4. Parameter value on 4-digit 7-segment display. 8. Value of parameter on graphic display terminal

Note:
• The text in square brackets [ ] indicates what you will see on the graphic display terminal.

30 BBV19478 11/2011
Interdependence of parameter values

The configuration of certain parameters modifies the adjustment range of other parameters. This may result in the modification of a
factory setting or a value you have already selected.

BBV19478 11/2011 31
Finding a parameter in this document

The following assistance with finding explanations on a parameter is provided:

• With the integrated display terminal: Direct use of the parameter code index, page 328, to find the page giving details of the
displayed parameter.

• With the graphic display terminal: Select the required parameter and press F1 : [Code]. The parameter code is displayed instead
of its name while the key is held down.

Example: ACC

RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A

1.3 SETTINGS 1.3 SETTINGS
Ramp increment: 01 Code Ramp increment: 01
Acceleration 9.51 s ACC 9.51 s
Deceleration: 9.67 s Deceleration: 9.67 s
Acceleration 2: 12.58 s Acceleration 2: 12.58 s
Deceleration 2: 13.45 s Deceleration 2: 13.45 s
Code << >> Quick Code << >> Quick

Then use the parameter code index, page 328, to find the page giving details of the displayed parameter.

32 BBV19478 11/2011
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

With graphic display terminal:

RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A RUN Term +50.00Hz 80A
MAIN MENU 1. DRIVE MENU 1.1 LIFT
ENT ENT
1 DRIVE MENU 1.1 LIFT LIFT CONFIGURATION
2 ACCESS LEVEL 1.2 MONITORING LIFT OPTIMIZATION
3 OPEN / SAVE AS 1.3 SETTINGS LIFT FUNCTIONS
4 PASSWORD 1.4 MOTOR CONTROL MONITORING
5 LANGUAGE 1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG
Code Quick Code << >> Quick Code << >> Quick

With integrated display terminal:

Turn on

XXX Displays the state of the drive

ENT

ENT
ESC

LIF- LIFT
ESC

ESC

SUP-

ESC

LAC-

The [1.1 LIFT] (LIF-) menu is used to apply settings for a lift application.

Note: The parameters of the [1.1 LIFT] (LIF-) menu must be entered in the order in which they appear, as the later ones are
dependent on the first ones.

The [1.1 LIFT] (LIF-) menu should be configured on its own or before the other drive configuration menus. If a modification has
previously been made to any of them, in particular in [1.4 MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-), some [1.1 LIFT] (LIF-) parameters may be changed,
for example, the motor parameters if a synchronous motor has been selected. Returning to the [1.1 LIFT] (LIF-) menu after modifying
another drive configuration menu is unnecessary. Changes following modification of another configuration menu are not therefore
described, to avoid unnecessary complication in this section.

BBV19478 11/2011 33
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Lift configuration
To get started quickly on the ATV LIFT, follow the instructions below.

The LIFT menu has been designed to be browsed in a linear manner. Go through this menu step by step in order to enter all the parameters
required for correct lift configuration.

Before starting to program the drive, identify the data below carefully:

Code Name/Description Value

[I/O ASSIGNMENTS] (LIO-) I/O menu
LI1 assignment ………
LI2 assignment ………
LI3 assignment ………
LI4 assignment ………
LI5 assignment ………
LI6 assignment ………
AI1 assignment ………
AI2 assignment ………
R1 assignment ………
R2 assignment ………
[ENCODER DATA] (End-) Encoder Data menu
Incremental encoder ………
[Number of pulses] (PGI) Number of pulses ………

Resolver encoder
[Freq.Excit.Resolve] (FreS) Resolver Excit Freq. ………
[Resolver poles nbr] (rppn) Resolver poles nbr ………

SinCos encoder
[Encoder supply volt.] (UECU) Encoder supply volt. ………
[Sincos lines count] (UELC) Number of lines ………

Dual SinCos encoder

[Encoder supply volt.] (UECU) Encoder supply volt. ………
[Sincos lines count] (UELC) Number of lines ………

EnDat SinCos encoder

[Sincos lines count] (UELC) Sincos lines count ………
[MOTOR DATA] (Mot-) Motor Data menu
[Motor control type] (Ctt) Motor control type ……… SVC V, SVC I, V/F 2pts,
V/F 5pts, Sync. mot, Sync. CL
Asynchronous ……… kW
[Rated motor power] (nPr) Rated motor power ……… V
[Rated motor volt.] (UnS) Rated motor volt. ……… A
[Rated mot. current] (nCr) Rated mot. current ……… Hz
[Rated motor freq.] (FrS) Rated motor freq. ……… rpm
[Rated motor speed] (nSP) Rated motor speed
or
Synchronous ……… Nm
[Motor torque] (tqS) Motor torque ……… A
[Nominal I sync.] (nCrS) Nominal I sync. ……… rpm
[Nom motor spdsync.] (nSPS) Nom motor spdsync ………
[Pole pairs] (PPnS) Pole pairs
[LIFT DATA] (LdA-) Lift Data menu
[Nominal car speed] (CSP) Nominal car speed at FRS ……… m/s
[Capacity of the lift] (LCA) Payload ……… kg
[Lift top speed] (LTS) Travel speed ……… m/s
[Deceleration length] (dEL) Deceleration length ……… cm
[Lift leveling time] (LLt) Lift leveling time ……… s
[Stop length] (StL) Stop length ……… cm
[Lift leveling speed] (LLS) Lift leveling speed ……… m/s

34 BBV19478 11/2011
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Assignment of the inputs/outputs

The ATV LIFT is factory-set with the following I/O assignments:

Logic inputs
• LI1: Forward
• LI2: Reverse
• LI3: Not assigned
• LI4: Lift speed management
• LI5: Inspection mode
• LI6: Not assigned

Logic outputs
• R1: No
• R2: Brake sequence
• dO1: Output contactor

Analog inputs
• AI1: Channel reference

Q1 1 3

LIFT COMMAND CONTROL CARD Q2

220 V 2 4
single 5
emergency
21

SE1 Q2
6
22

(5)

P2
13

SEn
T
14

Uf
13

13
1

Un a
KL KS
(1) (1)
14

S2
2

~
Q3 Q4 - +
R1A

7
T2

L1 L2 L3 +24 LI6 LI1 LI2 LI4 K1

8
ATV LIFT R2=BLC R1 = FLT KL
(2)
7

(4)
T1

U1 V1 W1 PB PA COM LO=OCC(4) LI5 +24 PWR K2

8
R2C

R1C
R2A
11
21
1

K1 KF
K1 I II
22

KCA
2
2

KCA KF
1

K2
A2

4
22

K2
D1
2

RF
13

to command P<75 VA
KCA
car door BRAKE
A1

A1
A1
14

KF K1 K2 KC KL KS
(1) (1)
A2

A2
A2
W
U

M M
3

(1) Optional elements.

(2) Fault relay contacts for remote signalling of drive status (reassignable).
(3) Internal +24 V. If an external +24V supply is used, connect the 0 V on the external supply to the COM terminal, do not use the
+24 terminal on the drive, and connect the common of the LI inputs to the +24 V of the external supply.
(4) Assignable relay R2 and logic output LO.
(5) Safety circuit.

BBV19478 11/2011 35
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

LCO- [LIFT CONFIGURATION]

L1O- [I/O ASSIGNMENTS]
InP-
[INPUTS]
Frd M [Forward] [LI1] (LI1)

nO v [No] (nO): Not assigned

LI1 v [LI1] (LI1) to [LI6] (LI6)
- v [LI7] (LI7) to [LI10] (LI10): If VW3A3201 logic I/O card has been inserted
- v [LI11] (LI11) to [LI14] (LI14): If VW3A3202 extended I/O card has been inserted
C101 v [C101] (C101) to [C115] (C115): With integrated Modbus in [I/O profile] (IO)
- v [C201] (C201) to [C215] (C215): With integrated CANopen in [I/O profile] (IO)
- v [C301] (C301) to [C315] (C315): With a communication card in [I/O profile] (IO)
- v [C401] (C401) to [C415] (C415): With a Controller Inside card in [I/O profile] (IO)
Cd00 v [CD00] (Cd00) to [CD13] (Cd13): In [I/O profile] (IO) can be switched with possible logic inputs
- v [CD14] (Cd14) to [CD15] (Cd15): In [I/O profile] (IO) can be switched without logic inputs
Reads the forward command assignment.

rrS M [Reverse] [LI2] (LI2)

nO v [No] (nO): Not assigned

nSt M [Freewheel stop ass.] [No] (nO)

nO v [No] (nO): Not assigned

36 BBV19478 11/2011
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Lift ramp
Assignment of [Lift Speed Mgt] (LSM) activates the ramp profile specific to the lift.

Speed
(m/s)

LtS

LLS

Time

0 (s)
Reference
(m/s)

LtS

LLS Time

0 (s)

LI (LSM)

1
Time

0 (s)

LI (FW / REV)

1
Time

0 (s)

BBV19478 11/2011 37
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

LCO- [LIFT CONFIGURATION] continued

L1O- [I/O ASSIGNMENTS] continued
InP-
[INPUTS] continued
ISP M [Inspection] [LI5] (LI5)

This parameter can be accessed if brake logic control [Brake assignment] (bLC) page 240 have been
assigned.
nO v [No] (nO): Function not assigned
LI1 v [LI1] (LI1) to [LI6] (LI6)
- v [LI7] (LI7) to [LI10] (LI10): If VW3A3201 logic I/O card has been inserted
LI14 v [LI11] (LI11) to [LI14] (LI14): If VW3A3202 extended I/O card has been inserted.
Inspection mode is activated when the assigned input changes to active state.

LSM M [Lift Speed Mgt] [LI4] (LI4)

Management of the lift speed

Assignment of LSM activates the ramp profile specific to the lift.
nO v [No] (nO): Function not assigned
LI1 v [LI1] (LI1) to [LI6] (LI6)
-- v [LI7] (LI7) to [LI10] (LI10): If VW3A3201 logic I/O card has been inserted
LI14 v [LI11] (LI11) to [LI14] (LI14): If VW3A3202 extended I/O card has been inserted
C101 v [C101] (C101) to [C115] (C115): With integrated Modbus in [I/O profile] (IO)
- v [C201] (C201) to [C215] (C215): With integrated CANopen in [I/O profile] (IO)
- v [C301] (C301) to [C315] (C315): With a communication card in [I/O profile] (IO)
- v [C401] (C401) to [C415] (C415): With a Controller Inside card in [I/O profile] (IO)
Cd00 v [CD00] (Cd00) to [CD13] (Cd13): In [I/O profile] (IO) can be switched with possible logic inputs
- v [CD14] (Cd14) to [CD15] (Cd15): In [I/O profile] (IO) can be switched without logic inputs
Note: If LSM has not been assigned, the standard ramp is active (see the [RAMP] (rPt-) submenu
in the [1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (Fun-) menu on page 224).

The input assigned to the lift ramp function commands [Lift top speed] (LtS) page 60.
Reference (1) LI (Fwd) or LI (Rev) LI [Lift Speed Mgt]
(LSM)
STOP 0 X
[Lift top speed] (LtS) 1 1
[Lift leveling speed] (LLS) 1 0

rCA M [Output contact. fdbk] [No] (nO)

nO v [No] (nO): Function inactive

LI1 v [LI1] (LI1)
- :
- :
- v [...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 211.

rFt M [Evacuation assign.] [No] (nO)

nO v [No] (nO): Function not assigned.

LI1 v [LI1] (LI1) to [LI6] (LI6)
- v [LI7] (LI7) to [LI10] (LI10) : If VW3A3201 logic I/O card has been inserted.
LI14 v [LI11] (LI11) to [LI14] (LI14) : If VW3A3202 extended I/O card has been inserted.
Evacuation is activated when the assigned input is at active state, if the drive is stationary.
Evacuation is activated when the assigned input is at inactive state, as soon as the drive stops.

(1) Note: This table is applicable to 2-wire control.

38 BBV19478 11/2011
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

LCO- [LIFT CONFIGURATION] continued

L1O- [I/O ASSIGNMENTS] continued
InP-
[INPUTS] continued
bCI M [Brake contact] [No] (nO)

If the brake has a monitoring contact (closed for released brake).

nO v [No] (nO): Function inactive
LI1 [LI1] (LI1)
- :
- :
- v [...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 211.
Fr1 M [Ref.1 channel] [AI1] (AI1)

AI1 v [AI1] (AI1): Analog input,

AI2 v [AI2] (AI2): Analog input,
AI3 v [AI3] (AI3): Analog input, if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted,
AI4 v [AI4] (AI4): Analog input, if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted,
LCC v [HMI] (LCC): Graphic display terminal,
Mdb v [Modbus] (Mdb): Integrated Modbus,
CAn v [CANopen] (CAn): Integrated CANopen,
nEt v [Com. card] (nEt): Communication card (if inserted),
APP v [C.Insid. card] (APP): Controller Inside card (if inserted),
PI v [RP] (PI): Frequency input, if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted,
PG v [Encoder] (PG): Encoder input, if encoder card has been inserted.
PES M [Weight sensor ass.] [No] (nO)

This function can be accessed if brake logic control has been assigned (see page 240).
If [Weight sensor ass.] (PES) is not [No] (nO), [Movement type] (bSt) page 240 is forced to [Hoisting] (UEr).
nO v [No] (nO): Function inactive,
AI1 v [AI1] (AI1): Analog input,
AI2 v [AI2] (AI2): Analog input,
AI3 v [AI3] (AI3): Analog input, if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted,
AI4 v [AI4] (AI4): Analog input, if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted,
PI v [RP] (PI): Frequency input, if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted,
PG v [Encoder] (PG): Encoder input, if encoder card has been inserted.
AIU1 v [Network AI] (AIU1): Virtual input via communication bus, to be configured via [AI net. channel] (AIC1)
page 183.

WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
If the equipment switches to forced local mode (see page 294), the virtual input remains frozen at the
last value transmitted.
Do not use the virtual input and forced local mode in the same configuration.
Failure to follow this instruction can result in death or serious injury.

BBV19478 11/2011 39
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Speed selector and lift ramp

This function is accessible if [Lift Speed Mgt] (LSM) page 38 is equal to [No] (nO) and if [ACCESS LEVEL] = [Expert].
A specific mechanism exists for speed selector.

Top speed selection

Speed selector

[selector input A] Stop selection Lift ramp

LIx (SPSA)

LIy [selector input B] Leveling speed selection

(SPSb) Inspection mode
Inspection speed selection

Preset speed selection

Preset speed

2 or 4 speeds can be selected, requiring 1 or 2 logic inputs respectively.

Combination table for speed selector

Parameter Assignment possible (1) State SPSA State SPSb

no no no
A0B0 inactive inactive
[LTS selection] (LtSS) A1B0 active inactive
A0B1 inactive active
A1B1 active active
no no no
A0B0 inactive inactive (1)
A and B represent 2 inputs used as
[LLS selection] (LLSS) A1B0 active inactive
selector
A0B1 inactive active
A1B1 active active
no no no A x B x
A0B0 inactive inactive
[Stop selection] (StPS) A1B0 active inactive
These 2 figures represent the state of the
A0B1 inactive active corresponding logical input
A1B1 active active
Example : If SPSA = LI4 and SPSb = LI5,
no no no then A0B1 represent LI4 = 0 and LI5 = 1.
A0B0 inactive inactive
[ISP selection] (ISPS) A1B0 active inactive
A0B1 inactive active
A1B1 active active
no no no
A0B0 inactive inactive
[Preset speed selec] (PSEn) A1B0 active inactive
A0B1 inactive active
A1B1 active active

40 BBV19478 11/2011
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Speed selector and lift ramp (continued)

Speed

LtS (m/s)

LLS (m/s)

Time
0

LtS selected LLS selected Stop selected

LtSS = A0B0 (SPSA = 0 ; SPSb = 0) LLSS = A0B0 (SPSA = 0 ; SPSb = 0) StPS = A0B0 (SPSA = 0 ; SPSb = 0)
or or or
A0B1 (SPSA = 0 ; SPSb = 1) A0B1 (SPSA = 0 ; SPSb = 1) A0B1 (SPSA = 0 ; SPSb = 1)
or or or
A1B0 (SPSA = 1 ; SPSb = 0) A1B0 (SPSA = 1 ; SPSb = 0) A1B0 (SPSA = 1 ; SPSb = 0)
or or ru
A1B1 (SPSA = 1 ; SPSb = 1) A1B1 (SPSA = 1 ; SPSb = 1) A1B1 (SPSA = 1 ; SPSb = 1)

(PSEn) [Preset speed selec] allows to use up to 16 preset speeds (see page 112).

The preset speed reference will be taken into account as soon as the motor is stopped.
After using preset speed function, [LTS selection] (LtSS) or [LLS selection] (LLSS) could be enabled as soon as the motor is stopped.

When the preset speed reference is taken into account, the specific lift ramp is no longer activated and the drive follow the
standard ramps.

BBV19478 11/2011 41
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

LCO- [LIFT CONFIGURATION] continued

L1O- [I/O ASSIGNMENTS] continued
InP- [INPUTS] continued
SPS- [SPEED SELECTOR]
Menu accessible if [Lift Speed Mgt] (LSM) page 38 is equal to [No] (nO) and if [ACCESS LEVEL] = [Expert].

SPSA M [selector input A] [No] (nO)

nO v [No] (nO): Not assigned

LI1 v [LI1] (LI1) to [LI6] (LI6)
- v [LI7] (LI7) to [LI10] (LI10): If VW3A3201 logic I/O card has been inserted
LI14 v [LI11] (LI11) to [LI14] (LI14): If VW3A3202 extended I/O card has been inserted
C101 v [C101] (C101) to [C115] (C115): With integrated Modbus in [I/O profile] (IO)
- v [C201] (C201) to [C215] (C215): With integrated CANopen in [I/O profile] (IO)
- v [C301] (C301) to [C315] (C315): With a communication card in [I/O profile] (IO)
- v [C401] (C401) to [C415] (C415): With a Controller Inside card in [I/O profile] (IO)
Cd00 v [CD00] (Cd00) to [CD13] (Cd13): In [I/O profile] (IO) can be switched with possible logic inputs
- v [CD14] (Cd14) to [CD15] (Cd15): In [I/O profile] (IO) can be switched without logic inputs

SPSb M [selector input B] [No] (nO)

Identical to [selector input A] (SPSA).

LtSS M [LTS selection] [No] (nO)

Visible if [selector input A] (SPSA) and [selector input B] (SPSb) are not set to [No] (nO).
nO v [No] (nO) : Not assigned.
A0B0 v [A0B0] (SPS A0 B0)
A1B0 v [A1B0] (SPS A1 B0)
A0B1 v [A0B1] (SPS A0 B1)
A1B1 v [A1B1] (SPS A1 B1)

LLSS M [LLS selection] [No] (nO)

Visible if [selector input A] (SPSA) and [selector input B] (SPSb) are not set to [No] (nO).
Identical to [LTS selection] (LtSS).

StPS M [Stop selection] [No] (nO)

Visible if [selector input A] (SPSA) and [selector input B] (SPSb) are not set to [No] (nO).
Identical to [LTS selection] (LtSS).
Note: The brake is closed even if the RUN order is still availlable (RUN is displayed on the drive)

ISPS M [ISP selection] [No] (nO)

Visible if [selector input A] (SPSA) and [selector input B] (SPSb) are not set to [No] (nO).
Identical to [LTS selection] (LtSS).

PSEn M [Preset speed selec] [No] (nO)

Visible if [selector input A] (SPSA) and [selector input B] (SPSb) are not set to [No] (nO).
It is possible to select the same AxBx assignment for [PresetSpeed Enable] (PSEn) and [Stop selection]
(StPS).
Identical to [LTS selection] (LtSS).

42 BBV19478 11/2011
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

LCO- [LIFT CONFIGURATION] continued

L1O- [I/O ASSIGNMENTS] continued
OUt-
[OUTPUTS]
bLC M [Brake assignment] [R2] (R2)

Note: If the brake is assigned, only a ramp stop is possible. Check the [Type of stop] (Stt)
page 228.
Brake logic control can only be assigned if [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 146 = [SVC V] (UUC), [SVC I]
(CUC), [FVC] (FUC) or [Sync.CL] (FSY).
Logic output or control relay
nO v [No] (nO): Function not assigned (in this case, none of the function's parameters can be accessed)
r2 v [R2] (r2)
- to
r4 [R4] (r4): Relay (selection of R2 extended to R3 or R4 if I/O card has been inserted)
LO1 v [LO1] (LO1)
- to
LO4 [LO4] (LO4): Logic output (if one or two I/O cards have been inserted, LO1 to LO2 or LO4 can be
selected).
dO1 v [dO1] (dO1): Analog output AO1 functioning as a logic output. Selection can be made if
[AO1 assignment] (AO1) page 198 = [No] (nO).

OCC M [Out. contactor ass.] [dO1] (dO1)

Logic output or control relay

nO v [No] (nO): Function not assigned (in this case, none of the function's parameters can be accessed).
LO1 v [LO1] (LO1)
- to
LO4 [LO4] (LO4): Logic output (if one or two I/O cards have been inserted, LO1 to LO2 or LO4 can be
selected).
r1 [R1] (r1)
- to
r4 [R4] (r4): Relay (selection of R1 extended to R3 or R4 if I/O card has been inserted)
dO1 v [dO1] (dO1): Analog output AO1 functioning as a logic output. Selection can be made if
[AO1 assignment] (AO1) page 198 = [No] (nO).

BBV19478 11/2011 43
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

LCO- [LIFT CONFIGURATION] continued

L1O- [I/O ASSIGNMENTS] continued
OUt-
[OUTPUTS] continued
r1 M [R1 Assignment] [No] (nO)

nO v [No] (nO): Not assigned

FLt v [No drive flt] (FLt): Drive fault detection status (relay normally energized, and de-energized if there is
a trip)
rUn v [Drv running] (rUn): Drive running
OCC v [Output cont] (OCC): Output contactor control
FtA v [Freq. Th. attain.] (FtA): Frequency threshold attained ([Freq. threshold] (Ftd) page 144)
FLA v [HSP attain.] (FLA): High speed attained
CtA v [I attained] (CtA): Current threshold attained ([Current threshold] (Ctd) page 143)
SrA v [Freq.ref.att] (SrA): Frequency reference attained
tSA v [Th.mot. att.] (tSA): Motor 1 thermal state attained
AP2 v [AI2 Al. 4-20] (AP2): Alarm indicating absence of 4-20 mA signal on input AI2
F2A v [FreqTh.att.2] (F2A): Frequency threshold 2 attained ([Freq. threshold 2] (F2d) page 144)
tAd v [Th. drv. att.] (tAd): Drive thermal state attained
ttHA v [High tq. att.] (ttHA): Motor torque greater than high threshold [High torque thd.] (ttH) page 143.
ttLA v [Low tq. att.] (ttLA): Motor torque less than low threshold [Low torque thd.] (ttL) page 143.
MFrd v [Forward] (MFrd): Motor running forward
MrrS v [Reverse] (MrrS): Motor running in reverse
tS2 v [Th.mot2 att] (tS2): Motor 2 thermal state attained
tS3 v [Th.mot3 att] (tS3): Motor 3 thermal state attained
AtS v [Neg Torque] (AtS): Negative torque (braking)
CnF0 v [Cnfg.0 act.] (CnF0): Configuration 0 active
CnF1 v [Cnfg.1 act.] (CnF1): Configuration 1 active
CnF2 v [Cnfg.2 act.] (CnF2): Configuration 2 active
CFP1 v [set 1 active] (CFP1): Parameter set 1 active
CFP2 v [set 2 active] (CFP2): Parameter set 2 active
CFP3 v [set 3 active] (CFP3): Parameter set 3 active
dbL v [DC charged] (dbL): DC bus charging
brS v [In braking] (brS): Drive braking
PrM v [P. removed] (PRM): Drive locked by "Power removal" input
FqLA v [Fr.met. alar.] (FqLA): Measured speed threshold attained: [Pulse warning thd.] (FqL) page 144.
MCP v [I present] (MCP): Motor current present
LSA v [Limit sw. att] (LSA): Limit switch reached
AG1 v [Alarm Grp 1] (AGI): Alarm group 1
AG2 v [Alarm Grp 2] (AG2): Alarm group 2
AG3 v [Alarm Grp 3] (AG3): Alarm group 3
P1A v [PTC1 alarm] (P1A): Probe alarm 1
P2A v [PTC2 alarm] (P2A): Probe alarm 2
PLA v [LI6=PTC al.] (PLA): LI6 = PTC probe alarm
tAP v [Rampe Mode] (tAP):Torque application mode
EFA v [Ext. fault al] (EFA): External fault alarm
USA v [Under V. al.] (USA): Undervoltage alarm
UPA v [Uvolt warn] (UPA): Undervoltage threshold
AnA v [slipping al.] (AnA): Slipping alarm
tHA v [Al. °C drv.] (tHA): Drive overheating
bSA v [Load mvt al] (bSA): Braking speed alarm
bCA v [Brk cont. al] (bCA): Brake contact alarm
SSA v [Lim T/I att.] (SSA): Torque limit alarm
rtA v [Trq. ctrl. al.] (rtA): Torque control alarm
tJA v [IGBT al.] (tJA): IGBT alarm
bOA v [Brake R. al.] (bOA): Braking resistor temperature alarm
APA v [Option al.] (APA): Alarm generated by the Controller Inside card
AP3 v [AI3 Al. 4-20] (AP3): Alarm indicating absence of 4-20 mA signal on input AI3
AP4 v [AI4 Al. 4-20] (AP4): Alarm indicating absence of 4-20 mA signal on input AI4
Opt v [Rescue dir.] (Opt): Optimized direction for rescue mode. (see page 101)
rdY v [Ready] (rdY): Drive ready
rdYr v [Rdy to run] (rdYr): The drive is ready to start or already started without any detected fault or blocking
state

44 BBV19478 11/2011
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

LCO- [LIFT CONFIGURATION] continued

L1O- [I/O ASSIGNMENTS] continued
OUt-
[OUTPUTS] continued
r2 M [R2 Assignment] [Brk control] (bLC)

Identical to R1 (see page 44) with the addition of (shown for information only as these selections can only
be configured in the [1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (Fun-) menu):
bLC v [Brk control] (bLC): Brake contactor control
LLC v [Input cont.] (LLC): Line contactor control
dCO v [DC charging] (dCO): DC bus precharging contactor control
dO1 M [DO1 assignment] [Output cont]
(OCC)
Identical to R1 (see page 44) with the addition of (shown for information only as these selections can only
be configured in the [1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (Fun-) menu):
bLC v [Brk control] (bLC): Brake contactor control
LLC v [Input cont.] (LLC): Line contactor control
dCO v [DC charging] (dCO): DC bus precharging contactor control
AO1 M [AO1 assignment] [dO1] (dO1)

nO v [No] (nO): Not assigned

OCr v [I motor] (OCr): Current in the motor, between 0 and 2 In (In = rated drive current indicated in the
Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate).
OFr v [Motor freq.] (OFr): Output frequency, between 0 and [Max frequency] (tFr)
OrP v [Ramp out.] (OrP): Between 0 and [Max frequency] (tFr)
trq v [Motor torq.] (trq): Motor torque, between 0 and 3 times the rated motor torque.
Stq v [Sign. torque] (Stq): Signed motor torque, between -3 and +3 times the rated motor torque. The + sign
corresponds to motor mode and the - sign to generator mode (braking).
OrS v [sign ramp] (OrS): Signed ramp output, between - [Max frequency] (tFr) and + [Max frequency] (tFr)
OPS v [PID ref.] (OPS): PID reference
OPF v [PID feedbk] (OPF): PID feedback
OPE v [PID error] (OPE): PID error
OPI v [PID output] (OPI): PID integral
OPr v [Mot. power] (OPr): Motor power, between 0 and 2.5 times [Rated motor power] (nPr)
tHr v [Mot thermal] (tHr): Motor thermal state, between 0 and 200% of the rated thermal state.
tHd v [Drv thermal] (tHd): Drive thermal state, between 0 and 200% of the rated thermal state.
tqMS v [Torque 4Q] (tqMS): Signed motor torque, between -3 and +3 times the rated motor torque. The + sign
and the - sign correspond to the physical direction of the torque, regardless of mode (motor or generator).
Example of usage: "master-slave" with the [TORQUE CONTROL] (tOr-) function, page 248.
OFrr v [Meas.mot.fr] (OFrr): Measured motor speed.
OFS v [Sig. o/p frq.] (OFS): Signed output frequency, between - [Max frequency] (tFr) and + [Max frequency] (tFr)
tHr2 v [Mot therm2] (tHr2): Thermal state of motor 2, between 0 and 200% of the rated thermal state.
tHr3 v [Mot therm3] (tHr3): Thermal state of motor 3, between 0 and 200% of the rated thermal state.
Utr v [Uns.TrqRef] (Utr): Torque reference, between 0 and 3 times the rated motor torque.
Str v [Sign trq ref.] (Str): Signed torque reference, between -3 and +3 times the rated motor torque.
tqL v [Torque lim.] (tqL): Torque limit, between 0 and 3 times the rated motor torque.
UOP v [Motor volt.] (UOP): Voltage applied to the motor, between 0 and [Rated motor volt.] (UnS)
dO1 v [dO1] (dO1): Assigned as logic output. This assignment can only appear if [DO1 assignment] (dO1)
page 195 has been assigned. This is the only possible choice in this case, and is displayed for information
purposes only.

BBV19478 11/2011 45
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

LCO- [LIFT CONFIGURATION] continued

End- [ENCODER DATA]
EnS M [Encoder type] [AABB] (AAbb)

This parameter can be accessed if an incremental encoder card has been inserted.
To be configured in accordance with the type of encoder used.
nO v [No] (nO): Function inactive.
AAbb v [AABB] (AAbb): For signals A, A-, B, B- or A, A-, B, B-, Z, Z-.
Ab v [AB] (Ab): For signals A, B.
A v [A] (A): For signal A. Value cannot be accessed if [Encoder usage] (EnU) = [Spd fdk reg.] (rEG).
EnU M [Encoder usage] [No] (nO)

This parameter can be accessed if an encoder card has been inserted (1).
nO v [No] (nO): Function inactive.
SEC v [Fdbk monit.] (SEC): The encoder provides speed feedback for monitoring only.
rEG v [Spd fdk reg.] (rEG): The encoder provides speed feedback for regulation and monitoring. This
configuration is automatic if the drive is configured for closed-loop operation ([Motor control type]
(Ctt) = [FVC] (FUC) or [Sync.CL] (FSY). If [Motor control type] (Ctt) = [SVC V] (UUC) the encoder operates
in speed feedback mode and enables static correction of the speed to be performed. This configuration is
not accessible for other [Motor control type] (Ctt) values.
PGr v [Speed ref.] (PGr): The encoder provides a reference. Can only be selected with an incremental encoder
card.
COr v [Slip Comp.] (COr)The encoder provides speed feedback for speed correction and monitoring.
This configuration is accesible if [Motor control type](Ctt) = [Sync.CL] (FSY). The encoder enables a
dynamic and static correction of the speed. This choice could be used in case of random error on the
encoder feedback (encoder slipping at high speed for example). The less the encoder feedback is reliable,
the more the drive will work as in open-loop operation.

EnrI M [Coder rotation inv.] [No] (nO)

This parameter can be accessed if an encoder card has been inserted. Activates reversal of encoder
rotation.
In some assemblies, the encoder positive direction of rotation is reversed in relation to the motor direction.
When this is the case, this parameter needs to be activated in order for the motor and the encoder both
to have a positive direction of rotation.
nO v [No] (nO): Reversal not activated
YES v [Yes] (YES): Reversal activated
PGI M [Number of pulses] 100 to 32767 1024

Number of pulses per encoder revolution.

This parameter can be accessed if a VW3 A3 401 to 407 or VW3 A3 410 and VW3 A3 411 card has been
inserted.

PGA M [Reference type] [Encoder] (EnC)

This parameter can be accessed if [Encoder usage] (EnU) = [Speed ref.] (PGr).
EnC v [Encoder] (EnC): Use of an encoder (incremental encoder only).
PtG v [Freq. gen.] (PtG): Use of a frequency generator (absolute speed setpoint).
EIL M [Freq. min. value] - 300 to 300 kHz 0 kHz

This parameter can be accessed if [Encoder usage] (EnU) = [Speed ref.] (PGr) and if [Reference type]
(PGA) = [Freq. gen.] (PtG).
Frequency corresponding to the minimum speed.

EFr M [Freq. max value] 0.00 to 300.00 kHz 300.00 kHz

This parameter can be accessed if [Encoder usage] (EnU) = [Speed ref.] (PGr) and if [Reference type]
(PGA) = [Freq. gen.] (PtG).
Frequency corresponding to the maximum speed.

(1) The encoder parameters can only be accessed if the encoder card has been inserted, and the available selections will depend on the
type of encoder card used. The encoder configuration can also be accessed in the [1.5 - INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I/O) menu.

46 BBV19478 11/2011
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

LCO- [LIFT CONFIGURATION] continued

End- [ENCODER DATA] continued
EFI M [Freq. signal filter] 0 to 1000 ms 0 ms

This parameter can be accessed if [Encoder usage] (EnU) = [Speed ref.] (PGr).
Interference filtering.

FrES M [Resolver Exct. Freq.] [8 kHz] (8)

Resolver excitation frequency. This parameter can be accessed if a VW3 A3 408 encoder card
(for resolver) has been inserted.
4 v [4 kHz] (4): 4 kHz
8 v [8 kHz] (8): 8 kHz
12 v [12 kHz] (12): 12 kHz
rPPn M [Resolver poles nbr] [2 poles] (2P)

Number of resolver poles. This parameter can be accessed if a VW3 A3 408 encoder card (for resolver)
has been inserted.
2P v [2 poles] (2P): 2 poles, max. speed 7500 rpm
4P v [4 poles] (4P): 4 poles, max. speed 3750 rpm
6P v [6 poles] (6P): 6 poles, max. speed 2500 rpm
8P v [8 poles] (8P): 8 poles, max. speed 1875 rpm
If the number of motor poles is not a whole multiple of the number of resolver poles, the resolver is
a relative encoder and no longer absolute. You should therefore set the [Angle setting activ.]
(AtA) parameter = [Power On] (POn) or [Run order] (AUtO).

UECP M [Encoder protocol] [Undefined] (Und)

Type of encoder used.

Und v [Undefined] (Und): Not defined
End v [EnDat 2.1] (End): Endat encoder.
SCHP v [Hiperface] (SCHP): Hiperface encoder
SC v [SinCos] (SC): SinCos encoder
SSI v [SSI] (SSI): SSI encoder
EnSC v [EndatSincos] (EnSC): EndatSincos encoder
UECU M [Encoder supply volt.] [Undefined] (Und)

Rated voltage of encoder used. The parameter can be accessed if [Encoder protocol] (UECP) is not
[Undefined] (Und).
Und v [Undefined] (Und): Not defined
5U v [5 volts] (5U): 5 Volts. Only possible value if [Encoder protocol] (UECP) = [EnDat 2.1] (End) or
[EndatSincos] (EnSC).
8U v [8 volts] (8U): 8 Volts
12U v [12 volts] (12U): 12 Volts
To make any changes to this parameter with the integrated display terminal, press and hold down the
"ENT" key for 2 s for the change to be taken into account. When using the graphic display terminal,
confirmation is requested.

UELC M [Sincos lines count] [Undefined] (Und)

Number of lines. This parameter can be accessed if [Encoder protocol] (UECP) = [SinCos] (SC) or
[EndatSinCos] (EnSC).
Und v [Undefined] (Und): Not defined
- v 1 to 10000: 1 to 10,000 lines
SSCP M [SSI parity] [Undefined] (Und)

Parity. This parameter can be accessed if [Encoder protocol] (UECP) = [SSI] (SSI).
Und v [Undefined] (Und): Not defined
nO v [No parity] (nO): No parity
Odd v [Odd parity] (Odd): Odd parity
EUEn v [Even parity] (EUEn): Even parity

BBV19478 11/2011 47
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

LCO- [LIFT CONFIGURATION] continued

End- [ENCODER DATA] continued
SSFS M [SSI frame size] [Undefined] (Und)

Frame length (number of bits). This parameter can be accessed if [Encoder protocol] (UECP) = [SSI] (SSI).
Und v [Undefined] (Und): Not defined. Only possible value if [SSI parity] (SSCP) = [Undefined] (Und).
- v 10 to 27: 10 to 25 if [SSI parity] (SSCP) = [No parity] (nO)
12 to 27 if [SSI parity] (SSCP) = [Odd parity] (Odd) or [Even parity] (EUEn).

EnMr M [Nbr of revolution] [Undefined] (Und)

Format of the number of revolutions (in number of bits). This parameter can be accessed if
[Encoder protocol] (UECP) = [SSI] (SSI).
Und v [Undefined] (Und): Not defined. Only possible value if [SSI frame size] (SSFS) = [Undefined] (Und)
- v 0 to 15: 0 to [SSI frame size] (SSFS) - 10 if [SSI parity] (SSCP) = [No parity] (nO).
0 to [SSI frame size] (SSFS) - 12 if [SSI parity] (SSCP) = [Odd parity] (Odd) or [Even parity] (EUEn)

Entr M [Turn bit resolution] [Undefined] (Und)

Resolution per revolution (in number of bits). This parameter can be accessed if [Encoder protocol]
(UECP) = [SSI] (SSI).
Und v [Undefined] (Und): Not defined. Only value possible if [Nbr of revolution] (EnMr) = [Undefined] (Und)
- v 10 to 25: If [SSI parity] (SSCP) = [No parity] (nO), the maximum value is:
[SSI frame size] (SSFS) - [Nbr of revolution] (EnMr).
If [SSI parity] (SSCP) = [Odd parity] (Odd) or [Even parity] (EUEn), the maximum value is:
[SSI frame size] (SSFS) - [Nbr of revolution] (EnMr) - 2.

SSCd M [SSI code type] [Undefined] (Und)

Type of code. This parameter can be accessed if [Encoder protocol] (UECP) = [SSI] (SSI).
Und v [Undefined] (Und): Not defined
bIn v [Binary code (bIn): Binary code
GrAY v [Gray code] (GrAY): Gray code.
EnSP M [Clock frequency] [500 kHz] (500)

This parameter can be accessed if [ACCESS LEVEL] = [Expert] and if [Encoder protocol] (UECP) =
[SSI] (SSI) or [EnDat 2.1] (End) ou [EndatSincos] (EnSC).
Clock frequency for Endat encoder, SSI encoder and Endat Sincos encoder.
160 v [160 kHz] (160)
200 v [200 kHz] (200)
300 v [300 kHz] (300)
400 v [400 kHz] (400)
500 v [500 kHz] (500)
600 v [600 kHz] (600)
700 v [700 kHz] (700)
800 v [800 kHz] (800)
AUtO v [Auto] (AUtO) : This value appears only if [Encoder protocol] (UECP) = [SSI] (SSI) and if the version
of this encoder board is upper or equal to V1.2IE01.

FFA M [Encoder filter activ.] [No] (nO)

This parameter can be accessed if [ACCESS LEVEL] = [Expert]

Activation of encoder feedback filter.
nO v [No] (no): Filter deactivated.
YES v [Yes] (YES): Filter activated.
FFr M [Encoder filter value] 0 to 50 ms Acc. to encoder
type

T This parameter can be accessed if [ACCESS LEVEL] = [Expert] and if [Encoder filter activ.] (FFA) =
[Yes] (YES).
Encoder feedback filter time constant in milliseconds.

48 BBV19478 11/2011
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

LCO- [LIFT CONFIGURATION] continued

MOt- [MOTOR DATA]
Ctt M [Motor control type] [SVC V] (UUC)

UUC v [SVC V] (UUC): Open-loop voltage flux vector control with automatic slip compensation according to
the load. This type of control is recommended when replacing an ATV58. It supports operation with a
number of motors connected in parallel on the same drive (if the motors are identical).

CUC v [SVC I] (CUC): Open-loop current flux vector control. This type of control is recommended when
replacing an ATV58F used in an open-loop configuration. It does not support operation with a number of
motors connected in parallel on the same drive.

FUC v [FVC] (FUC): Closed-loop current flux vector control for motor with encoder. This selection is only
possible if an encoder card has been inserted. This type of operation is not possible, however, when using
an incremental encoder that generates signal "A" only.
This type of control is recommended when replacing an ATV58F used in a closed-loop configuration.
It provides better performance in terms of speed and torque accuracy and enables torque to be obtained at
zero speed. It does not support operation with a number of motors connected in parallel on the same drive.

Perform the encoder check detailled on page 150 before selecting [FVC] (FUC).

v [V/F 2pts] (UF2): Simple V/F profile without slip compensation.

UF2 See page 146 for more details of this parameter.

v [V/F 5pts] (UF5): 5-segment V/F profile: Similar to V/F 2 pts profile but also supports the avoidance
UF5 of resonance phenomena (saturation).See page 146 for more details of this parameter.

v [Sync. mot.] (SYn): For permanent magnet synchronous motors with sinusoidal electromotive force
SYn (EMF) only. This selection makes the asynchronous motor parameters inaccessible, and the synchronous
motor parameters accessible.

v [Sync.CL] (FSY): Closed-loop synchronous motor. For permanent magnet synchronous motors with
FSY sinusoidal electromotive force (EMF) only, with encoder. This selection is only possible if an encoder card
has been inserted; it makes the asynchronous motor parameters inaccessible, and the synchronous motor
parameters accessible.

This type of operation is not possible, however, when using an incremental encoder that generates signal
"A" only.
Perform the encoder check detailled on page 150 before selecting [Sync.CL] (FSY).

BBV19478 11/2011 49
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

LCO- [LIFT CONFIGURATION] continued

MOt- [MOTOR DATA] continued
rEqP M [Read motor param.] [No] (nO)

This parameter can only be used with BDH, BRH and BSH type motors from the Telemecanique
range.
Can only be accessed if [Encoder protocol] (UECP) page 188 = [Hiperface] (SCHP).
Request to load motor parameters from the encoder EEPROM memory.
nO v [No] (nO): Loading not performed or has not succeed.
YES v [Yes] (YES): Loading is performed as soon as possible, then the parameter automatically changes to
[Done] (dOnE).
dOnE v [Done] (dOnE):Loading done.
The following parameters are loaded: [Angle offset value] (ASU) page 161, [Nom motor spdsync] (nSPS)
page 157, [Nominal I sync.] (nCrS) page 157, [Pole pairs] (PPnS) page 157, [Syn. EMF constant] (PHS)
page 157, [Cust. stator R syn] (rSAS) page 157, [Autotune L d-axis] (LdS) page 157, and
[Autotune L q-axis] (LqS) page 157.
Note:
• During loading the drive is in "Freewheel Stop" state with the motor turned off.
• If a "line contactor" or "output contactor" function has been configured, the contactor closes
during loading.

rEtP M [Status motor param] [Not done] (tAb)

Can only be accessed if [Encoder protocol] (UECP) page 188 = [Hiperface] (SCHP).
Information on the request to load motor parameters from the encoder EEPROM memory (not modifiable).
tAb v [Not done] (tAb): Loading has not been performed, default motor parameters will be used.
PrOG v [In Progress] (PrOG): Loading in progress.
FAIL v [Failed] (FAIL) : Loading has not succeed.
dOnE v [Done] (dOnE): Loading completed successfully.
CUS v [Customized] (CUS): Loading completed successfully but one or more motor parameters have
subsequently been modified by the user via the display terminal or serial link, or auto-tuning has been
performed by [Auto-tuning] (tUn).

50 BBV19478 11/2011
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Asynchronous motor parameters:

These parameters can be accessed if [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 146 = [SVC V] (UUC), [SVC I] (CUC), [FVC] (FUC), [V/F 2pts] (UF2)
or [V/F 5pts] (UF5). In this case, the synchronous motor parameters cannot be accessed.

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

LCO- [LIFT CONFIGURATION] continued

MOt- [MOTOR DATA] continued
nPr M [Rated motor power] Acc. to drive
rating
Acc. to drive
rating
Rated motor power given on the nameplate, in kW if [Standard mot. freq] (bFr) = [50Hz IEC] (50), in HP if
[Standard mot. freq] (bFr) = [60Hz NEMA] (60).
nPr = Uns x nCr x √3 x η x cos ϕ
Avec : η = rendement et cos ϕ = facteur de puissance
Exemple:
Si [Tension nom. mot.] (Uns) = 400 V et [Courant nom. mot.] (nCr) = 11 A, alors
nPr = 400 x 11 x √3 x 0,85 x 0,7
nPr = 4,54 kW

UnS M [Rated motor volt.] Acc. to drive

rating
According to drive
rating and
[Standard mot.
freq] (bFr)
Rated motor voltage given on the nameplate.
ATV71LpppM3Z: 100 to 240 V
ATV71LpppN4Z: 200 to 480 V

nCr M [Rated mot. current] 0.25 to 1.5 In (1) According to drive

rating and
[Standard mot.
freq] (bFr)
Rated motor current given on the nameplate.

FrS M [Rated motor freq.] 10 to 500 Hz 50 Hz

Rated motor frequency given on the nameplate.

The factory setting is 50 Hz, or preset to 60 Hz if [Standard mot. freq] (bFr) is set to 60 Hz.

nSP M [Rated motor speed] 0 to 65535 rpm Acc. to drive

rating
Rated motor speed given on the nameplate.
0 to 9999 rpm then 10.00 to 65.53 krpm on the integrated display terminal.
If, rather than the rated speed, the nameplate indicates the synchronous speed and the slip in Hz
or as a %, calculate the rated speed as follows:
100 - slip as a %
• Rated speed = Synchronous speed x
100
or
50 - slip in Hz
• Rated speed = Synchronous speed x (50 Hz motors)
50
or
60 - slip in Hz
• Rated speed = Synchronous speed x (60 Hz motors)
60
If the motor is old or wrong motor nameplate, calculate the rated speed as follows:
nSP = Synchronous speed - 1,5 x (Synchronous speed - nominal speed)
Example :
nSP = 1500 - 1,5 x (1500 - 1430)
nSP = 1395 RPM

(1) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate.

BBV19478 11/2011 51
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Synchronous motor parameters:

These parameters can be accessed if [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 146 = [Sync. mot.] (SYn) or [Sync.CL] (FSY). In this case, the
asynchronous motor parameters cannot be accessed.

Important: For synchronous motors, it is crucial to set the current limit. See [Current Limitation] (CLI) page 53.

CAUTION
RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE EQUIPEMENT
Check that the motor will withstand this current, particularly in the case of permanent magnet synchronous motors, which
are susceptible to demagnetization.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

LCO- [LIFT CONFIGURATION] continued

MOt- [MOTOR DATA] continued
PPnS M [Pole pairs] 1 to 50 According to drive
rating
Number of pairs of poles on the synchronous motor.

nCrS M [Nominal I sync.] 0.25 to 1.5 In (1) According to drive

rating
Rated synchronous motor current given on the nameplate.

nSpS M [Nom motor spdsync] 0 to 60000 rpm According to drive

rating
Rated synchronous motor speed given on the nameplate.
On the integrated display unit: 0 to 9999 rpm then 10.00 to 60.00 krpm.

tqS M [Motor torque] 1 to 65535 Nm (2) According to drive

rating
Rated motor torque given on the nameplate.

(1) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate.
(2) [Motor torque] (tqS) maximum value is 48336 if [International unit] (SIU) is set to [No] (nO)

52 BBV19478 11/2011
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

LCO- [LIFT CONFIGURATION] continued

MOt- [MOTOR DATA] continued
ItH M [Mot. therm. current] 0.2 to 1.5 In (1) According to drive
rating
Motor thermal protection current, to be set to the rated current indicated on the motor nameplate page 274.

CLI M [Current Limitation] 0 to 1.36 In (1) 1.36 In (1)

CAUTION

RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE EQUIPEMENT

Check that the motor will withstand this current, particularly in the case of permanent magnet synchronous motors,
which are susceptible to demagnetization.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Used to limit the motor current.
Note 1: If the setting is less than 0.25 In, the drive may lock in [Output Phase Loss] (OPF)
detected fault mode if this has been enabled (see page 276). If it is less than the no-load motor
current, the limitation no longer has any effect.
Note 2: In synchronous mode, this is the maximum permissible current for the motor. If this value
has not been defined, use 150% of [Nominal I sync.] (nCrs)

(1) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate.

BBV19478 11/2011 53
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

LCO- [LIFT CONFIGURATION] continued

MOt- [MOTOR DATA] continued
tUn M [Auto tuning] [No] (nO)

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK OR ARC FLASH
• During auto-tuning, the motor operates at rated current.
• Do not service the motor during auto-tuning.

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
• It is essential that the following parameters [Rated motor volt.] (UnS), [Rated motor freq.] (FrS),
[Rated mot. current] (nCr), [Rated motor speed] (nSP) and [Rated motor power] (nPr) are correctly configured
before starting auto-tuning for asynchronous motor.
• It is essential that the following parameters [Nominal I sync] (nCrS), [Nom motor spdsync] (nSPS), [Pole pairs.]
(PPnS) and [Motor torque] (TqS) are correctly configured before starting auto-tuning for synchronous motor.
• When one or more of these parameters have been changed after auto-tuning has been performed, [Auto tuning]
(tUn) will return [No] (nO) and the procedure will have to be repeated.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury.

nO v [No] (nO): Auto-tuning not performed.

YES v [Yes] (YES): Auto-tuning is performed as soon as possible, then the parameter automatically changes
to [Done] (dOnE).
dOnE v [Done] (dOnE): Use of the values given the last time auto-tuning was performed.
Note:
• Auto-tuning is only performed if no stop command has been activated. If a "freewheel stop" or "fast stop"
function has been assigned to a logic input, this input must be inactive.
• Auto-tuning takes priority over any run or prefluxing commands, which will be taken into account after
the auto-tuning sequence.
• If auto-tuning does not succeed, the drive displays [No] (nO) and, depending on the configuration of
[Autotune fault mgt] (tnL) page 288, may switch to [Auto-tuning] (tnF) detected fault mode.
• Auto-tuning may last for 1 to 2 seconds. Do not interrupt the process. Wait for the display to change to
"[Done] (dOnE)" or "[No] (nO)".

54 BBV19478 11/2011
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Lift data
Identification of the [Nominal car speed] (CSP) and payload [Capacity of the lift] (LCA)

Type of winch Lift

Motor Gearbox Sheave and block and car
FRS(S) tackle
Hz (1:1 or 1:2)
NSP(S) M

rpm

CSP
M m/s

For the nominal motor frequency [Rated motor freq.] (FrS) / [Nominal freq sync.] (FrSS) the car speed is [Nominal car speed]
(CSP) = ...... m/s.

Ratio 1:1
CSP [m/s] = 3.14 x Sheave radius [meters] x NSP(S) [rpm]/(60 x Gearbox radius)

Ratio 1:2
CSP [m/s] = 1.57 x Sheave radius [meters] x NSP(S) [rpm]/(60 x Gearbox radius)

L/2 L

Ratio 1:1 Ratio 1:2

The car movement is equal to the length The car movement is equal to half the
of cable unwound by the motor. length of cable unwound by the motor.

BBV19478 11/2011 55
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

LCO- [LIFT CONFIGURATION] continued

LdA- [LIFT DATA]
CSp M [Nominal car speed] 0.01 to 10.00 m/s 1.00 m/s

The nominal car speed corresponds to the linear speed of the lift car when the motor runs at its rated speed
([Rated motor freq.] (FrS) for an asynchronous motor or [Nominal freq sync.] (FrSS) for a synchronous motor).
The [Nominal car speed] (CSP) therefore integrates the various gear ratios (sheave sizes, type of block
and tackle, use of a gearbox or not).

Type of winch
and block and tackle
(1:1 or 1:2)
M

[Capacity of the lift] (LCA)

LCA = ……… kg

[Counterweight] (CtM) [Car weight] (CMA)

CTM = ……… kg CMA = ……… kg

56 BBV19478 11/2011
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

LCO- [LIFT CONFIGURATION] continued

LdA- [LIFT DATA] continued
LCA M [Capacity of the lift] 0 to 48000 kg 400 kg

The payload corresponds to the maximum permissible load in the lift car. It must always be stated in the
lift car (for example: 630 kg - 8 persons)
This value can only be trusted
• If the lift has been balanced correctly, i.e., if the weight of the counterweight is similar to the weight of
the car when half-loaded. In other words if CtM is similar to CMA + (LCA/2)
• The weight of the empty car is similar to the payload
If not, the values of CtM and CMA calculated by the drive must be re-entered manually.

CMA M [Car weight] [Estimated]

(AUtO)
This parameter can be accessed if [ACCESS LEVEL] = [Expert]
Weight of lift car
When CMA = AUTO the system inertia calculation uses an estimated car weight.
When CMA <> AUTO the system inertia calculation uses the car weight entered by the user.
AUtO v [Estimated] (AUtO)
CtM M [Counterweight] [Estimated]
(AUtO)
This parameter can be accessed if [ACCESS LEVEL] = [Expert]
Weight of counterweight
When CtM = AUTO the system inertia calculation uses an estimated counterweight.
When CtM <> AUTO the system inertia calculation uses the counterweight entered by the user.
AUtO v [Estimated] (AUtO)
ACM M [Comfort accel.] 0.10 to 5.00 m/s2 0.80 m/s2

This parameter can be accessed if [ACCESS LEVEL] = [Expert]

This parameter defines the maximal acceleration and deceleration authorized during the movements of
the lift.

BBV19478 11/2011 57
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Parameters management
Regarding the parameters that define the ramp profile, 2 kinds of parameters can be defined:

• Parameters for the application description: [Acceleration time] (ACt), [Lift top speed] (LtS), [Deceleration length] (dEL),
[Stop length] (StL), [Lift leveling time] (LLt), [Lift leveling speed] (LLS), [Comfort accel.] (ACM) page 60, 61 and 57.

• Parameters for optimization : [Jerk round 1] (JAr1), [Jerk round 2] (JAr2), [Jerk round 3] (JAr3), [Jerk round 4] (JAr4), [Jerk round 5]
(JAr5), [Jerk round 6] (JAr6) page 62.

When the application parameters are the same, the same default (that is to say without optimization settings) behaviour must be provided
by the drive.

In the following drawings, identical colours indicates identical value and behaviour.

Parameters for Parameters for Parameters for

application description application description application description
ACM ACM ACM
ACt ACt ACt
LtS LtS LtS
dEL dEL dEL
StL StL StL
LLt LLt LLt
LLS LLS LLS

Once the application decription parameters are set, an optimization phase can start.

Nota: The adjustment of optimization parameters and [Comfort accel.] (ACM) parameter can modify parameters for application
description in order to stay consistent with the optimization required.

Following interaction can eventually occur:

• The modification of [Jerk round 1] (JAr1) and [Jerk round 2] (JAr2) parameters can update [Acceleration time] (ACt).
• The modification of [Jerk round 3] (JAr3) and [Jerk round 4] (JAr4) parameters can update [Lift leveling speed] (LLS) and / or
[Lift leveling time] (LLt).
• The modification of [Jerk round 5] (JAr5) and [Jerk round 6] (JAr6) parameters can update [Lift leveling speed] (LLS) and / or
[Lift leveling time] (LLt).
• The modification of [Comfort accel.] (ACM) can update [Acceleration time] (ACt), [Lift leveling speed] (LLS) and / or
[Lift leveling time] (LLt).

Whatever the optimization choices, [Comfort accel.] (ACM), [Lift top speed] (LtS), [Deceleration length] (dEL) and [Stop length] (StL)
parameters cannot be changed.

The setting of optimization parameters must be done as the last step of commissionning. During this optimization phase, if the application
description parameters are modified to some unacceptable values, then it is necessary to modify them again.
In this case, any modification of one of the application description parameters will reset the optimization parameters.

58 BBV19478 11/2011
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Parameters management (continued)

In conclusion, the lift menu allows to adjust the ramp in 2 steps.

Step 1 : Adjust only the application description parameters. Once these parameters are well adjusted, go to the second step.
Step 2 : Adjust optimization parameters.

Application description
parameter
ACM
Step 1 ACt
LtS
dEL
StL
LLt
LLS

Optimization parameters

JAr1
Step 2 JAr2
JAr3
JAr4
JAr5
JAr6

BBV19478 11/2011 59
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

LCO- [LIFT CONFIGURATION] continued

LdA- [LIFT DATA] continued
LtS M [Lift top speed] 0.10 to 10.00 m/s 1.00 m/s

This parameter can be accessed if [Lift Speed Mgt] (LSM) is not [No] (nO) or if [selector input A] (SPSA)
and [selector input B] (SPSb) are not set to [No] (nO).
The travel speed corresponds to the linear speed of the car in steady state (high speed).
This can be less than the [Nominal car speed] (CSP) if the motor is oversized in relation to the installation.
Note: [Lift top speed] (LTS) depends on [Nominal car speed] (CSP), [High speed] (HSP) and
[Rated motor freq.] (FRS) parameters.

ACt M [Acceleration time] 0.50 to 60.00 s 3s

This parameter can be accessed if [Lift Speed Mgt] (LSM) is not [No] (nO) or if [selector input A] (SPSA)
and [selector input B] (SPSb) are not set to [No] (nO).
The acceleration time corresponds to the time the car will take to attain its [Lift top speed] (LtS).
The acceleration time should be consistent with the desired travel speed so that the car travels at a
constant speed for at least a few seconds.

If the acceleration time is too short, acceleration will be too strong, making the ride uncomfortable.

If the acceleration time is too long, the travel speed can never be attained and the half floor function will
then be activated systematically. The travel time will not therefore be optimized for normal floors.

Speed

JAR2 JAR3
LtS (m/s)

dEL (cm)

StL (cm)

JAR4 JAR5
LLS (m/s)

JAR1 JAR6
0
ACt (s) LLt (s)
Time

StL M [Stop length] 1.0 to 300, 0 cm 10.0 cm

This parameter can be accessed if [Lift Speed Mgt] (LSM) is not [No] (nO) or if [selector input A] (SPSA)
and [selector input B] (SPSb) are not set to [No] (nO).

The stop length corresponds to the distance separating the stop indicator from the step the car is destined
to reach.
The drive considers the [Stop length] (StL) as being the distance still to be traveled by the car when the
drive loses the run command.
This distance is taken into account when calculating the deceleration profile.

60 BBV19478 11/2011
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

LCO- [LIFT CONFIGURATION] continued

LdA- [LIFT DATA] continued
LLS M [Lift leveling speed] 0.01 to 0.50 m/s 0.10 m/s

This parameter can be accessed if [Lift Speed Mgt] (LSM) is not [No] (nO) or if [selector input A] (SPSA)
and [selector input B] (SPSb) are not set to [No] (nO).
The lift leveling speed is calculated by the drive automatically. If the calculated speed is not suitable
(because it corresponds to a mechanical resonance frequency for example), it can be re-entered
manually. In this case, the lift leveling time should be recalculated.The [Lift leveling speed] (LLS) can't be
greater than the [Lift top speed] (LtS).

LLt M [Lift leveling time] 0.50 to 10.00 s 2.00 s

This parameter can be accessed if [Lift Speed Mgt] (LSM) is not [No] (nO) or if [selector input A] (SPSA)
and [selector input B] (SPSb) are not set to [No] (nO).
The lift leveling time corresponds to the time the car will spend at lift leveling speed in steady state.
If the lift leveling time is too short, the ride will be uncomfortable (rolling sensation).
If the lift leveling time is too long, the ramp between LtS and LLS will be intense (loss of comfort).

dEL M [Deceleration length] 10.0 to 999.9 cm 120.0 cm

This parameter can be accessed if [Lift Speed Mgt] (LSM) is not [No] (nO) or if [selector input A] (SPSA)
and [selector input B] (SPSb) are not set to [No] (nO).
The slowdown length corresponds to the distance separating the slowdown indicator from the floor the car
is destined to reach.
The drive considers the dEL as being the distance still to be traveled by the car when the drive receives
the low speed signal (or loss of the high speed signal).
This distance is taken into account when calculating the deceleration profile. [Deceleration length] (dEL)
can’t be shorter than [Stop length] (StL)

BBV19478 11/2011 61
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Ramp optimisation

Jerks JAR1 to JAR6 correspond to the maximum permissible jerk values for each rounding.
If one of the roundings is not satisfactory (for example: starting too sudden) it can be re-entered manually. In this case, the associated
rounding (for example: arrival at travel speed) will automatically be revised to keep it consistent. Some application data can also be modified
(travel speed, lift leveling time, acceleration time). However, the slowdown and stop lengths are adhered to.

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

LCO- [LIFT CONFIGURATION] continued

LdA- [LIFT DATA] continued
rOP-
[RAMP OPTIM.]
Note: This function can be accessed if [Lift Speed Mgt] (LSM) is not [No] (nO) or if [selector input A]
(SPSA) and [selector input B] (SPSb) are not set to [No] (nO).

JAr1 M [Jerk round 1] 0.01 to 3.00 m/s3 According to

application
parameters
Decreasing JAr1 and JAr2 may increase the acceleration time [Acceleration time] (ACt).

JAr2 M [Jerk round 2] 0.01 to 3.00 m/s3 According to

application
parameters
Decreasing JAr1 and JAr2 may increase the acceleration time [Acceleration time] (ACt).

JAr3 M [Jerk round 3] 0.01 to 3.00 m/s3 According to

application
parameters
Decreasing JAr3 and JAr4 may decrease the time at [Lift leveling time] (LLt).

JAr4 M [Jerk round 4] 0.01 to 3.00 m/s3 According to

application
parameters
Decreasing JAr3 and JAr4 may decrease the time at [Lift leveling time] (LLt).

JAr5 M [Jerk round 5] 0.01 to 3.00 m/s3 According to

application
parameters
Decreasing JAr5 and JAr6 may decrease the [Lift leveling speed] (LLS).

JAr6 M [Jerk round 6] 0.01 to 3.00 m/s3 According to

application
parameters
Decreasing JAr5 and JAr6 may decrease the [Lift leveling speed] (LLS).

62 BBV19478 11/2011
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

LCO- [LIFT CONFIGURATION] continued

LdA- [LIFT DATA] continued
Inr M [Ramp increment] 0.01 - 0.1 - 1 0.1

This parameter can be accessed if [Lift Speed Mgt] (LSM) is equal to [No] (nO) and if [selector input A]
(SPSA) and [selector input B] (SPSb) are not set to [No] (nO).

0.01 v [0.01]: Ramp up to 99.99 seconds

0.1 v [0.1]: Ramp up to 999.9 seconds
1 v [1]: Ramp up to 6000 seconds
This parameter is valid for [Acceleration] (ACC), [Deceleration] (dEC), [Acceleration 2] (AC2) and
[Deceleration 2] (dE2).

ACC M [Acceleration] 0.01 to 6000 s (1) 3.0 s

This parameter can be accessed if [Lift Speed Mgt] (LSM) is equal to [No] (nO) and if [selector input A]
(SPSA) and [selector input B] (SPSb) are not set to [No] (nO).
Time to accelerate from 0 to the [Rated motor freq.] (FrS) page 152 for an asynchronous motor or [Nominal
freq sync.] (FrSS) page 158 for a synchronous motor. Make sure that this value is compatible with the
inertia being driven.

dEC M [Deceleration] 0.01 to 6000 s (1) 3.0 s

This parameter can be accessed if [Lift Speed Mgt] (LSM) is equal to [No] (nO) and if [selector input A]
(SPSA) and [selector input B] (SPSb) are not set to [No] (nO).
Time to decelerate from the [Rated motor freq.] (FrS) page 152 to 0 for an asynchronous motor or
[Nominal freq sync.] (FrSS) page 158 for a synchronous motor. Make sure that this value is compatible
with the inertia being driven.

(1) Range 0.01 to 99.99 s or 0.1 to 999.9 s or 1 to 6000 s according to [Ramp increment] (Inr).

BBV19478 11/2011 63
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

LCO- [LIFT CONFIGURATION] continued

LdA- [LIFT DATA] continued
rPt M [Ramp type] [Linear] (LIn)

This parameter can be accessed if [Lift Speed Mgt] (LSM) is equal to [No] (nO) and if [selector input A]
LIn (SPSA) and [selector input B] (SPSb) are not set to [No] (nO).
S v [Linear] (LIn)
U v [S ramp] (S)
CUS v [U ramp] (U)
v [Customized] (CUS)
S ramps
f (Hz) f (Hz)
FrS FrS The rounding coefficient is fixed,
where t2 = 0.6 x t1
and t1 = set ramp time.
0 0
t t
t2 t2
t1 t1

U ramps
f (Hz) f (Hz)
FrS FrS

The rounding coefficient is fixed,

where t2 = 0.5 x t1
0 0 and t1 = set ramp time.
t t
t2 t2
t1 t1

Customized ramps
f (Hz) f (Hz) tA1: adjustable from 0 to 100%
FrS FrS
tA2: adjustable from 0 to (100% - tA1)
tA3: adjustable from 0 to 100%
tA4: adjustable from 0 to (100% - tA3)
0 0
t t
tA1 tA2 tA3 tA4
As a % of t1, where t1 = set ramp time
t1 t1

tA1 M [Begin Acc round] (1) 0 to 100% 50%

This parameter can be accessed if [Lift Speed Mgt] (LSM) is equal to [No] (nO) and if [selector input A]
(SPSA) and [selector input B] (SPSb) are not set to [No] (nO).
Rounding of start of acceleration ramp as a % of the [Acceleration] (ACC) or [Acceleration 2] (AC2)
ramp time. Can be set between 0 and 100%

tA2 M [End Acc round] (1) 50%

This parameter can be accessed if [Lift Speed Mgt] (LSM) is equal to [No] (nO) and if [selector input A]
(SPSA) and [selector input B] (SPSb) are not set to [No] (nO).
Rounding of end of acceleration ramp as a % of the [Acceleration] (ACC) or [Acceleration 2] (AC2)
ramp time. Can be set between 0 and (100% - [Begin Acc round] (tA1)).

tA3 M [Begin Dec round] (1) 0 to 100% 40%

This parameter can be accessed if [Lift Speed Mgt] (LSM) is equal to [No] (nO) and if [selector input A]
(SPSA) and [selector input B] (SPSb) are not set to [No] (nO).
Rounding of start of deceleration ramp as a % of the [Deceleration] (dEC) or [Deceleration 2] (dE2)
ramp time. Can be set between 0 and 100%

tA4 M [End Dec round] (1) 60%

This parameter can be accessed if [Lift Speed Mgt] (LSM) is equal to [No] (nO) and if [selector input A]
(SPSA) and [selector input B] (SPSb) are not set to [No] (nO).
Rounding of end of deceleration ramp as a % of the [Deceleration] (dEC) or [Deceleration 2] (dE2)
ramp time. Can be set between 0 and (100% - [Begin Dec round] (tA3)).
(1) Parameter can also be accessed in the [1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu.

64 BBV19478 11/2011
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

LCO- [LIFT CONFIGURATION] continued

LdA- [LIFT DATA] continued
Frt M [Ramp 2 threshold] 0 to 500 or
1600 Hz
0 Hz

according to
rating
This parameter can be accessed if [Lift Speed Mgt] (LSM) is equal to [No] (nO) and if [selector input A]
(SPSA) and [selector input B] (SPSb) are not set to [No] (nO).
Ramp switching threshold
The 2nd ramp is switched if the value of Frt is not 0 (0 deactivates the function) and the output frequency
is greater than Frt.
Threshold ramp switching can be combined with [Ramp switch ass.] (rPS) switching as follows:

LI or bit Frequency Ramp

0 <Frt ACC, dEC
0 >Frt AC2, dE2
1 <Frt AC2, dE2
1 >Frt AC2, dE2

rPS M [Ramp switch ass.] [No] (nO)

Ramp switching threshold

This parameter can be accessed if [Lift Speed Mgt] (LSM) is equal to [No] (nO) and if [selector input A]
(SPSA) and [selector input B] (SPSb) are not set to [No] (nO).
nO
LI1 v [No] (nO): Not assigned.
- v [LI1] (LI1)
:
v [...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 211.
• ACC and dEC are enabled when the assigned input or bit is at inactive state.
• AC2 and dE2 are enabled when the assigned input or bit is at active state.

AC2 M [Acceleration 2] 0.01 to 6000 s (1) 5.0 s

See page 226

This parameter can be accessed if [Lift Speed Mgt] (LSM) is equal to [No] (nO) and if [selector input A]
g (SPSA) and [selector input B] (SPSb) are not set to [No] (nO).
Time to accelerate from 0 to the [Rated motor freq.] (FrS) page 152 for an asynchronous motor or [Nominal
freq sync.] (FrSS) page 158 for a synchronous motor. Make sure that this value is compatible with the
inertia being driven.

dE2 M [Deceleration 2] 0.01 to 6000 s (1) 5.0 s

See page 226

This parameter can be accessed if [Lift Speed Mgt] (LSM) is equal to [No] (nO) and if [selector input A]
g (SPSA) and [selector input B] (SPSb) are not set to [No] (nO).
Time to accelerate from the [Rated motor freq.] (FrS) page 152 to 0 for an asynchronous motor or [Nominal
freq sync.] (FrSS) page 158 for a synchronous motor.. Make sure that this value is compatible with the
inertia being driven.

(1) Range 0.01 to 99.99 s or 0.1 to 999.9 s or 1 to 6000 s according to [Ramp increment] (Inr).

These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
g also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed
in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.

BBV19478 11/2011 65
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

The [LIFT OPTIMISATION] menu is used to make adjustments easily in order to optimise the lift ride comfort if necessary.

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

LOP- [LIFT OPTIMISATION]

Note: This menu is visible from [ACCESS LEVEL] = [Standard]

MCO- [MOTOR OPTIMISATION]

tUS M [Auto tuning state] [Not done] (tAb)

For information only, cannot be modified.

tAb v [Not done] (tAb): The default stator resistance value is used to control the motor.
PEnd v [Pending] (PEnd): Auto-tuning has been requested but not yet performed.
PrOG v [In Progress] (PrOG): Auto-tuning in progress.
FAIL v [Failed] (FAIL): Auto-tuning has not succeeded.
dOnE v [Done] (dOnE): The stator resistance measured by the auto-tuning function is used to control the motor.
Strd v [Entered R1] (Strd) The drive uses the stator resistance given by the parameter (rSC)
CUS v [Customized] (CUS): Auto-tuning has been performed, but at least one of the parameters [Autotune L d-
axis] (LdS), [Autotune L q-axis] (LqS) or [Cust. stator R syn] (rSAS) has subsequently been modified.
The following auto-tuning parameters are affected:
• [Cust stator resist.] (rSA), [Idw] (IdA), [LFw] (LFA) and [Cust. rotor t const.] (trA) page 156 for asynchronous
motors.
• [Cust. stator R syn] (rSAS) page 157 for synchronous motors.

These parameters can be accessed in asynchronous motor profiles and in [Expert] mode.

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

LOP- [LIFT OPTIMISATION]

MCO- [MOTOR OPTIMISATION]
rSM M [Stator R measured]
Cold stator resistance, calculated by the drive, in read-only mode. Value in milliohms (mΩ) up to 75 kW
(100 HP), and in hundredths of milliohms (mΩ/100) above 75 kW (100 HP).

rSA M [Cust stator resist.]

Cold state stator resistance (per winding), modifiable value. In milliohms (mΩ) up to 75 kW (100 HP), and
in hundredths of milliohms (mΩ/100) above 75 kW (100 HP). On the integrated display unit: 0 to 9999 then
10.00 to 65.53 (10000 to 65536).

LFM M [Lfr]
Leakage inductance in mH, calculated by the drive, in read-only mode.

LFA M [Lfw]
Leakage inductance in mH, modifiable value.

IdM M [Idr]
Magnetizing current in A, calculated by the drive, in read-only mode.

IdA M [Idw]
Magnetizing current in A, modifiable value.

trM M [T2r]
Rotor time constant in mS, calculated by the drive, in read-only mode.

trA M [Cust. rotor t const.]

Rotor time constant in mS, modifiable value.

66 BBV19478 11/2011
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

These parameters can be accessed in synchronous motor profiles.

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

LOP- [LIFT OPTIMISATION] continued

MCO- [MOTOR OPTIMISATION] continued
rSMS M [R1rS]
This parameter can be accessed if [ACCESS LEVEL] = [Expert]
Cold state stator resistance (per winding), in read-only mode. This is the drive factory setting or the result
of the auto-tuning operation, if it has been performed.
Value in milliohms (mΩ).
On the integrated display unit: 0 to 9999 then 10.00 to 65.53 (10000 to 65536).

rSAS M [Cust. stator R syn] According to drive

rating
According to drive
rating
This parameter can be accessed if [ACCESS LEVEL] = [Expert]
Cold state stator resistance (per winding) The factory setting is replaced by the result of the auto-tuning
operation, if it has been performed.
The value can be entered by the user, if he knows it.
Value in milliohms (mΩ).
On the integrated display unit: 0 to 9999 then 10.00 to 65.53 (10000 to 65536).

LdMS M [Measured Ld-axis]

This parameter can be accessed if [ACCESS LEVEL] = [Expert]

LdS M [Autotune L d-axis] 0 to 655.35 According to drive

rating
Axis "d" stator inductance in mH (per phase).
On motors with smooth poles [Autotune L d-axis] (LdS) = [Autotune L q-axis] (LqS) = Stator inductance L.

LqMS M [Measured Lq-axis]

This parameter can be accessed if [ACCESS LEVEL] = [Expert]

LqS M [Autotune L q-axis] 0 to 655.35 According to drive

rating
Axis "q" stator inductance in mH (per phase).
On motors with smooth poles [Autotune L d-axis] (LdS) = [Autotune L q-axis] (LqS) = Stator inductance L.

pHS M [Syn. EMF constant] 0 to 65535 According to drive

rating
Synchronous motor EMF constant, in 0.1 mV per rpm or 1 mV per rpm (peak voltage per phase), according
to the value of [Increment EMF] (IPHS).
On the integrated display unit: 0 to 9999 then 10.00 to 65.53 (10000 to 65536).

IpHS M [Increment EMF] [0.1mV/rpm] (0.1)

Increment for the [Syn. EMF constant] (PHS) parameter.

0.1 v [0.1 mV/rpm] (0.1): 0.1mV per rpm
1 v [1 mV/rpm] (1): 1mV per rpm

BBV19478 11/2011 67
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

LOP- [LIFT OPTIMISATION] continued

MCO- [MOTOR OPTIMISATION] continued
bOO M [Boost] - 100 to 100% 0

This parameter can be accessed if [ACCESS LEVEL] = [Expert] and if [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 146
is not [Sync.CL] (FSY) or if [Motor control type] (Ctt) is set to [Sync.CL] (FSY) and [Encoder usage] (EnU)
is set to [Slip comp.] (COr) or [Spd fdk reg.] (rEG).
Adjustment of the motor magnetizing current at low speed, as a % of the rated magnetizing current. This
parameter is used to increase or reduce the time taken to establish the torque. It allows gradual adjustment
up to the frequency set by [Action Boost] (FAb). Negative values apply particularly to tapered rotor motors
Note: If [Motor control type] (Ctt) is set to [Sync.CL] (FSY) and [Encoder usage] (EnU) is set to [Slip comp.]
(COr), [Boost] (bOO) is set to 100 %.

Magnetizing current

Positive[Boost] (bOO)

Rated magnetizing current

Negative [Boost] (bOO)

Frequency
0
[Action Boost] (FAb)

FAb M [Action Boost] 0 to 500 Hz 0 Hz

This parameter can be accessed if [ACCESS LEVEL] = [Expert] and if [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 146
is not [Sync.CL] (FSY) or if [Motor control type] (Ctt) is set to [Sync.CL] (FSY) and [Encoder usage] (EnU)
is set to [Slip comp.] (COr) or [Spd fdk reg.] (rEG).
Frequency above which the magnetizing current is no longer affected by [Boost] (bOO) If [Motor control
type] (Ctt) is set to [Sync.CL] (FSY) and [Encoder usage] (EnU) is set to [Slip comp.] (COr), [Action Boost]
(FAb) is set to [Nominal freq sync.] (FrSS) / 3.

SLp M [Slip compensation] 0 to 300 % 100 %

This parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type] (Ctt) is not [V/F 2pts] (UF2) or [V/F 5pts] (UF5).
Adjusts the slip compensation around the value set by the rated motor speed.
The speeds given on motor nameplates are not necessarily exact.
• If slip setting < actual slip: the motor is not rotating at the correct speed in steady state, but at a speed
lower than the reference.
• If slip setting > actual slip: The motor is overcompensated and the speed is unstable.

68 BBV19478 11/2011
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Velocity Loop

The ATV LIFT speed loop helps to ensure optimum comfort in the lift car while complying with the speed references produced by the
automatic ramp profile.
The ATV LIFT speed loop is configured automatically by the drive from the application data (car speed and payload).

In the majority of applications, there is no need to re-enter the speed loop settings. However, if you are not satisfied with the lift behavior,
refer to the Procedure for setting the speed loop paragraph on page 71.

Description of the loop

The ATV LIFT speed loop consists of the following elements:
• [Fr.Loop.Stab] (StA): Stability (attenuation coefficient)
• [FreqLoopGain] (FLG): Gain (passband)
• [K speed loop filter] (SFC): Reference filter constant
• [Real motor inertia] (JMOt) and [Estim. motor inertia] (JCAL): Motor inertia (JMOt can be accessed in read/write mode and JCAL is
read-only.
• [Application Inertia] (JAPL): Application inertia (pre-calculated)
The total inertia used in the loop is
- JMOt + JAPL when JMOt is not 0
- JCAL + JAPL when JMOt = Auto

In expert mode:
• [Feed forward] (FFP): Feed forward term gain
• [Bandwidth feedfor.] (FFU): Feed forward term bandwidth

This description of the loop can include the filter on the speed measurement, as it is closely linked to the final setting of this loop:
• [Encoder filter value] (FFr): Filter time constant
• [Encoder filter active] (FFA): Activation of the filter

Here then is the block diagram for this speed loop:

BBV19478 11/2011 69
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Basic operation
In the case of standard operation, the speed loop should be preset using the [Capacity of the lift] (LCA) and [Nominal car speed] (CSP)
parameters as follows:
1. The total weight of the application is estimated using [Capacity of the lift] (LCA)
2. The total inertia of the application is estimated using the total weight, [Nominal car speed] (CSP) and [Nom motor spdsync] (nSPS)
(or [Rated motor speed] (nSP) for asynchronous motors)
3. The speed regulator bandwidth and attenuation are predefined and adapted to the lift application
4. The regulator is predefined as being a PI speed regulator (SFC = 100%) for synchronous motors and as having intermediate behavior
between a PI and an IP for synchronous motors (SFC = 65%). Note: An IP speed regulator is obtained if SFC = 0%.
5. The filter constant applied to the speed reference is calculated using SFC
6. The speed controller Kp and Ki gains are calculated using the inertia, the bandwidth and the attenuation
7. The lift speed loop also has an additional feedforward compensation term for the acceleration and deceleration torque. By default this
is not active. Its gain can be set by [Feed forward] (FFP), set initially at 0%. This term is based on an acceleration observer whose
predefined bandwidth corresponds to [Bandwidth feedfor.] (FFU) = 100%. This can be modified if necessary.
8. When a closed-loop control profile (with speed feedback) is being used, there is the possibility of using a filter on the measured speed,
to reduce the measurement noise. This filter is preset according to the [Motor torque] (TqS) and the resolution of the encoder used
(resolution detected automatically)
Thus, in the case of fairly good correspondence between the drive inertia and the actual inertia, for the usual lift ramps, an encoder with
resolution >2^16 (=>[Encoder filter value] (FFR) = 3 ms), the actual speed should follow the reference speed exactly:
60

-10
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Reference speed
Actual speed
Measured speed

300

200

100

-100

-200

-300
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

torque

In the above example, the default inertia is that of the drive and the inertia parameter equals the default inertia. The roundings are all at
50% and the ramps at 3 s.

70 BBV19478 11/2011
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Procedure for setting the speed loop

This procedure must be used in inspection mode (see page 38). The lift ramps should then be set. It can be re-entered from setting item 6
in normal operation if necessary.

As explained in previous sections, the inertia must be set.

1. Start by entering the lift capacity [Capacity of the lift] (LCA) correctly and checking that the linear speed [Nominal car speed] (CSP),
[Rated motor speed] (nSP) or [Nom. motor spdsync] (nSPS) and rated frequency for asynchronous motors [Rated motor freq.] (FrS) or
the number of pole pairs for synchronous motors [Pole pairs] (PPnS) are entered correctly

2. The [Car weight] (CMA) et [Counterweight] (CtM) parameters are updated again depending on [Capacity of the lift] (LCA), and therefore
the total inertia of the application is calculated. If the the car weight and counterweight weight are known, it is better to enter them
separately

3. The synchronous motor torque [Motor torque] (tqS) and the number of motor pole pairs [Poles pair number] (PPn) or [Pole pairs] (PPnS)
update the estimated motor inertia (JCAL in read-only and [Real motor inertia] (JMOt) in read/write mode). If the motor inertia is known,
it is better to enter it in [Real motor inertia] (JMOt). You should be aware that our estimate of the inertia takes account of a "long cylinder"
lift motor model. If a flat lift motor is used, it is vital to fill in this parameter.

To sum up, in order to find the inertia you should enter:

At minimum As a preference
[Capacity of the lift] (LCA) [Capacity of the lift] (LCA)
[Nominal car speed] (CSP) [Nominal car speed] (CSP)
[Rated motor speed] (nSP) or [Nom motor spdsync] (nSPS) [Rated motor speed] (nSP) or [Nom motor spdsync] (nSPS)
[Motor torque] (tqS) [Motor torque] (tqS)
[Poles pair number] (PPn) or [Pole pairs] (PPnS) [Poles pair number] (PPn) or [Pole pairs] (PPnS)
[Car weight] (CMA)
[Counterweight] (CtM)
[Real motor inertia] (JMOt)

4. When little is known about the parameters (weights, rated speed, etc.), the total application inertia can be set directly as follows:
• Increase [Real motor inertia] (JMOt) and/or [Capacity of lift] (LCA) (to increase [Application Inertia] (JAPL) ) up to the system
stability limit (noise and strong vibrations in the car)
• Reduce [Real motor inertia] (JMOt) and/or [Capacity of lift] (LCA) (to reduce [Application Inertia] (JAPL) ) to help to eliminate
strong vibrations; these can be reduced until slow oscillations on the speed or speed overshoots occur which are easily felt in
the car; in this case the inertia should be increased again

5. The default values of StA, FLG, SFC, FFP, FFU are suitable in the vast majority of cases. The pre-calculated value of [Encoder filter value]
(FFR) is suitable in the vast majority of applications.

Exceptions:
6. A very loud noise and rapid oscillations on starting in inspection mode can be due to overestimation of the inertia (see "Influence of the
[Fr.Loop.Stab] (StA) et [FreqLoopGain] (FLG)" paragraph, page 76). The parameters involved in calculating the inertia, items 1, 2
and 3, should be reviewed.

7. Should the revised inertia (item 4) not give satisfactory results, it is possible to make the control system slacker, by reducing
[FreqLoopGain] (FLG) and/or increasing [Fr.Loop.Stab.] (StA), or more reactive, by increasing [FreqLoopGain] (FLG) and/or reducing
[Fr.Loop. Stab.] (StA) (see "Influence of the [Fr.Loop.Stab.] (StA) and [FreqLoopGain] (FLG)parameters" paragraph).

8. Background noise (high-frequency vibration) during operation or during rollback can be reduced by increasing the [Encoder filter value]
(FFr) parameter (see "Influence of the [Encoder filter value] (FFr) parameter" paragraph, page 80). In this case, do not forget to re-enter
[FreqLoopGain] (FLG) if necessary.

9. If it is necessary to reduce [Encoder filter value] (FFr) for the rollback (to have a faster reaction) and if the system allows it
(without increasing the background noise), there is no need to re-enter [FreqLoopGain] (FLG), because it will also be correct for a
smaller [Encoder filter value] (FFr).

10. If a system mechanical resonance is reached at a particular speed, rather slow oscillations may appear. You can:
• Reduce [FreqLoopGain] (FLG)
• And/or increase [Fr.Loop.Stab] (StA)
• And/or increase [Feed forward] (FFP) (to increase the gains only in transient operation, not at steady state)
• And/or reduce [K speed loop filter] (SFC) (in this case you need to re-enter the ramp settings, as delays will be introduced during
speed following)

BBV19478 11/2011 71
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Influence of the [FreqLoopGain] (FLG) and [Fr.Loop.Stab] (StA) parameters

These parameters are used to adjust the response of the speed loop obtained from the inertia, in particular when this is not known.

• [Fr.Loop.Stab] (StA): Used to adapt the return to steady state after a speed transient, according to the dynamics of the machine.
Gradually increase the stability to increase control loop attenuation and thus reduce any overspeed.

• [FreqLoopGain] (FLG): Used to adapt the response of the machine speed transients according to the dynamics (passband).
For machines with high resistive torque, high inertia or fast cycles, increase the gain gradually.

Initial response Increase in StA Increase in StA

Reference division Reference division Reference division

1,2 1,2 1,2

1 1 1

0,8 0,8 0,8

0,6 0,6 0,6

0,4 0,4 0,4

0,2 0,2 0,2

0 0 0
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
Time in ms Time in ms Time in ms

Initial response Increase in FLG Increase in FLG

Reference division Reference division Reference division

1,2 1,2 1,2

1 1 1

0,8 0,8 0,8

0,6 0,6 0,6

0,4 0,4 0,4

0,2 0,2 0,2

0 0 0
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
Time in ms Time in ms Time in ms

For a better understanding of the influence of the [FreqLoopGain] (FLG) and [Fr.Loop.Stab] (StA) parameters, we will look at 2 types of
example:
• A very short linear ramp (a very unlikely scenario for the lift, but very useful for the example)
• The same ramp rounded (ACC=DEC=3s) as before (like the lift)

1. Very short linear ramp

60 60

50 50

40 40

30 30

20 20

10 10

0 0

-10 -10
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2
Time in s Time in s
Reference speed Reference speed
Actual speed Actual speed
Measured speed Measured speed

4000 4000

3000 3000

2000 2000

1000 1000

0 0

-1000 -1000
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2
Time in s
Time in s torque
torque
1) Default loop settings, Jvar = J real 2) Fig. 1 + STA increased to 80

72 BBV19478 11/2011
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

60 60
60

50 50
50

40 40
40

30 30
30

20 20
20

10 10
10

0 0
0

-10 -10
-10
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2
Time in s Reference speed Time in s Time in s
Reference speed Reference speed
Actual speed Actual speed Actual speed
Measured speed Measured speed Measured speed

6000 6000
4000
4000
4000 3000
2000
2000
2000
0
1000
0 -2000
0

-2000 -4000
-1000
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2
Time in s Time in s
torque Time in s torque torque
3) Fig. 2 + FLG increased to 60 4) Fig. 3 + FLG increased to 100 5) Fig. 4 + STA decreased to 20

60 60 60

50 50 50

40 40 40

30 30 30

20 20 20

10 10 10

0 0 0

-10 -10 -10

0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Time in s Time in s Time in s
Reference speed Reference speed Reference speed
Actual speed Actual speed Actual speed
Measured speed Measured speed Measured speed

6000 3000 800

4000 2000 600

400
2000 1000
200
0 0
0

-2000 -1000 -200

0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

Time in s Time in s Time in s

torque torque torque
6) Fig. 5 + STA decreased to 5 7) Fig. 6 + FLG decreased to 20 8) Fig. 7 + FLG decreased to 5

BBV19478 11/2011 73
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

2. Ramp rounded to 3 s

60 60 60

50 50 50

40 40 40

30 30 30

20 20 20

10 10 10

0 0 0

-10 -10 -10

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Time in s Time in s Time in s

Reference speed Reference speed Reference speed
Actual speed Actual speed Actual speed
Measured speed Measured speed Measured speed

300 300 300

200 200 200

100 100 100

0 0 0

-100 -100 -100

-200 -200 -200

-300 -300 -300

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Time in s Time in s Time in s

torque torque torque
1) Default loop settings Jvar = J real 2) Fig. 1 + STA increased to 80 3) Fig. 2 + FLG increased to 60

60 60 60

50 50 50

40 40 40

30 30 30

20 20 20

10 10 10

0 0 0

-10 -10 -10

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Time in s Time in s Time in s

Reference speed Reference speed Reference speed
Actual speed Actual speed Actual speed
Measured speed Measured speed Measured speed

300 300 300

200 200 200

100 100 100

0 0 0

-100 -100 -100

-200 -200 -200

-300 -300 -300

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Time in s Time in s Time in s

torque torque torque

4) Fig. 3 + FLG increased to 100 5) Fig. 4 + STA decreased to 5 6) Fig. 5 + FLG decreased to 5

From these latest figures (except the last), we can see the influence of [FreqLoopGain] (FLG) and [Fr.Loop.Stab] (StA) when the inertia is
well defined (drive inertia adapted to the actual inertia). In summary, only an important dip in the [FreqLoopGain] (FLG) (bandwidth) can
make the control system very slack, and therefore oscillating.

74 BBV19478 11/2011
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Robustness of basic operation

Speed following is very robust when large variations of inertia occur. Let us look at the same example (with all default values, except for
inertia):

50
50

40
40

30
30

20
20

10
10

0
0

-10
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Reference speed Time in s Time in s

Reference speed
Actual speed Actual speed
Measured speed Measured speed

1500
30
1000
20
500
10
0
0
-500
-10
-1000
-20
-1500
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 -30
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
torque Time in s torque Time in s

Underestimation of the inertia by a factor of 5 Underestimation of the inertia (actual inertia is 0.1 kg.m2) brings
(actual inertia is 5 kg.m2) is also hardly noticeable. the system toward the limit of stability, but a factor of 10 is
acceptable.

60 60

50 50

40 40

30 30

20 20

10 10

0 0

-10 -10
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Time in s Time in s
Reference speed Reference speed
Actual speed Actual speed
Measured speed Measured speed

300 5000
200

100

0 0
-100

-200

-300 -5000
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Time in s torque Time in s
torque
Significant overestimation of the actual inertia Significant underestimation of the actual
(ratio 33.33). inertia (ratio 20).

Note that underestimation by a ratio of 30 is preferable to overestimation by a ratio of 30, since the control system remains stable
(Note: in this case the response will be too slow and the lift will be caught too late).

BBV19478 11/2011 75
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Influence of the [FreqLoopGain] (FLG) and [Fr.Loop.Stab] (StA) parameters for the ATV LIFT

Given these latest results, in the great majority of lift applications, there is no point in changing the settings of [Fr.Loop.Stab] (StA) and
[FreqLoopGain] (FLG).
Moreover, the settings of StA/FLG differ from the default values and usually hide incorrectly defined inertia:

60 60

50 50

40 40

30 30

20 20

10 10

0 0

-10 -10
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Time in s Reference speed Time in s

Reference speed
Actual speed Actual speed
Measured speed Measured speed

3000 3000

2000 2000

1000 1000

0 0

-1000 -1000

-2000 -2000

-3000 -3000
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Time in s Time in s
torque torque
Inertia underestimated by a ratio of 10, An increase of FLG to 100% improves the speed following
default loop values. while producing torque oscillations.

60 60

50 50

40 40

30 30

20 20

10 10

0 0

-10 -10
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2
Time in s Time in s
Reference speed Reference speed
Actual speed Actual speed
Measured speed Measured speed

6 10

5
5
2

0 0

-2
-5
-4

-6 -10
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Time in s Time in s
torque torque
A decrease of FLG improves the speed following, while
Significant overestimation of the actual inertia
nonetheless covering incorrect estimation of the inertia.
(ratio 33.33).

The inertia should therefore be redefined rather than changing the gains [FreqLoopGain] (FLG) or [Fr.Loop.Stab] (StA).

However, even in the case of well defined inertia, it is sometimes useful to reduce the gain [FreqLoopGain] (FLG) or increase the stability
[Fr.Loop.Stab] (StA) to make the system even slacker. A slack control system is useful for example to avoid exciting the mechanical
resonance frequencies of the lift or the motor.

76 BBV19478 11/2011
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

E.g.

60
60
50
50
40
40
30
30
20
20
10
10
0
0
-10
-10 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Time in s Reference speed Time in s
Reference speed
Actual speed Actual speed
Measured speed Measured speed

300
300
200
200
100
100
0
0
-100
-100
-200
-200
-300
-300 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Time in s torque Time in s
torque
Let's consider that the mechanical system is causing a By reducing FLG the little oscillations reduce, giving way to
resonance at the speed used. Even if the speed is followed larger oscillations which are felt less in the car.
correctly, the torque oscillations show discomfort.

-10
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Reference speed Time in s

Actual speed
Measured speed

300

200

100

-100

-200

-300
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

torque Time in s

By increasing STA to 100%, the system is dampened further.

This reduces the oscillations.

BBV19478 11/2011 77
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Another example of the advantage of the slacker system is when you need to use a very large filter on the speed measurement (also see
section on [Encoder filter value] (FFr)):

70 70

60 60

50 50

40 40

30 30

20 20

10 10

0 0

-10 -10
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4

Reference speed Time in s Reference speed Time in s

Actual speed Actual speed
Measured speed Measured speed

8000 2000

6000 1500

4000 1000

2000 500

0 0

-2000 -500
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4

Time in s torque Time in s

torque
Reducing the passband FLG helps to eliminate the speed
Very short ACC ramp (0.1 s), very long FFR (40 ms).
oscillations.

78 BBV19478 11/2011
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Influence of the [K speed loop filter] parameter (SFC)

The filter on the speed reference converts the PI regulator (SFC = 100%) to an IP regulator (SFC = 0%).
An IP regulator has no overshoot. The consequence is a delay in the actual speed compared to the reference speed.
In the great majority of lift applications it should be left at the default value: 100% for synchronous motors, 65% for asynchronous motors.

It can be useful when using steep ramp profiles. However, it could be said that in this case it hides an incorrect definition of the ramp rounds.
Nonetheless, it can be seen as another degree of freedom for increasing comfort.

60 60

50 50

40 40

30 30

20 20

10 10

0 0

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Time in s Time in s
Reference speed Reference speed
Actual speed Actual speed
Measured speed Measured speed

500 500

0 0

-500 -500
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

torque Time in s torque Time in s

Inertia underestimated (ratio 3), rounding of end of ramp If SFC = 65%, a good compromise between the speed
10%, SFC = 100% overshoot and the delay on the command is obtained.

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Time in s
Reference speed
Actual speed
Measured speed

500

-500
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Time in s
torque
If SFC = 0%, there is no speed overshoot and comfortable
jerks are obtained.

We should also point out that the reduction in [K speed loop filter] (SFC) also improves behavior in the event of mechanical resonance.
In this case, it can be used even together with the increase in [Fr.Loop.Stab] (StA) and/or the reduction in [Freq Loop Gain] (FLG).

BBV19478 11/2011 79
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Influence of the [Encoder filter value] (FFr) parameter

The [Encoder filter value] (FFR) filter is pre-positioned in the case of the lift to a value that depends on the actual encoder resolution and
the rated motor torque. It can be modified as follows:
• The FFR value is increased to reduce the acoustic noise or background (high frequency) vibration in the cables; this vibration is
usually due to the measurement noise (quality of the encoder cables, EMC interference, length of cable etc.).
• FFR is reduced to be able to increase (with the other dynamic gains) the dynamics of the response
For a better understanding of the filter's influence on the measured speed, we will also look at the example of a short ramp
(the influence of this parameter for the usual lift application ramps is much less pronounced):
Example with PI structure 100%

70
70
60
60
50
50
40
40
30
30
20
20
10
10
0
0
-10
-10 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2

Time in s Reference speed Time in s

Reference speed
Actual speed Actual speed
Measured speed Measured speed

5000 8000

4000 6000

3000 4000
2000
2000
1000
0
0
-2000
-1000
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2
Time in s torque Time in s
torque
Default loop settings, Jvar = J real, ACC = 0.1 s, FFR = 3 ms Very long FFR (40 ms).

Remember that the speed oscillations that appear in this latter case can be reduced by decreasing [FreqLoopGain] (FLG)
(see section on the advantages of [FreqLoopGain] (FLG) and [Fr.Loop.Stab] (StA)), page 72).

Example with an intermediate PI/IP structure (SFC = 80%):

70
70
60
60
50
50
40
40
30
30
20
20
10
10
0
0
-10
-10 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2
Reference speed Time in s
Reference speed Time in s
Actual speed
Actual speed
Measured speed
Measured speed

6000
4000
4000
3000
2000
2000
0
1000
-2000
0 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2
torque Time in s
torque Time in s
SFC = 80%, FFR = 40 ms: A system without overshoot can be
SFC = 80%, FFR = 3 ms converted into a system with overshoot and a little oscillation
due to too much filtering on the speed feedback.
In this case too, [FreqLoopGain] (FLG) must be reduced to reduce oscillations (and overshoots).
You should be aware that too large a filtering constant reduces the performance of the rollback function, since the rollback gains will be
applied to the filtered speed.
The FFR setting will therefore be a compromise between the noise and oscillations in normal operation and rejection of interference by the
rollback.

80 BBV19478 11/2011
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Use of [Feed forward] (FFP) and [Bandwidth feedfor.] (FFU)

This is optionnal in the case of lifts, such as applications with fairly slow dynamics (ramps 3 s, significant rounding, high inertia).

[Feed forward] (FFP) is used to adjust the level of dynamic torque feedforward required for accelerating and decelerating the inertia.
The effect of this parameter on ramp following is illustrated below. Increasing the value of FFP allows the ramp to be followed more closely.
However, if the value is too high, overspeed occurs. The optimum setting is obtained when the speed follows the ramp precisely;
this depends on the accuracy of the [Application Inertia] (JAPL) parameter, page 82, and the [Encoder filter value] (FFr) parameter setting,
page 189.

Initial response with FFP = 0 Increase in FFP Increase in FFP

Reference division Reference division Reference division

1,2 1,2 1,2

1 1 1

0,8 0,8 0,8

0,6 0,6 0,6

0,4 0,4 0,4

0,2 0,2 0,2

0 0 0
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
Time in ms Time in ms Time in ms

Increase in FFP

Reference division

1,2

0,8

0,6

0,4

0,2

0
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
Time in ms

As we have shown in the "Robustness of basic operation" paragraph, page 75, [Feed forward] (FFP) can be useful to hide inertia estimation
errors.

[Feed forward] (FFP) can also be used to separate the effect of the Kp and Ki speed regulator gains, on acceleration/deceleration and during
steady state operation (this term only acts on a change of speed reference, therefore only in transient operation).
The [Feed forward] (FFP) parameter serves no purpose during rollback, since there is no acceleration of the reference (speed reference 0 Hz).

[Bandwidth feedfor.] (FFU) is used to adjust the bandwidth of the dynamic torque feedforward term. The effect of this parameter on ramp
following is illustrated below. Decreasing the value of FFU reduces the effect of noise on the speed reference (torque ripple). However, too
great a decrease in relation to the ramp settings (on short ramps) causes a delay, and ramp following is adversely affected. Increasing the
value of FFU allows the ramp to be followed more closely, but also heightens noise sensitivity. The optimum setting is obtained by reaching
the compromise between ramp following and the existing noise sensitivity.

Initial response with FFU = 100% Reduction in FFU Increase in FFU

Reference division Reference division Reference division

1,2 1,2 1,2

1 1 1

0,8 0,8 0,8

0,6 0,6 0,6

0,4 0,4 0,4

0,2 0,2 0,2

0 0 0
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
Time in ms Time in ms Time in ms

BBV19478 11/2011 81
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

LOP- [LIFT OPTIMISATION] continued

SPL- [SPEED LOOP]
JCAL M [Estim. motor inertia] 0.01 to 655.35
kgm2
-

This parameter is read-only.

The parameter JCAL shows the estimated motor inertia. See below [Application Inertia] (JAPL).

JMOt M [Real motor inertia] [Estimated]

(AUtO)
[Estimated]
(AUtO)
to 655.35 kgm2
AUtO v [Estimated] (AUtO)
The parameter JMOt allows to adjust the motor inertia. See below [Application Inertia] (JAPL).
The following formula allows to calculate the [Real motor Inertia] (JMOt) from the flywheel effet (GD²):
JMOt = (GD² / 4).

JApL M [Application Inertia]

This parameter is only readable. It is updated when the [Car weight] (CMA) parameter is modified.

The total inertia is:

- [Real motor Inertia] (JMOt) + [Application Inertia] (JAPL) when [Real motor Inertia] (JMOt) is different from
[Estimated] (AUtO).
- [Estim. motor inertia] (JCAL) + [Application Inertia] (JAPL) when [Real motor Inertia] (JMOt) is equal to
[Estimated] (AUtO).

WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
If the value of [Application Inertia] (JAPL) parameter is incorrect, it can cause speed instability and loss
of motor control, which could lead to a sudden drop. The inertia may vary significantly according to the
application; in general, it is very high for lifts. As such, the default value does not guarantee correct
operation.

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

StA M [Fr.Loop.Stab] 0 to 100 % 20 %

Stability: Used to adapt the return to steady state after a speed transient, according to the dynamics of the
T machine. Gradually increase the stability to increase control loop attenuation and thus reduce any
overspeed.

FLG M [FreqLoopGain] 0 to 100 % 6%

Frequency loop gain: Used to adapt the pace of the machine speed transients according to the dynamics.

T For machines with high resistive torque, high inertia or fast cycles, increase the gain gradually.
[FreqLoopGain] (FLG) is set to 20% when [Motor control type] (Ctt) is set to [Sync. mot.] (SYn) or [Sync.CL]
(FSY).

T Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.

82 BBV19478 11/2011
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

LOP- [LIFT OPTIMISATION] continued

SPL- [SPEED LOOP] continued
SFC M [K speed loop filter] 0 to 100 % (1) According to
[Motor control
type] (Ctt)
T Speed loop filter coefficient.
See page 69 for more details of the effect of this parameter.

FFA M [Encoder filter activ.] [No] (nO)

This parameter can be accessed if [ACCESS LEVEL] = [Expert]

Activation of encoder feedback filter.
nO v [No] (no): Filter deactivated
YES v [Yes] (YES): Filter activated
FFr M [Encoder filter value] 0 to 50 ms Acc. to encoder
type

T This parameter can be accessed if [ACCESS LEVEL] = [Expert] and if [Encoder filter activ.] (FFA) =
[Yes] (YES).
Encoder feedback filter time constant in milliseconds.

FFp M [Feed forward] 0 to 200 % 0%

This parameter can be accessed if [ACCESS LEVEL] = [Expert]

Percentage of the high-performance regulator feedforward term. 100% corresponds to the term calculated
using the value of [Application Inertia] (JAPL) page 82.

FFU M [Bandwidth feedfor.] 20 to 500 % 100 %

This parameter can be accessed if [ACCESS LEVEL] = [Expert]

Bandwidth of the high-performance speed loop feedforward term, as a percentage of the predefined value.

(1) Parameter can also be accessed in the [1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu and [1.4 MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-).

T Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.

Notch filter
Vibrations naturally exist in lift systems and have disturbing consequences as noises and/or vibrations in the car.

These vibrations can come from mechanical roots as

• the elastic ropes resonance,
• impacts at guide rail joint,
• conjunction between guide rail and guide shoe,
• high ratios between the inertia of the application and of the motor (typicalli in direct drive application with no gear box),
and also electric noise coming from the motor.

To improve comfort the ATV LIFT drive provides 2 optional notch filters to reject effects of the mechanical resonance and consequently
improve the speed behaviour.
The notch filter attenuates a band of frequencies around its central frequency within it bandwidth and with maximum attenuation defined by
its depth :
• NFFx : Filter central frequency,
• NFBx : Bandwidth of the attenuation that will be applied by the filter (with of the notch),
• NFDx : Depth of the attenuation that will be applied by the filter.

When vibrations are rejected significant improvement of overall travel comfort is achievable. In particular:
• Speed loop setting is easier and less dependant on the system parameter variation (load, lift car position etc.).
• Speed loop damping is improved and lift car vibrations are reduced.
• Increased speed loop gains can be used for better speed ramp tracking and more accurate level positioning.
• Increased gains of the roll back controller are achievable without incurring vibrations in the car.

BBV19478 11/2011 83
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

The ATV LIFT provides 2 identical cascaded notch filters that can be configured and enabled independently.
By default, notch filter 1 is set to provide compensation of the typical lift mechanical resonant mode which is can be usually found in
15 Hz..25 Hz range.
The default settings of notch filter 2 are selected to provide additional attenuation at higher frequencies if the notch filter 1 can not be set to
provide sufficiently attenuation in the frequency range required in a particular lift installation (typically with very high load/motor inertia
mismatch).

Usually, using only notch filter 1 with its default settings is sufficient to remove vibrations that are felt in the car.

The ATV LIFT provides 2 different notch filters that can be configured and enable independently: the default setting of notch filter 1
concerned mechanical vibrations while default setting of notch filter 2 concerned electrical vibrations.
Usually, using only notch filter 1 with its default values is sufficient to remove vibrations that are felt in the car.

NFA = No, 1st, Notch Filter 1 Notch Filter 2

2nd, ALL

Commissioning
Activation of the notch filter should be typically considered in direct drive applications (no gear boxes) where load to motor inertia ratio is
high. The notch filter central frequency should be set at or slightly higher than to the mechanical resonant frequency. The mechanical natural
resonant frequency can be detected if the mechanical system is excited by sudden torque variations. So the main task is to identify as close
as possible the resonant frequency.
To commission properly the notch filter 1 and in order to be sure that the origin of these vibrations is mechanical resonance, a simple test
may be done:
• remove roll-back management,
• start in inspection,
• stop.

During stop during down movement with empty car at mid in freewheel, the measured speed will contain the resonant frequencies of the
application. The speed may be observed with an external equipment (tachometer for example).

Example:
56 ms period of the oscillation => 18 Hz
resonance

reference speed

measured speed
torque current

If it is impossible to measure the speed, we should consider that usual mechanical resonances are between 15 and 25 Hz.

Remark: Possible speed vibrations seen during drive run normally appear at frequencies higher than the mechanical resonant frequency
depending on the settings of the speed loop, speed-back filter and motor parameters. Thus it is important to identify real natural resonance
frequency (above explained observation during free wheeling is one possibility).

84 BBV19478 11/2011
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

[1.] Set Motor data Settings

Nameplate,
Auto-tuning …

[2.] Set Application data Setting

Capacity cabine,
Ramp (Top Speed, Levelling speed, Dec
length, Stop length),
Application Inertia

[3.] Set speed loop Settings

(for RUN),
Anti-rollback loop (for TORQUE
APPLICATION)

Speed vibrations occur

No and performance is
not sufficient
with lower gains

Yes

[4] Set NotchFilter settings

See details hereafter

Performance is OK ? No

Yes

END

BBV19478 11/2011 85
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

[4] Set NotchFilter settings

Mechanical vibrations: Sensor/Motor vibration:

Low frequency Acoustic Noise High frequency Acoustic Noise
(LF) (HF)

Use speed measurement filter

(increase FFR)

LF Vibrations ?

1st NotchFilter activation 2nd NotchFilter activation

Vibrations ? Yes

Without PC-Software With PC-Software

No
Increase notch filter
Start without notch filter
frequency (NFF) from
default settings, up to
max.
Identified the frequency
with PC-Software thru
scope of SRFR in RUN
No Vibrations ? without the activation of
the notch filter
(nFA = nO)

Yes
Activate the notch filter
with this notch filter
Increase notch filter frequency
bandwidth (NFB) from
default settings by one
step (example 50%)
Reduce No
vibrations ?

Yes

Increase the notch filter

bandwidth (NFB)

No Vibrations ?

Yes
END

86 BBV19478 11/2011
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Code Name/Description Factory setting

LOP- [LIFT OPTIMISATION] continued

SPL- [SPEED LOOP] continued
nFA M [Notch Filter Activ.] [No] (nO)

This parameter activates the notch filter function. 2 independent notch filters can be configured.

1St v [First] (1St): notch filter 1 enabled

2nd v [2nd] (2nd): notch filter 2 enabled
ALL v [All] (ALL): notch filters 1 and 2 enabled
nO v [No] (nO): no notch filter enabled

Parameters that can be accessed in [Expert] mode

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

SSL- [SPEED LOOP] (continued)

nFF1 M [Notch Filter Freq 1] 10..150 Hz 15

Notch filter 1 central frequency. Parameter accessible only if [Notch Filter Activ.] (nFA) = [First] (1St) or
[All] (ALL).

nFb1 M [Notch Filter Bdw 1] 10..400% 100

Notch filter 1 bandwidth. Parameter accessible only if [Notch Filter Activ.] (nFA) = [First] (1St) or [All] (ALL).
This parameter defines the bandwidth of the notch filter 1. Filter with higher bandwidth will provide better
stability margin when the load resonant frequency changes (with car position or load).
Note: rising the bandwidth can interfere with the expect drive dynamic (reducing the dynamic of the speed
loop).

nFd1 M [Notch Filter Activ.] 0..100% 10

Notch filter 1 gain. Parameter accessible only if [Notch Filter Activ.] (nFA) = [First] (1St) or [All] (ALL).
This parameter defines the gain of the notch filter 1 at the central frequency. When NFD1=100%, no filter is
applied

nFF2 M [Notch Filter Freq 2] 10..150 Hz 85

Notch filter 2 central frequency. Parameter accessible only if [Notch Filter Activ.] (nFA) = [2nd] (2nd) or
[All] (ALL).

nFb2 M [Notch Filter Bdw 2] 10..400% 100

Notch filter 2 bandwidth. Parameter accessible only if [Notch Filter Activ.] (nFA) = [2nd] (2nd) or [All] (ALL).
This parameter defines the bandwidth of the notch filter 2. Filter with higher bandwidth will provide better
stability margin when the load resonant frequency changes (with car position or load).
Note: rising the bandwidth can interfere with the expect drive dynamic (reducing the dynamic of the speed
loop).

nFd2 M [Notch Filter Activ.] 0..100% 25

Notch filter 2 gain. Parameter accessible only if [Notch Filter Activ.] (nFA) = [2nd] (2nd) or [All] (ALL).
This parameter defines the gain of the notch filter 2 at the central frequency. When NFD2=100%, no filter is
applied.

BBV19478 11/2011 87
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

LOP- [LIFT OPTIMISATION] continued

StA- [START ADJUSTMENT]
brS- [BRAKE START]
Note: This menu is visible if [Brake assignment] (bLC) is not [No] (nO)

brt M [Brake Release time] 0.00 to 5.00 s 0.5 s

Brake release time delay

bIr M [Brake release freq] [Auto] (AUtO) to

10.0 Hz
[Nominal motor
slip] (nSL)/2
This parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 146 is not [FVC] (FUC) or [Sync.CL]
(FSY) and if [Movement type] (bSt) page 240 is [Hoisting] (UEr).
Brake release frequency threshold (initialization of acceleration ramp).
AUtO v [Auto] (AUtO): The drive takes a value equal to the nominal motor slip, calculated using the drive
parameters.
- v 0 to 10 Hz: Manual setting
Ibr M [Brake release I FW] (1) -1.32 In to 1.32 In 0A

This parameter can be accessed if [Weight sensor ass.] (PES) = [No] (nO) (see page 246).
Brake release current threshold for Ascending or Forward movement.

bIp M [Brake impulse] [Yes] (YES)

This parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 146 is not [FVC] (FUC) or [Sync.CL]
(FSY) and if [Movement type] (bSt) page 240 is [Hoisting] (UEr).
nO v [No] (nO): The motor torque is given in the required operating direction, at current Ibr.
YES v [Yes] (YES): The motor torque is always Forward (check that this direction corresponds to
ascending), at current Ibr.
2Ibr v [2 IBR] (2Ibr): The torque is in the required direction, at current Ibr for Forward and Ird for Reverse,
for certain specific applications.

(1) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual or on the drive nameplate.

88 BBV19478 11/2011
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Rollback management
In some lift applications (gearless with high inertia), a jolt can be felt in the car at the start of any movement when the brake is released.
At this moment (since there is no external weight sensor), the torque applied by the motor is not yet at the level needed to hold the car.
A slight movement (up or down, depending on the general equilibrium) occurs. This movement is known as a "rollback".

The [Rollback MGT] (rbM) function, page 90 can only be accessed in closed-loop mode ([Motor control type] (Ctt) , page 146 = [Sync.CL]
(FSY) or [FVC] (FUC)). It increases the drive's rigidity control during release of the mechanical brake to cancel any movement during the
brake release time ([Brake Release time] (brt) , page 88).

Speed reference
Car speed without Rollback
rollback management

brt > 1 s

Time

Brake
feedback

Time

The [Rollback MGT] (rbM) function can be used to avoid the effects of rollback once the following parameters have been set:
- The speed loop parameters must be set and must not be modified after the [Rollback MGT] (rbM) function has been activated.
- The [Encoder filter value] parameter (FFr) page 48 must be configured with an appropriate value and must not be modified after
the[Rollback MGT] (rbM) function has been activated.
- The current parameter [Brake release I FW] (Ibr) page 88 can be adjusted to apply a current level corresponding to the most
common load scenario (approximately 25% of the total load).
- The brake release sequence must be configured with an appropriate brake release time [Brake Release time] (brt)
(typically brt > 1 second).

Recommended settings:
- Set the speed loop correctly in order to have satisfactory rollback management (correct ramp following and well damped
response). Initial optimisation of the initial speed loop must be performed using the [Rollback MGT] (rbM) function =
[No] (nO) (deactivated).
- We recommend gradually increasing the [Rbk Compensation] (rbC) gain from 0 until the rollback movement is reduced to the
desired level.
- If vibrations occur while the [Rbk Compensation] (rbC) gain is being increased, it must be reduced until these stop. It is possible
to increase damping with the [Rbk Damping] (rbd) parameter, this allows the [Rbk Compensation] (rbC) gain to be increased
again.
- Note: A high setting of the [Rbk Damping] (rbd) parameter can amplify the encoder noise. It is therefore advisable to keep the
value as low as possible.
- The performance of the rollback compensation function will be limited by the system resonance frequencies and the encoder
feedback resolution. Encoders with a low resolution do not necessarily offer the desired rollback management.
- Note: You should allow adequate time after the brake is released and prioritize starting of the speed ramp to control the rollback
in order to stabilize the lift position.

BBV19478 11/2011 89
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

LOP- [LIFT OPTIMISATION] continued

StA- [START ADJUSTMENT] continued
rbM- [ROLLBACK MGT]
Menu accessible:
- If [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 146 = [Sync.CL] (FSY) or [FVC] (FUC),
- If brake logic control [Brake assignment] (bLC) page 240 has been assigned.

rbM M [Rollback MGT] [No] (nO)

Activation of Rollback MGT function

nO v [No] (nO)
YES v [Yes] (YES)
rbC M [Rbk Compensation] 0 to 1000 % 20 %

This parameter can be accessed if [Rollback MGT] (rbM) = [Yes] (YES)

Rollback compensation gain.

rbd M [Rbk Damping] 0 to 1000 % 50 %

This parameter can only be accessed when [ACCESS LEVEL] = [Expert] and if
[Rollback MGT] (rbM) = [Yes] (YES).
Rollback coefficient damping.

90 BBV19478 11/2011
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Start-up stiffnes boost

The Start-up stiffness boost adapts the IBR current level according to the encoder feedback while the brake is opening.
The Start-up stiffness boost operates during the first part after the Run order: when the load torque becomes predominant and when the
breaking torque due to the mechanical brake progressively reduces.
At the end of the braking operation, the resulting opening current level set in the parameter IBR is internally re-adjusted according to the
response of the system.

encoder
position

SUSA

monitoring parameter
PUCI: maximum
current SUSB Rollback movement measured
(A) Stiffnes Boost management during rollback

IBR
SUSG
to low

SUSG
to high monitoring parameter
IBRM: level of current
need to control the
R (BLC) rollback

brake torque
(N·m) engaged

open

run order
BRT

BBV19478 11/2011 91
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

LOP- [LIFT OPTIMISATION] continued

StA- [START ADJUSTMENT] continued
rbM- [ROLLBACK MGT] continued
Menu accessible:
- If [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 146 = [Sync.CL] (FSY) or [FVC] (FUC),
- If brake logic control [Brake assignment] (bLC) page 240 has been assigned.

SUSb M [Start Stiffnes Boost] [No] (nO)

Activation of start-up stiffness boost function.

Note: This function is compliant with the rollback management function [Rollback MGT] (rbM). It is
recommended to activate both.
nO v [No] (nO)
YES v [Yes] (YES)

Parameters that can be accessed in [Expert] mode

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

LOP- [LIFT OPTIMISATION] continued

StA- [START ADJUSTMENT] continued
SUSA M [Activation Angle] 0..10 2

This parameter defines the angular movement threshold at which the start-up stiffness boost is activated
to modify the current level applied during (brt) [Brake Release time].

It defines an angular variation. A same angular variation could contain deferent numbers of encoder lines
according the encoder resolution. As usual, high resolution provides good behaviour.

Note: too low settings can provide bad regulation because of the encoder noise.

SUSG M [Stiffness gain] 0..1000 % 100 %

This parameter defines the gain apply on the current regulation when the (SUSA) [Activation Angle] is
reached.

92 BBV19478 11/2011
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

External weight measurement

This function uses the information supplied by a weight sensor to adapt the current [Brake release I FW] (Ibr) of the [BRAKE LOGIC
CONTROL] (bLC-) function. The signal from the weight sensor can be assigned to an analog input (usually a 4 - 20 mA signal), to the
pulse-in input or to the encoder input, according to the type of weight sensor.

Examples include
- Measurement of the total weight of a hoisting winch and its load.
- Measurement of the total weight of an elevator winch, the cabin and counterweight.

The current [Brake release I FW] (Ibr) is adapted in accordance with the curve below.

Ibr

[Point 2y] (CP2)

[Point 1x]
(LP1)
0 Weight sensor signal
[Point 2x] 100%
LP2
Zero load

[Point 1y] (CP1)

This curve can represent a weight sensor on an elevator winch, where zero load on the motor occurs when the load in the cabin is not zero.

BBV19478 11/2011 93
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

LOP- [LIFT OPTIMISATION] continued

StA- [START ADJUSTMENT] continued
ELM- [EXTERNAL WEIGHT MEAS.]
PES M [Weight sensor ass.] [No] (nO)

This function can be accessed if brake logic control has been assigned (see page 240).
If [Weight sensor ass.] (PES) is not [No] (nO), [Movement type] (bSt) page 240 is forced to [Hoisting] (UEr).
nO v [No] (nO): Function inactive
AI1 v [AI1] (AI1): Analog input
AI2 v [AI2] (AI2): Analog input
AI3 v [AI3] (AI3): Analog input, if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted
AI4 v [AI4] (AI4): Analog input, if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted
PI v [RP] (PI): Frequency input, if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted
PG v [Encoder] (PG): Encoder input, if encoder card has been inserted
AIU1 v [Network AI] (AIU1): Virtual input via communication bus, to be configured via [AI net. channel]
(AIC1) page 183.

LP1 M [Point 1 X] 0 to 99.99 % 0

0 to 99.99% of signal on the assigned input.

[Point 1x] (LP1) must be less than [Point 2x] (LP2).
This parameter can be accessed if [Weight sensor ass.] (PES) has been assigned.

CP1 M [Point 1Y] -1.36 to +1.36 In

(1)
- In

Current corresponding to the load [Point 1 X] (LP1), in A.

This parameter can be accessed if [Weight sensor ass.] (PES) has been assigned.

LP2 M [Point 2X] 0.01 to 100 % 50 %

0.01 to 100 % of signal on the assigned input.

[Point 2x] (LP2) must be greater than [Point 1x] (LP1).
This parameter can be accessed if [Weight sensor ass.] (PES) has been assigned.

CP2 M [Point 2Y] -1.36 to +1.36 In

(1)
0

Current corresponding to the load [Point 2x] (LP2), in A.

This parameter can be accessed if [Weight sensor ass.] (PES) has been assigned.

IbrA M [Ibr 4-20 mA loss] 0 to 1.36 In (1) 0

T Brake release current in the event of the loss of the weight sensor information.
This parameter can be accessed if the weight sensor has been assigned to an analog current input and
the 4-20 mA loss fault detection is deactivated.
Recommended settings:
- 0 for lifts
- Rated motor current for a hoisting application

(1) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual or on the drive nameplate.

94 BBV19478 11/2011
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

LOP- [LIFT OPTIMISATION] continued

StO- [STOP ADJUSTMENT]
Note: This menu is visible if [Brake assignment] (bLC) is not [No] (nO)

bEn M [Brake engage freq] (1) [Nominal motor

slip] (nSL)/2
T
Brake engage frequency threshold
This parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 146 is not [FVC] (FUC) or [Sync.CL] (FSY).
AUtO v [Auto] (AUtO): The drive takes a value equal to the nominal motor slip, calculated using the drive
parameters.
- v 0 to 10 Hz: Manual setting
bEt M [Brake engage time] 0.00 to 5.00 s (1) 0.30 s

T Brake engage time (brake response time).

tbE M [Brake engage delay] 0.00 to 5.00 s (1) 0s

T Time delay before request to engage brake. To delay brake engagement, if you wish the brake to be
engaged when the drive comes to a complete stop.

bECd M [Brake engage at 0] [No] (nO)

Brake engages at regulated zero speed.

This parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 146 = [FVC] (FUC) or [Sync.CL] (FSY).
Can be used to engage the brake at zero speed in closed-loop mode with speed regulation. This parameter
can be used to adjust the brake engage delay once zero speed has been reached.
If a speed other than zero is then required, the command to release the brake is sent following torque
application.
nO v [No] (nO): Brake does not engage at regulated zero speed.
- v 0.0 to 30.0 s: Brake engage delay once zero speed is reached.

(1) Parameter can also be accessed in the [1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu and in the [1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUN-) menu.

T Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.

BBV19478 11/2011 95
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Inspection
It can only be accessed if the [Brake assignment] (bLC) page 240 function have already been assigned.

It is used for operation at a fixed preset speed that is independent of all other references and over which it takes priority. The whole trajectory
of the elevator can thus be covered and the necessary checks performed.

This function requires:

• A logic input to control the "inspection" mode.
• An appropriate frequency reference (inspection speed).

When the assigned logic input is at active state, inspection mode is activated:
• When a run command is given, the motor starts up normally, with output contactor command and brake logic control, until it reaches
the inspection speed.
• When the run command is disabled, the motor changes to freewheel stop and brake logic control and output contactor command
functions are triggered immediately.

Note: If evacuation function is activated and [Opt. rescue mode] (OrM) (see page 265) is set to [Automatic] (AUtO), then inpection operation
is possible in the direction autodetected by the drive. A run order in the other direction will not start the motor.

96 BBV19478 11/2011
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Inspection mode
LIx (ISP)
AND
LIx = FWD
OR Reference (1) LI (Fwd) [Lift Speed Mgt] [Inspection]
LIx = REV or (LSM) (ISP)
LI (Rev)
[Inspection speed] (ISrF)
FRH STOP 0 1 or 0 1 or 0
[Lift top
1 1 0
speed] (LtS)
[Lift leveling
1 0 0
speed] (LLS)
[Inspection]
1 1 or 0 1
R (BLC) (ISP)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

LFn- [LIFT FUNCTIONS]

ISP- [INSPECTION MODE]
ACC M [Acceleration] 0.1 to 6000.0 s (2) 3.0 s

Time to accelerate from 0 to the [Rated motor freq.] (FrS) page 152 for an asynchronous motor or
[Nominal freq sync.] (FrSS) page 158 for a synchronous motor. Make sure that this value is compatible
with the inertia being driven.

dEC M [Deceleration] 0.01 to 6000 s (1) 3.0 s

Time to decelerate from the [Rated motor freq.] (FrS) page 152 to 0 for an asynchronous motor or [Nominal
freq sync.] (FrSS) page 158 for a synchronous motor. Make sure that this value is compatible with the
inertia being driven.

ISP M [Inspection] [LI5] (LI5)

This parameter can be accessed if brake logic control [Brake assignment] (bLC) page 240 has been
assigned.
nO v [No] (nO): Function not assigned.
LI1 v [LI1] (LI1) to [LI6] (LI6)
- v [LI7] (LI7) to [LI10] (LI10): If VW3A3201 logic I/O card has been inserted.
LI14 v [LI11] (LI11) to [LI14] (LI14): If VW3A3202 extended I/O card has been inserted.
Inspection mode is activated when the assigned input changes to active state.
If evacuation function is activated at the same time and [Opt. rescue mode] (OrM) (see page 265) is set to [Auto]
(AUtO), the drive can only start in the direction allowed by evacuation function.

ISrF M [Inspection speed] 0 to 25 Hz According to drive

rating
Value of the "inspection" mode frequency reference. This parameter can be accessed if [Inspection] (ISP)
is not [No] (nO) or [ISP selection] (ISPS) is not set to [No] (nO).

SttL M [Stop type ISP] [FreeWheel] (nSt)

Stop mode on activation or deactivation of the inspection function as well as on disappearance of the run
command or appearance of a stop command during the inspection phase.
v [Ramp stop] (rMP): Ramp stop in inspection.
v [Freewheel] (nSt): Freewheel stop in inspection.

(1) Note: This table is applicable to 2-wire control only.

(2) Range 0.01 to 99.99 s or 0.1 to 999.9 s or 1 to 6000 s according to [Ramp increment] (Inr).

BBV19478 11/2011 97
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Evacuation function
When a lift is stuck between 2 floors due to a power outage, it must be possible to evacuate its occupants within a reasonable period of time.
This function requires an emergency power supply to be connected to the drive.
This power supply is at a reduced voltage, and only allows a derated operating mode, at reduced speed, but with full torque.

This function requires:

• One logic input to control "evacuation" operation
• Reduction of the voltage monitoring threshold
• An appropriate low speed reference

Following a power outage, the drive can restart without having to clear the [Undervoltage] (USF) state if the corresponding logic input is at
active state at the same time.

DANGER
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
• This input must not be at active state when the drive is powered from the line supply. To ensure this and also avoid
any short-circuits, supply changeover contactors must be used.
• Set this input to 0 before connecting the emergency power supply to the line supply.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

The optimized rescue function [Opt. rescue mode] (OrM) offers 3 possible modes:
• Standard mode: This is the the Evacuation mode existing on ATV71L.
This mode does not take into account the lift ramp parameters. The drive is using linear ramps and is running at the evacuation
frequency defined by the parameter [Evacuation freq.] (rSP).
• Optimized mode: The target of this mode is to identify the direction which requires the less power in order to optimize the emergency
power supply size. The speed reference used during rescue is given by the LIFT ramp, taken into account the [Cust. rescue speed]
(OrSP) speed limitation and the specific acceleration time [Acc. time rescue] (rACC).
The optimized direction for rescue mode is available on a logic output if set to [Rescue dir.] (Opt). If the output is at active state (1),
it means that the forward direction requires less power than reverse. The output at passive state (0) means that the reverse direction
requires less power than forward.
- Manual optimized mode: the drive can start in both directions.
- Automatic optimized mode: the drive will start only in the direction that requires the less power.

DANGER
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
• If OrM is set to auto, the direction will be choosen by the drive whaterver the direction requested.
• Check this configuration is compatible with the application.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

The power requested by the drive during evacuation phase depends on the car load, as shown on the figure below:

POWER
NEEDED
- Power needed in the opposite direction.
- Power needed in the optimized direction.

EMPTY HALF-LOAD FULL LOAD

The requested emergency power supply [Calc. rescue power] (PMC) calculated for the ATV LIFT takes into account the chosen [Opt.
rescue mode] (OrM), the dedicated parameters for evacuation and the parameters of the lift system (motor data, and lift data). This is the
maximum peak power value in KVA necessary for evacuation phase according to the drive parameters.

In order to reduce the emergency power supply size, set [Opt. rescue mode] (OrM) to [Automatic] (AUtO).
If [Opt. rescue mode] (OrM) is set to [Manual] (MAnU), [Calc. rescue power] (PMC) includes the possibility to go in the less efficient direction

98 BBV19478 11/2011
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

The size of the emergency power supply could be optimized by adjusting following paramters:

1) Reduce [Cust. rescue speed] (OrSP)

2) Increase [Acc. time rescue] (rACC)
Note: [Acc. time rescue] (rACC) is automatically recalculated each time [Cust. rescue speed] (OrSP) is modified.
3) Reduce [Resc max current ] (rCLI) within the limit of the application requested current.

WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
[Resc max current ] (rCLI) should be set up in order to be able to maintain the cabin during starting or run.
• If [Opt. rescue mode] (OrM) is set to [Automatic] (AUtO), [Resc max current ] (rCLI) should not be much lower (75%)
than the nominal current of the motor.
• If [Opt. rescue mode] (OrM) is set to [Manual] (MAnU), [Resc max current ] (rCLI) should not be lower than the
nominal current of the motor.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

The power available with the emergency power supply depends on the runtime needed.
Runtime (Min)

Nominal Output Load (VA) Peak Output

Power Capacity Power Capacity

As lift applications does not require a long runtime in rescue mode, and based on the fact that Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) systems
have a high crest factor, a small emergency power supply could be enough to drive the ATV LIFT up to next floor at low speed.

The available peak power available with an UPS is given by the formula below:
Peak Output Capacity = Nominal Output Capacity * Crest Factor

The requested electrical power depends on the torque and the speed set points following the formula:
Power = Torque * Speed

The variable speed drive allows running at constant nominal torque, so the requested electrical power depends on the speed set point. As
soon as the maximum evacuation speed is low enough, even a small UPS will provide enough current to drive the motor at full torque.

BBV19478 11/2011 99
[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

250 %
Couple moteur
(% couple nominal moteur)

Vitesse Vitesse
d'évacuation normale

Commande
à couple
constant
Couple moteur
nécecessaire à pleine
charge

0
0 Vitesse de sortie 100 %
(% Vitesse nominale)

Puissance moteur
(% puissance nominale moteur)
80-90 %
Puissance moteur
nécessaire en pleine
charge pendant
un cycle normal.

Puissance
moteur

Puissance moteur
nécessaire en pleine
charge pendant
un cycle d'évacuation

0
0 Vitesse de sortie 100 %
(% Vitesse nominale)
Vitesse moteur Vitesse moteur
pendant un cycle pendant un
d'évacuation cycle normal

100 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

LFn- [LIFT FUNCTIONS] continued

rFt- [EVACUATION]
rFt M [Evacuation assign.] [No] (nO)

nO v [No] (nO): Function not assigned.

LI1 v [LI1] (LI1) to [LI6] (LI6)
- v [LI7] (LI7) to [LI10] (LI10): If VW3A3201 logic I/O card has been inserted.
LI14 v [LI11] (LI11) to [LI14] (LI14): If VW3A3202 extended I/O card has been inserted.
Evacuation is activated when the assigned input is at active state, if the drive is stationary.
Evacuation is deactivated when the assigned input is at inactive state, as soon as the drive stops.

rSU M [Evacuation Input V.] 200 to 480 V 220 V

AC voltage value of the emergency power supply.

This parameter can be accessed if [Evacuation assign.] (rFt) is not [No] (nO).

rSP M [Evacuation freq.] 5 Hz

T Value of the "Standard evacuation" mode frequency reference.

This parameter can be accessed if [Evacuation assign.] (rFt) is not [No] (nO) and [Opt. rescue mode] (OrM)
is set to [Standard] (Std).
The adjustment range is determined by the [Low speed] (LSP) (page 135), [Rated motor freq.] (FrS)
page 152 for an asynchronous motor or [Nominal freq sync.] (FrSS) page 158 for a synchronous motor and
[Rated motor volt.] (UnS) (page 152) parameters and by [Evacuation Input V.] (rSU) above.
Example with an asynchronous motor:
• If LSP < (FrS x rSU/UnS): rSP min. = LSP, rSP max. = (Frs x rSU/UnS)
• If LSP u (FrS x rSU/UnS): rSP = (Frs x rSU/UnS)
With a synchronous motor: Same formula using FrSS in place of FrS and 400 V in place of UnS.

OrM M [Opt. rescue mode] [Standard] (Std)

Optimized rescue mode, visible if [Evacuation assign.] (rFt) is not set to [No] (nO).

Std v [Standard] (Std) Standard evacuation mode.

This is the Evacuation mode existing on ATV71L. This does not take into account the lift ramp parameters.
Lift ramp parameters (distances) are taken into account in the modes [Manual] (MAnU) and [Automatic]
(AUtO) of the rescue function.

MAnU v [Manual] (MAnU) Optimized evacuation mode.

The optimized direction for rescue mode is available on a logic output if set to [Rescue dir.] (Opt)
- Output at passive state (0) means that the forward direction requieres less power than reverse.
- Output at active state (1) means that the reverse direction requires less power than forward.

AUtO v [Automatic] (AUtO) Optimized evacuation mode with direction autodetection that permits to minimize the
request UPS power. In that case, the direction will be choosen by the drive whaterver the direction
requested.

Note: When [Opt. rescue mode] (OrM) is set to [AUtO] (AUtO), if the inspection mode is activated and the
requested direction is not optimized one, the drive will not start.

(1) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate.

T Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.

BBV19478 11/2011 101

[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

LFn- [LIFT FUNCTIONS] continued

rFt- [EVACUATION]
rCLI M [Resc max current ] 0.0 A to 1.36 In (1) [Automatic] (AUtO)

WARNING
T LOSS OF CONTROL
[Resc max current ] (rCLI) should be set up in order to be able to maintain the cabin during starting or run.
• If [Opt. rescue mode] (OrM) is set to [Automatic] (AUtO), [Resc max current ] (rCLI) should not be
much lower (75%) than the nominal current of the motor.
• If [Opt. rescue mode] (OrM) is set to [Manual] (MAnU), [Resc max current ] (rCLI) should not be lower
than the nominal current of the motor.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

AUtO v [Automatic] (AUtO): Current limitation during rescue visible if [Evacuation assign.] (rFt) is not set to [No]
(nO). When [Resc max current ] (rCLI) is set to [Automatic] (AUtO), [Resc max current ] (rCLI) takes the value
of [Rated mot. current] (NCr) (or [Nominal I sync.] (NCrS) if a synchronous motor law is configured) each time
the parameter is modifed.
0.1
- v 0.1 to 1.36 In
1.36

OrSP M [Cust. rescue speed] 0 to [Nominal car

speed] (CSP)
0.100 m/s

Maximum optimized rescue speed, visible if [Evacuation assign.] (rFt) is not set to [No] (nO) and [Opt.
rescue mode] (OrM) is not set to [Standard] (Std).
Note: [Cust. rescue speed] (OrSP) is used as the maximum speed to take into account for the UPS size
calculation. Speed reference used during rescue is given by the LIFT ramp, taken into account the [Cust.
rescue speed] (OrSP) speed limitation.

(1) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate.

T Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.

102 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

LFn- [LIFT FUNCTIONS] continued

rFt- [EVACUATION] continued
PMC M [Calc. rescue power]
Requested UPS power in KVA, visible if [Evacuation assign.] (rFt) is not set to [No] (nO) and [Opt. rescue
mode] (OrM) is not set to [Standard] (Std).This is the power needed by the drive only during evacuation,
this does not inculde third party devices powered by the UPS. The calculated value depends on other
parameters value, see page 98 for more details.

rACC M [Acc. time rescue] 0.01 s to 99.99 s AUtO

T Acceleration time during rescue, visible if [Evacuation assign.] (rFt) is not set to [No] (nO) and [Opt. rescue
mode] (OrM) is not set to [Standard] (Std)
AUtO v [Automatic] (AUtO) : Acceleration time is calculated according to [Max. rescue speed] (OrSP) value.
0.01
- v 0.01 to 99.9
99.9

OCC- [OUTPUT CONTACTOR CMD]

OCC M [Out. contactor ass.] [dO1] (dO1)

Logic output or control relay

nO v [No] (nO): Function not assigned (in this case, none of the function's parameters can be accessed)
LO1 v [LO1] (LO1)
- to
LO4 [LO4] (LO4): Logic output (if one or two I/O cards have been inserted, LO1 to LO2 or LO4 can be
selected)
r1 [R1] (r1)
- to
r4 [R4] (r4): Relay (selection of R1 extended to R3 or R4 if I/O card has been inserted)
dO1 v [dO1] (dO1): Analog output AO1 functioning as a logic output. Selection can be made if
[AO1 assignment] (AO1) page 198 = [No] (nO).

rCA M [Output contact. fdbk] [No] (nO)

nO v [No] (nO): Function inactive.

LI1 v [LI1] (LI1)
- :
- :
- v [...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 211.
The motor starts up when the assigned input or bit changes to inactive state.

dbS M [Delay to motor run] 0.05 to 60.00 s 0.15 s

T Time delay for:

• Motor control following the sending of a run command
• Output contactor state monitoring, if the feedback has been assigned. If the contactor fails to close at
the end of the set time, the drive will lock in FCF2 mode.
This parameter can be accessed if [Out. contactor ass.] (OCC) has been assigned or if [Output contact. fdbk]
(rCA) has been assigned.
The time delay must be greater than the closing time of the output contactor.

dAS M [Delay to open cont.] 0.00 to 5.00 s 0.10 s

T Time delay for output contactor opening command following motor stop.
This parameter can be accessed if [Output contact. fdbk] (rCA) has been assigned.
The time delay must be greater than the opening time of the output contactor. If it is set to 0, the detected
fault will not be monitored.
If the contactor fails to open at the end of the set time, the drive will lock in FCF1 mode.

T Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.

BBV19478 11/2011 103

[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Half floor
When a lift sets off from floors and half floors, the cycle time for half floors can be too long, as the elevator does not have time to reach full
speed before crossing the slowdown limit switch. As a result, the slowdown time is unnecessarily long. The "half floor" function can be used
to compensate this phenomenon.

When the former ramp is used

The "half floor" function can be used to compensate this by not triggering slowdown until the speed reaches a preset threshold
[Half-floor speed] (HLS) in order that the final part of the path will be the same as for a standard floor.
When the new ramp is used
If the [Lift speed mgt.] (LSM) function is assigned, the "half-floor" function is automatically:
- activated if the high speed reference is lost before the lift has reached its [Lift top speed] (LtS)
- configured according to the distance still to be covered [Deceleration length] (dEL) when the high speed reference is lost.
If the [Lift Speed Mgt] (LSM) function is not assigned, the "half-floor" function must be configured with the target speed to be reached by
the lift before it starts to decelerate.

The graphs below show the various types of operation with an without the function for using the former rampe:
Frequency Standard floor

A: Slowdown limit switch reached

B: Stop limit switch reached

Slowdown
frequency
Distance
A B

Frequency
Half floor without function

Slowdown
frequency
Distance
A B

Frequency Half floor with function

[Half-floor
The function is only activated if, when the slowdown limit
speed] (HLS)
switch is tripped, the motor frequency is less than
[Half-floor speed] (HLS). Acceleration is then maintained up
Slowdown to this value prior to slowing down.
frequency The final part of the path is identical to that of the standard
Distance floor.
A B

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

LFn- [LIFT FUNCTIONS] continued

HFF- [HALF FLOOR]
HLS M [Half-floor speed] [No] (nO)

Activation and adjustment of the "half floor" function. This function has priority over all speed reference
functions (preset speeds, for example) with the exception of those generated via fault monitoring
(fallback speed, for example).
nO v [No] (nO): Function inactive.
- v 0.1 Hz to 500.0 Hz: Activation of the function by adjusting the motor frequency to be reached prior to
slowing down.

104 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

LFn- [LIFT FUNCTIONS] continued

Ftd- [FREQ. THRESHOLD]
Ftd M [Freq. threshold] (1) 0.0 to 1600 Hz [High speed]
(HSP)
Frequency threshold for [Freq.Th.att.] (FtA) function assigned to a relay or a logic output (see page 190),
or used by the [PARAM. SET SWITCHING] (MLP-) function, page 259.

F2d M [Freq. threshold 2] (1) 0.0 to 1600 Hz [High speed]

(HSP)
Frequency threshold for [FreqTh.att.2] (F2A) function assigned to a relay or a logic output
(see page 190), or used by the [PARAM. SET SWITCHING] (MLP-) function, page 259.

(1) Parameter can also be accessed in the [1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu.

BBV19478 11/2011 105

[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Deferred stop on thermal alarm

This function helps to prevent the lift stopping between two floors if the drive or motor overheats, by authorizing operation until the next stop.
At the next stop, the drive is locked until the thermal state falls back to a value, which undershoots the set threshold by 20%. E.g. A trip
threshold set at 80% enables reactivation at 64%.
One thermal state threshold must be defined for the drive, and one thermal state threshold for the motor(s), which will trip the deferred stop.

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

LFn- [LIFT FUNCTIONS] continued

SAt- [THERMAL ALARM STOP]
SAt M [Thermal alarm stop] [No] (nO)

nO v [No] (nO): Function inactive (in this case, the following parameters cannot be accessed)
tH v [Th. mot drv] (tH): Defered stop on drive thermal alarm or motor thermal alarm
PtC v [PTC] (PtC): Defered stop on PTC alarm
ALL v [ALL] (ALL): Defered stop on drive thermal alarm, motor thermal alarm or PTC alarm

CAUTION
RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE EQUIPMENT
The drive and motor are no longer protected in the event of thermal alarm stops.
This invalidates the warranty.
Check that the possible consequences do not present any risk.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

dth M [Delay Thermal fault] 0 to 1000,0 s 5.0 s

Tripping time delay after the drive stops in case of thermal alarm occurs.

tHA M [Drv therm. state al] 0 to 118 % 100 %

T Thermal state threshold of the drive tripping the deferred stop.

ttd M [Motor therm. level] 0 to 118 % 100 %

T Thermal state threshold of the motor tripping the deferred stop.

ttd2 M [Motor2 therm. level] 0 to 118 % 100 %

T Thermal state threshold of the motor 2 tripping the deferred stop.

ttd3 M [Motor3 therm. level] 0 to 118 % 100 %

T Thermal state threshold of the motor 3 tripping the deferred stop.

T Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.

106 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

LFn- [LIFT FUNCTIONS] continued

OPL- [OUTPUT PHASE LOSS]
OPL M [Output Phase Loss] [Yes] (YES)

nO v [No] (nO): Function inactive.

YES v [Yes] (YES): [Mot. phase] (OPF) trip with freewheel stop.
Note: [Output Phase Loss] (OPL) is forced to [No] (nO) if [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 146 = [Sync. mot.]
(SYn) or [Sync.CL] (FSY).

Odt M [OutPh time detect] 0.5 to 10.0 s 0.5 s

T Time delay for taking the [Output Phase Loss] (OPL) trip into account.

T Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.

BBV19478 11/2011 107

[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Parameter set switching [PARAM. SET SWITCHING]

A set of 1 to 15 parameters from the [1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu on page 133 can be selected and 2 or 3 different values assigned. These
2 or 3 sets of values can then be switched using 1 or 2 logic inputs or control word bits. This switching can be performed during operation
(motor running).
It can also be controlled on the basis of one or two frequency thresholds, whereby each threshold acts as a logic input (0 = threshold not
attained, 1 = threshold attained).

Values 1 Values 2 Values 3

Parameter 1 Parameter 1 Parameter 1
Parameter 2 Parameter 2 Parameter 2
Parameter 3 Parameter 3 Parameter 3
Parameter 4 Parameter 4 Parameter 4
Parameter 5 Parameter 5 Parameter 5
Parameter 6 Parameter 6 Parameter 6
Parameter 7 Parameter 7 Parameter 7
Parameter 8 Parameter 8 Parameter 8
Parameter 9 Parameter 9 Parameter 9
Parameter 10 Parameter 10 Parameter 10
Parameter 11 Parameter 11 Parameter 11
Parameter 12 Parameter 12 Parameter 12
Parameter 13 Parameter 13 Parameter 13
Parameter 14 Parameter 14 Parameter 14
Parameter 15 Parameter 15 Parameter 15
Input LI or bit or frequency threshold 0 1 0 or 1
2 values
Input LI or bit or frequency threshold 0 0 1
3 values

Note: Do not modify the parameters in the [1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu, because any modifications made in this menu
[1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-) will be lost on the next power-up. The parameters can be adjusted during operation in the
[PARAM. SET SWITCHING] (MLP-) menu, on the active configuration.

Note: Parameter set switching cannot be configured from the integrated display terminal.
Parameters can only be adjusted on the integrated display terminal if the function has been configured previously via the graphic display
terminal, by PC-Software or via the bus or communication network. If the function has not been configured, the MLP- menu and the
PS1-, PS2-, PS3- submenus will not appear.

108 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

LFn- [LIFT FUNCTIONS] continued

MLP- [PARAM. SET SWITCHING]
CHA1 M [2 Parameter sets] [No] (nO)

nO v [No] (nO): Function inactive

FtA v [Freq.Th.att.] (FtA): Switching via [Freq. threshold] (Ftd) page 144.
F2A v [FreqTh.att.2] (F2A): Switching via [Freq. threshold 2] (F2d) page 144.
tAP v [Ramp Mode] (tAP): Switching during the brake sequence. This new assignment can be used, for
example, to set high gains on brake release before starting the ramp (useful in lift applications).
Frequency

Reference

t
[Brake engage freq]
(bEN)

Motor

Injection
Torque
Flux

control type Frequency

Parameter set 2 Parameter set 1

LI1 v [LI1] (LI1)

- :
- :
- v [...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 211.
Switching 2 parameter sets

CHA2 M [3 Parameter sets] [No] (nO)

nO v [No] (nO): Function inactive

Reference

t
[Brake engage freq]
(bEN)

Motor
Injection
Torque
Flux

control type Frequency

Parameter set 2 Parameter set 3

LI1 v [LI1] (LI1)

- :
- :
- v [...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 211.
Switching 3 parameter sets
Note: In order to obtain 3 parameter sets, [2 parameter sets] must also be configured.

BBV19478 11/2011 109

[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

LFn- [LIFT FUNCTIONS] continued

MLP- [PARAM. SET SWITCHING] continued
SpS M [PARAMETER SELECTION] 0.5 to 10.0 s 0.5 s

This parameter can only be accessed on the graphic display terminal if [2 parameter sets] is not [No].
Making an entry in this parameter opens a window containing all the adjustment parameters that can be
accessed.
Select 1 to 15 parameters using ENT (a tick then appears next to the parameter). Parameter(s) can also
be deselected using ENT.
E.g.

PARAMETER SELECTION
1.3 SETTINGS
Ramp increment
---------
---------
---------

PS1- M [SET 1]
This parameter can be accessed if at least 1 parameter has been selected in [PARAMETER SELECTION].
Making an entry in this parameter opens a settings window containing the selected parameters in the
order in which they were selected.
With the graphic display terminal: :

RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A

SET1 Acceleration
Acceleration: 9.51 s ENT
Deceleration: 9.67 s
Acceleration 2: 12.58 s 9.51 s
Deceleration 2 : 13.45 s
Begin Acc round: 2.3 s Min = 0.1 Max = 999.9
Code Quick << >> Quick

With the integrated display terminal:

Proceed as in the Settings menu using the parameters that appear.

PS2- M [SET 2]
This parameter can be accessed if at least 1 parameter has been selected in [PARAMETER SELECTION].
Procedure identical to [SET 1] (PS1-).

PS3- M [SET 3]
This parameter can be accessed if [3 parameter sets] is not [No] and if at least 1 parameter has been
selected in [PARAMETER SELECTION].
Procedure identical to [SET 1] (PS1-).

110 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

LFn- [LIFT FUNCTIONS] continued

nOI- [NOISE LEVEL]
SFr M [Switching freq.] (1) According to
rating
According to
rating
T Switching frequency setting.
Adjustment range: This can vary between 2.5 and 16 kHz, but the minimum and maximum values, as well
as the factory setting, can be limited in accordance with the rating and the configuration of the [Sinus filter]
(OFI) and [Motor surge limit] (SUL) parameters, page 169.

Adjustment with drive running:

If the initial value is greater than or equal to 2.5 kHz, a minimum of 2.5 kHz must be maintained while running.
Adjustment with the drive stopped: No restrictions.

Note: In the event of excessive temperature rise, the drive will automatically reduce the switching
frequency and reset it once the temperature returns to normal.

CAUTION
RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE EQUIPMENT
On ATV71LD10N4 drives, if the RFI filters are disconnected (operation on an IT system), the drive's switching
frequency must not exceed 4 kHz.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

nrd M [Noise reduction] [Yes] (YES)

nO v [No] (nO): Fixed frequency.

YES v [Yes] (YES): Frequency with random modulation.
Random frequency modulation prevents any resonance, which may occur at a fixed frequency.

(1) Parameter can also be accessed in the [1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu and [1.4 MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-) menu.

T Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.

BBV19478 11/2011 111

[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Preset speeds
Note: You must configure 2 and 4 speeds in order to obtain 4 speeds.
You must configure 2, 4 and 8 speeds in order to obtain 8 speeds.
You must configure 2, 4, 8, and 16 speeds in order to obtain 16 speeds.

Combination table for preset speed inputs

16 speeds 8 speeds 4 speeds 2 speeds Speed reference

LI (PS16) LI (PS8) LI (PS4) LI (PS2)
0 0 0 0 Reference (1)
0 0 0 1 SP2
0 0 1 0 SP3
0 0 1 1 SP4
0 1 0 0 SP5
0 1 0 1 SP6
0 1 1 0 SP7
0 1 1 1 SP8
1 0 0 0 SP9
1 0 0 1 SP10
1 0 1 0 SP11
1 0 1 1 SP12
1 1 0 0 SP13
1 1 0 1 SP14
1 1 1 0 SP15
1 1 1 1 SP16

(1) See the diagram on page 205: Reference 1 = (SP1).

112 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

PSS- [PRESET SPEEDS]

Note: This function cannot be used with certain other functions. Follow the instructions on page 217.

PS2 M [2 preset speeds] [No] (nO)

nO v [No] (nO): Function inactive

LI1 v [LI1] (LI1)
- :
- :
- v [...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 211.

PS4 M [4 preset speeds] [No] (nO)

nO v [No] (nO): Function inactive

LI1 v [LI1] (LI1)
- :
- :
- v [...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 211.
To obtain 4 speeds you must also configure 2 speeds.

PS8 M [8 preset speeds] [No] (nO)

nO v [No] (nO): Function inactive

LI1 v [LI1] (LI1)
- :
- :
- v [...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 211.
To obtain 8 speeds you must also configure 2 and 4 speeds.

PS16 M [16 preset speeds] [No] (nO)

nO v [No] (nO): Function inactive

LI1 v [LI1] (LI1)
- :
- :
- v [...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 211.
To obtain 16 speeds you must also configure 2, 4 and 8 speeds.

BBV19478 11/2011 113

[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

[PRESET SPEEDS] (continued)

SP2 M [Preset speed 2] (1) 0 to 1600 Hz 10 Hz

T
SP3 M [Preset speed 3] (1) 15 Hz

T
SP4 M [Preset speed 4] (1) 20 Hz

T
SP5 M [Preset speed 5] (1) 25 Hz

T
SP6 M [Preset speed 6] (1) 30 Hz

T
SP7 M [Preset speed 7] (1) 35 Hz

T
SP8 M [Preset speed 8] (1) 40 Hz

T
SP9 M [Preset speed 9] (1) 45 Hz

T
SP10 M [Preset speed 10] (1) 50 Hz

T
SP11 M [Preset speed 11] (1) 55 Hz

T
SP12 M [Preset speed 12] (1) 60 Hz

T
SP13 M [Preset speed 13] (1) 70 Hz

T
SP14 M [Preset speed 14] (1) 80 Hz

T
SP15 M [Preset speed 15] (1) 90 Hz

T
SP16 M [Preset speed 16] (1) 100 Hz

T The appearance of these [Preset speed x] (SPx) parameters is determined by the number of speeds
configured.

(1) Parameter can also be accessed in the [1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (Fun-) menu.

T Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.

114 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

The parameters in this menu are read-only.

Code Name/Description

LMO- [MONITORING]
dOt M [Travel distance]
km

ESp M [Lift Speed]

m/s

rFr M [Output frequency]

LCr M [Motor current]

nOt M [Number of travels]

In thousands

LLSL M [Length in LLS]

Measure in cm of the distance crossed with a speed reference [Lift leveling speed] (LLS).

Speed

JAR2 JAR3
LtS (m/s)

dEL (cm)

LLSL (cm) StL (cm)

JAR4 JAR5
LLS (m/s)

JAR1 JAR6
0
ACt (s) LLt (s)
Time

brM M [Pre-Torque Current]

Level of current needed during the last brake opening, in Amps.

PUCI M [Rlbk angl. variation]

level of rollback measured during last brake opening.

BBV19478 11/2011 115

[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Encoder selection guide

Introduction
An encoder must be used with a synchronous motor for nominal operation.

The encoder is generally selected by the motor manufacturer. However, the ATV LIFT allows the following encoders to be used:
• Incremental
• SinCos
• SinCos Hiperface
• EnDat SinCos
• SSI
• Resolver
• Absolute SinCos

With an asynchronous motor, the use of an encoder is not mandatory. Everything depends on the performance required by the lift
manufacturer.

The use of an encoder is recommended for

• High car speeds (more than 1.5 m/s)
• Highly reversible machines
• Systems where precise stopping is required
• Greater comfort when the brake is released and applied

Selection criteria
Where the drive is concerned, the selection criteria for the encoder are

Immunity to EMC interference

• Analog transmission encoders (resolver, SinCos, incremental, SinCos Hiperface) are sensitive to EMC interference.
• Digital transmission encoders (SSI, EnDat) are more robust.

Absolute/relative
An absolute encoder has an image of the position of the rotor, whereas a relative encoder only has information on the rotor speed.
With a synchronous motor, an angle test has to be performed on each power-up with the relative encoder, whereas an absolute encoder
requires only one angle test on the first power-up.

Resolution
Depending on the encoder technology, the drive can "interpolate" the encoder signals to obtain a better speed resolution than that indicated
by the encoder.

Examples include
• With a 4096 line (2^12) incremental encoder, the drive can have a resolution 4 times more accurate, in other words 16 384 points
(2^14).
• With a SinCos encoder having the same resolution (4096 lines, (2^12)), the drive can have a resolution 1000 times more accurate,
in other words 4 194 304 points (2^22).

The encoder resolution has a direct effect on rollback management. Depending on the desired comfort level, an encoder with more or less
precision can be used.

The following data are given for guidance. Comfort depends on many parameters (type of block and tackle, mechanism, nominal speed,
reversibility of the machine, type of brake, use of an external weight sensor, etc.).

116 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Encoder selection guide (continued)

However, it is considered that at least 16 bits of useful resolution for the drive (the green range) are necessary for an acceptable comfort
level in various loading conditions without using an external weight sensor. Below this value, discomfort may be felt.
Speed

Medium High High

resolution resolution resolution
required required required

3 m/s

Low Medium Medium

resolution resolution resolution
sufficient required required

1 m/s

Low Low Medium

resolution resolution resolution
sufficient sufficient required

weight
200 kg 800 kg

Encoder resolution Resolution used by the ATV LIFT for different encoder technologies
EnDat SinCos Incremental Resolveur
SSI SinCos Hiperface (number of poles)
EnDat SinCos
Absolute SinCos
No. of bits No. of lines No. of bits Points used No. of bits Points used No. of bits
low resolution 1 2 11 2048
low resolution 2 4 12 4096
low resolution 3 8 13 8192
low resolution 4 16 14 16384
low resolution 5 32 15 32768
low resolution 6 64 16 65536
low resolution 7 128 17 131072
low resolution 8 256 18 262144 10 1024
low resolution 9 512 19 524288 11 2048
low resolution 10 1024 20 1048576 12 4096
low resolution 11 2048 21 2097152 13 8192
low resolution 12 4096 22 4194304 14 16384
low resolution 13 8192 13 8192 22 4194304 15 32768 13 (2 poles; 1pp)
medium resol. 14 16384 14 16384 22 4194304 16 65536 14 (4 or 6 poles;
2 or 3 pp)
medium resol. 15 32768 15 32768 22 4194304 16 65536 15 (8 poles; 4 pp)
medium resol. 16 65536 16 65536 22 4194304 16 65536
high resolution 17 131072 17 131072 22 4194304 16 65536
high resolution 18 262144 18 262144 22 4194304 16 65536
high resolution 19 524288 19 524288 22 4194304 16 65536
high resolution 20 1048576 20 1048576 22 4194304 16 65536
high resolution 21 2097152 21 2097152 22 4194304 16 65536
high resolution 22 4194304 22 4194304 22 4194304 16 65536

BBV19478 11/2011 117

[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Encoder selection guide (continued)

Summary
The table below summarizes the main criteria for the selection of an encoder:

Encoder Transmission type Absolute/relative Typical resolution

Incremental Analog Relative 8192 units
Resolver Analog Absolute 8 poles
SinCos / Absolute SinCos Analog Relative 2048 lines
SinCos Hiperface Analog + digital on power-up Absolute _
SinCosEnDat Digital + analog Absolute Endat 13 bit with SinCos 1024 line
EnDat Digital Absolute Endat 13 bit
SSI Digital Absolute _

Operation without an encoder

The ATV LIFT provides for open-loop operation with a synchronous motor, which can be used in degraded mode.

This configuration can be used for:

• Performing the encoder test
• Evacuating persons if the encoder is inoperable

However, the brake sequence is not compatible with open-loop operation with a synchronous motor. Stopping is therefore carried out in
freewheel or ramp mode, as in the inspection mode.

118 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

[International unit] (SIU)

With integrated display terminal:

Turn on

XXX Displays the state of the drive

ENT

ESC

LIF-

ENT
ESC
International unit
SIU ESC

The unit for all the followings parameters should be selected via the [Internatinal unit] (SIU) parameter.

Code Name/Description Factory setting

SIU M [International unit] YES

YES • [YES] (YES): Use metric system.

nO • [No] (nO): Use imperial units.

Press and hold down the "ENT" key for 2 s for the change to be taken into account.

Note 1: The first time the drive is powered up, this parameter is at the first place of the [1.1 LIFT] (LIF-) menu. It moves at the end of this
menu at subsequent power ups
Note 2: Choose the [International unit] (SIU) parameter value before starting the parameters adjustment of the drive.
Note 3: NPR unit does not depend on [International unit] (SIU) parameter, it depends on [Standard mot. freq] (bFr) parameter. See page 146

WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL

• Before to transfert a configuration to the drive with a commissioning tool, set the [International unit] (SIU) parameter of the drive
to the same value as in the configuration to transfert to the drive.
• Do not transfert a configuration with [International unit] (SIU) set to [No] (nO) into a drive where this parameter does not exist
(Drive version < 5.4).
• [International unit] (SIU) will changes unit for setting. Check that this change is compatible with the application.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

BBV19478 11/2011 119

[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
• For paramater JAPL, JCAL, JMOT, LCA, CMA and CTM, the maximimum value is reduced in Imprerial units compare to International
metric units.
• Choose the [International unit] (SIU) parameter value before starting the parameters adjustment of the drive.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

(1) The high limit could be overflowed during the conversion when changing [International unit] (SIU) from [Yes] (yES) to [No] (nO) . The display will
show the maximum value, but internally, the right value is kept in order not to change the behaviour of the application just when changing
[International unit] (SIU). If the concerned parameter is changed manually, the new value is taken into account after validation.

Parameters Unit Range Default value

[Application Inertia] (JAPL) Kg.m² 0.01 - 655.35 kg.m² Calculated
Motor estimated inertia (read only)
Ib.ft² 1 – 65535 lb.ft² (1) Calculated
[Estim. motor inertia] (JCAL) Kg.m² 0.01 - 655.35 kg.m² Calculated
Motor estimated inertia (read only)
lb.ft² 1 – 65535 lb.ft² (1) Calculated
[Real motor inertia] (JMOT) Kg.m² 0.01 - 655.35 kg.m² Estimated
Real motor inertia
lb.ft² 1 – 15551 lb.ft² (1) Estimated
[Motor torque] (TQS) N.m 1 - 65535 N.m Auto
Synchronous motor: nominal motor torque
lbf.ft 1 - 48336 lbf.ft Auto
[Nominal car speed] (CSP) m/s 0.01 - 10.00 m/s 1 m/s
Nominal car speed
fpm (ft/min) 2 - 1969 fpm 197 fpm
[Capacity of the lift] (LCA) Kg 0 - 48000 kg 400 kg
Capacity of the lift
lb (pounds) 0 - 65535 lb (1) 882 lb
[Car weight] (CMA) Kg 0 - 65535 kg Auto
Car weight
lb (pounds) 0 - 65535 lb (1) Auto
[Counterweight] (CTM) Kg 0 - 65535 kg Auto
Counterweight
lb (pounds) 0 - 65535 lb (1) Auto
[Comfort accel.] (ACM) m/s² 0.10 - 5.00 m/s² 0.80 m/s²
Comfort acceleration
ft/s² 0.32 - 16.40 ft/s² 2.62 ft/s²
[Deceleration length] (DEL) cm 10.0 - 999.9 cm 120.0 cm
Deceleration length
in (inch) 3.9 - 393.7 in 47.2 in
[Stop length] (STL) cm 1.0 - 300.0 cm 10.0 cm
Stop length
in (inch) 0.4 - 118.1 in 3.9 in
[Jerk round x] (JAR1)…(JAR6) m/s3 0.01 - 3.00 m/s3 Auto
Jerks
ft/s3 0.01 - 9.84 ft/s3 Auto
[Lift top speed] (LTS) m/s 0.01 - 10.00 m/s 1.00 m/s
Lift top speed
fpm (ft/min) 2 - 1969 fpm 197 fpm
[Lift Speed] (ESP) m/s - -
Lift speed (read only, monitoring)
fpm (ft/min) - -
[Lift leveling speed] (LLS) m/s 0.01 - 0.5 m/s 0.10 m/s
Lift levelling speed
fpm (ft/min) 0.1 - 99 fpm 20 fpm

120 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Parameters Unit Range Default value

[Travel distance] (DOT) km - -
Travel distance (read only, monitoring) (unit in
mi (miles) - -
function of UOT)
m - -
ft - -
0.01m - -
in - -
[Length in LLS] (LLSL) cm - -
Length in LLS (read only, monitoring)
in (inch) - -
[Cust. rescue speed] (ORSP) m/s 0.01 - 10.00 m/s 10.00
Maximum optimized rescue speed
fpm (ft/min) 0 - 1969 m/s 20

BBV19478 11/2011 121

[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Conversion tables for used variables:

Distance
1 cm = 0.393701 in (inch)
1 in = 2.54 cm
1m = 3.280839895 ft (feet) = 39.3701 in (inch)
1 ft = 0.3048 m = 12 * 2.54 cm
1 km = 0.6213712 mi (miles)
1 mi = 1.609344 km

Speed
1 m/s = 196.850393701 ft/min
1 ft/min (fpm=feet per minute) = 0.00508 m/s

Acceleration
1 m/s² = 3.280839895 ft/s²
1 ft/s² = 0.3048 m/s²

Jerk
1 m/s3 = 3.280839895 ft/s3
1 ft/s3 = 0.3048 m/s3

Weight
1 kg = 2.204622622 lb = 35.27396195 oz (onces)
1 lb = 453.59237 g

Torque
1 N.m = 0.22481 lbf * 3.280839895 ft = 0.737562121 lbf.ft
(pound force feet)
1 lbf.ft = 4.448222 N * 0.3048 m = 1.355818 N.m

Inertia
1 kg.m² = 2.204622622 lb * 3.280839895² ft² = 23.730360405 lb.ft² (pound square feet)
1 lb.ft² = 0.04214011 kg.m²

122 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Description Probable cause Remedy

Stop length • The [Nominal car speed] (CSP) is • Using a tachometer, measure the actual speed of the car cable when
incorrect incorrect the motor rotates at its nominal speed (NSP or NSPS)
• Check that the [Nominal car speed] (CSP) is correct for the sheave
radius (in metres) and the nominal motor speed:
- Ratio 1:1
CSP [m/s] = 6.28 x Sheave radius [m] x NSPS [rpm]/60
- Ratio 1:2
CSP [m/s] = 3.14 x Sheave radius [m] x NSPS [rpm]/60
• The [Stop length] (StL) is incorrect • Adjust StL to the value measured in the lift shaft
• Reposition stop flags in the lift haft at the stop length StL
Vibration during • Inertia estimated incorrectly • Check that the payload [Capacity of lift] (LCA) page 57 is entered
travel correctly
• Check that the lift is properly balanced (at half load, the current when
ascending should be the same as the current when descending).
• Manually re-enter the following values:
- Weight of counterweight [Counterweight] (CtM)
- Weight of empty car [Car weight] (CMA)
• Special application (special winch, belt • Re-enter FLG and StA (see speed loop optimization, page 69)
type cable, etc.)
The lift leveling • The slowdown indicator is not • Adjust [Deceleration length] (dEL), page 61, to the value measured in
time is not as positioned at the distance configured the lift shaft
configured in LLt in [Deceleration length] (dEL). • Reposition the slowdown indicators in the lift shaft at the
[Deceleration length] (dEL).
Drive in tNF state • It has not been possible to perform tUN • Consider forcing the motor contactors if the installation requires it.
correctly.
The car jerks when • Activate the rollback function. See page 89.
the brake is • Deactivate the motor phase loss detection
released
[DB unit sh. circuit] • Short-circuit output from braking unit • Check the wiring of the braking unit and the resistor
• Braking unit not connected • Check the braking resistor

[Precharge] • Precharge relay control detected fault • Turn the drive off and then back on again.
or damaged precharge resistor • Check the internal connections.
• Contact Schneider Electric Product Support..
[Thyr. soft charge] • DC bus charging detected fault
(thyristors)
[Encoder coupling] • Break in encoder’s mechanical coupling • Check the encoder’s mechanical coupling.

In close loop, • encoder signal reversed • Reverse the direction of rotation of the encoder with the parameter
during the first run [Coder rotation inv.] (EnRI)
order, the drive • Do an encoder check. See page 150.
stays in [Current
Limitation] (CLI)
and stays to 0 Hz
The drive is locked • when an encoder board VW3A3409 is • Complete the encoder board settings.
in (nSt) or (nLP). used.

BBV19478 11/2011 123

[1.2 MONITORING] (SUP-)

With graphic display terminal:

RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A

RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A 1 DRIVE MENU RUN Term +50.00Hz 80A
MAIN MENU 1.1 LIFT ENT 1.2 MONITORING
ENT
1 DRIVE MENU 1.2 MONITORING I/O MAP
2 ACCESS LEVEL 1.3 SETTINGS Controller Inside I/O
3 OPEN / SAVE AS 1.4 MOTOR CONTROL COMMUNICATION
MAP
4 PASSWORD 1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG
Alarm groups :
5 LANGUAGE Code << >> Quick
HMI Frequency ref. :
Code Quick
Code << >> Quick

With integrated display terminal:

Turn on

XXX Displays the state of the drive

ENT

ESC

LIF-
ENT
ESC

SUP-
ESC

ESC
SETTINGS
SEt-

ESC

LAC-

124 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.2 MONITORING] (SUP-)

With graphic display terminal

This menu can be used to display the inputs/outputs, the drive internal states and values, and the communication data and values.

RUN Term +50.00Hz 80A

1.2 MONITORING
I/O MAP I/O
Controller Inside I/O I/O of the Controller Inside card if it is present
COMMUNICATION MAP Communication data and values
Alarm groups:
HMI Frequency ref.:
Drive internal drive states and values (see page 130)
Code << >> Quick

I/O

RUN Term +50.00Hz 80A

Move from one screen to another
I/O MAP
(from LOGIC INPUT MAP
LOGIC INPUT MAP
ANALOG INPUTS IMAGE
to FREQ. SIGNAL IMAGE)
LOGIC OUTPUT MAP by turning the navigation button
ANALOG OUTPUTS IMAGE
FREQ. SIGNAL IMAGE
Code Quick

RUN Term +50.00Hz 80A RUN Term +50.00Hz 80A

State 0 Access to the selected input or
LOGIC INPUT MAP LI1 assignment
output configuration:
PR LI1 LI2 LI3 LI4 LI5 LI6 LI7 Forward
State 1 1 Press ENT. LI1 On Delay> : 0 ms
0
LI8 LI9 LI10 LI11 LI12 LI13 LI14
1
0

<< >> Quick << >> Quick

RUN Term +50.00Hz 80A RUN Term +50.00Hz 80A

ANALOG INPUTS IMAGE AI1 assignment
ENT
AI1 : 9.87 V Ref. channel 1
AI2: 2.35 mA Forced local
Torque reference
AI1 min value : 0.0 V
AI1 max value : 10.0 V
Code << >> Quick Quick

RUN Term +50.00Hz 80A RUN Term +50.00Hz 80A

LOGIC OUTPUT MAP LO1 assignment
ENT
State 0 R1 R2 LO No
LO1 delay time : 0 ms
State 1 LO1 active at : 1
LOA: 0000000000000010b LO1 holding time : 0 ms

<< >> Quick << >> Quick

RUN Term +50.00Hz 80A RUN Term +50.00Hz 80A

ANALOG OUTPUTS IMAGE AO1 assignment
ENT
AO1 : 9.87 V Motor freq.
AO1 min output : 4 mA
AO1 max output : 20 mA
AO1 Filter : 10 ms

Code << >> Quick Quick

RUN Term +50.00Hz 80A RUN Term +50.00Hz 80A

FREQ. SIGNAL IMAGE RP assignment
ENT
RP input : 25.45 kHz Frequency ref.
Encoder : 225 kHz RP min value : 2 kHz
RP max value : 50 kHz
RP filter : 0 ms

Code << >> Quick Quick

BBV19478 11/2011 125

[1.2 MONITORING] (SUP-)

With graphic display terminal

Controller Inside card I/O

RUN Term +50.00Hz 80A

Move from one screen to another
Controller Inside I/O
(from C. INSIDE CARD LI MAP
C. INSIDE CARD LI MAP
Control. Inside AI MAP
to CONTROL. INSIDE AO MAP)
Control. INSIDE LO MAP by turning the navigation button
Control. Inside AO Map

Code Quick

RUN Term +50.00Hz 80A

State 0
C. INSIDE CARD LI MAP
LI51 LI52 LI53 LI54 LI55 LI56 LI57 LI58
State 1 1
0
LI59 LI60
1
0

<< >> Quick

RUN Term +50.00Hz 80A RUN Term +50.00Hz 80A

Control. Inside AI MAP AI51
ENT
AI51 : 0 mA
AI52 : 9.87 V
0 mA
Min = 0.001 Max = 20,000
Code << >> Quick << >> Quick

RUN Term +50.00Hz 80A

State 0
Control. INSIDE LO MAP
LO51 LO52 LO53 LO54 LO55 LO56
State 1 1
0

<< >> Quick

RUN Term +50.00Hz 80A RUN Term +50.00Hz 80A

Control. Inside AO Map AO51
ENT
AO51 : 0 mA
AO52 : 9.87 V
0 mA
Min = 0.001 Max = 20,000
Code << >> Quick << >> Quick

126 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.2 MONITORING] (SUP-)

With graphic display terminal

Communication

RUN Term +50.00Hz 80A [COMMUNICATION MAP] indicates the types of bus used for control or reference, the
COMMUNICATION MAP corresponding command and reference values, the status word, the words selected in
Command Channel : Modbus the [DISPLAY CONFIG.] menu, etc.
Cmd value : ABCD Hex
The display format (hexadecimal or decimal) can be configured in the [DISPLAY
Active ref. channel: CANopen
CONFIG.] menu.
Frequency ref. : - 12.5 Hz
ETA status word: 2153 Hex
Code Quick
W3141 : F230 Hex
W2050 : F230 Hex
W4325 : F230 Hex
W0894 : F230 Hex
COM. SCANNER INPUT MAP RUN Term +50.00Hz 80A
COM SCAN OUTPUT MAP COM. SCANNER INPUT MAP
CMD. WORD IMAGE Com Scan In1 val.: 0
FREQ. REF. WORD MAP Com Scan In2 val.: 0
MODBUS NETWORK DIAG Com Scan In3 val.: 0
MODBUS HMI DIAG Com Scan In4 val.: 0
CANopen MAP Com Scan In5 val.: 0
RUN Term +50.00Hz 80A
PLC CARD SCANNER Code Quick
COM SCAN OUTPUT MAP
Com Scan In6 val.: 0
Com Scan Out1 val.: 0
Com Scan In7 val.: 0
Com Scan Out2 val.: 0
Com Scan In8 val.: 0
Com Scan Out3 val.: 0
Com Scan Out4 val.: 0
Com Scan Out5 val.: 0
Code Quick
Com Scan Out6 val.: 0
Com Scan Out7 val.: 0
Com Scan Out8 val.: 0

RUN Term +50.00Hz 80A

CMD. WORD IMAGE
Modbus cmd.: 0000 Hex.
CANopen cmd.: 0000 Hex.
COM. card cmd. : 0000 Hex.
C Inside Card Cmd.: 0000 Hex.
RUN Term +50.00Hz 80A
Code Quick FREQ. REF. WORD MAP
Modbus ref.: 0.0 Hz
CANopen ref.: 0.0 Hz
Com. card ref. : 0.0 Hz
C Inside Card Ref.: 0.0 Hz

Code Quick

[COM. SCANNER INPUT MAP] and [COM SCAN OUTPUT MAP]:

Visualization of registers exchanged periodically (8 input and 8 output) for integrated Modbus and for fieldbus cards.

BBV19478 11/2011 127

[1.2 MONITORING] (SUP-)

With graphic display terminal

Communication (continued)

The state of the LEDs, the periodic data, the address, the speed, and the
format, etc, is given for each bus.
RUN Term +50.00Hz 80A
COMMUNICATION MAP
Command Channel : Modbus LED off
Cmd value : ABCD Hex LED on
Active ref. channel: CANopen
Frequency ref. : - 12.5 Hz Communication via Modbus
ETA status word: 2153 Hex RUN Term +50.00Hz 80A
Code Quick MODBUS NETWORK DIAG
W3141 : F230 Hex COM LED :
W2050 : F230 Hex Mb NET frames nb.
W4325 : F230 Hex Mb NET CRC errors
W0894 : F230 Hex
COM. SCANNER INPUT MAP
COM SCAN OUTPUT MAP Code Quick
CMD. WORD IMAGE
FREQ. REF. WORD MAP Communication via the graphic display terminal
MODBUS NETWORK DIAG RUN Term +50.00Hz 80A
MODBUS HMI DIAG MODBUS HMI DIAG
CANopen MAP COM LED :
PLC CARD SCANNER Mb HMI frames nb.
Mb HMI CRC errors

PDO configuration using

Code Quick
the network tool.
Some PDOs cannot be
Communication via CANopen used.
RUN Term +50.00Hz 80A RUN Term +50.00Hz 80A
CANopen MAP PDO1 IMAGE
RUN LED: Received PDO1-1 : FDBA Hex
ERR LED: Received PDO1-2
PDO1 IMAGE Received PDO1-3
PDO2 IMAGE Received PDO1-4
PDO3 IMAGE Transmit PDO1-1 : FDBA Hex
Code Quick Code Quick
Canopen NMT state Transmit PDO1-2
Number of TX PDO 0 Transmit PDO1-3
Number of RX PDO 0 Transmit PDO1-4
Error code 0
RX Error Counter 0 RUN Term +50.00Hz 80A
TX Error Counter 0 PDO2 IMAGE
Received PDO2-1 : FDBA Hex
Received PDO2-2
Received PDO2-3
PDO images are only visible if
Received PDO2-4
CANopen has been enabled
Transmit PDO2-1 : FDBA Hex
(address other than OFF) and if Code Quick
the PDOs are active. Transmit PDO2-2
Transmit PDO2-3
Transmit PDO2-4

RUN Term +50.00Hz 80A

PDO3 IMAGE
Received PDO3-1 : FDBA Hex
Received PDO3-2
Received PDO3-3
Received PDO3-4
Transmit PDO3-1 : FDBA Hex
Code Quick
Transmit PDO3-2
Transmit PDO3-3
Transmit PDO3-4

128 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.2 MONITORING] (SUP-)

With graphic display terminal

Communication (continued)

RUN Term +50.00Hz 80A

COMMUNICATION MAP
Command Channel : Modbus
Cmd value : ABCD Hex
Active ref. channel: CANopen
Frequency ref.: - 12.5 Hz
ETA status word: 2153 Hex
Code Quick
W3141 : F230 Hex
W2050 : F230 Hex RUN Term +50.00Hz 80A
W4325 : F230 Hex Input scanner
W0894 : F230 Hex Prg.card. scan in 1: 0
COM. SCANNER INPUT MAP Prg.card. scan in 2: 0
COM SCAN OUTPUT MAP Prg.card. scan in 3: 0
CMD. WORD IMAGE Controller Inside card Prg.card. scan in 4: 0
FREQ. REF. WORD MAP RUN Term +50.00Hz 80A Prg.card. scan in 5: 0
MODBUS NETWORK DIAG PLC CARD SCANNER Code Quick
MODBUS HMI DIAG Input scanner Prg.card. scan in 6: 0
CANopen MAP Output scanner Prg.card. scan in 7: 0
PLC CARD SCANNER Prg.card. scan in 8: 0

Code Quick

RUN Term +50.00Hz 80A

Output scanner
PLC card.scan Out1: 0
PLC card.scan Out2: 0
PLC card.scan Out3: 0
PLC card.scan Out4: 0
PLC card.scan Out5: 0
Code Quick
PLC card.scan Out6: 0
PLC card.scan Out7: 0
PLC card.scan Out8: 0

[Input scanner] and [Output scanner]:

Visualization of registers exchanged periodically (8 input and 8 output).

BBV19478 11/2011 129

[1.2 MONITORING] (SUP-)

With graphic display terminal: Drive internal states and values

Name/Description
[Alarm groups] (ALGr) Current alarm group numbers
[HMI Frequency ref.] (LFr) in Hz. Frequency reference via the graphic display terminal (can be accessed if the function has been
configured).
[HMI torque ref.] (Ltr) as a % of the rated torque. Torque reference via graphic display terminal.
[Multiplying coeff.] (MFr) as a % (can be accessed if [Multiplier ref. -] (MA2,MA3) page 223 has been assigned)
[Frequency ref.] (FrH) in Hz
[Torque reference] (trr) as a % of the rated torque (can be accessed if the function has been configured)
[Output frequency] (rFr) in Hz
[Measured output fr.] (MMF) in Hz: The measured motor speed is displayed if an encoder card has been inserted, otherwise 0 appears.
[Pulse in. work. freq.] (FqS) in Hz: Frequency of the "Pulse input" input used by the [FREQUENCY METER] (FqF-) function, page 287.
[Motor current] (LCr) in A
[Lift speed] (ESP) in m/s
[Motor speed] (SPd) in rpm
[Motor voltage] (UOP) in V
[Motor power] (OPr) as a % of the rated power
[Motor torque] (Otr) as a % of the rated torque
[Mains voltage] (ULn) in V. Line voltage from the point of view of the DC bus, motor running or stopped.
[Travel distance] (dOt) in km
[Number of travels] (nOt) Number of travels in thousands
[Motor thermal state] (tHr) as a %
[Drv.thermal state] (tHd) as a %
[DBR thermal state] (tHb) as a % (can be accessed if [DB res. protection] (brO) has been enabled, see page 288)
[Consumption] (APH) in Wh, kWh or MWh (accumulated consumption)
[Run time] (rtH) in seconds, minutes or hours (length of time the motor has been switched on)
[Power on time] (PtH) in seconds, minutes or hours (length of time the drive has been switched on)
[IGBT alarm counter] (tAC) in seconds (length of time the "IGBT temperature" alarm has been active)
[IGBT alarm Nb] (ntJ) number of time the switching frequency has been decrease to reduce the power module temperature (can
be accessed in expert mode only)
[Calc. rescue power] (PMC) in VA, UPS requested power (can be accessed if [Evacuation assign.] (rFt) is not set to [No] (no) and [Opt.
rescue mode] (OrM) is not set to [Standard] (Std)).
[- - - - -] (o02) Words generated by the Controller Inside card (can be accessed if the card has been inserted)
to
[- - - - -] (o06)
Active configuration [Config. n°0, 1 or 2]
[Config. active] (CnFS) [Set n°1, 2 or 3] (can be accessed if parameter switching has been enabled, see page 259)
[Utilised param. set] (CFPS) List of current alarms. If an alarm is present, a appears.
[ALARMS] (ALr-) List of secondary states:
[OTHER STATE] (SSt-)
- [In motor fluxing] (FLX): In motor fluxing - [HSP attained] (FLA): High speed attained
- [PTC1 alarm] (PtC1): Probe alarm 1 - [Load slipping] (AnA): Slipping alarm
- [PTC2 alarm] (PtC2): Probe alarm 2 - [set 1 active] (CFP1): Parameter set 1
- [LI6=PTC alarm] (PtC3): LI6 = PTC probe alarm active
- [Fast stop in prog.] (FSt): Fast stop in progress - [set 2 active] (CFP2): Parameter set 2
- [Current Th. attained] (CtA): Current threshold active
attained ([Current threshold] (Ctd) page 143) - [set 3 active] (CFP3): Parameter set 3
- [Freq. Th. attained] (FtA): Frequency threshold active
attained ([Freq. threshold] (Ftd) page 144) - [In braking] (brS): Drive braking
- [Freq. Th. 2 attained] (F2A): 2nd frequency threshold - [DC bus loading] (dbL): DC bus charging
attained ([Freq. threshold 2] (F2d) page 144) - [Forward] (MFrd): Motor running forward
- [Frequency ref. att.] (SrA): Frequency reference - [Reverse] (MrrS): Motor running in reverse
attained - [High torque alarm] (ttHA): Motor torque
- [Motor th. state att.] (tSA): Motor 1 thermal state higher than high threshold [High torque
attained thd.] (ttH) page 143.
- [External fault alarm] (EtF): External fault alarm - [Low torque alarm] (ttLA): Motor torque
- [Auto restart] (AUtO): Automatic restart in progress less than low threshold [Low torque thd.]
- [Remote] (FtL): Line mode control (ttL) page 143.
- [Auto-tuning] (tUn): Performing auto-tuning - [Freq. meter Alarm] (FqLA): Measured
- [Undervoltage] (USA): Undervoltage alarm speed threshold attained: [Pulse warning
- [Cnfg.1 act.] (CnF1): Configuration 1 active thd.] (FqL) page 144.
- [Cnfg.2 act.] (CnF2): Configuration 2 active

130 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.2 MONITORING] (SUP-)

With integrated display terminal

This menu can be used to display the drive inputs, states and internal values.

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

IOM- I/O MAP

LIA-
Logic input functions
L1A Can be used to display the functions assigned to each input. If no functions have been assigned, nO is
to displayed.
L14A Use the and arrows to scroll through the functions. If a number of functions have been assigned
to the same input, check that they are compatible.

LIS1
State of logic inputs LI1 to LI8
Can be used to visualize the state of logic inputs LI1 to LI8
(display segment assignment: high = 1, low = 0)
State 1

State 0
LI1 LI2 LI3 LI4 LI5 LI6 LI7 LI8
Example above: LI1 and LI6 are at 1; LI2 to LI5, LI7 and LI8 are at 0.
LIS2
State of logic inputs LI9 to LI14 and Power Removal
Can be used to visualize the state of logic inputs LI9 to LI14 and PR (Power Removal)
(display segment assignment: high = 1, low = 0)
State 1

State 0
LI9 LI10 LI11 LI12 LI13 LI14 PR
Example above: LI9 and LI14 are at 1, LI10 to LI13 are at 0 and PR (Power Removal) is at 1.
AIA-
Analog input functions
AI1A Can be used to display the functions assigned to each input. If no functions have been assigned, nO is
AI2A displayed. Use the and arrows to scroll through the functions. If a number of functions have been
AI3A assigned to the same input, check that they are compatible.
AI4A

BBV19478 11/2011 131

[1.2 MONITORING] (SUP-)

With integrated display terminal: Drive internal states and values

Code Name/Description Unit

ALGr Alarm groups: Current alarm group numbers

LFr HMI Frequency reference: Can be accessed if the function has been configured Hz

Ltr HMI Torque reference %

MFr Multiplication coefficient (can be accessed if [Multiplier ref. -] (MA2,MA3) page 223 has been assigned) %

FrH Frequency reference Hz

trr Torque reference: Can be accessed if the function has been configured %.

rFr Output frequency Hz

MMF The measured motor speed is displayed if an encoder card has been inserted, otherwise 0 appears. Hz

FqS Frequency of the "Pulse input" used by the [FREQUENCY METER] (FqF-) function, page 287. Hz

LCr Motor current A

ESP Lift speed m/s

SPd Motor speed rpm

UOP Motor voltage V

OPr Motor power %

Otr Motor torque %

ULn Line voltage: Line voltage from the point of view of the DC bus, motor running or stopped. V

dOt Travel distance km

nOt Number of travels 10^3

tHr Motor thermal state %

tHd Drv thermal state %

tHb DBR thermal state: Can be accessed if [DB res. protection] (brO) function has been configured. %

APH Consumption Wh, kWh

or MWh

rtH Run time: Length of time the motor has been turned on seconds,
minutes
PtH Power on time: Length of time the drive has been turned on or hours

tAC IGBT alarm counter: Length of time the "IGBT temperature" alarm has been active seconds

ntJ IGBT alarm Nb: Number of time the "IGBT temperature" alarm has been actived

PMC Calculated rescue power KVA

o02 Word generated by the Controller Inside card (can be accessed if the card has been inserted)
...
o06

CnFS Config. active: CnF0, 1 or 2 (can be accessed if motor or configuration switching has been enabled, see page
263

CFPS Utilised param. set: CFP1, 2 or 3 (can be accessed if parameter switching has been enabled, see page 259

132 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-)

With graphic display terminal:

RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A

1 DRIVE MENU
RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A 1.1 LIFT RUN Term +50.00Hz 80A
MAIN MENU 1.2 MONITORING 1.3 SETTINGS
ENT ENT
1 DRIVE MENU 1.3 SETTINGS Ramp increment
2 ACCESS LEVEL 1.4 MOTOR CONTROL Acceleration
3 OPEN / SAVE AS 1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG Deceleration
4 PASSWORD Code << >> Quick Acceleration 2
5 LANGUAGE Deceleration 2
Code Quick Code << >> Quick

With integrated display terminal:

Turn on

Displays the state of the drive

XXX

ENT

ESC

LIF-

ENT
ESC

SEt-
ESC

ESC
drC-

ESC

LAC-

BBV19478 11/2011 133

[1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-)

The adjustment parameters can be modified with the drive running or stopped.

DANGER
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
• Check that changes made to the settings during operation do not present any danger.
• We recommend stopping the drive before making any changes.

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

Inr M [Ramp increment] 0.01 - 0.1 - 1 0.1

0.01 v [0.01]: Ramp up to 99.99 seconds

0.1 v [0.1]: Ramp up to 999.9 seconds
1 v [1]: Ramp up to 6000 seconds
This parameter is valid for [Acceleration] (ACC), [Deceleration] (dEC), [Acceleration 2] (AC2) and [Deceleration 2]
(dE2).

ACC M [Acceleration] 0.01 to 6000 s (1) 3.0 s

Time to accelerate from 0 to the [Rated motor freq.] (FrS) page 152 for an asynchronous motor or [Nominal
freq sync.] (FrSS) page 158 for a synchronous motor. Make sure that this value is compatible with the inertia
being driven.

dEC M [Deceleration] 0.01 to 6000 s (1) 3.0 s

AC2 M [Acceleration 2] 0.01 to 6000 s (1) 5.0 s

See page 226

g Time to accelerate from 0 to the [Rated motor freq.] (FrS) page 152 for an asynchronous motor or [Nominal
freq sync.] (FrSS) page 158 for a synchronous motor. Make sure that this value is compatible with the inertia
being driven.

dE2 M [Deceleration 2] 0.01 to 6000 s (1) 5.0 s

See page 226

g Time to decelerate from the [Rated motor freq.] (FrS) page 152 to 0 for an asynchronous motor or [Nominal
freq sync.] (FrSS) page 158 for a synchronous motor. Make sure that this value is compatible with the inertia
being driven.

tA1 M [Begin Acc round] 0 to 100 % 50 %

g See page 225

Rounding of start of acceleration ramp as a % of the [Acceleration] (ACC) or [Acceleration 2] (AC2) ramp time.

tA2 M [End Acc round] 50 %

See page 225

g - Rounding of end of acceleration ramp as a % of the [Acceleration] (ACC) or [Acceleration 2] (AC2) ramp
time.
- Can be set between 0 and (100% - [Begin Acc round] (tA1))

tA3 M [Begin Dec round] 0 to 100 % 40 %

g See page 225

Rounding of start of deceleration ramp as a % of the [Deceleration] (dEC) or [Deceleration 2] (dE2) ramp time.

(1) Range 0.01 to 99.99 s or 0.1 to 999.9 s or 1 to 6000 s according to [Ramp increment] (Inr).

134 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

tA4 M [End Dec round] 60 %

See page 225

g - Rounding of end of deceleration ramp as a % of the [Deceleration] (dEC) or [Deceleration 2] (dE2) ramp
time.
- Can be set between 0 and (100% - [Begin Dec round] (tA3)).

LSP M [Low speed] 0 Hz

Motor frequency at minimum reference, can be set between 0 and [High speed] (HSP).

HSP M [High speed] 50 Hz

Motor frequency at maximum reference, can be set between [Low speed] (LSP) and [Max frequency] (tFr).
The factory setting changes to 60 Hz if [Standard mot. freq] (bFr) = [60Hz NEMA] (60).

CAUTION
RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE EQUIPMENT
For permanent magnet synchronous motors, the maximum permissible speed must not be exceeded,
otherwise demagnetization may occur. The maximum speed permitted by the motor, drive chain or
application must not be exceeded at any time.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

ItH M [Mot. therm. current] 0.2 to 1.5 In (1) According to drive

rating
Motor thermal protection current, to be set to the rated current indicated on the motor nameplate page 274

SFC M [K speed loop filter] 0 to 100 According to

[Motor control type]
(Ctt)
T Speed loop filter coefficient.
See page 69 for more details of the effect of this parameter.

StA M [Fr.Loop.Stab] 0 to 100 % 20 %

FLG M [FreqLoopGain] 0 to 100 % According to

[Motor control type]
(Ctt)
T Frequency loop gain: Used to adapt the pace of the machine speed transients according to the dynamics.
Gradually increase the gain to increase the control loop passband.
See page 69 for more details of the effect of this parameter.
[FreqLoopGain] (FLG) is set to 20% when [Motor control type] (Ctt) is set to [Sync. mot.] (SYn) or (FSY).

(1) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual or on the drive nameplate.

T Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.

BBV19478 11/2011 135

[1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

GPE M [ENA prop.gain] 1 to 9999 250

g See page 167

GIE M [ENA integral gain] 0 to 9999 100

g See page 167

UFr M [IR compensation] 25 to 200 % 100 %

g See page 168

SLP M [Slip compensation] 0 to 300 % 100 %

g See page 154

dCF M [Ramp divider] 0 to 10 4

g See page 228

IdC M [DC inject. level 1] 0.1 to 1.41 In (1) 0.64 In (1)

See page 229

g Level of DC injection braking current activated via logic input or selected as stop mode.

CAUTION
RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

tdI M [DC injection time 1] 0.1 to 30 s 0.5 s

See page 229

g Maximum current injection time [DC inject. level 1] (IdC). After this time the injection current becomes
[DC inject. level 2] (IdC2).

IdC2 M [DC inject. level 2] 0.1 In (2) to [DC inject.

level 1] (IdC)
0.5 In (1)

See page 229

g Injection current activated by logic input or selected as stop mode, once period of time [DC injection time 1] (tdI)
has elapsed.

CAUTION
RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

tdC M [DC injection time 2] 0.1 to 30 s 0.5 s

g See page 229

Maximum injection time [DC inject. level 2] (IdC2) for injection selected as stop mode only.

(1) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual or on the drive nameplate.

136 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

dOtd M [Dis. operat opt code] [Ramp stop] (rMp)

Disable operation stop mode.

nSt [Freewheel] (nSt): the drive stops in freewheel when going from Operation enable to Switched on state.
rMp [Ramp stop] (rMp): the drive stops on ramp when going from Operation enable to Switched on state.

SdC1 M [Auto DC inj. level 1] 0 to 1.2 In (1) 0.7 In (1)

g Level of standstill DC injection current. This parameter can be accessed if [Auto DC injection] (AdC) page 230
is not [No] (nO).
This parameter is forced to 0 if [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 146 = [Sync. mot.] (SYn) or [Sync.CL] (FSY).

CAUTION
RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

tdCI M [Auto DC inj. time 1] 0.1 to 30 s 0.5 s

Standstill injection time. This parameter can be accessed if [Auto DC injection] (AdC) page 230 is not [No] (nO)
g If [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 146 = [FVC] (FUC) or [Sync. mot.] (SYn) or [Sync.CL] (FSY) this time
corresponds to the zero speed maintenance time.

SdC2 M [Auto DC inj. level 2] 0 to 1.2 In (1) 0.5 In (1)

g 2nd level of standstill DC injection current.

This parameter can be accessed if [Auto DC injection] (AdC) page 230 is not [No] (nO).
This parameter is forced to 0 if [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 146 = [Sync. mot.] (SYn) or [Sync.CL] (FSY).

CAUTION
RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

tdC2 M [Auto DC inj. time 2] 0 to 30 s 0s

2nd standstill injection time.

g This parameter can be accessed if [Auto DC injection] (AdC) page 230 = [Yes] (YES).

AdC SdC2 Operation

Note: When [Motor control type] (Ctt) page
I 146 = [FVC] (FUC) or [Sync.CL] (FSY):
YES x SdC1 [Auto DC inj. level 1] (SdC1), [Auto DC inj.
SdC2 level 2] (SdC2) and [Auto DC inj. time 2]
tdC1 tdC1 + tdC2 t (tdC2) are not accessible. Only [Auto DC inj.
I
Ct ≠0 SdC1 time 1] (tdC1) can be accessed. This then
SdC2 corresponds to a zero speed maintenance
time.
tdC1 t
I
Ct =0 SdC1

1
Run command
0
t

speed
0
t

(1) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual or on the drive nameplate.

BBV19478 11/2011 137

[1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

SFr M [Switching freq.] (2) According to rating According to rating

See page 111.

T
CLI M [Current Limitation] 0 to 1.36 In (1) 1.36 In (1)

See page 53.

T
CL2 M [I Limit. 2 value] 0 to 1.36 In (1) 1.36 In (1)

g See page 253

Note: If the setting is less than 0.25 In, the drive may lock in [Output Phase Loss] (OPF) fault mode if
this has been enabled (see page 276). If it is less than the no-load motor current, the limitation no longer
has any effect.

CAUTION
RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
Check that the motor will withstand this current, particularly in the case of permanent magnet synchronous
motors, which are susceptible to demagnetization.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

(1) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual or on the drive nameplate.
(2) Parameter can also be accessed in the [1.4 MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-) menu and [1.1 LIFT] (LIF-) menu.

T Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.

138 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

FLU M [Motor fluxing] [No] (FnO)

FnC v [Not cont.] (FnC): Non-continuous mode

FCt v [Continuous] (FCt): Continuous mode. This option is not possible if [Angle setting type] (ASt) pages 160 is
[With load] (brC) or if [Auto DC injection] (AdC) page 230 is [Yes] (YES) or if [Type of stop] (Stt) page 228 is
[Freewheel] (nSt).
FnO v [No] (FnO): Function inactive. This option is not possible if [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 146 = [SVCI] (CUC)
or [FVC] (FUC).
If [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 146 = [SVCI] (CUC), [FVC] (FUC) or [Sync. mot.] (SYn), the factory setting is
replaced by [Not Cont.] (FnC).
If [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 146 = [Sync.CL] (FSY), [Motor fluxing] (FLU) is forced to [No] (FnO).

In order to obtain rapid high torque on startup, magnetic flux needs to already have been established in the
motor.
• In [Continuous] (FCt) mode, the drive automatically builds up flux when it is powered up.
• In [Not cont.] (FnC) mode, fluxing occurs when the motor starts up.

The flux current is greater than nCr (configured rated motor current) when the flux is established and is then
adjusted to the motor magnetizing current.

CAUTION
RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

If [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 146 = [Sync. mot.] (SYn), the [Motor fluxing] (FLU) parameter must be active
([No] (FnO) is not permitted): this parameter causes rotor angle detection or alignment (according to the
configuration of [Angle setting type] (ASt) page 160) and not fluxing.
• If [Brake assignment] (bLC) page 240 is not [No] (nO), the [Motor fluxing] (FLU) parameter has no effect.

Note: If [Angle setting type] (ASt) = [W/o load] (nLd), the motor may rotate one full revolution during
measurement.

tLS M [Low speed time out] 0 to 999.9 s 0s

Maximum operating time at [Low speed] (LSP) (see page 135)

Following operation at LSP for a defined period, a motor stop is requested automatically. The motor will restart
if the reference is greater than LSP and if a run command is still present.
Note: A value of 0 indicates an unlimited period of time.

Note: If [Low speed time out] (tLS) is not 0, [Type of stop] (Stt) page 228 is forced to [Ramp stop] (rMP)
(only if a ramp stop can be configured). The [Low speed time out] (tLS) has no effect it the lift ramp is
used

(1) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual or on the drive nameplate.

BBV19478 11/2011 139

[1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

SP2 M [Preset speed 2] 0 to 1600 Hz 10 Hz

g See page 233

Preset speed 2

SP3 M [Preset speed 3] 0 to 1600 Hz 15 Hz

g See page 233

Preset speed 3

SP4 M [Preset speed 4] 0 to 1600 Hz 20 Hz

g See page 233

Preset speed 4

SP5 M [Preset speed 5] 0 to 1600 Hz 25 Hz

g See page 233

Preset speed 5

SP6 M [Preset speed 6] 0 to 1600 Hz 30 Hz

g See page 233

Preset speed 6

SP7 M [Preset speed 7] 0 to 1600 Hz 35 Hz

g See page 233

Preset speed 7

SP8 M [Preset speed 8] 0 to 1600 Hz 40 Hz

g See page 233

Preset speed 8

SP9 M [Preset speed 9] 0 to 1600 Hz 45 Hz

g See page 233

Preset speed 9

SP10 M [Preset speed 10] 0 to 1600 Hz 50 Hz

g See page 233

Preset speed 10

SP11 M [Preset speed 11] 0 to 1600 Hz 55 Hz

g See page 233

Preset speed 11

SP12 M [Preset speed 12] 0 to 1600 Hz 60 Hz

g See page 233

Preset speed 12

SP13 M [Preset speed 13] 0 to 1600 Hz 70 Hz

g See page 233

Preset speed 13

SP14 M [Preset speed 14] 0 to 1600 Hz 80 Hz

g See page 233

Preset speed 14

140 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

SP15 M [Preset speed 15] 0 to 1600 Hz 90 Hz

g See page 233

Preset speed 15

SP16 M [Preset speed 16] 0 to 1600 Hz 100 Hz

g See page 233

Preset speed 16

MFr M [Multiplying coeff.] 0 to 100 % 100 %

Multiplying coefficient, can be accessed if [Multiplier ref.-] (MA2,MA3) page 223 has been assigned to the
graphic terminal

(1) If a graphic display terminal is not in use, values greater than 9999 will be displayed on the 4-digit display with a period mark after the
thousand digit, e.g., 15.65 for 15650.

BBV19478 11/2011 141

[1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

Ibr M [Brake release I FW] -1.32 In to 1.32 In (2) 0

g See page 240

Brake release current threshold for lifting or forward movement

Ird M [Brake release I Rev] 0 to 1.32 In (2) 0A

g See page 240

Brake release current threshold for lowering or reverse movement

brt M [Brake Release time] 0.00 to 5.00 s According to

[Motor control type]
(Ctt)

g See page 241

Brake release time delay

bIr M [Brake release freq] [Automatic] (AUtO)

0 to 10 Hz
[Nominal motor slip]
(nSL) /2

g See page 241

Brake release frequency threshold

bEn M [Brake engage freq] [Automatic] (AUtO)

0 to 10 Hz
[Nominal motor slip]
(nSL) /2

g See page 241

Brake engage frequency threshold

tbE M [Brake engage delay] 0 to 5.00 s 0s

See page 241

g Time delay before request to engage brake. To delay the engaging of the brake, for horizontal movement only, if
you wish the brake to engage when the drive comes to a complete stop.

(1) If a graphic display terminal is not in use, values greater than 9999 will be displayed on the 4-digit display with a period mark after the
thousand digit, e.g., 15.65 for 15650.
(2) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual or on the drive nameplate.

142 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

bEt M [Brake engage time] 0.00 to 5.00 s 0.30 s

g See page 241

Brake engage time (brake response time)

JdC M [Jump at reversal] [Automatic] (AUtO)

0 to 10 Hz
[Automatic] (AUtO)

g See page 242

ttr M [Time to restart] 0 to 5.00 s 0s

g See page 242

Time between the end of a brake engage sequence and the start of a brake release sequence.

tLIM M [Motoring torque lim] 0 to 300 % 100 %

See page 251

g Torque limitation in generator mode, as a whole % or in 0.1% increments of the rated torque in accordance with
the [Torque increment] (IntP) parameter, page 251.

tLIG M [Gen. torque lim] 0 to 300 % 100 %

See page 251

g Torque limitation in generator mode, as a whole % or in 0.1% increments of the rated torque in accordance with
the [Torque increment] (IntP) parameter, page 251.

Ctd M [Current threshold] 0 to 1.36 In (1) In (1)

Current threshold for [I attained] (CtA) function assigned to a relay or a logic output (see page 190).

ttH M [High torque thd.] -300% to +300% 100 %

High current threshold for [High tq. att.] (ttHA) function assigned to a relay or a logic output (see page 190), as
a % of the rated motor torque.

ttL M [Low torque thd.] -300% to +300% 50 %

Low current threshold for [Low tq. att.] (ttLA) function assigned to a relay or a logic output (see page 190), as
a % of the rated motor torque.

(1) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual or on the drive nameplate.

BBV19478 11/2011 143

[1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

FqL M [Pulse warning thd.] 0 Hz at 30.00 kHz 0 Hz

Speed threshold measured by the [FREQUENCY METER] (FqF-) function, page 287, assigned to a relay or a
g logic output (see page 190).

Ftd M [Freq. threshold] 0.0 to 1600 Hz [High speed] (HSP)

Frequency threshold for [Freq.Th.att.] (FtA) function assigned to a relay or a logic output (see page 190), or
used by the [PARAM. SET SWITCHING] (MLP-) function, page 259.

F2d M [Freq. threshold 2] 0.0 to 1600 Hz [High speed] (HSP)

Frequency threshold for [FreqTh.att.2] (F2A) function assigned to a relay or a logic output (see page 190), or
used by the [PARAM. SET SWITCHING] (MLP-) function, page 259.

FFt M [Freewheel stop Thd] 0.0 to 1600 Hz 0.0

See page 228

g This parameter supports switching from a ramp stop or a fast stop to a freewheel stop below a low speed
threshold.
It can be accessed if [Type of stop] (Stt) = [Fast stop] (FSt) or [Ramp stop] (rMP).
v 0.0: Does not switch to freewheel stop.
v 0.1 to 1600 Hz: Speed threshold below which the motor will switch to freewheel stop.
ttd M [Motor therm. level] 0 to 118 % 100 %

g See page 275

Trip threshold for motor thermal alarm (logic output or relay).

LbC M [Load correction] 0 to 1000 Hz 0

g See page 170

Rated correction in Hz.

144 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.4 MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-)

With graphic display terminal:

RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A

1 DRIVE MENU
1.1 LIFT
RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A 1.2 MONITORING RUN Term +50.00Hz 80A
MAIN MENU 1.3 SETTINGS 1.4 MOTOR CONTROL
ENT ENT
1 DRIVE MENU 1.4 MOTOR CONTROL Standard mot. freq
2 ACCESS LEVEL 1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG Motor control type
3 OPEN / SAVE AS Code << >> Quick Max. frequency
4 PASSWORD Output Ph rotation
5 LANGUAGE Sinus filter
Code Quick Code << >> Quick

With integrated display terminal:

Turn on

XXX Displays the state of the drive

ENT

ESC

LIF-

ENT
ESC
drC- MOTOR CONTROL
ESC

ESC

I-O-

ESC

LAC-

BBV19478 11/2011 145

[1.4 MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-)

The parameters in the [1.4 MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-) menu can only be modified when the drive is stopped and no run command is
present, with the following exceptions:
• [Auto tuning] (tUn) page 163 and [Angle auto-test] (ASA) page 160, which can cause the motor to start up.
• Parameters containing the sign Tin the code column, which can be modified with the drive running or stopped.

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

bFr M [Standard mot. freq]

50 v [50Hz IEC] (50): IEC
60 v [60Hz NEMA] (60): NEMA
This parameter modifies the presets of the following parameters: [High speed] (HSP) page 135, [Freq.
threshold] (Ftd) page 144, [Rated motor volt.] (UnS) page 152, [Rated motor freq.] (FrS) page 152 and [Max
frequency] (tFr) page 147.

Ctt M [Motor control type] [SVC V] (UUC)

UUC v [SVC V] (UUC): Open-loop voltage flux vector control with automatic slip compensation according to the load.
This type of control is recommended when replacing an ATV58. It supports operation with a number of motors
connected in parallel on the same drive (if the motors are identical).

CUC v [SVC I] (CUC): Open-loop current flux vector control. This type of control is recommended when replacing an
ATV58F used in an open-loop configuration. It does not support operation with a number of motors connected
in parallel on the same drive.

FUC v [FVC] (FUC): Closed-loop current flux vector control for motor with encoder. This selection is only possible if
an encoder card has been inserted. This type of operation is not possible, however, when using an incremental
encoder that generates signal "A" only.
This type of control is recommended when replacing an ATV58F used in a closed-loop configuration. It provides
better performance in terms of speed and torque accuracy and enables torque to be obtained at zero speed.
It does not support operation with a number of motors connected in parallel on the same drive.

UF2 v [V/F 2pts] (UF2): Simple V/F profile without slip compensation. It supports operation with:
- Special motors (wound rotor, tapered rotor, etc.)
- A number of motors in parallel on the same drive.
- High-speed motors.
- Motors with a low power rating in comparison to that of the drive.
Voltage
UnS

The profile is defined by

the values of parameters
UnS, FrS and U0.

Frequency
FrS

146 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.4 MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

Ctt M [Motor control type] (continued)

UF5 v [V/F 5pts] (UF5): 5-segment V/F profile: Similar to V/F 2 pts profile but also supports the avoidance of
resonance phenomena (saturation).
Voltage
UnS
U5

The profile is defined

U4 by the values of
parameters UnS, FrS,
U0 to U5 and F0 to F5.
U3
U1
FrS > F5 > F4 > F3 > F2 > F1
U2
U0

Frequency
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 FrS

SYn v [Sync. mot.] (SYn): For permanent magnet synchronous motors with sinusoidal electromotive force (EMF)
only. This selection makes the asynchronous motor parameters inaccessible, and the synchronous motor
parameters accessible.

FSY
v [Sync.CL] (FSY): Closed-loop synchronous motor. For permanent magnet synchronous motors with
sinusoidal electromotive force (EMF) only, with encoder. This selection is only possible if an encoder card has
been inserted. It makes the asynchronous motor parameters inaccessible, and the synchronous motor
parameters accessible.
This function is not possible, however, when using an incremental encoder that generates signal "A" only.
Perform the encoder check detailled on page 150 before selecting [Sync.CL] (FSY).

tFr M [Max frequency] 10 to 500 Hz [Automatic] (AUtO)

AUtO v [Automatic] (AUtO) : The factory setting is 60 Hz, or preset to 72 Hz if [Standard mot. freq] (bFr) is set to 60
Hz. [Max frequency]. (tFr) is set to [Rated motor freq.] (FrS) page 152 for asynchronous motor or [Nominal freq
sync.] (FrSS) page 158 for synchronous motor each time [Nominal car speed] (CSP) page 56 is modified.

The maximum value is limited by the following conditions:

• It must not exceed 10 times the value of [Rated motor freq.] (FrS) page 152 for an asynchronous motor or
[Nominal freq sync.] (FrSS) page 158 for a synchronous motor.
• It must not exceed 500 Hz if [Motor control type] (Ctt) (page 146) is not V/F
Values between 500 Hz and 1600 Hz are only possible in V/F control. In this case, configure [Motor control
type] (Ctt) before [Max frequency] (tFr).
10
... v 10 to 500
500

PHr M [Output Ph rotation] [ABC] (AbC)

AbC v [ABC] (AbC): Forward

ACb v [ACB] (ACb): Reverse
This parameter can be used to reverse the direction of rotation of the motor without reversing the wiring.
Do not modify the [Output Ph rotation] (PHr) parameter when [Motor control type] (Ctt)
page 146 = [FVC] (FUC) or [Sync.CL] (FSY). The direction of rotation must be modified, if required,
before or during the encoder check procedure detailed on page 150, when [Motor control type] (Ctt)
is not [FVC] (FUC) or [Sync.CL] (FSY). Otherwise, checking and measuring procedures must be
performed again ([Angle auto-test] (ASA) and [Angle offset value] (ASU) return to [No] (nO)).

BBV19478 11/2011 147

[1.4 MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

OFI M [Sinus filter] [No] (nO)

nO v [No] (nO): No sinus filter

YES v [Yes] (YES): Use of a sinus filter, to limit overvoltages on the motor and reduce the ground fault leakage
current.

CAUTION
RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE EQUIPMENT
If [Sinus filter] (OFI) = [Yes] (YES), [Max frequency] (tFr) page 147 must not exceed 100 Hz.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

SFr M [Switching freq.] (1) According to rating According to rating

T See page 111.

(1) Parameter can also be accessed in the [1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu and [1.1 LIFT] (LIF-) menu.

T Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.

148 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.4 MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

CLI M [Current Limitation] (1) 0 to 1.36 In (2) 1.36 In (2)

T Used to limit the motor current.

Note: If the setting is less than 0.25 In, the drive may lock in Output Phase Loss (OPF) fault mode if
this has been enabled (see page 276). If it is less than the no-load motor current, the limitation no longer
has any effect.

CAUTION
RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE EQUIPMENT
Check that the motor will withstand this current, particularly in the case of permanent magnet synchronous
motors, which are susceptible to demagnetization.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

(1) Parameter can also be accessed in the [1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu.
(2) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate.

T Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.

BBV19478 11/2011 149

[1.4 MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-)

Selecting the encoder

Follow the recommendations in the catalog and the Installation Manual.

Note 1: When an encoder is used with a VW3 A3 408 or VW3 A3 409 card, it is only possible to configure the "encoder" input for
speed feedback. Functions can only be configured as references or inputs with a VW3 A3 401 to 407 and VW3 A3 411 card.
Note 2: When an encoder is used with a VW3 A3 409 card, the drive remains locked in stop mode (and displays nSt or nLp) if the
encoder is not fully configured.

Encoder check procedure

This procedure applies to all types of encoder.

1. Configure the parameters of the encoder used, pages 186 to 189.

2. Set [Motor control type] (Ctt) to a value other than [FVC] (FUC) and [Sync.CL] (FSY), even if it is the required configuration. For example,
use [SVC V] (UUC) for an asynchronous motor and [Sync. mot.] (SYn) for a synchronous motor.

3. Configure the motor parameters in accordance with the specifications on the rating plate.
• Asynchronous motor (see page 152): [Rated motor power] (nPr), [Rated motor volt.] (UnS), [Rated mot. current] (nCr), [Rated motor
freq.] (FrS), [Rated motor speed] (nSP).
• Synchronous motor (see page 157): [Nominal I sync] (nCrS), [Nom motor spdsync] (nSPS), [Pole pairs.] (PPnS), [Syn. EMF constant]
(PHS), [Autotune L d-axis] (LdS), [IAutotune L q-axis] (LqS), [Cust. stator R syn] (rSAS). [Current limitation] (CLI) must not exceed
the maximum motor current, otherwise demagnetization may occur.

4. Set [Encoder usage] (EnU) = [No] (nO).

5. Perform auto-tuning.

6. Set [Encoder check] (EnC) = [Yes] (YES).

7. Set the motor rotating at stabilized speed ≈ 15% of the rated speed for at least 3 seconds, and use the [1.2-MONITORING] (SUP-) menu
to monitor its behavior.

8. If it trips on an [Encoder fault] (EnF), [Encoder check] (EnC) returns to [No] (nO).
- Check the parameter settings and perform auto-tuning again (see steps 1 to 5 above).
- Check that the mechanical and electrical operation of the encoder, its power supply and connections are OK.
- Reverse the direction of rotation of the motor ([Output Ph rotation] (PHr) parameter page 147) or the encoder signals.

9. Repeat the operations from step 6 onwards until [Encoder check] (EnC) changes to [Done] (dOnE).

10. If necessary, change [Motor control type] (Ctt) to [FVC] (FUC) or [Sync.CL] (FSY). In the case of [Sync.CL] (FSY), go on to perform the
"Procedure for measuring the phase-shift angle between the motor and the encoder" page 159.

150 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.4 MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

EnS- [ENCODER FEEDBACK]

Can only be accessed if an encoder card has been inserted.

EnC M [Encoder check] [Not done] (nO)

Check encoder feedback. See procedure on previous page.

This parameter can be accessed if an encoder card has been inserted (1).
nO v [Not done] (nO): Check not performed.
YES v [Yes] (YES): Activates monitoring of the encoder.
dOnE v [Done] (dOnE): Check performed successfully.
The check procedure checks:
- The direction of rotation of the encoder/motor
- The presence of signals (wiring continuity)
- The number of pulses/revolution
If a fault is detected, the drive locks in [Encoder fault] (EnF) fault mode.

EnU M [Encoder usage] [No] (nO)

This parameter can be accessed if an encoder card has been inserted (1).
nO v [No] (nO): Function inactive.
SEC v [Fdbk monit.] (SEC): The encoder provides speed feedback for monitoring only.
rEG v [Spd fdk reg.] (rEG): The encoder provides speed feedback for regulation and monitoring. This
configuration is automatic if the drive is configured for closed-loop operation ([Motor control type] (Ctt) = [FVC]
(FUC) or [Sync.CL] (FSY). If [Motor control type] (Ctt) = [SVC V] (UUC) the encoder operates in speed feedback
mode and enables static correction of the speed to be performed. This configuration is not accessible for other
[Motor control type] (Ctt) values.
PGr v [Speed ref.] (PGr): The encoder provides a reference. Can only be selected with an incremental encoder card.
COr v [Slip Comp.] (COr): The encoder provides speed feedback for speed correction and monitoring.
This configuration is accesible if [Motor control type](Ctt) is set to [Sync.CL] (FSY). The encoder enables a
dynamic and static correction of the speed. This choise could be used in case of random error on the encoder
feedback (encoder slipping at high speed for example). The less the encoder feedback is reliable, the more the
drive will work as in open-loop operation.

BBV19478 11/2011 151

[1.4 MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-)

Asynchronous motor parameters:

Code Name/Description Adjustment range

ASY- [ASYNC. MOTOR]

Can only be accessed if [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 146 = [SVC V] (UUC), [SVC I] (CUC), [FVC] (FUC),
[V/F 2pts] (UF2), or [V/F 5pts] (UF5).

nPr M [Rated motor power] Acc. to drive rating

Rated motor power given on the nameplate, in kW if [Standard mot. freq] (bFr) = [50Hz IEC] (50), in HP if
[Standard mot. freq] (bFr) = [60Hz NEMA] (60).

UnS M [Rated motor volt.] Acc. to drive rating

Rated motor voltage given on the nameplate.

ATV71LpppM3XZ: 100 to 240 V, ATV71LpppN4Z: 200 to 480 V

nCr M [Rated mot. current] 0.25 to 1.5 In (1)

Rated motor current given on the nameplate.

FrS M [Rated motor freq.] 10 to 1600 Hz

Rated motor frequency given on the nameplate.

The factory setting is 50 Hz, or preset to 60 Hz if [Standard mot. freq] (bFr) is set to 60 Hz.
The maximum value is limited to 500 Hz if [Motor control type] (Ctt) (page 146) is not V/F.
Values between 500 Hz and 1600 Hz are only possible in V/F control. In this case, configure [Motor control
type] (Ctt) before [Rated motor freq.] (FrS).

InSP M [rpm increment]

Increment of parameter [Rated motor speed] (nSP).
1 v [x1 rpm] (1): Increment of 1 rpm, to be used if [Rated motor speed] (nSP) does not exceed 65535 rpm.
10 v [x10 rpm] (10): Increment of 10 rpm, to be used if [Rated motor speed] (nSP) exceeds 65535 rpm.
Note: Changing [rpm increment] (InSP) will restore [Rated motor speed] (nSP) to its factory setting.

nSP M [Rated motor speed] 0 to 96000 rpm

Rated motor speed given on the nameplate. Adjustable between 0 and 65535 rpm if [rpm increment] (InSP) =
[x1 rpm] (1) or between 0.00 and 96.00 krpm if [rpm increment] (InSP) = [x10 rpm] (10).
0 to 9999 rpm then 10.00 to 65.53 or 96.00 krpm on the integrated display terminal.
If, rather than the rated speed, the nameplate indicates the synchronous speed and the slip in Hz or as a %,
calculate the rated speed as follows:
100 - slip as a %
• Rated speed = Synchronous speed x
100
or
50 - slip in Hz
• Rated speed = Synchronous speed x (50 Hz motors)
50
or
60 - slip in Hz
• Rated speed = Synchronous speed x (60 Hz motors)
60

(1) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate.

152 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.4 MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

ASY- [ASYNC. MOTOR] (continued)

U0 M [U0] 0 to 800 or 1000 V 0
according to rating
V/F profile setting. This parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type] (Ctt) = [V/F 2pts] (UF2) or [V/F 5pts]
(UF5)

U1 M [U1] 0 to 800 or 1000 V 0

according to rating
V/F profile setting. This parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type] (Ctt) = [V/F 5pts] (UF5)

F1 M [F1] 0 to 1600 Hz 0

V/F profile setting. This parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type] (Ctt) = [V/F 5pts] (UF5)

U2 M [U2] 0 to 800 or 1000 V 0

according to rating
V/F profile setting. This parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type] (Ctt) = [V/F 5pts] (UF5)

F2 M [F2] 0 to 1600 Hz 0

V/F profile setting. This parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type] (Ctt) = [V/F 5pts] (UF5)

U3 M [U3] 0 to 800 or 1000 V 0

according to rating
V/F profile setting. This parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type] (Ctt) = [V/F 5pts] (UF5)

F3 M [F3] 0 to 1600 Hz 0

V/F profile setting. This parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type] (Ctt) = [V/F 5pts] (UF5)

U4 M [U4] 0 to 800 or 1000 V 0

according to rating
V/F profile setting. This parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type] (Ctt) = [V/F 5pts] (UF5)

F4 M [F4] 0 to 1600 Hz 0

V/F profile setting. This parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type] (Ctt) = [V/F 5pts] (UF5)

U5 M [U5] 0 to 800 or 1000 V 0

according to rating
V/F profile setting. This parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type] (Ctt) = [V/F 5pts] (UF5)

F5 M [F5] 0 to 1600 Hz 0

V/F profile setting. This parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type] (Ctt) = [V/F 5pts] (UF5)

BBV19478 11/2011 153

[1.4 MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

ASY- [ASYNC. MOTOR] (continued)

UC2 M [Vector Control 2pt] [No] (nO)

nO v [No] (nO): Function inactive.

YES v [Yes] (YES): Function active.
Used in applications in which the motor rated speed and frequency need to be exceeded in order to optimize
operation at constant power, or when the maximum voltage of the motor needs to be limited to a value below
the line voltage.
The voltage/frequency profile must then be adapted in accordance with the motor's capabilities to operate at
maximum voltage UCP and maximum frequency FCP.

Motor voltage
Max. voltage UCP

Rated motor volt. UnS

Frequency
Rated motor freq. FrS Freq. Const Power

UCP M [V. constant power] According to drive

rating
According to drive
rating and [Standard
mot. freq] (bFr)
This parameter can be accessed if [Vector Control 2pt] (UC2) = [Yes] (YES)

FCP M [Freq. Const Power] According to drive

rating and [Rated
= [Standard mot. freq]
(bFr)
motor freq.] (FrS)
This parameter can be accessed if [Vector Control 2pt] (UC2) = [Yes] (YES)

SLP M [Slip compensation] (1) 0 to 300% 100%

This parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type] (Ctt) is not [V/F 2pts] (UF2) or [V/F 5pts] (UF5).
Adjusts the slip compensation around the value set by the rated motor speed.
The speeds given on motor nameplates are not necessarily exact.
T • If slip setting < actual slip: the motor is not rotating at the correct speed in steady state, but at a speed lower
than the reference.
• If slip setting > actual slip: The motor is overcompensated and the speed is unstable.

(1) Parameter can also be accessed in the [1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu.

T Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.

154 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.4 MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-)

Asynchronous motor parameters that can be accessed in [Expert] mode

These include:
• Special parameters.
• Parameters calculated by the drive during auto-tuning, in read-only mode. For example, [Stator R measured] (rSM), calculated cold
stator resistance.
• The possibility of replacing some of these calculated parameters with other values, if necessary. For example,
[Cust stator resist.] (rSA), measured cold stator resistance.
When a parameter is modified by the user, the drive uses it in place of the calculated parameter.

If auto-tuning is performed or if one of the motor parameters on which auto-tuning depends is modified ([Rated motor volt.] (UnS),
[Rated motor freq.] (FrS), [Rated mot. current] (nCr), [Rated motor speed] (nSP), [Rated motor power] (nPr)), the modified parameters return
to their factory setting.

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

ASY- [ASYNC. MOTOR] (continued)

rSM M [Stator R measured]
Cold stator resistance, calculated by the drive, in read-only mode. Value in milliohms (mΩ) up to 75 kW
(100 HP), and in hundredths of milliohms (mΩ/100) above 75 kW (100 HP).

IdM M [Idr]
Magnetizing current in A, calculated by the drive, in read-only mode.

LFM M [Lfr]
Leakage inductance in mH, calculated by the drive, in read-only mode.

trM M [T2r]
Rotor time constant in ms, calculated by the drive, in read-only mode.

nSL M [Nominal motor slip]

Nominal slip in Hz, calculated by the drive, in read-only mode.
To modify the nominal slip, modify the [Rated motor speed] (nSP) (page 152).

PPn M [Poles pair number]

Number of pairs of poles, calculated by the drive, in read-only mode.

BBV19478 11/2011 155

[1.4 MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-)

Asynchronous motor parameters that can be accessed in [Expert] mode, continued

Code Name/Description

ASY- [ASYNC. MOTOR] (continued)

rSA M [Cust stator resist.]
Cold state stator resistance (per winding), modifiable value. In milliohms (mΩ) up to 75 kW (100 HP), and
in hundredths of milliohms (mΩ/100) above 75 kW (100 HP). On the integrated display unit: 0 to 9999 then
10.00 to 65.53 (10000 to 65536).

IdA M [Idw]
Magnetizing current in A, modifiable value.

LFA M [Lfw]
Leakage inductance in mH, modifiable value.

trA M [Cust. rotor t const.]

Rotor time constant in ms, modifiable value.

156 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.4 MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-)

Synchronous motor parameters:

These parameters can be accessed if [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 146 = [Sync. mot.] (SYn) or [Sync.CL] (FSY). In this case, the
asynchronous motor parameters cannot be accessed.

Important: For synchronous motors, it is crucial to set the current limit. See [Current Limitation] (CLI) page 149.

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

SYn- [SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR]

Can only be accessed if [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 146 = [Sync.CL] (FSY) or [Sync. mot.] (SYn).

nCrS M [Nominal I sync.] 0.25 to 1.5 In (1) According to drive

rating
Rated synchronous motor current given on the nameplate.

nSPS M [Nom motor spdsync] 0 to 60000 rpm According to drive

rating
Rated synchronous motor speed given on the nameplate.
On the integrated display unit: 0 to 9999 rpm then 10.00 to 60.00 krpm.

PPnS M [Pole pairs] 1 to 50 According to drive

rating
Number of pairs of poles on the synchronous motor.

IPHS M [Increment EMF] [0.1mV/rpm] (0.1)

Increment for the [Syn. EMF constant] (PHS) parameter.

0.1 v [0.1 mV/rpm] (0.1): 0.1mV per rpm
1 v [1 mV/rpm] (1): 1mV per rpm
PHS M [Syn. EMF constant] 0 to 65535 According to drive
rating
Synchronous motor EMF constant, in 0.1 mV per rpm or 1 mV per rpm (peak voltage per phase), according to
the value of [Increment EMF] (IPHS).
On the integrated display unit: 0 to 9999 then 10.00 to 65.53 (10000 to 65536).

LdS M [Autotune L d-axis] 0 to 655.35 According to drive

rating
Axis "d" stator inductance in mH (per phase).
On motors with smooth poles [Autotune L d-axis] (LdS) = [Autotune L q-axis] (LqS) = Stator inductance L.

LqS M [Autotune L q-axis] 0 to 655.35 According to drive

rating
Axis "q" stator inductance in mH (per phase).
On motors with smooth poles [Autotune L d-axis] (LdS) = [Autotune L q-axis] (LqS) = Stator inductance L.

rSAS M [Cust. stator R syn] According to drive

rating
According to drive
rating
Cold state stator resistance (per winding) The factory setting is replaced by the result of the auto-tuning
operation, if it has been performed.
The value can be entered by the user, if he knows it.
Value in milliohms (mΩ) up to 75 kW (100 HP), and in hundredths of milliohms (mΩ/100) above 75 kW (100 HP).
On the integrated display unit: 0 to 9999 then 10.00 to 65.53 (10000 to 65536).

(1) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate.

BBV19478 11/2011 157

[1.4 MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-)

Code Name/Description

SYn- [SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR] (continued)

rEqP M [Read motor param.] [No] (nO)

This parameter can only be used with BDH, BRH and BSH type motors from the Telemecanique
range.
Can only be accessed if [Encoder protocol] (UECP) page 188 = [Hiperface] (SCHP).
Request to load motor parameters from the encoder EEPROM memory.
nO v [No] (nO): Loading not performed or not succeeded.
YES v [Yes] (YES): Loading is performed as soon as possible, then the parameter automatically changes to
[Done] (dOnE).
dOnE v [Done] (dOnE): Loading done.
The following parameters are loaded: [Angle offset value] (ASU) page 161, [Nom motor spdsync] (nSPS)
page 157, [Nominal I sync.] (nCrS) page 157, [Pole pairs] (PPnS) page 157, [Syn. EMF constant] (PHS)
page 157, [Cust. stator R syn] (rSAS) page 157, [Autotune L d-axis] (LdS) page 157, and
[Autotune L q-axis] (LqS) page 157.
Note:
• During loading the drive is in "Freewheel Stop" state with the motor turned off.
• If a "line contactor" or "output contactor" function has been configured, the contactor closes
during loading.

rEtP M [Status motor param] [Not done] (tAb)

Can only be accessed if [Encoder protocol] (UECP) page 188 = [Hiperface] (SCHP).
Information on the request to load motor parameters from the encoder EEPROM memory (not modifiable).
tAb v [Not done] (tAb): Loading has not been performed, default motor parameters will be used.
PrOG v [In progress] (PrOG): Loading in progress.
FAIL v [Failed] (FAIL): Loading has not succeeded.
dOnE v [Done] (dOnE): Loading completed successfully.
CUS v [Customized] (CUS): Loading completed successfully but one or more motor parameters have
subsequently been modified by the user via the display terminal or serial link, or auto-tuning has been
performed by [Auto-tuning] (tUn).

Synchronous motor parameters that can be accessed in [Expert] mode

Code Name/Description

SYn- [SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR] (continued)

rSMS M [R1rS]
Cold state stator resistance (per winding), in read-only mode. This is the drive factory setting or the result
of the auto-tuning operation, if it has been performed.
Value in milliohms (mΩ) up to 75 kW (100 HP), and in hundredths of milliohms (mΩ/100) above 75 kW
(100 HP).
On the integrated display unit: 0 to 9999 then 10.00 to 65.53 (10000 to 65536).

FrSS M [Nominal freq sync.]

Motor frequency at rated speed in Hz, calculated by the drive (rated motor frequency), in read-only mode.

(1) Parameter can also be accessed in the [1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu.
(2) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate.

T Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.

158 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.4 MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-)

Closed-loop synchronous motor

Operation on a synchronous motor in a closed loop configuration requires an encoder providing the exact position of the motor rotor.
The phase-shift angle of the encoder in relation to the rotor must therefore be determined. The drive can perform this measurement
automatically.

Selecting a resolver type encoder

If the number of motor poles is not a whole multiple of the number of resolver poles, the resolver is a relative encoder and
no longer absolute. You should therefore set the [Angle setting activ.] (AtA) parameter = [Power On] (POn) or [Run order] (AUtO).

Procedure for measuring the phase-shift angle between the motor and the encoder
Preliminary remarks:
Select the [Angle setting type] (ASt) measuring mode according to the type of machine being driven:
• [Angle setting type] (ASt) = [W/o load] (nLd): Measurement with motion, if the rotation of the motor is free (no load, brake released)
During measurement current flows through the motor, which may cause it to rotate one full revolution.

DANGER
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Check that the rotation of the motor will not cause any dangerous movements.

Failure to follow this instruction can result in death or serious injury.

• [Angle setting type] (ASt) = [With load] (brC): Measurement without motion, motor with or without load, brake engaged or released.
This mode is recommended for a lift, for example. You must adhere to the following instructions:
- The motor rotor must not move during measurement, otherwise the result will be incorrect.
- In some cases, the measurement current can cause tripping on an [Overcurrent] (OCF) fault; if so, use [W/o load] (nLd) mode.
This occurs when using low-inductance motors, high-speed motors, or motors in which the rated voltage is well below the supply
voltage of the drive.
- In some cases, the measurement can cause tripping on an [Angle error] (ASF) fault. This occurs if the motor rotor has moved
during measurement (only detected in closed-loop mode), a motor phase is disconnected or if the motor inductance is too high,
thus limiting the measurement current (in this case, use [W/o load] (nLd) mode).
• [Angle setting type] (ASt) = [Optimised] (brCO): Measurement without motion, possible with or without load, brake engaged or
released. Optimizing the angle detection time, based on the second detection request, even after the product has been turned off.

1. First, follow the "Encoder check procedure" on page 150.

2. Set [Motor control type] (Ctt) = [Sync.CL] (FSY).

3. If you have selected [Angle setting type] (ASt) = [W/o load] (nLd): For measurement with motion, check that the motor can turn freely
without resistive or driving torque. If this condition is not met, the resulting measurement will be inaccurate.

4. Set [Angle auto-test] (ASA) = [Yes] (YES). The measurement is performed and [Angle auto-test] (ASA) changes to [Done] (dOnE).
The [Angle offset value] (ASU) parameter changes from [No] (nO) to a numerical value proportional to the electrical angle measured
(8191 = 360°).

5. If required, configure automatic measurements using [Angle setting activ.] (AtA). If using a relative encoder (incremental or SinCos), it
is recommended that you set [Angle setting activ.] (AtA) = [Power On] (POn) or [Run order] (AUtO).

6. If an [Angle error] (ASF) fault occurs, [Angle auto-test] (ASA) returns to [No] (nO).
- Check that the parameters and instructions relating to this procedure have been carried out correctly and perform the
measurement again.

Notes
The phase-shift angle must be re-measured each time:
• The motor is changed
• The encoder is changed
• The coupling between the motor and encoder is removed
• The [Output Ph rotation] (PHr) parameter is modified
• The [Coder rotation inv.] (EnRI) parameter is modified.
If a relative encoder (incremental or SinCos) is used, measurement must be repeated each time the motor is turned off/on. It is therefore
recommended that you set [Angle setting activ.] (AtA) = [Power On] (POn) or [Run order] (AUtO).

BBV19478 11/2011 159

[1.4 MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range

ASA- [ANGLE TEST SETTING]

Can only be accessed if [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 146 = [Sync.CL] (FSY)

ASt M [Angle setting type] [With load] (brC)

Mode for measuring the phase-shift angle between the motor and the encoder.
brC v [With load] (brC): Measurement without motion, possible with or without load, brake engaged or released.
nLd v [W/o load] (nLd): Measurement with motion, only for free motors (brake released), without load.
brCO v [Optimized] (brCO): Measurement without motion, possible with or without load, brake engaged or released.
Optimizing the angle detection time, based on the second detection request, even after the product has been
turned off.
Note: If [Angle setting type] (ASt) = [W/o load] (nLd), [Measured Ld-axis] (LdMS), [Measured Lq-axis]
(LqMS) and [Angle auto-test] (ASA) will not be executed.

ASA M [Angle auto-test] [No] (nO)

Measurement of the phase-shift angle between the motor and the encoder.
nO v [No] (nO): Measurement not performed or has not succeeded, or [Output Ph rotation] (PHr) has been
modified, or [Coder rotation Inv.] (EnRI) has been modified.
YES v [Yes] (YES): Measurement is performed as soon as possible, then the parameter automatically changes to
[Done] (dOnE).
dOnE v [Done] (dOnE): Use of the value given the last time the measurement was performed.
Important:
• It is necessary that all the motor parameters are configured correctly before performing measurements:
- [Nominal I sync.] (nCrS), [Current Limitation] (CLI), [Nom motor spdsync] (nSPS), [Pole pairs] (PPnS),
[Syn. EMF constant] (PHS), [Autotune L d-axis] (LdS), [Autotune L q-axis] (LqS), [Cust. stator R syn]
(rSAS).
• Measurement is only performed if no stop command has been activated. If a "freewheel stop" or "fast stop"
function has been assigned to a logic input, this input must be inactive.
• Measurement takes priority over any run commands, which will be taken into account after the measurement
sequence.
• If measurement does not succeeded, the drive displays [No] (nO) and changes to [Angle Error] (ASF) fault
mode.
• Measurement may take several seconds. Do not interrupt the process. Wait for the display to change to
"[Done] (dOnE)" or "[No] (nO)".

Note: If a "line contactor" or "output contactor" function has been configured, the contactor closes
during measurement.

ASL M [Angle auto test] [No] (nO)

Measurement of the phase-shift angle between the motor and the encoder by means of a logic input or
command bit.
nO v [No] (nO): Not assigned
LI1 v [LI1] (LI1)
- :
- :
- v [...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 211.
Measurement is performed when the assigned bit or input changes to 1.

Note: If a "line contactor" or "output contactor" function has been configured, the contactor closes
during measurement.

160 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.4 MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range

ASA- [ANGLE TEST SETTING] (continued)

AtA M [Angle setting activ.] [Run order] (AUtO):

Activation of automatic measurement of the phase-shift angle between the motor and encoder when using a
relative encoder (incremental or SinCos).
nO v [No] (nO): Function inactive.
POn v [Power On] (POn): Measurement is performed on each power-up (1).
AUtO v [Run order] (AUtO): Measurement is performed on each run command if necessary, i.e., if parameter
[Angle offset value] (ASU) is set to [No] (nO).
This option is recommended for use with a VW3 A3 401 to 407 card, and with the VW3 A3 411 card when the
"line contactor" function has been configured (loss of angle on each stop) (1).
If [Angle setting activ.] (AtA) = [Power On] (POn) or [Run order] (AUtO), it is advisable to set [Angle setting type]
(ASt) = [With load] (brC).

Note: If a "line contactor" or "output contactor" function has been configured, the contactor closes
during measurement.
Note: At each multi-motor configuration switching, the drive performs an automatic measurement of the
phase-shift angle at next run order.

ASU M [Angle offset value] [No] (nO)

Phase-shift angle between the motor and the encoder.

nO v [No] (nO): Measurement has not been performed or has not succeeded, or [Output Ph rotation] (PHr) has
been modified, or measurement has been lost due to powering down (1), or [Coder rotation inv.] (EnRI) has
been modified.
- v 0 to 8191: Phase-shift angle. 8191 corresponds to 360°.

AStS M [Angle setting status] [Not done] (tAb)

Information on the phase-shift angle measurement between the motor and the encoder (cannot be modified).
tAb v [Not done] (tAb): Phase-shift angle not defined.
PEnd v [Pending] (PEnd): Measurement requested but not yet performed.
PrOG v [In progress] (PrOG): Measurement in progress.
FAIL v [Failed] (FAIL): Measurement not succeeded.
dOnE v [Done] (dOnE): Measurement performed successfully.
CUS v [Customized] (CUS): The phase-shift angle value has been entered by the user via the display terminal or
serial link.

(1) Powering down causes a loss of measurement data in the following cases:
• With a VW3 A3 401 to 407 and VW3 A3 411 card:
- Every time the power section is turned off, even if the drive control section has a separate power supply
(for example, if the "line contactor" function has been configured).
• With a VW3 A3 409 card and a SinCos encoder:
- Every time the power section is turned off, if the drive control section does not have a separate power supply.
- Only when the drive control section is turned off (if it has a separate power supply via the 0 and P24 terminals).
- If the resolver has a number of poles which is not a multiple of the number of motor poles.
• With a VW3 A3 410 card:
- VW3 A3 410 card manage SinCos encoders providing signal for the mechanical position of the rotor (if wired) in addition of
standard sincos signals of the speed feedback.
- This mechanical position information is useful with synchronous motor (PMSM) because no more angle test is required at power
on (just one is needed at the installation as the absolute encoder).

BBV19478 11/2011 161

[1.4 MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

FLI- [FLUXING BY LI]

Cannot be accessed if [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 146 = [Sync.CL] (FSY).

FLU M [Motor fluxing] (1) [No] (FnO)

T
FnC v [Not cont.] (FnC): Non-continuous mode
FCt v [Continuous] (FCt): Continuous mode. This option is not possible if [Angle setting type] (ASt) page 162
is [With load] (brC) or if [Auto DC Injection] (AdC) page 230 is [Yes] (YES) or if [Type of stop] (Stt) page 228
is [Freewheel] (nSt).
FnO v [No] (FnO): Function inactive. This option is not possible if [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 146 = [SVCI]
(CUC) or [FVC] (FUC).
If [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 146 = [SVCI] (CUC), [FVC] (FUC) or [Sync. mot.] (SYn), the factory setting
is replaced by [Not Cont.] (FnC).

The flux current is greater than nCr (configured rated motor current) when the flux is established and is then
adjusted to the motor magnetizing current.

CAUTION
RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

If [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 146 = [Sync. mot.] (SYn), the [Motor fluxing] (FLU) parameter must be
active ([No] (FnO) is not permitted): this parameter causes rotor angle detection or alignment (according to
the configuration of [Angle setting type] (ASt) page 160) and not fluxing.
If [Brake assignment] (bLC) page 240 is not [No] (nO), the [Motor fluxing] (FLU) parameter has no effect.

ASt M [Angle setting type] [With load] (brC)

This parameter can be accessed only if [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 146 = [Sync. mot.] (SYn)
Mode for measuring the phase-shift angle between the motor and the encoder.

brC v [With load] (brC): Measurement without motion, possible with or without load, brake engaged or
released.
nLd v [W/o load] (nLd): Measurement with motion, only for free motors (brake released), without load.
brCO v [Optimized] (brCO): Measurement without motion, possible with or without load, brake engaged or
released. Optimizing the angle detection time, based on the second detection request, even after the
product has been turned off.
Note: If [Angle setting type] (ASt) = [W/o load] (nLd), the motor may rotate one full revolution during
measurement.

(1) Parameter can also be accessed in the [1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu.

T Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.

162 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.4 MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range

tUn- [AUTOMATIC TUNE]

tUn M [Auto tuning] [No] (nO)

nO v [No] (nO): Auto-tuning not performed.

YES v [Yes] (YES): Auto-tuning is performed as soon as possible, then the parameter automatically changes to
[Done] (dOnE).
dOnE v [Done] (dOnE): Use of the values given the last time auto-tuning was performed.
Important:
• It is essential that all the motor parameters are correctly configured before starting auto-tuning.
- Asynchronous motor: [Rated motor volt.] (UnS), [Rated motor freq.] (FrS), [Rated mot. current] (nCr),
[Rated motor speed] (nSP), [Rated motor power] (nPr) page 152.
- Synchronous motor: [Nominal I sync.] (nCrS), [Nom motor spdsync] (nSPS), [Pole pairs] (PPnS), [Syn.
EMF constant] (PHS), [Autotune L d-axis] (LdS), [Autotune L q-axis] (LqS) page 157.
If at least one of these parameters (except [Syn. EMF constant] (PHS), [Autotune L d-axis] (LdS), [Autotune
L q-axis] (LqS)) is modified after auto-tuning has been performed, [Auto tuning] (tUn) will return to [No] (nO)
and must be repeated.
• Auto-tuning is only performed if no stop command has been activated. If a "freewheel stop" or "fast stop"
function has been assigned to a logic input, this input must be inactive.
• Auto-tuning takes priority over any run or prefluxing commands, which will be taken into account after the
auto-tuning sequence.
• If auto-tuning does not succeeded, the drive displays [No] (nO) and, depending on the configuration of
[Autotune fault mgt] (tnL) page 288, may switch to [Auto-tuning] (tnF) fault mode.
• Auto-tuning may last for 1 to 2 seconds. Do not interrupt the process. Wait for the display to change to
"[Done] (dOnE)" or "[No] (nO)".

Note:
• During auto-tuning the motor operates at rated current.
• If the "line contactor" or "output contactor" function has been configured, the contactor closes during
auto-tuning.

AUt M [Automatic autotune] [No] (nO)

nO v [No] (nO): Function inactive.

YES v [Yes] (YES): Auto-tuning is performed on every power-up.
Important: Same comments as for [Auto tuning] (tUn) above.

tUL M [Auto-tune assign.] [No] (nO)

Assignment of auto-tuning to a logic input or control bit.

nO v [No] (nO): Not assigned
LI1 v [LI1] (LI1)
- :
- :
- v [...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 211.
Auto-tuning is performed when the assigned bit or input changes to 1.
Important: Same comments as for [Auto tuning] (tUn) above.

tUS M [Auto tuning state] [Not done] (tAb)

For information only, cannot be modified.

tAb v [Not done] (tAb): The default stator resistance value is used to control the motor.
PEnd v [Pending] (PEnd): Auto-tuning has been requested but not yet performed.
PrOG v [In progress] (PrOG): Auto-tuning in progress.
FAIL v [Failed] (FAIL): Auto-tuning has not succeeded.
dOnE v [Done] (dOnE): The stator resistance measured by the auto-tuning function is used to control the motor.
CUS v [Customized] (CUS): Auto-tuning has been performed but at least one of the parameters [Autotune L d-
axis] (LdS), [Autotune L q-axis] (LqS) or [Cust. stator R syn] (rSAS) has subsequently been modified.
The following auto-tuning parameters are affected:
• [Cust stator resist.] (rSA), [Idw] (IdA), [LFw] (LFA) and [Cust. rotor t const.] (trA) page 156 for asynchronous
motors.
• [Cust. stator R syn] (rSAS) page 157 for synchronous motors.

BBV19478 11/2011 163

[1.4 MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

SSL- [SPEED LOOP]

SFC M [K speed loop filter] (1) 0 to 100 According to
[Motor control type]
T (Ctt)
Speed loop filter coefficient.
See page 69 for more details of the effect of this parameter.

StA M [Fr.Loop.Stab] (1) 0 to 100 % 20 %

T Stability: Used to adapt the return to steady state after a speed transient, according to the dynamics of the
machine. Gradually increase the stability to increase control loop attenuation and thus reduce any overspeed.

FLG M [FreqLoopGain] (1) 0 to 100 % According to

[Motor control type]
T (Ctt)
Frequency loop gain: Used to adapt the pace of the machine speed transients according to the dynamics.
For machines with high resistive torque, high inertia or fast cycles, increase the gain gradually.
[FreqLoopGain] (FLG) is set to 20% when [Motor control type] (Ctt) is set to [Sync. mot.] (SYn) or [Sync.CL]
(FSY).

(1) Parameter can also be accessed in the [1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu and [1.1 LIFT] (LIF-).

T Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.

164 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.4 MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-)

Parameters that can be accessed in [Expert] mode

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

SSL- [SPEED LOOP] (continued)

FFP M [Feed forward] 0 to 200 % 0%

Percentage of the high-performance regulator feedforward term. 100% corresponds to the term calculated
T using the value of [Application Inertia] (JAPL) page 82.

FFU M [Bandwidth feedfor.] 20 to 500 % 100 %

T Bandwidth of the high-performance speed loop feedforward term, as a percentage of the predefined value.

T Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.

BBV19478 11/2011 165

[1.4 MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-)

[ENA SYSTEM]
ENA SYSTEM is a control profile designed for rotating machines with unbalanced load. It only applies to asynchronous motors.
It is used primarily for oil pumps. The operating principle applied:
- Allows operation without a braking resistor
- Reduces mechanical stress on the rod
- Reduces line current fluctuations
- Reduces energy consumption by improving the electric power/current ratio.

[ENA prop.gain]
This setting is used to achieve a compromise between the reduced energy consumption (and/or line current fluctuations) and the
mechanical stress to which the rod is subject.
Energy is saved by reducing current fluctuations and increasing the current while retaining the same average speed.

[ENA integral gain]

This setting is used to smooth the DC bus voltage.

Start up the machine with a low integral and proportional gain (proportional 25% and integral 10%) in order to avoid an overvoltage trip in
the absence of a braking resistor. See if these settings are suitable.

Recommended adjustments to be made during operation:

• To be able to remove the braking resistor and, to limit the increase in the DC bus voltage:
Display the machine speed on the graphic display terminal.
Reduce the integral gain value until the machine speed drops. When this point is reached, increase the integral gain until the machine
speed stabilizes.
Use the graphic display terminal or an oscilloscope to check that the DC bus voltage is stable.
• To save energy:
Reducing the proportional gain (gradually) may increase energy savings by reducing the maximum value of the line current, but it will
increase speed variations and, therefore, mechanical stress.
The aim is to identify settings that will enable energy to be saved and minimize mechanical stress.
When reducing the proportional gain, it may be necessary to readjust the integral gain in order to avoid an overvoltage trip.

Note: Once the adjustments are complete, check that the pump starts up correctly. If the ENA integral gain setting is too low, this may lead
to insufficient torque on startup.

[Reduction ratio]
This setting corresponds to the motor speed ahead of gearbox/speed after gearbox ratio. This parameter is used to display the average
speed in Hz and the machine speed in customer units (e.g., in strokes per minute) on the graphic display terminal. In order to be displayed
on the graphic display terminal, these values must be selected in the [1.2 MONITORING] (SUP-) menu.

Adjustment recommendations for prevention of tripping in [Overspeed] (SOF)

ENA SYSTEM authorizes overspeed, which can trigger an [Overspeed] (SOF) detected fault. To avoid this occurring, it is advisable to
increase the value of the following parameters slightly:
• [Max frequency] (tFr) page 147.
• [Overspd. pulse thd.] (FqA) page 287, if the "frequency meter" function is configured.

166 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.4 MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

SSL- [SPEED LOOP] (continued)

EnA M [ENA system] [No] (nO)

This parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type] (Ctt) = [SVC V] (UUC), see page 146.
nO v [No] (nO): Function inactive
YES v [Yes] (YES): Function active
GPE M [ENA prop.gain] (1) 1 to 9999 250

T This parameter can be accessed if [ENA system] (EnA) = [Yes] (YES)

GIE M [ENA integral gain] (1) 0 to 9999 100

T This parameter can be accessed if [ENA system] (EnA) = [Yes] (YES)

rAP M [Reduction ratio] (1) 10.0 to 999.9 10

T This parameter can be accessed if [ENA system] (EnA) = [Yes] (YES)

(1) Parameter can also be accessed in the [1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu.

T Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.

BBV19478 11/2011 167

[1.4 MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

bOO M [Boost] (1) -100% to 100% 0

This parameter can be accessed if [ACCESS LEVEL] = [Expert] and if [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 146 is
not [Sync.CL] (FSY) or if [Motor control type] (Ctt) is set to [Sync.CL] (FSY) and [Encoder usage] (EnU) is set
to [Slip comp.] (COr) or [Spd fdk reg.] (rEG).
Adjustment of the motor magnetizing current at low speed, as a % of the rated magnetizing current. This
parameter is used to increase or reduce the time taken to establish the torque. It allows gradual adjustment up
to the frequency set by [Action Boost] (FAb). Negative values apply particularly to tapered rotor motors.
Note: If [Motor control type] (Ctt) is set to [Sync.CL] (FSY) and [Encoder usage] (EnU) is set to [Slip comp.]
(COr), [Boost] (bOO) is set to 100 %.

Magnetizing current

Positive[Boost] (bOO)

Rated magnetizing current

Negative [Boost] (bOO)

Frequency
0
[Action Boost] (FAb)

FAb M [Action Boost] (1) 0 to 500 Hz 0

This parameter can be accessed if [ACCESS LEVEL] = [Expert] and if [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 146 is
not [Sync.CL] (FSY) or if [Motor control type] (Ctt) is set to [Sync.CL] (FSY) and [Encoder usage] (EnU) is set
to [Slip comp.] (COr).
Frequency above which the magnetizing current is not longer affected by [Boost] (bOO) If [Motor control type]
(Ctt) is set to [Sync.CL] (FSY) and [Encoder usage] (EnU) is set to [Slip comp.] (COr), [Action Boost] (FAb) is
set to [Nominal freq sync.] (FrSS) / 3 Hz.

UFr M [IR compensation] (2) 25 to 200% 100%

This parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 146 is not [V/F 2pts] (UF2) or [V/F 5pts] (UF5).

T Used to optimize the torque at very low speed (increase [IR compensation] (UFr) if the torque is insufficient).
Check that the [IR compensation] (UFr) value is not too high when the motor is warm (risk of instability).

nrd M [Noise reduction] [Yes] (YES)

nO v [No] (nO): Fixed frequency.

YES v [Yes] (YES): Frequency with random modulation.
Random frequency modulation helps to prevent any resonance, which may occur at a fixed frequency.

(1) These two parameters cannot be accessed in closed-loop synchronous mode [Sync.CL] (FSY).
(2) Parameter can also be accessed in the [1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu.

T Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.

168 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.4 MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

SUL M [Motor surge limit.] [No] (nO)

This function limits motor overvoltages and is useful in the following applications:
- NEMA motors
- Japanese motors
- Spindle motors
- Rewound motors
nO v [No] (nO): Function inactive
YES v [Yes] (YES): Function active
This parameter is forced to [No] (nO) if [Sinus filter] (OFI) page 148 = [Yes] (YES).
This parameter can remain = [No] (nO) for 230/400 V motors used at 230 V, or if the length of cable between
the drive and the motor does not exceed:
- 4 m with unshielded cables
- 10 m with shielded cables
10 μs
SOP M [Volt surge limit. opt]
Optimization parameter for transient overvoltages at the motor terminals. Can be accessed if [Motor surge limit.]
(SUL) = [Yes] (YES).
Set to 6, 8, or 10 μs, according to the following table.

The value of the "SOP" parameter corresponds to the attenuation time of the cable used. It is defined to prevent the superimposition of
voltage wave reflections resulting from long cable lengths. It limits overvoltages to twice the DC bus rated voltage.
For longer cable lengths, a sinus filter or a dV/dt protection filter must be used.
• For motors in parallel, the sum of all the cable lengths must be taken into consideration. Compare the length given in the table row
corresponding to the power for one motor with that corresponding to the total power, and select the shorter length. E.g. Two 7.5 kW
(10 HP) motors - take the lengths on the 15 kW (20 HP) table row, which are shorter than those on the 7.5 kW (10 HP) row, and divide
by the number of motors to obtain the length per motor (with unshielded "GORSE" cable and SOP = 6, the result is 40/2 = 20 m
maximum for each 7.5 kW (10 HP) motor).

In special cases (for example, different types of cable, different motor powers in parallel, different cable lengths in parallel, etc.), we
recommend using an oscilloscope to check the overvoltage values obtained at the motor terminals.

To retain the overall drive performance, do not increase the SOP value unnecessarily.

BBV19478 11/2011 169

[1.4 MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

Ubr M [Braking level] According to drive

voltage rating
T DC bus voltage threshold above which the braking transistor cuts in to limit this voltage.
ATV71LpppM3pZ: factory setting 395 V.
ATV71LpppN4Z: factory setting 785 V.
The adjustment range depends on the voltage rating of the drive and the [Mains voltage] (UrES) parameter,
page 280.

bbA M [Braking balance] [No] (nO)

nO v [No] (nO): Function inactive

YES v [Yes] (YES): Function active, to be used on drives connected in parallel via their DC bus. Used to balance the
braking power between the drives. The [Braking level] (Ubr) parameter must be set to the same value on the
various drives.
The value [Yes] (YES) is possible only if [Dec ramp adapt.] (brA) = [No] (nO) (see page 227).

LbA M [Load sharing] [No] (nO)

When 2 motors are connected mechanically and therefore at the same speed, and each is controlled by a drive,
this function can be used to improve torque distribution between the two motors. To do this, it varies the speed
based on the torque.
nO v [No] (nO): Function inactive
YES v [Yes] (YES): Function active
The parameter can only be accessed if [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 146 is not [V/F 2pts] (UF2) or [V/F 5pts]
(UF5).

LbC M [Load correction] (1) 0 to 1000 Hz 0

T Rated correction in Hz.

This parameter can be accessed if [Load sharing] (LbA) = [Yes] (YES)
Torque LbC
Nominal torque

0 Frequency

Nominal torque
LbC

(1) Parameter can also be accessed in the [1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu.

T Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.

170 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.4 MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-)

Load sharing, parameters that can be accessed at Expert level

Principle
Torque reference
Reference +
Ramp
Speed Loop
speed -

Balancing
Filter
K

LBC LBF
LBC1
LBC2
LBC3

The load sharing factor K is determined by the torque and speed, with two factors K1 and K2 (K = K1 x K2).
K1

speed
LBC1 LBC2

K2
LBC

LBC3
Torque
LBC3 Rated
torque x (1 + LBC3)

LBC

BBV19478 11/2011 171

[1.4 MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

LbC1 M [Correction min spd] 0 to 999.9 Hz 0

T This parameter can be accessed if [Load sharing] (LbA) = [Yes] (YES)

Minimum speed for load correction in Hz. Below this threshold, no corrections are made. Used to helps to
prevent correction at very low speed if this would hamper rotation of the motor.

LbC2 M [Correction max spd] [Correction min spd]

(LbC1) + 0.1
0.1

T at 1000 Hz
This parameter can be accessed if [Load sharing] (LbA) = [Yes] (YES)
Speed threshold in Hz above which maximum load correction is applied.

LbC3 M [Torque offset] 0 to 300 % 0%

T This parameter can be accessed if [Load sharing] (LbA) = [Yes] (YES)

Minimum torque for load correction as a % of the rated torque. Below this threshold, no corrections are made.
Used to avoid torque instabilities when the torque direction is not constant.

LbF M [Sharing filter] 100 ms to 20 s 100 ms

T This parameter can be accessed if [Load sharing] (LbA) = [Yes] (YES)

Time constant (filter) for correction in ms. Used in the event of flexible mechanical coupling in order to avoid
instabilities.

T Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.

172 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I-O-)

With graphic display terminal:

RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A

1 DRIVE MENU
1.1 LIFT
1.2 MONITORING
RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A 1.3 SETTINGS RUN Term +50.00Hz 80A
MAIN MENU 1.4 MOTOR CONTROL 1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG
ENT ENT
1 DRIVE MENU 1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG 2/3 wire control
2 ACCESS LEVEL Code << >> Quick 2 wire type
3 OPEN / SAVE AS Reverse assign.
4 PASSWORD LI1 CONFIGURATION
5 LANGUAGE LIx CONFIGURATION
Code Quick Code << >> Quick

With integrated display terminal:

Turn on

XXX Displays the state of the drive

ENT

ESC

LIF-

ENT
ESC

I-O- INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG

ESC

CtL-

ESC

LAC-

BBV19478 11/2011 173

[1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I-O-)

The parameters in the [1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I-O-) menu can only be modified when the drive is stopped and no run command is
present.

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

tCC M [2/3 wire control] [2 wire] (2C)

2C v [2 wire] (2C)
3C v [3 wire] (3C)
2-wire control: This is the input state (0 or 1) or edge (0 to 1 or 1 to 0), which controls running or stopping.

Example of "source" wiring:

ATV
+24 LI1 LIx LI1: Forward
LIx: Reverse

3-wire control (pulse commands): A "forward" or "reverse" pulse is sufficient to control startup, a "stop" pulse
is sufficient to control stopping.

Example of "source" wiring:

ATV
+24 LI1 LI2 LIx LI1: Stop
LI2: Forward
LIx: Reverse

DANGER
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
To change the assignment of [2/3 wire control] (tCC) press and hold down the “ENT” key for 2 s.
It causes the following functions to return to factory setting: [2 wire type] (tCt) and [Reverse assign.]
(rrS) below, and all functions which assign logic inputs and analog inputs.
The macro configuration selected will also be reset if it has been customized (loss of custom settings).
It is advisable to configure this parameter before configuring the [1.6 COMMAND] (CtL-) and
[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-) menus.
Check that this change is compatible with the wiring diagram used.
Failure to follow this instruction can result in death or serious injury.

tCt M [2 wire type] [Transition] (trn)

LEL v [Level] (LEL): State 0 or 1 is taken into account for run (1) or stop (0).
trn v [Transition] (trn): A change of state (transition or edge) is necessary to initiate operation, in order to help to
prevent accidental restarts after a break in the power supply.
PFO v [Fwd priority] (PFO): State 0 or 1 is taken into account for run or stop, but the "forward" input always takes
priority over the "reverse" input.

rrS M [Reverse assign.] [LI2] (LI2)

nO v [No] (nO): Not assigned

174 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I-O-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

L1- [LI1 CONFIGURATION]

L1A M [LI1 assignment]
Read-only parameter, cannot be configured.
It displays all the functions that are assigned to input LI1 in order to check for multiple assignments.

L1d M [LI1 On Delay] 0 to 200 ms 0

This parameter is used to take account of the change of the logic input to state 1 with a delay that can be
adjusted between 0 and 200 milliseconds, in order to filter out possible interference. The change to state 0
is taken into account without delay.

Note: The relative order in which these inputs are taken into account may be modified according to the delay values
of the various logic inputs, and thus lead to unintended operation.

L-- [LIx CONFIGURATION]

All the logic inputs available on the drive are processed as in the example for LI1 above, up to LI6, LI10 or
LI14, depending on whether or not option cards have been inserted.

BBV19478 11/2011 175

[1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I-O-)

Configuration of analog inputs and Pulse input

The minimum and maximum input values (in volts, mA, etc.) are converted to % in order to adapt the references to the application.

Minimum and maximum input values:

The minimum value corresponds to a reference of 0% and the maximum value to a reference of 100%. The minimum value may be greater
than the maximum value:

Reference
Reference

100 % 100 %

Current or Current or
voltage or voltage or
frequency frequency
input input
0% 0%
[Min value] [Max value] 20 mA or [Max value] [Min value] 20 mA or
(CrLx or (CrHx or 10 V or (CrHx or (CrLx or 10 V or
ULx or PIL) UHx or PFr) 30.00 kHz UHx or PFr) ULx or PIL) 30.00 kHz

For +/- bidirectional inputs, the min. and max. are relative to the absolute value, for example, +/- 2 to 8 V.

Negative min. value of Pulse input:

Reference

100 %

Frequency
input
-30.00 [RP min 0 % [RP max value] 30.00
kHz value] (PFr) kHz
(PIL)

Range (output values): For analog inputs only

This parameter is used to configure the reference range to [0% V100%] or [-100% V +100%] in order to obtain a bidirectional output from
a unidirectional input.

Reference Reference

100 % 100 %

current current
or or
voltage voltage
[Min value]
0% input 0% input
[Min value] [Max value] 20 mA [Max value] 20 mA
Range 0 V 100% or 10 V or 10 V

- 100 %
Range - 100 % V + 100 %

176 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I-O-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

bSP M [Reference template] [Standard] (bSd)

bSd v [Standard] (bSd)

Frequency At zero reference the frequency = LSP

HSP

LSP
-100 %
Reference
0% +100 %
LSP

HSP

bLS v [Pedestal] (bLS)

Frequency At reference = 0 to LSP the frequency = LSP
HSP

LSP
-100 %
Reference
LSP +100 %

HSP

bnS v [Deadband] (bnS)

Frequency At reference = 0 to LSP the frequency = 0
HSP

-100 % LSP
Reference
0
LSP +100 %

HSP

bnS0 v [Deadband 0] (bnS0)

Frequency This operation is the same as [Standard] (bSd),
except that in the following cases at zero
HSP reference, the frequency = 0:
• The signal is less than [Min value], which is
greater than 0 (example 1 V on a 2 - 10 V input)
LSP • The signal is greater than [Min value], which is
-100 % greater than [Max value] (example 11 V on a
0%
Reference 10 - 0 V input).
+100 %
LSP
If the input range is configured as
HSP "bidirectional", operation remains identical to
[Standard] (bSd).

This parameter defines how the speed reference is taken into account, for analog inputs and Pulse
input only.
The limits are set by the [Low speed] (LSP) and [High speed] (HSP) parameters, page 135.

BBV19478 11/2011 177

[1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I-O-)

Delinearization: For analog inputs only

The input can be delinearized by configuring an intermediate point on the input/output curve of this input:

For range 0 V 100%

Reference

100 %

current
[Interm. point Y] or
voltage
0% input
[Min value] [Interm. point [Max value] 20 mA
(0 %) X] (100%) or 10 V

Note: For [Interm. point X], 0% corresponds to [Min value] and 100% to [Max value]

For range -100% V 100%

Reference

100 %

[Interm. point Y] current

[Min value] - [Interm.
or
(- 100%) point X]
voltage input
0%
0% [Interm. point [Max value] 20 mA
X] (100%) or 10 V
- [Interm. point Y]

- 100 %

178 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I-O-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

AI1- [AI1 CONFIGURATION]

AI1A M [AI1 assignment]
Read-only parameter, cannot be configured.
It displays all the functions associated with input AI1

AI1t M [AI1 Type] [Voltage] (10U)

10U v [Voltage] (10U): Positive voltage input (negative values are interpreted as zero: the input is unidirectional).
v [Voltage +/-] (n10U): Positive and negative voltage input (the input is bidirectional).
n10U

UIL1 M [AI1 min value] 0 to 10.0 V 0V

UIH1 M [AI1 max value] 0 to 10.0 V 10.0 V

AI1F M [AI1 filter] 0 to 10.00 s 0s

Interference filtering.

AI1E M [AI1 Interm. point X] 0 to 100 % 0%

Input delinearization point coordinate.

• 0% corresponds to [AI1 min value] (UIL1).
• 100% corresponds to [AI1 max value] (UIH1).

AI1S M [AI1 Interm. point Y] 0 to 100 % 0%

Output delinearization point coordinate (frequency reference).

BBV19478 11/2011 179

[1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I-O-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

AI2- [AI2 CONFIGURATION]

AI2A M [AI2 assignment]
Read-only parameter, cannot be configured.
It displays all the functions associated with input AI2.

AI2t M [AI2 Type] [Current] (0A)

10U v [Voltage] (10U): Voltage input

0A v [Current] (0 A): Current input
CrL2 M [AI2 min. value] 0 to 20.0 mA 0 mA

This parameter can be accessed if [AI2 Type] (AI2t) = [Current] (0 A)

UIL2 M [AI2 min. value] 0 to 10.0 V 0V

This parameter can be accessed if [AI2 Type] (AI2t) = [Voltage] (10U)

CrH2 M [AI2 max. value] 0 to 20.0 mA 20.0 mA

This parameter can be accessed if [AI2 Type] (AI2t) = [Current] (0 A)

UIH2 M [AI2 max. value] 0 to 10.0 V 10.0 V

This parameter can be accessed if [AI2 Type] (AI2t) = [Voltage] (10U)

AI2F M [AI2 filter] 0 to 10.00 s 0s

Interference filtering.

AI2L M [AI2 range] [0 - 100%] (POS)

POS v [0 - 100%] (POS): Unidirectional input

nEG v [+/- 100%] (nEG): Bidirectional input
E.g. On a 0/10 V input
- 0 V corresponds to reference - 100%
- 5 V corresponds to reference 0 %
- 10 V corresponds to reference + 100%

AI2E M [AI2 Interm. point X] 0 to 100 % 0%

Input delinearization point coordinate.

• 0% corresponds to [Min value] if the range is 0 V 100%.
[Max value] + [Min value]
• 0% corresponds to 2 if the range is -100% V + 100%.

• 100% corresponds to [Max value].

AI2S M [AI2 Interm. point Y] 0 to 100 % 0%

Output delinearization point coordinate (frequency reference).

180 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I-O-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

AI3- [AI3 CONFIGURATION]

Can be accessed if a VW3A3202 option card has been inserted

AI3A M [AI3 assignment]

Read-only parameter, cannot be configured.
It displays all the functions associated with input AI3.

AI3t M [AI3 Type] [Current] (0A)

Read-only parameter, cannot be configured.

0A v [Current] (0 A): Current input
CrL3 M [AI3 min. value] 0 to 20.0 mA 0 mA

CrH3 M [AI3 max. value] 0 to 20.0 mA 20.0 mA

AI3F M [AI3 filter] 0 to 10.00 s 0s

Interference filtering.

AI3L M [AI3 range] [0 - 100%] (POS)

POS v [0 - 100%] (POS): Unidirectional input

nEG v [+/- 100%] (nEG): Bidirectional input
E.g. On a 4 - 20 mA input
- 4 mA corresponds to reference - 100%
- 12 mA corresponds to reference 0 %
- 20 mA corresponds to reference + 100%
Since AI3 is, in physical terms, a bidirectional input, the [+/- 100%] (nEG) configuration must only be used if
the signal applied is unidirectional. A bidirectional signal is not compatible with a bidirectional configuration.

AI3E M [AI3 Interm. point X] 0 to 100 % 0%

Input delinearization point coordinate.

• 0% corresponds to [Min value] (CrL3) if the range is 0 V 100%.
[AI3 max. value] (CrH3) - [AI3 min. value]
• 0% corresponds to 2 if the range is -100% V +100%.

• 100% corresponds to [AI3 max. value] (CrH3).

AI3S M [AI3 Interm. point Y] 0 to 100 % 0%

Output delinearization point coordinate (frequency reference).

BBV19478 11/2011 181

[1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I-O-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

AI4- [AI4 CONFIGURATION]

Can be accessed if a VW3A3202 option card has been inserted

AI4A M [AI4 assignment]

Read-only parameter, cannot be configured.
It displays all the functions associated with input AI4.

AI4t M [AI4 Type] [Voltage] (10U)

10U v [Voltage] (10U): Voltage input

0A v [Current] (0 A): Current input
CrL4 M [AI4 min value] 0 to 20.0 mA 0 mA

This parameter can be accessed if [AI4 Type] (AI4t) = [Current] (0 A)

UIL4 M [AI4 min value] 0 to 10.0 V 0V

This parameter can be accessed if [AI4 Type] (AI4t) = [Voltage] (10U)

CrH4 M [AI4 max value] 0 to 20.0 mA 20.0 mA

This parameter can be accessed if [AI4 Type] (AI4t) = [Current] (0 A)

UIH4 M [AI4 max value] 0 to 10.0 V 10.0 V

This parameter can be accessed if [AI4 Type] (AI4t) = [Voltage] (10U)

AI4F M [AI4 filter] 0 to 10.00 s 0s

Interference filtering.

AI4L M [AI4 range] [0 - 100%] (POS)

POS v [0 - 100%] (POS): Unidirectional input

nEG v [+/- 100%] (nEG): Bidirectional input
E.g. On a 0/10 V input
- 0 V corresponds to reference - 100%
- 5 V corresponds to reference 0 %
- 10 V corresponds to reference + 100%

AI4E M [AI4 Interm.point X] 0 to 100 % 0%

Input delinearization point coordinate.

• 0% corresponds to [Min value] if the range is 0 V 100%.
[Max value] + [Min value]
• 0% corresponds to 2 if the range is -100% V + 100%.

• 100% corresponds to [Max value].

AI4S M [AI4 Interm.point Y] 0 to 100 % 0%

Output delinearization point coordinate (frequency reference).

182 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I-O-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

AU1- [VIRTUAL AI1]

AIC1 M [AI net. channel] [No] (nO)

Virtual input.

nO [No] (nO): Not assigned (in this case, the virtual input does not appear in the analog input assignment
parameters for the functions)
Mdb v [Modbus] (Mdb): Integrated Modbus
CAn v [CANopen] (CAn): Integrated CANopen
nEt v [Com. card] (nEt): Communication card (if inserted)
APP v [C.Insid. card] (APP): Controller Inside card (if inserted)

Scale: The value 8192 transmitted by this input is equivalent to 10 V on a 10 V input.

BBV19478 11/2011 183

[1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I-O-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

PLI- [RP CONFIGURATION]

Can be accessed if a VW3A3202 option card has been inserted

PIA M [RP assignment]

Read-only parameter, cannot be configured.
It displays all the functions associated with the Pulse In input in order to check, for example, for compatibility
problems.

PIL M [RP min value] - 30.00 to 30.00 kHz 0

Frequency corresponding to the minimum speed

PFr M [RP max value] 0 to 30.00 kHz 30.00 kHz

Frequency corresponding to the maximum speed

PFI M [RP filter] 0 to 1000 ms 0

Interference filtering.

184 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I-O-)

Configuration of the encoder input serving as a reference, with a frequency genera-

tor
This reference is not signed, therefore the directions of operation must be given via the control channel (logic inputs, for example).

Minimum and maximum values (input values):

The minimum value corresponds to a minimum reference of 0% and the maximum value to a maximum reference of 100%. The minimum
value may be greater than the maximum value. It may also be negative.

Reference
Reference

100 % 100 %

Frequency Frequency
input input
0 0
[Freq. min. [Freq. max. 300 kHz [Freq. max. [Freq. min. 300 kHz
value] value] value] value]
(EIL) (EFr) (EFr) (EIL)

Reference

100 %

Frequency
[Freq. min. 0 [Freq. max. 300 kHz input
value] value]
(EIL) (EFr)

A reference can be obtained at zero frequency by assigning a negative value to the minimum value.

BBV19478 11/2011 185

[1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I-O-)

The encoder configuration can also be accessed in the [1.4 MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-) menu.

Note 1: When an encoder is used with a VW3 A3 408 or VW3 A3 409 card, it is only possible to configure the "encoder" input for
speed feedback. Functions can only be configured as references or inputs with a VW3 A3 401 to 407 and VW3 A3 411 card.
Note 2: When an encoder is used with a VW3 A3 409 card, the drive remains locked in stop mode (displays nSt or nLP) if the
encoder is not fully configured.

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

IEn- [ENCODER CONFIGURATION]

The encoder parameters can only be accessed if a compatible encoder card has been inserted, and the
available selections will depend on the type of encoder card used.

EnS M [Encoder type] [AABB] (AAbb)

This parameter can be accessed if an incremental encoder card has been inserted.
To be configured in accordance with the type of encoder used.
nO v [No] (nO): Function inactive.
AAbb v [AABB] (AAbb): For signals A, A-, B, B- or A, A-, B, B-, Z, Z-
Ab v [AB] (Ab): For signals A, B.
A v [A] (A): For signal A. Value cannot be accessed if [Encoder usage] (EnU) = [Spd fdk reg.] (rEG)
EnC M [Encoder check] [Not done] (nO)

Check encoder feedback. See procedure page 150.

This parameter can be accessed if an encoder card has been inserted and if [Encoder usage] (EnU) is not
[Speed ref.] (PGr).
nO v [Not done] (nO): Check not performed.
YES v [Yes] (YES): Activates monitoring of the encoder.
dOnE v [Done] (dOnE): Check performed successfully.
The check procedure checks:
- The direction of rotation of the encoder/motor
- The presence of signals (wiring continuity)
- The number of pulses/revolution
If a fault is detected, the drive locks in [Encoder fault] (EnF) fault mode.

EnU M [Encoder usage] [No] (nO)

This parameter can be accessed if an encoder card has been inserted.

nO v [No] (nO): Function inactive, In this case, the other parameters cannot be accessed.
SEC v [Fdbk monit.] (SEC): The encoder provides speed feedback for monitoring only.
rEG v [Spd fdk reg.] (rEG): The encoder provides speed feedback for regulation and monitoring. This
configuration is automatic if the drive is configured for closed-loop operation ([Motor control type] (Ctt) =
[FVC] (FUC) or [Sync.CL] (FSY). If [Motor control type] (Ctt) = [SVC V] (UUC) the encoder operates in speed
feedback mode and enables static correction of the speed to be performed. This configuration is not
accessible for other [Motor control type] (Ctt) values.
PGr v [Speed ref.] (PGr): The encoder provides a reference. Can only be selected with an incremental encoder
card.
COr v [Slip Comp.] (COr)The encoder provides speed feedback for speed correction and monitoring.
This configuration is accesible if [Motor control type](Ctt) is set to [Sync.CL] (FSY). The encoder enables a
dynamic and static correction of the speed. This choise could be used in case of random error on the
encoder feedback (encoder slipping at high speed for example). The less the encoder feedback is reliable,
the more the drive will work as in open-loop operation.

EnrI M [Coder rotation inv.] [No] (nO)

This parameter can be accessed if an encoder card has been inserted. Activates reversal of encoder
rotation.
In some assemblies, the encoder positive direction of rotation is reversed in relation to the motor direction.
When this is the case, this parameter needs to be activated in order for the motor and the encoder both to
have a positive direction of rotation.
nO v [No] (nO): Reversal not activated
YES v [Yes] (YES): Reversal activated

186 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I-O-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

[ENCODER CONFIGURATION] (continued)

PGI M [Number of pulses] 100 to 32767 1024

Number of pulses per encoder revolution.

This parameter can be accessed if a VW3 A3 401 to 407 or VW3 A3 411 card has been inserted.

PGA M [Reference type] [Encoder] (EnC)

This parameter can be accessed if [Encoder usage] (EnU) = [Speed ref.] (PGr) and if [Reference type]
(PGA) = [Freq. gen.] (PtG).
Frequency corresponding to the minimum speed.

EFr M [Freq. max value] 0.00 to 300 kHz 300 kHz

This parameter can be accessed if [Encoder usage] (EnU) = [Speed ref.] (PGr) and if [Reference type]
(PGA) = [Freq. gen.] (PtG).
Frequency corresponding to the maximum speed.

EFI M [Freq. signal filter] 0 to 1000 ms 0

This parameter can be accessed if [Encoder usage] (EnU) = [Speed ref.] (PGr).
Interference filtering.

FrES M [Resolver Exct. Freq.] [8 kHz] (8)

Resolver excitation frequency. This parameter can be accessed if a VW3 A3 408 encoder card (for resolver)
has been inserted.
4 v [4 kHz] (4): 4 kHz
8 v [8 kHz] (8): 8 kHz
12 v [12 kHz] (12): 12 kHz
rPPn M [Resolver poles nbr] [2 poles] (2P)

Number of resolver poles. This parameter can be accessed if a VW3 A3 408 encoder card (for resolver) has
been inserted.
2P v [2 poles] (2P): 2 poles, max. speed 7500 rpm
4P v [4 poles] (4P): 4 poles, max. speed 3750 rpm
6P v [6 poles] (6P): 6 poles, max. speed 2500 rpm
8P v [8 poles] (8P): 8 poles, max. speed 1875 rpm
If the number of motor poles is not a whole multiple of the number of resolver poles, the resolver is
a relative encoder and no longer absolute. You should therefore set the [Angle setting activ.]
(AtA) parameter = [Power On] (POn) or [Run order] (AUtO).

BBV19478 11/2011 187

[1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I-O-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

[ENCODER CONFIGURATION] (continued)

These parameters can be accessed if a VW3 A3 409 encoder card has been inserted.

UECP M [Encoder protocol] [Undefined] (Und)

Type of encoder used.

Und v [Undefined] (Und): Not defined.
End v [EnDat 2.1] (End): EnDat encoder.
SCHP v [Hiperface] (SCHP): Hiperface encoder.
SC v [SinCos] (SC): SinCos encoder.
SSI v [SSI] (SSI): SSI encoder.
EnSC v [EndatSincos] (EnSC): EndatSincos encoder.
UECU M [Encoder supply volt.] [Undefined] (Und)

Rated voltage of encoder used. The parameter can be accessed if [Encoder protocol] (UECP) is not
[Undefined] (Und).
Und v [Undefined] (Und): Not defined.
5U v [5 volts] (5U): 5 Volts. Only possible value if [Encoder protocol] (UECP) = [EnDat 2.1] (End) or
[EndatSincos] (EnSC).
8U v [8 volts] (8U): 8 Volts.
12U v [12 volts] (12U): 12 Volts.
To make any changes to this parameter with the integrated display terminal, press and hold down the "ENT"
key for 2 s for the change to be taken into account. When using the graphic display terminal, confirmation
is requested.

UELC M [Sincos lines count] [Undefined] (Und)

Number of lines. This parameter can be accessed if [Encoder protocol] (UECP) = [SinCos] (SC) or
[EndatSinCos] (End).
Und v [Undefined] (Und): Not defined.
- v 1 to 10000: 1 to 10,000 lines.
SSCP M [SSI parity] [Undefined] (Und)

Parity. This parameter can be accessed if [Encoder protocol] (UECP) = [SSI] (SSI).
Und v [Undefined] (Und): Not defined.
nO v [No parity] (nO): No parity.
Odd v [Odd parity] (Odd): Odd parity.
EUEn v [Even parity] (EUEn): Even parity.
SSFS M [SSI frame size] [Undefined] (Und)

Frame length (number of bits). This parameter can be accessed if [Encoder protocol] (UECP) = [SSI] (SSI).
Und v [Undefined] (Und): Not defined. Only possible value if [SSI parity] (SSCP) = [Undefined] (Und).
- v 10 to 27: 10 to 25 if [SSI parity] (SSCP) = [No parity] (nO).
12 to 27 if [SSI parity] (SSCP) = [Odd parity] (Odd) or [Even parity] (EUEn).

EnMr M [Nbr of revolution] [Undefined] (Und)

Format of the number of revolutions (in number of bits). This parameter can be accessed if
[Encoder protocol] (UECP) = [SSI] (SSI).
Und v [Undefined] (Und): Not defined. Only possible value if [SSI frame size] (SSFS) = [Undefined] (Und).
- v 0 to 15: 0 to [SSI frame size] (SSFS) - 10 if [SSI parity] (SSCP) = [No parity] (nO).
0 to [SSI frame size] (SSFS) - 12 if [SSI parity] (SSCP) = [Odd parity] (Odd) or [Even parity] (EUEn).

Entr M [Turn bit resolution] [Undefined] (Und)

Resolution per revolution (in number of bits). This parameter can be accessed if [Encoder protocol]
Und (UECP) = [SSI] (SSI).
- v [Undefined] (Und): Not defined. Only value possible if[Nbr of revolution] (EnMr) = [Undefined] (Und).
v 10 to 25: If [SSI parity] (SSCP) = [No parity] (nO), the maximum value is:
[SSI frame size] (SSFS) - [Nbr of revolution] (EnMr).
If [SSI parity] (SSCP) = [Odd parity] (Odd) or [Even parity] (EUEn), the maximum value is:
[SSI frame size] (SSFS) - [Nbr of revolution] (EnMr) - 2.

188 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I-O-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

[ENCODER CONFIGURATION] (continued)

These parameters can be accessed if a VW3 A3 409 encoder card has been inserted.

SSCd M [SSI code type] [Undefined] (Und)

Type of code. This parameter can be accessed if [Encoder protocol] (UECP) = [SSI] (SSI).
Und v [Undefined] (Und): Not defined.
bIn v [Binary code (bIn): Binary code.
GrAY v [Gray code] (GrAY): Gray code.

EnSP M [Clock frequency] [500 kHz] (500)

This parameter can be accessed if [ACCESS LEVEL] = [Expert] and if [Encoder protocol] (UECP) = [SSI]
(SSI) or [EnDat 2.1] (End) ou [EndatSincos] (EnSC).
Clock frequency for Endat encoder, SSI encoder, and Endat Sincos encoder.
160 v [160 kHz] (160)
200 v [200 kHz] (200)
300 v [300 kHz] (300)
400 v [400 kHz] (400)
500 v [500 kHz] (500)
600 v [600 kHz] (600)
700 v [700 kHz] (700)
800 v [800 kHz] (800)
AUtO v [Auto] (AUtO) : This value appears only if [Encoder protocol] (UECP) = [SSI] (SSI) and if the version
of this encoder board is upper or equal to V1.2IE01.

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

[ENCODER CONFIGURATION] (continued)

These parameters can only be accessed when [ACCESS LEVEL] = [Expert] and an encoder card has
been inserted.

FFA M [Encoder filter activ.] [No] (nO)

Activation of encoder feedback filter.

nO v [No] (no): Filter deactivated.
YES v [Yes] (YES): Filter activated.
FFr M [Encoder filter value] 0 to 50 ms Acc. to encoder type

This parameter can be accessed if [Encoder filter activ.] (FFA) = [Yes] (YES).
T Encoder feedback filter time constant in milliseconds.

T Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.

BBV19478 11/2011 189

[1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I-O-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

r1- [R1 CONFIGURATION]

r1 M [R1 Assignment] [No] (nO)

nO v [No] (nO): Not assigned

FLt v [No drive flt] (FLt): Drive fault detection status (relay normally energized, and de-energized if there is a
trip)
rUn v [Drv running] (rUn): Drive running
OCC v [Output cont] (OCC): Output contactor control
FtA v [Freq. Th. attain.] (FtA): Frequency threshold attained ([Freq. threshold] (Ftd) page 144)
FLA v [HSP attain.] (FLA): High speed attained
CtA v [I attained] (CtA): Current threshold attained ([Current threshold] (Ctd) page 143)
SrA v [Freq.ref.att] (SrA): Frequency reference attained
tSA v [Th.mot. att.] (tSA): Motor 1 thermal state attained
AP2 v [AI2 Al. 4-20] (AP2): Alarm indicating absence of 4-20 mA signal on input AI2
F2A v [FreqTh.att.2] (F2A): Frequency threshold 2 attained ([Freq. threshold 2] (F2d) page 144)
tAd v [Th. drv. att.] (tAd): Drive thermal state attained
ttHA v [High tq. att.] (ttHA): Motor torque higher than high threshold [High torque thd.] (ttH) page 143.
ttLA v [Low tq. att.] (ttLA): Motor torque less than low threshold [Low torque thd.] (ttL) page 143.
MFrd v [Forward] (MFrd): Motor running forward
MrrS v [Reverse] (MrrS): Motor running in reverse
tS2 v [Th.mot2 att] (tS2): Motor 2 thermal state attained
tS3 v [Th.mot3 att] (tS3): Motor 3 thermal state attained
AtS v [Neg Torque] (AtS): Negative torque (braking)
CnF0 v [Cnfg.0 act.] (CnF0): Configuration 0 active
CnF1 v [Cnfg.1 act.] (CnF1): Configuration 1 active
CnF2 v [Cnfg.2 act.] (CnF2): Configuration 2 active
CFP1 v [set 1 active] (CFP1): Parameter set 1 active
CFP2 v [set 2 active] (CFP2): Parameter set 2 active
CFP3 v [set 3 active] (CFP3): Parameter set 3 active
dbL v [DC charged] (dbL): DC bus charging
brS v [In braking] (brS): Drive braking
PrM v [P. removed] (PRM): Drive locked by "Power removal" input
FqLA v [Fr.met. alar.] (FqLA): Measured speed threshold attained: [Pulse warning thd.] (FqL) page 144.
MCP v [I present] (MCP): Motor current present
LSA v [Limit sw. att] (LSA): Limit switch reached
AG1 v [Alarm Grp 1] (AGI): Alarm group 1
AG2 v [Alarm Grp 2] (AG2): Alarm group 2
AG3 v [Alarm Grp 3] (AG3): Alarm group 3
P1A v [PTC1 alarm] (P1A): Probe alarm 1
P2A v [PTC2 alarm] (P2A): Probe alarm 2
PLA v [LI6=PTC al.] (PLA): LI6 = PTC probe alarm
tAP v [Rampe Mode] (tAP): Torque application mode
EFA v [Ext. fault al] (EFA): External fault alarm
USA v [Under V. al.] (USA): Undervoltage alarm
UPA v [Uvolt warn] (UPA): Undervoltage threshold
AnA v [slipping al.] (AnA): Slipping alarm
tHA v [Al. °C drv.] (tHA): Drive overheating
bSA v [Load mvt al] (bSA): Braking speed alarm
bCA v [Brk cont. al] (bCA): Brake contact alarm
SSA v [Lim T/I att.] (SSA): Torque limit alarm
rtA v [Trq. ctrl. al.] (rtA): Torque control alarm
tJA v [IGBT al.] (tJA): IGBT alarm
bOA v [Brake R. al.] (bOA): Braking resistor temperature alarm
APA v [Option al.] (APA): Alarm generated by the Controller Inside card
AP3 v [AI3 Al. 4-20] (AP3): Alarm indicating absence of 4-20 mA signal on input AI3
AP4 v [AI4 Al. 4-20] (AP4): Alarm indicating absence of 4-20 mA signal on input AI4
Opt v [Rescue dir.] (Opt): Optimized direction for rescue mode.(see page 101)
rdY v [Ready] (rdY): Drive ready
rdYr v [Rdy to run] (rdYr): The drive is ready to start or already started without any detected fault or blocking
state

190 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I-O-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

[R1 CONFIGURATION] (continued)

r1d M [R1 Delay time] 0 to 9999 ms 0

The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed, when the information
becomes true.
The delay cannot be set for the [No drive flt] (FLt) and [Output cont.] (OCC) assignment, and remains at 0.

r1S M [R1 Active at] [1 ] (POS)

Configuration of the operating logic:

POS v [1] (POS): State 1 when the information is true
nEG v [0] (nEG): State 0 when the information is true
Configuration [1] (POS) cannot be modified for the [No drive flt] (FLt) assignment.

r1H M [R1 Holding time] 0 to 9999 ms 0

The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed, when the information
becomes false.
The holding time cannot be set for the [No drive flt] (FLt) assignment, and remains at 0.

r2- [R2 CONFIGURATION]

r2 M [R2 Assignment] [Brk control] (bLC)

Identical to R1 (see page 190) with the addition of (shown for information only as these selections can only
be configured in the [1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (Fun-) menu):
bLC v [Brk control] (bLC): Brake contactor control
LLC v [Input cont.] (LLC): Line contactor control
dCO v [DC charging] (dCO): DC bus precharging contactor control.
r2d M [R2 Delay time] 0 to 9999 ms 0

The delay cannot be set for the [No drive flt] (FLt), [Brk control] (bLC), [Output cont.] (OCC), [DC charging]
(dCO), and [Input cont.] (LLC) assignments, and remains at 0.
The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed, when the information
becomes true.

r2S M [R2 Active at] [1 ] (POS)

Configuration of the operating logic:

POS v [1] (POS): State 1 when the information is true
nEG v [0] (nEG): State 0 when the information is true
The configuration [1 ] (POS) cannot be modified for the [No drive flt] (FLt), [Brk control] (bLC), [DC charging]
(dCO), and [Input cont.] (LLC) assignments.

r2H M [R2 Holding time] 0 to 9999 ms 0

The holding time cannot be set for the [No drive flt] (FLt), [Brk control] (bLC), [DC charging] (dCO), and
[Input cont] (LLC) assignments, and remains at 0.
The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed, when the information becomes
false.

BBV19478 11/2011 191

[1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I-O-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

r3- [R3 CONFIGURATION]

Can be accessed if a VW3A3201 option card has been inserted

r3 M [R3 Assignment] [No] (nO)

Identical to R2

r3d M [R3 Delay time] 0 to 9999 ms 0

r3S M [R3 Active at] [1 ] (POS)

Configuration of the operating logic:

r3H M [R3 Holding time] 0 to 9999 ms 0

r4- [R4 CONFIGURATION]

Can be accessed if a VW3A3202 option card has been inserted

r4 M [R4 Assignment] [No] (nO)

Identical to R2 (see page 191).

r4d M [R4 Delay time] 0 to 9999 ms 0

r4S M [R4 Active at] [1 ] (POS)

Configuration of the operating logic:

r4H M [R4 Holding time] 0 to 9999 ms 0

192 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I-O-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

LO1- [LO1 CONFIGURATION]

Can be accessed if a VW3A3201 option card has been inserted

LO1 M [LO1 assignment] [No] (nO)

LO1S M [LO1 active at] [1 ] (POS)

Configuration of the operating logic:

LO1H M [LO1 holding time] 0 to 9999 ms 0

LO2- [LO2 CONFIGURATION]

Can be accessed if a VW3A3201 option card has been inserted

LO2 M [LO2 assignment] [No] (nO)

Identical to LO1.

LO2d M [LO2 delay time] 0 to 9999 ms 0

LO2S M [LO2 active at] [1 ] (POS)

Configuration of the operating logic:

LO2H M [LO2 holding time] 0 to 9999 ms 0

BBV19478 11/2011 193

[1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I-O-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

LO3- [LO3 CONFIGURATION]

Can be accessed if a VW3A3202 option card has been inserted

LO3 M [LO3 assignment] [No] (nO)

Identical to LO1 (see page 193).

LO3d M [LO3 delay time] 0 to 9999 ms 0

LO3S M [LO3 active at] [1 ] (POS)

Configuration of the operating logic:

LO3H M [LO3 holding time] 0 to 9999 ms 0

LO4- [LO4 CONFIGURATION]

Can be accessed if a VW3A3202 option card has been inserted

LO4 M [LO4 assignment] [No] (nO)

Identical to LO1 (see page 193).

LO4d M [LO4 delay time] 0 to 9999 ms 0

LO4S M [LO4 active at] [1 ] (POS)

Configuration of the operating logic:

LO4H M [LO4 holding time] 0 to 9999 ms 0

194 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I-O-)

Use of analog output AO1 as a logic output

Analog output AO1 can be used as a logic output, by assigning dO1. In this case, state 0 of this output corresponds to the minimum value
of AO1 (0 V or 0 mA, for example), and state 1 corresponds to the maximum value of AO1 (10 V or 20 mA, for example).
The electrical characteristics of this analog output remain unchanged. As they differ from logic output characteristics, check that they are
compatible with the intended application.

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

dO1- [DO1 CONFIGURATION]

dO1 M [DO1 assignment] [Output cont] (OCC)

Identical to R1 (see page 190) with the addition of (shown for information only as these selections can only
be configured in the [1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (Fun-) menu):
bLC v [Brk control] (bLC): Brake contactor control
LLC v [Input cont.] (LLC): Line contactor control
OCC v [Output cont.] (OCC) : Output contactor control
dCO v [DC charging] (dCO): DC bus precharging contactor control
dO1d M [DO1 delay time] 0 to 9999 ms 0

dO1S M [DO1 active at] [1 ] (POS)

Configuration of the operating logic:

dO1H M [DO1 holding time] 0 to 9999 ms 0

BBV19478 11/2011 195

[1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I-O-)

Configuration of analog outputs

Minimum and maximum values (output values):
The minimum output value, in volts or mA, corresponds to the lower limit of the assigned parameter and the maximum value corresponds
to its upper limit. The minimum value may be greater than the maximum value:

Assigned parameter
Assigned parameter

Upper limit Upper limit

Lower Current or Lower Current or

limit voltage limit voltage
[Min Output] [Max Output] 20 mA output [Max Output] [Min Output] 20 mA
output
(AOLx or (AOHx or or (AOHx or (AOLx or or
UOLx) UOHx) 10 V UOHx) UOLx) 10 V

Outputs AO2 and AO3 configured as bipolar outputs (strongly recommended for signed parameters):

The [min Output] (UOLx) and [max Output] (UOHx) parameters are absolute values, although they function symmetrically. In the case of
bipolar outputs, always set the maximum value higher than the minimum value.
The [max Output] (UOHx) corresponds to the upper limit of the assigned parameter, and the [min Output] (UOLx) corresponds to an average
value between the upper and lower limits (0 for a signed and symmetrical parameter such as in the example below).

Assigned
parameter

Upper limit

- 10 V
Voltage
[min Output] [max Output] + 10 V output
(UOLx) (UOHx)

Lower limit

196 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I-O-)

Scaling of the assigned parameter

The scale of the assigned parameter can be adapted in accordance with requirements by modifying the values of the lower and upper limits
by means of two parameters for each analog output.
These parameters are given as a %; 100% corresponds to the total variation range of the configured parameter, so:
- 100% = upper limit - lower limit. For example, for [Sign. torque] (Stq), which varies between -3 and +3 times the rated torque,
100% corresponds to 6 times the rated torque.

• The parameter [Scaling AOx min] (ASLx) modifies the lower limit: new value = lower limit + (range x ASLx). The value 0%
(factory setting) does not modify the lower limit.
• The [Scaling AOx max] (ASLx) parameter modifies the upper limit: new value = lower limit + (range x ASHx). The value 100%
(factory setting) does not modify the upper limit.
• [Scaling AOx min] (ASLx) must always be lower than [Scaling AOx max] (ASHx).

Upper limit of the assigned parameter

100 %
New scale
ASHx

ASLx

Lower limit of the assigned parameter

Application example 1
The value of the signed motor torque at the AO2 output is to be transferred with +/- 10 V, with a range of -2 Tr to +2 Tr.

The parameter [Sign. torque.] (Stq) varies between -3 and +3 times the rated torque, or a range of 6 times the rated torque.

[Scaling AO2 min] (ASL2) must modify the lower limit by 1x the rated torque, or 100/6 = 16.7% (new value = lower limit + (range x ASL2).

[Scaling AO2 max] (ASH2) must modify the upper limit by 1x the rated torque, or 100 - 100/6 = 83.3% (new value = lower limit +
(range x ASH2).

Application example 2
The value of the motor current at the AO2 output is to be transferred with 0 - 20 mA, with a range of 2 In motor, In motor being the equivalent
of a 0.8 In drive.

The parameter [I motor] (OCr) varies between 0 and 2 times the rated drive current, or a range of 2.5 times the rated drive current.

[Scaling AO2 min] (ASL2) must not modify the lower limit, which therefore remains at its factory setting of 0%.

[Scaling AO2 max] (ASH2) must modify the upper limit by 0.5x the rated motor torque, or 100 - 100/5 = 80% (new value = lower limit +
(range x ASH2).

BBV19478 11/2011 197

[1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I-O-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

AO1- [AO1 CONFIGURATION]

AO1 M [AO1 assignment] [dO1] (dO1)

nO v [No] (nO): Not assigned

OCr v [I motor] (OCr): Current in the motor, between 0 and 2 In (In = rated drive current indicated in the
Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate).
OFr v [Motor freq.] (OFr): Output frequency, between 0 and [Max frequency] (tFr)
OrP v [Ramp out.] (OrP): Between 0 and [Max frequency] (tFr)
trq v [Motor torq.] (trq): Motor torque, between 0 and 3 times the rated motor torque
Stq v [Sign. torque] (Stq): Signed motor torque, between -3 and +3 times the rated motor torque. The + sign
corresponds to motor mode and the - sign to generator mode (braking).
OPS v [PID ref.] (OPS): PID reference
OPF v [PID feedbk] (OPF): PID feedback
OPE v [PID error] (OPE): PID error
OPI v [PID output] (OPI): PID integral
OrS v [sign ramp] (OrS): Signed ramp output, between - [Max frequency] (tFr) and + [Max frequency] (tFr)
OPr v [Mot. power] (OPr): Motor power, between 0 and 2.5 times [Rated motor power] (nPr)
tHr v [Mot thermal] (tHr): Motor thermal state, between 0 and 200% of the rated thermal state
tHd v [Drv thermal] (tHd): Drive thermal state, between 0 and 200% of the rated thermal state
tqMS v [Torque 4Q] (tqMS): Signed motor torque, between -3 and +3 times the rated motor torque. The + sign
and the - sign correspond to the physical direction of the torque, regardless of mode (motor or generator).
Example of usage: "master-slave" with the [TORQUE CONTROL] (tOr-) function, page 248.
OFrr v [Meas.mot.fr] (OFrr): Measured motor speed
OFS v [Sig. o/p frq.] (OFS): Signed output frequency, between - [Max frequency] (tFr) and + [Max frequency] (tFr)
tHr2 v [Mot therm2] (tHr2): Thermal state of motor 2, between 0 and 200% of the rated thermal state
tHr3 v [Mot therm3] (tHr3): Thermal state of motor 3, between 0 and 200% of the rated thermal state
Utr v [Uns.TrqRef] (Utr): Torque reference, between 0 and 3 times the rated motor torque
Str v [Sign trq ref.] (Str): Signed torque reference, between -3 and +3 times the rated motor torque
tqL v [Torque lim.] (tqL): Torque limit, between 0 and 3 times the rated motor torque
UOP v [Motor volt.] (UOP): Voltage applied to the motor, between 0 and [Rated motor volt.] (UnS)
dO1 v [dO1] (dO1): Assigned as logic output. This assignment can only appear if [DO1 assignment] (dO1)
page 195 has been assigned. This is the only possible choice in this case, and is displayed for information
purposes only.

AO1t M [AO1 Type] [Current] (0A)

10U v [Voltage] (10U): Voltage output

0A v [Current] (0 A): Current output
AOL1 M [AO1 min Output] 0 to 20.0 mA 0 mA

This parameter can be accessed if [AO1 Type] (AO1t) = [Current] (0A)

AOH1 M [AO1 max Output] 0 to 20.0 mA 20.0 mA

This parameter can be accessed if [AO1 Type] (AO1t) = [Current] (0A)

UOL1 M [AO1 min Output] 0 to 10.0 V 0V

This parameter can be accessed if [AO1 Type] (AO1t) = [Voltage] (10U)

UOH1 M [AO1 max Output] 0 to 10.0 V 10.0 V

This parameter can be accessed if [AO1 Type] (AO1t) = [Voltage] (10U)

198 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I-O-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

AO1- [AO1 CONFIGURATION] (continued)

ASL1 M [Scaling AO1 min] 0 to 100.0 % 0%

Scaling of the lower limit of the assigned parameter, as a % of the maximum possible variation.

ASH1 M [Scaling AO1 max] 0 to 100.0 % 100,0 %

Scaling of the upper limit of the assigned parameter, as a % of the maximum possible variation.

AO1F M [AO1 Filter] 0 to 10.00 s 0s

Interference filtering. This parameter is forced to 0 if [AO1 assignment] (AO1) = [dO1] (dO1).

BBV19478 11/2011 199

[1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I-O-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

AO2- [AO2 CONFIGURATION]

Can be accessed if a VW3A3202 option card has been inserted

AO2 M [AO2 assignment] [No] (nO)

Same assignments as AO1, without [dO1] (dO1).

AO2t M [AO2 Type] [Current] (0A)

10U v [Voltage] (10U): Voltage output

0A v [Current] (0 A): Current output
n10U v [Voltage +/-] (n10U): Bipolar voltage output
AOL2 M [AO2 min Output] 0 to 20.0 mA 0 mA

This parameter can be accessed if [AO2 Type] (AO2t) = [Current] (0A)

AOH2 M [AO2 max Output] 0 to 20.0 mA 20.0 mA

This parameter can be accessed if [AO2 Type] (AO2t) = [Current] (0A)

UOL2 M [AO2 min Output] 0 to 10.0 V 0V

This parameter can be accessed if [AO2 Type] (AO2t) = [Voltage] (10U) or [Voltage +/-] (n10U)

UOH2 M [AO2 max Output] 0 to 10.0 V 10.0 V

This parameter can be accessed if [AO2 Type] (AO2t) = [Voltage] (10U) or [Voltage +/-] (n10U)

ASL2 M [Scaling AO2 min] 0 to 100.0 % 0%

Scaling of the lower limit of the assigned parameter, as a % of the maximum possible variation.

ASH2 M [Scaling AO2 max] 0 to 100.0 % 100,0 %

Scaling of the upper limit of the assigned parameter, as a % of the maximum possible variation.

AO2F M [AO2 Filter] 0 to 10.00 s 0s

Interference filtering.

200 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I-O-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

AO3- [AO3 CONFIGURATION]

Can be accessed if a VW3A3202 option card has been inserted

AO3 M [AO3 assignment] [No] (nO)

Same assignments as AO1, without [dO1] (dO1).

AO3t M [AO3 Type] [Current] (0A)

10U v [Voltage] (10U): Voltage output

0A v [Current] (0 A): Current output
n10U v [Voltage +/-] (n10U): Bipolar voltage output
AOL3 M [AO3 min Output] 0 to 20.0 mA 0 mA

This parameter can be accessed if [AO3 Type] (AO3t) = [Current] (0A)

AOH3 M [AO3 max Output] 0 to 20.0 mA 20.0 mA

This parameter can be accessed if [AO3 Type] (AO3t) = [Current] (0A)

UOL3 M [AO3 min Output] 0 to 10.0 V 0V

This parameter can be accessed if [AO3 Type] (AO3t) = [Voltage] (10U) or [Voltage +/-] (n10U)

UOH3 M [AO3 max Output] 0 to 10.0 V 10.0 V

This parameter can be accessed if [AO3 Type] (AO3t) = [Voltage] (10U) or [Voltage +/-] (n10U)

ASL3 M [Scaling AO3 min] 0 to 100.0 % 0%

Scaling of the lower limit of the assigned parameter, as a % of the maximum possible variation.

ASH3 M [Scaling AO3 max] 0 to 100.0 % 100,0 %

Scaling of the upper limit of the assigned parameter, as a % of the maximum possible variation.

AO3F M [AO3 Filter] 0 to 10.00 s 0s

Interference filtering.

BBV19478 11/2011 201

[1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I-O-)

The following submenus group the alarms into 1 to 3 groups, each of which can be assigned to a relay or a logic output for remote signaling.
These groups can also be displayed on the graphic display terminal (see [6 MONITORING CONFIG.] menu) and viewed via the
[1.2 MONITORING] (SUP) menu.
When one or a number of alarms selected in a group occurs, this alarm group is activated.

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

A1C-
[ALARM GRP1 DEFINITION]
Selection to be made from the following list:
PLA v [LI6=PTC al.] (PLA): LI6 = PTC probe alarm
P1A v [PTC1 alarm] (P1A): Probe alarm 1
P2A v [PTC2 alarm] (P2A): Probe alarm 2
EFA v [Ext. fault al] (EFA): External fault alarm
USA v [Under V. al.] (USA): Undervoltage alarm
AnA v [slipping al.] (AnA): Slipping alarm
CtA v [I attained] (CtA): Current threshold attained ([Current threshold] (Ctd) page 143)
FtA v [Freq. Th. attain.] (FtA): Frequency threshold attained ([Freq. threshold] (Ftd) page 144)
F2A v [FreqTh.att.2] (F2A): Frequency threshold 2 attained ([Freq. threshold 2] (F2d) page 144)
SrA v [Freq.ref.att] (SrA): Frequency reference attained
tSA v [Th.mot. att.] (tSA): Motor 1 thermal state attained
tS2 v [Th.mot2 att] (tS2): Motor 2 thermal state attained
tS3 v [Th.mot3 att] (tS3): Motor 3 thermal state attained
UPA v [Uvolt warn] (UPA): Undervoltage threshold
FLA v [HSP attain.] (FLA): High speed attained
tHA v [Al. °C drv.] (tHA): Drive overheating
bSA v [Load mvt al] (bSA): Braking speed alarm
bCA v [Brk cont. al] (bCA): Brake contact alarm
AP2 v [AI2 Al. 4-20] (AP2): Alarm indicating absence of 4-20 mA signal on input AI2
AP3 v [AI3 Al. 4-20] (AP3): Alarm indicating absence of 4-20 mA signal on input AI3
AP4 v [AI4 Al. 4-20] (AP4): Alarm indicating absence of 4-20 mA signal on input AI4
SSA v [Lim T/I att.] (SSA): Torque limit alarm
tAd v [Th. drv. att.] (tAd): Drive thermal state reached
tJA v [IGBT alarm] (tJA): IGBT alarm
rtA v [Torque Control al.] (rtA): Torque control alarm
bOA v [Brake R. al.] (bOA): Braking resistor temperature alarm
APA v [Option alarm] (APA): Alarm generated by an option card.
UrA v [Regen. underV. al.] (UrA): Reserved.
ttHA v [High torque alarm] (ttHA): Motor torque higher than high threshold [High torque thd.] (ttH) page 143.
ttLA v [Low torque alarm] (ttLA): Motor torque less than low threshold [Low torque thd.] (ttL) page 143.
FqLA v [Freq. meter Alarm] (FqLA): Measured speed threshold attained: [Pulse warning thd.] (FqL) page 144.
See the multiple selection procedure on page 26 for the integrated display terminal, and page 17 for the graphic
display terminal.

A2C-
[ALARM GRP2 DEFINITION]
Identical to [ALARM GRP1 DEFINITION] (A1C-)

A3C-
[ALARM GRP3 DEFINITION]
Identical to [ALARM GRP1 DEFINITION] (A1C-)

202 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.6 COMMAND] (CtL-)

With graphic display terminal:

RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A

1 DRIVE MENU
1.1 LIFT
1.2 MONITORING
1.3 SETTINGS
1.4 MOTOR CONTROL
RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A 1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG RUN Term +50.00Hz 80A
MAIN MENU Code << >> Quick 1.6 COMMAND
ENT ENT
1 DRIVE MENU 1.6 COMMAND Ref. channel 1
2 ACCESS LEVEL 1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT. RV Inhibition
3 OPEN / SAVE AS 1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT Stop Key priority
4 PASSWORD 1.9 COMMUNICATION Channel configProfile.
5 LANGUAGE 1.10 DIAGNOSTICS Cmd switching
Code Quick 1.11 IDENTIFICATION Code << >> Quick
1.12 FACTORY SETTINGS
1.13 USER MENU
1.14 CONTROL. INSIDE CARD

With integrated display terminal:

Turn on

XXX Displays the state of the drive

ENT

ESC

LIF-

ESC

I-O-
ENT
ESC

CtL- COMMAND
ESC

ESC

FUn-

ESC

LAC-

BBV19478 11/2011 203

[1.6 COMMAND] (CtL-)

The parameters in the [1.6 COMMAND] (CtL) menu can only be modified when the drive is stopped and no run command is present.

Command and reference channels

Run commands (forward, reverse, stop, etc.) and references can be sent using the following channels:

Control Reference
• Terminals: Logic inputs LI • Terminals: Analog inputs AI, frequency input, encoder
• Graphic terminal • Graphic terminal
• Integrated Modbus • Integrated Modbus
• Integrated CANopen • Integrated CANopen
• Communication card • Communication card
• Controller Inside card • Controller Inside card
• +/- speed via the terminals
• +/- speed via the graphic display terminal

The behavior of the Altivar LIFT can be adapted according to requirements:

• [Not separ.] (SIM): Command and reference are sent via the same channel.
• [Separate] (SEP): Command and reference may be sent via different channels.
In these configurations, control via the communication bus is performed in accordance with the DRIVECOM standard with only 5 freely-
assignable bits (see Communication Parameters Manual). The application functions cannot be accessed via the communication interface.

• [I/O profile] (IO): Command and reference may be sent via different channels. This configuration both simplifies and extends use via
the communication interface.
Commands may be sent via the logic inputs on the terminals or via the communication bus.
When commands are sent via a bus, they are available on a word, which acts as virtual terminals containing only logic inputs.
Application functions can be assigned to the bits in this word. More than one function can be assigned to the same bit.

Note: Stop commands from the terminals remain active even if the terminals are not the active command channel.

Note: The integrated Modbus channel has two physical communication ports:
- The Modbus network port
- The Modbus HMI port
The drive does not differentiate between these two ports, but recognizes the graphic display terminal irrespective of the port to
which it is connected.

204 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.6 COMMAND] (CtL-)

Reference channel for [Not separ.] (SIM), [Separate] (SEP) and [I/O profile] (IO) confi-
gurations

[Ref 1B switching]
FLOC
rCb
[Ref.1 channel] 0V nO

Fr1 AI1
Note: Forced local is not
(FRA + SA2 + SA3 - dA2 - dA3) x MA2 x MA3

Preset
Fr1b FRA AI2 active in [I/O profile].
speeds
[Ref.1B channel]
AI3
[Summing ref. 2] nO LFr
Graphic AI4
SA2
(SP1) terminal LCC
[Summing ref. 3]
SP2
SA3
[Subtract. ref. 2]
dA2 SP16
[Subtract. ref. 3]
dA3
[Multiplier ref. 2]
NA2
[Multiplier ref. 3]
NA3

[High Ramps
Channe

LI speed]
HSP ACC DEC
FrH rFr
nO
[Ref.2 channel] nO
LSP AC2 DE2
Fr2 [Low speed]
Channel

FLO
Key: Forced local
rFC
[Ref. 2 switching]

Parameter:
The black square represents
the factory setting assignment.

References
Fr1, SA2, SA3, dA2, dA3, MA2, MA3:
• Terminals, graphic display terminal, integrated Modbus, integrated CANopen, communication card, Controller Inside card

Fr1b, for SEP and IO:

• Terminals, graphic display terminal, integrated Modbus, integrated CANopen, communication card, Controller Inside card

Fr1b, for SIM:

• Terminals, only accessible if Fr1 = terminals

Fr2:
• Terminals, graphic display terminal, integrated Modbus, integrated CANopen, communication card, Controller Inside card

Note: [Ref.1B channel] (Fr1b) and [Ref 1B switching] (rCb) must be configured in the [1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (Fun-) menu.

BBV19478 11/2011 205

[1.6 COMMAND] (CtL-)

Reference channel for [Not separ.] (SIM), [Separate] (SEP) and [I/O profile] (IO) confi-
gurations

[Ref 1B switching] FLOC

rCb

[Ref.1 channel] 0V nO
FRA
Fr1 AI1 Note: Forced local is not
Fr1b AI2 active in [I/O profile].
[Ref.1B channel]
FRA + SA2 + SA3 - dA2 - dA3

AI3
LFr
[Summing ref. 2]
AI4
SA2
LCC
[Summing ref. 3]
SA3
Graphic
[Subtract. ref. 2] terminal
dA2
[Subtract. ref. 3]
dA3

[High
LI Ramps (1)
speed]
HSP ACC DEC
Channel 1 FrH rFr
nO
Ref. channel 2]
LSP AC2 DE2
Fr2
Channel 2 [Low speed]
FLO
Key: rFC Forced local
[Ref. 2 switching]

Parameter:
The black square represents the
factory setting assignment.

References
Fr1:
• Terminals, graphic display terminal, integrated Modbus, integrated CANopen, communication card, Controller Inside card

Fr1b, for SEP and IO:

• Terminals, graphic display terminal, integrated Modbus, integrated CANopen, communication card, Controller Inside card

Fr1b, for SIM:

• Terminals, only accessible if Fr1 = terminals

SA2, SA3, dA2, dA3:

• Terminals only

Fr2:
• Terminals, graphic display terminal, integrated Modbus, integrated CANopen, communication card, Controller Inside card

(1) Ramps not active if the PID function is active in automatic mode.

Note: [Ref.1B channel] (Fr1b) and [Ref 1B switching] (rCb) must be configured in the [1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (Fun-) menu.

206 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.6 COMMAND] (CtL-)

Command channel for [Not separ.] (SIM) configuration

Reference and command, not separate
The command channel is determined by the reference channel. Parameters Fr1, Fr2, rFC, FLO and FLOC are common to reference and
command.
For example: If the reference is Fr1 = AI1 (analog input at the terminals), control is via LI (logic input at the terminals).

FLOC
LI nO
AI1
AI2

[Ref.1 channel] AI3

Fr1 AI4
LCC
(RUN/STOP
FWD/REV)
Graphic terminal

LI
[Profile]
CHCF FLO Forced local
[Ref. 2 switching] rFC
nO

SIM
CMD Forward
Reverse
nO STOP

Graphic STOP YES

terminal LI
PSt
Fr2 (Stop Key priority)

[Ref.2 channel]

Key:

Parameter:
The black square represents
the factory setting assignment.

BBV19478 11/2011 207

[1.6 COMMAND] (CtL-)

Command channel for [Separate] (SEP) configuration

Separate reference and command
Parameters FLO and FLOC are common to reference and command.
E.g. If the reference is in forced local mode via AI1 (analog input at the terminals), command in for-
ced local mode is via LI (logic input at the terminals).
The command channels Cd1 and Cd2 are independent of the reference channels Fr1, Fr1b and Fr2.

FLOC
LI nO
AI1
AI2
AI3
[Cmd channel 1]
Cd1 AI4
LCC
(RUN/STOP
FWD/REV)
Graphic
terminal
LI
[Profile]
[Cmd switching] CCS CHCF FLO Forced local
SEP
nO

Forward
CMD
Reverse
STOP
nO
Graphic STOP YES
terminal
PSt
Cd2 (Stop Key
priority)
[Cmd channel 2]

Key:
Parameter:
The black rectangle represents the factory
setting assignment, except for [Profile].

Controls
Cd1, Cd2:
• Terminals, graphic display terminal, integrated Modbus, integrated CANopen, communication card, Controller Inside card

208 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.6 COMMAND] (CtL-)

Command channel for [I/O profile] (IO)

Separate reference and command, as in [Separate] (SEP) configuration

The command channels Cd1 and Cd2 are independent of the reference channels Fr1, Fr1b and Fr2.

[Cmd channel 1]
Cd1

Note: Forced local is not

active in [I/O profile].

LI
[Profile]
[Cmd switching] CCS CHCF FLO Forced local
I/O
nO

Forward
CMD
Reverse
STOP
nO
Graphic STOP YES
terminal
PSt
Cd2 (Stop Key priority)
[Cmd channel 2]

Key:
Parameter:
The black rectangle represents the factory
setting assignment, except for [Profile].

Controls
Cd1, Cd2:
• Terminals, graphic display terminal, integrated Modbus, integrated CANopen, communication card, Controller Inside card

BBV19478 11/2011 209

[1.6 COMMAND] (CtL-)

Command channel for [I/O profile] (IO)

Selection of a command channel:
A command or an action can be assigned:
• To a fixed channel by selecting an LI input or a Cxxx bit:
- By selecting e.g., LI3, this action will be triggered by LI3 regardless of which command channel is switched.
- By selecting e.g., C214, this action will be triggered by integrated CANopen with bit 14 regardless of which command channel is
switched.

• To a switchable channel by selecting a CDxx bit:

- By selecting, e.g., CD11, this action will be triggered by
LI12 if the terminals channel is active
C111 if the integrated Modbus channel is active
C211 if the integrated CANopen channel is active
C311 if the communication card channel is active
C411 if the Controller Inside card channel is active

If the active channel is the graphic display terminal, the functions and commands assigned to CDxx switchable internal bits are inactive.

Note:
• CD14 and CD15 can only be used for switching between 2 networks. They do not have equivalent logic inputs.

Communication Controller Inside Internal bit, can be

Terminals Integrated Modbus Integrated CANopen
card card switched
CD00
LI2 (1) C101 (1) C201 (1) C301 (1) C401 (1) CD01
LI3 C102 C202 C302 C402 CD02
LI4 C103 C203 C303 C403 CD03
LI5 C104 C204 C304 C404 CD04
LI6 C105 C205 C305 C405 CD05
LI7 C106 C206 C306 C406 CD06
LI8 C107 C207 C307 C407 CD07
LI9 C108 C208 C308 C408 CD08
LI10 C109 C209 C309 C409 CD09
LI11 C110 C210 C310 C410 CD10
LI12 C111 C211 C311 C411 CD11
LI13 C112 C212 C312 C412 CD12
LI14 C113 C213 C313 C413 CD13
- C114 C214 C314 C414 CD14
- C115 C215 C315 C415 CD15

(1) If [2/3 wire control] (tCC) page 174 = [3 wire] (3C), LI2, C101, C201, C301, and C401 cannot be accessed.

210 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.6 COMMAND] (CtL-)

Assignment conditions for logic inputs and control bits

The following elements are available for every command or function that can be assigned to a logic input or a control bit:

[LI1] (LI1)
to Drive with or without option
[LI6] (LI6)
[LI7] (LI7)
to With VW3A3201 logic I/O card
[LI10] (LI10)
[LI11] (LI11)
to With VW3A3202 extended I/O card
[LI14] (LI14)
[C101] (C101)
to With integrated Modbus in [I/O profile] (IO) configuration
[C110] (C110)
[C111] (C111)
to With integrated Modbus regardless of configuration
[C115] (C115)
[C201] (C201)
to With integrated CANopen in [I/O profile] (IO) configuration
[C210] (C210)
[C211] (C211)
to With integrated CANopen regardless of configuration
[C215] (C215)
[C301] (C301)
to With a communication card in [I/O profile] (IO) configuration
[C310] (C310)
[C311] (C311)
to With a communication card regardless of configuration
[C315] (C315)
[C401] (C401)
to With Controller Inside card in [I/O profile] (IO) configuration
[C410] (C410)
[C411] (C411)
to With Controller Inside card regardless of configuration
[C415] (C415)
[CD00] (Cd00)
to In [I/O profile] (IO) configuration
[CD10] (Cd10)
[CD11] (Cd11)
to Regardless of profile
[CD15] (Cd15)

Note: In [I/O profile] (IO) configuration, LI1 cannot be accessed and if [2/3 wire control] (tCC) page 174 = [3 wire] (3C), LI2, C101,
C201, C301, and C401 cannot be accessed either.

WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
Inactive communication channels are not monitored (no lock following malfunction in the event of a communication bus
failure). Make sure that the commands and functions assigned to bits C101 to C415 will not pose a risk in the event of
the failure of the associated communication bus.

Failure to follow this instruction can result in death or serious injury.

BBV19478 11/2011 211

[1.6 COMMAND] (CtL-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

Fr1 M [Ref.1 channel] [AI1] (AI1)

AI1 v [AI1] (AI1): Analog input

AI2 v [AI2] (AI2): Analog input
AI3 v [AI3] (AI3): Analog input, if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted
AI4 v [AI4] (AI4): Analog input, if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted
LCC v [HMI] (LCC): Graphic display terminal
Mdb v [Modbus] (Mdb): Integrated Modbus
CAn v [CANopen] (CAn): Integrated CANopen
nEt v [Com. card] (nEt): Communication card (if inserted)
APP v [C.Insid. card] (APP): Controller Inside card (if inserted)
PI v [RP] (PI): Frequency input, if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted
PG v [Encoder] (PG): Encoder input, if encoder card has been inserted
rIn M [RV Inhibition] [No] (nO)

nO v [No] (nO)
YES v [Yes] (YES)
Inhibition of movement in reverse direction, does not apply to direction requests sent by logic inputs.
- Reverse direction requests sent by logic inputs are taken into account.
- Reverse direction requests sent by the graphic display terminal are not taken into account.
- Reverse direction requests sent by the line are not taken into account.
- Any reverse speed reference originating from the PID, summing input, etc., is interpreted as a zero reference.

PSt M [Stop Key priority] [Yes] (YES)

nO v [No] (nO)
YES v [Yes] (YES): Gives priority to the STOP key on the graphic display terminal when the graphic display terminal
is not enabled as the command channel.
Press and hold down ENT for 2 seconds in order for any change in the assignment of [Stop Key priority] (PSt)
to be taken into account.
This will be a freewheel stop. If the active command channel is the graphic display terminal, the stop will be
performed according to the [Type of stop] (Stt) page 228 irrespective of the configuration of [Stop Key priority]
(PSt).

CHCF M [Profile] [Not separ.] (SIM)

SIM v [Not separ.] (SIM): Reference and command, not separate

SEP v [Separate] (SEP): Separate reference and command This assignment cannot be accessed in
[I/O profile] (IO).
IO v [I/O profile] (IO): I/O profile
When [I/O profile] (IO) is deselected, the drive automatically returns to the factory setting (this is mandatory).
This factory setting only affects the [1 DRIVE MENU] menu. It does not affect either [1.9 COMMUNICATION]
or [1.14 CONTROL INSIDE CARD].
- With the graphic display terminal, a screen appears to perform this operation. Follow the instructions on
the screen.
- With the integrated display terminal, press ENT and hold it down (for 2 s). This will save the selection and
return to the factory setting.

212 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.6 COMMAND] (CtL-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

CCS M [Cmd switching] [ch1 active] (Cd1)

This parameter can be accessed if [Profile] (CHCF) = [Separate] (SEP) or [I/O profile] (IO)
Cd1 v [ch1 active] (Cd1): [Cmd channel 1] (Cd1) active (no switching)
Cd2 v [ch2 active] (Cd2): [Cmd channel 2] (Cd2) active (no switching)
LI1 v [LI1] (LI1)
- :
- :
- v [...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 211 (not CDOO to CD14).
If the assigned input or bit is at inactive state, channel [Cmd channel 1] (Cd1) is active.
If the assigned input or bit is at active state, channel [Cmd channel 2] (Cd2) is active.

Cd1 M [Cmd channel 1] [Terminals] (tEr)

tEr v [Terminals] (tEr): Terminals

LCC v [HMI] (LCC): Graphic display terminal
Mdb v [Modbus] (Mdb): Integrated Modbus
CAn v [CANopen] (CAn): Integrated CANopen
nEt v [Com. card] (nEt): Communication card (if inserted)
APP v [C.Insid. card] (APP): Controller Inside card (if inserted)
The parameter is available if [Profile] (CHCF) = [Separate] (SEP) or [I/O profile] (IO).

Cd2 M [Cmd channel 2] [Modbus] (Mdb)

tEr v [Terminals] (tEr): Terminals

rFC M [Ref. 2 switching] [ch1 active] (Fr1)

Fr1 v [ch1 active] (Fr1): No switching, [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) active

Fr2 v [ch2 active] (Fr2): No switching, [Ref.2 channel] (Fr2) active
LI1 v [LI1] (LI1)
- :
- :
- v [...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 211 (not CDOO to CD14).
If the assigned input or bit is at inactive state, channel [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) is active.
If the assigned bit or input is at active sate, channel [Ref. 2 channel] (Fr2) is active.

Fr2 M [Ref.2 channel] [No] (nO)

nO v [No] (nO): Not assigned If [Profile] (CHCF) = [Not separ.] (SIM), command is at the terminals with a zero
reference. If [Profile] (CHCF) = [Separate] (SEP) or [I/O profile] (IO) , the reference is zero.
AI1 v [AI1] (AI1): Analog input
AI2 v [AI2] (AI2): Analog input
AI3 v [AI3] (AI3): Analog input, if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted
AI4 v [AI4] (AI4): Analog input, if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted
UPdt v [+/- Speed] (UPdt): +/-Speed command
LCC v [HMI] (LCC): Graphic display terminal
Mdb v [Modbus] (Mdb): Integrated Modbus
CAn v [CANopen] (CAn): Integrated CANopen
nEt v [Com. card] (nEt): Communication card (if inserted)
APP v [C.Insid. card] (APP): Controller Inside card (if inserted)
PI v [RP] (PI): Frequency input, if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted
PG v [Encoder] (PG): Encoder input, if encoder card has been inserted

BBV19478 11/2011 213

[1.6 COMMAND] (CtL-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

COP M [Copy channel 1 <> 2] [No] (nO)

Can be used to copy the current reference and/or the command by means of switching, in order to avoid speed
surges, for example.
If [Profile] (CHCF) page 212 = [Not separ.] (SIM) or [Separate] (SEP), copying will only be possible from
channel 1 to channel 2.
If [Profile] (CHCF) = [I/O profile] (IO), copying will be possible in both directions.
nO v [No] (nO): No copy
SP v [Reference] (SP): Copy reference
Cd v [Command] (Cd): Copy command
ALL v [Cmd + ref.] (ALL): Copy command and reference
- A reference or a command cannot be copied to a channel on the terminals.
- The reference copied is FrH (before ramp) unless the destination channel reference is set via +/- speed.
In this case, the reference copied is rFr (after ramp).

DANGER
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Copying the command and/or reference can change the direction of rotation.
Check that this is safe.
Failure to follow this instruction can result in death or serious injury.

214 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.6 COMMAND] (CtL-)

As the graphic display terminal may be selected as the command and/or reference channel, its action modes can be configured.
The parameters on this page can only be accessed on the graphic display terminal, and not on the integrated display terminal.

Comments:
• The display terminal command/reference is only active if the command and/or reference channels from the terminal are active with
the exception of [T/K] (command via the display terminal), which takes priority over these channels. Press [T/K] (command via the
display terminal) again to revert control to the selected channel.
• Command and reference via the display terminal are impossible if the latter is connected to more than one drive.
• The preset speed function can only be accessed if [Profile] (CHCF) = [Not separ.] (SIM).
• The [T/K] function (command via the display terminal) can be accessed regardless of the [Profile] (CHCF).

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

FN1 M [F1 key assignment] [No] (nO)

nO v [No]: Not assigned,

FPS1 v [Preset spd2]: Press the key to run the drive at the 2nd preset speed [Preset speed 2] (SP2) page 233.
Press STOP to stop the drive.
FPS2 v [Preset spd3]: Press the key to run the drive at the 3rd preset speed [Preset speed 3] (SP3) page 233.
Press STOP to stop the drive.
Ft v [T/K]: Control via the display terminal: Takes priority over [Cmd switching] (CCS) and over [Ref. 2 switching]
(rFC).

FN2 M [F2 key assignment] [No] (nO)

Identical to [F1 key assignment].

FN3 M [F3 key assignment] [No] (nO)

Identical to [F1 key assignment].

FN4 M [F4 key assignment] [No] (nO)

Identical to [F1 key assignment].

bMP M [HMI cmd.] [Stop] (StOP)

When the [T/K] function is assigned to a key and that function is active, this parameter defines the behavior at the
moment when control returns to the graphic display terminal.
S OP v [Stop]: Stops the drive (although the controlled direction of operation and reference of the previous channel are
copied (to be taken into account on the next RUN command)).
bUMP v [Bumpless]: Does not stop the drive (the controlled direction of operation and the reference of the previous
channel are copied).

BBV19478 11/2011 215

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)

With graphic display terminal:

RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A

1 DRIVE MENU
1.1 LIFT
1.2 MONITORING
1.3 SETTINGS
1.4 MOTOR CONTROL
1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG
RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A Code << >> Quick RUN Term +50.00Hz 80A
MAIN MENU 1.6 COMMAND 1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.
ENT ENT
1 DRIVE MENU 1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT. REFERENCE SWITCH.
2 ACCESS LEVEL 1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT REF. OPERATIONS
3 OPEN / SAVE AS 1.9 COMMUNICATION RAMP
4 PASSWORD 1.10 DIAGNOSTICS STOP CONFIGURATION
5 LANGUAGE 1.11 IDENTIFICATION AUTO DC INJECTION
Code Quick 1.12 FACTORY SETTINGS Code << >> Quick
6 MONITORING CONFIG. 1.13 USER MENU
7 DISPLAY CONFIG. 1.14 CONTROL. INSIDE CARD
8 Internation unit

With integrated display terminal: Summary of functions:

Turn on
Code Name Page
rEF- [REFERENCE SWITCH.] 222
XXX Displays the state of the drive OAI- [REF. OPERATIONS] 223
rPt- [RAMP] 224
ENT
Stt- [STOP CONFIGURATION] 228
AdC- [AUTO DC INJECTION] 230
ESC

LIF- PSS- [PRESET SPEEDS] 232

LSt- [LIMIT SWITCHES] 235
bLC- [BRAKE LOGIC CONTROL] 240
ESC rbM- [ROLLBACK MGT] 245
CtL-
ELM- [EXTERNAL WEIGHT MEAS.] 246
ENT
ESC

FUn- APPLICATION FUNCT. tOr- [TORQUE CONTROL] 248

ESC
tOL- [TORQUE LIMITATION] 251
ESC

FLt- CLI- [2nd CURRENT LIMIT.] 253

LLC- [LINE CONTACTOR COMMAND] 255
OCC- [OUTPUT CONTACTOR CMD] 257

ESC
MLP- [PARAM. SET SWITCHING] 259
LAC- MMC- [MULTIMOTORS/CONFIG.] 263
ISP- [INSPECTION MODE] 264
rFt- [EVACUATION] 266
HFF- [HALF FLOOR] 266
dCO- [DC BUS SUPPLY] 267
tOp- [TOP Z MANAGEMENT] 268

216 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)

The parameters in the [1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-) menu can only be modified when the drive is stopped and there is no run
command, except for parameters with a T symbol in the code column, which can be modified with the drive running or stopped.

Note: Compatibility of functions

The choice of application functions may be limited by the number of I/O and by the fact that some functions are incompatible with
one another. Functions that are not listed in the table below are fully compatible.
If there is an incompatibility between functions, the first function configured will prevent the others being configured.

Each of the functions on the following pages can be assigned to one of the inputs or outputs.
A single input can activate several functions at the same time (reverse and 2nd ramp, for example). The user must therefore ensure
that these functions can be used at the same time. It is only possible to assign one input to several functions at [Advanced] (AdU) and
[Expert] (EPr) level.

Before assigning a command, reference or function to an input or output, the user must make sure that this input or output has
not already been assigned and that another input or output has not been assigned to an incompatible or undesirable function.
The drive factory setting or macro configurations automatically configure functions, which may prevent other functions being assigned.
It may be necessary to unconfigure one or more functions in order to be able to enable another. Check the compatibility table below.

BBV19478 11/2011 217

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)

Compatibility table

Measurement of motor/encoder phase shift (page 160)

Closed-loop synchronous motor (page 159)
Open-loop synchronous motor (page 157)
Management of limit switches (page 235)
Reference operations (page 223)

Brake logic control (page 240)

DC injection stop (page 228)

Freewheel stop (page 228)

Torque control (page 248)

Preset speeds (page 232)

Stop on TDC (page 268)

Load sharing (page 170)

Fast stop (page 228) p(1)
Reference operations (page 223) A
Management of limit switches (page 235)
Preset speeds (page 232) X p(1)

Brake logic control (page 240) p p p p(4)

DC injection stop (page 228) p p(2) A p(2) p p

Fast stop (page 228) p(2) A p(2)

Freewheel stop (page 228) X X X
Stop on TDC (page 268) p(2) p(2) A
Torque control (page 248) p(1) p(1) p p p
Load sharing (page 170) p
Open-loop synchronous motor (page 157) p p p
Closed-loop synchronous motor (page 159) p
Measurement of motor/encoder phase shift p(4)
(page 160)

(1) Torque control and these functions are only incompatible while torque control mode is active.
(2) Priority is given to the first of these two stop modes to be activated.
(3) Excluding special application with reference channel Fr2 (see diagrams on pages 205 and 206).
(4) These two functions are incompatible only if [Angle setting type] (ASt) = [W/o load] (nLd).

Incompatible functions Compatible functions Not applicable

Priority functions (functions, which cannot be active at the same time):

The function indicated by the arrow has priority over the other.

Stop functions have priority over run commands.

Speed references via logic command have priority over analog references.

Note: This compatibility table does not affect commands that can be assigned to the keys of the graphic display terminal (see page 215).

218 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)

Incompatible functions
The following function will be inaccessible or deactivated in the cases described below:

Automatic restart
This is only possible for control type [2/3 wire control] (tCC) = [2 wire] (2C) and [2 wire type] (tCt) = [Level] (LEL) or [Fwd priority] (PFO).
See page 174.

The SUP- monitoring menu (page 124) can be used to display the functions assigned to each input in order to check their compatibility.

When a function is assigned, a appears on the graphic display terminal, as illustrated in the example below:

RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A

1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.
REFERENCE SWITCH.
REF. OPERATIONS
RAMP
STOP CONFIGURATION
AUTO DC INJECTION
Code << >> Quick
PSS

If you attempt to assign a function that is incompatible with another function that has already been assigned,
an alarm message will appear:
With the graphic display terminal:

RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A

INCOMPATIBILITY
The function can't be assigned
because an incompatible
function is already selected. See
programming book.
ENT or ESC to continue

With the integrated display terminal:

COMP flashes until ENT or ESC is pressed.

When you assign a logic input, an analog input, a reference channel or a bit to a function, pressing the HELP
button will display the functions that may already have been activated by this input, bit or channel.

BBV19478 11/2011 219

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)

When a logic input, an analog input, a reference channel or a bit that has already been assigned is assigned
to another function, the following screens appear:
With the graphic display terminal:

RUN +50.00Hz 1,250 +50.00Hz

A
WARNING - ASSIGNED TO
Ref. 2 switching

ENT->Continue ESC->Cancel

If the access level permits this new assignment, pressing ENT confirms the assignment.
If the access level does not permit this new assignment, pressing ENT results in the following display:

RUN +50.00Hz 1,250 +50.00Hz

A
ASSIGNMENT FORBIDDEN
Un-assign the present
functions, or select
Advanced access level

With the integrated display terminal:

The code for the first function, which is already assigned, is displayed flashing.
If the access level permits this new assignment, pressing ENT confirms the assignment.
If the access level does not permit this new assignment, pressing ENT has no effect, and the message continues to flash. It is only possible
to exit by pressing ESC.

220 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)

Summing input/Subtracting input/Multiplier

Fr1 or Fr1b

SA2

SA3

dA2 A

dA3

MA2

MA3

A = (Fr1 or Fr1b + SA2 + SA3 - dA2 - dA3) x MA2 x MA3

• If SA2, SA3, dA2, dA3 are not assigned, they are set to 0.
• If MA2, MA3 are not assigned, they are set to 1.
• A is limited by the minimum LSP and maximum HSP parameters.
• For multiplication, the signal on MA2 or MA3 is interpreted as a %; 100% corresponds to the maximum value of the corresponding
input. If MA2 or MA3 is sent via the communication bus or graphic display terminal, an MFr multiplication variable
(see page 130) must be sent via the bus or graphic display terminal.
• Reversal of the direction of operation in the event of a negative result can be inhibited (see page 212).

BBV19478 11/2011 221

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

rEF- [REFERENCE SWITCH.]

rCb M [Ref 1B switching] [ch1 active] (Fr1)

See the diagrams on pages 205 and 206.

Fr1 v [ch1 active] (Fr1): No switching, [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) active
Fr1b v [ch1B active] (Fr1b): No switching, [Ref.1B channel] (Fr1b) active
LI1 v [LI1] (LI1)
- :
- :
- v [...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 211 (not CDOO to CD14).
• If the assigned input or bit is at inactive state, [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) is active (see page 212).
• If the assigned input or bit is at active state, [Ref.1B channel] (Fr1b) is active.

[Ref 1B switching] (rCb) is forced to [ch1 active] (Fr1) if [Profile] (CHCF) = [Not separ.] (SIM) with
[Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) assigned via the terminals (analog inputs, encoder, pulse input); see page 212.

Fr1b M [Ref.1B channel] [No] (nO)

nO v [No] (nO): Not assigned

AI1 v [AI1] (AI1): Analog input
AI2 v [AI2] (AI2): Analog input
AI3 v [AI3] (AI3): Analog input, if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted
AI4 v [AI4] (AI4): Analog input, if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted
LCC v [HMI] (LCC): Graphic display terminal
Mdb v [Modbus] (Mdb): Integrated Modbus
CAn v [CANopen] (CAn): Integrated CANopen
nEt v [Com. card] (nEt): Communication card (if inserted)
APP v [C.Insid. card] (APP): Controller Inside card (if inserted)
PI v [RP] (PI): Frequency input, if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted
PG v [Encoder] (PG): Encoder input, if encoder card has been inserted
Note:
In the following instances, only assignments via the terminals are possible:
- [Profile] (CHCF) = [Not separ.] (SIM) with [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) assigned via the terminals
(analog inputs, encoder, pulse input); see page 212.
- PID configured with PID references via the terminals

222 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

OAI- [REF. OPERATIONS]

Reference = (Fr1 or Fr1b + SA2 + SA3 - dA2 - dA3) x MA2 x MA3. See the diagrams on pages 205 and 206.
Note: This function cannot be used with certain other functions. Follow the instructions on page 217.

SA2 M [Summing ref. 2] [No] (nO)

Selection of a reference to be added to [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) or [Ref.1B channel] (Fr1b).

nO v [No] (nO): No source assigned
AI1 v [AI1] (AI1): Analog input
AI2 v [AI2] (AI2): Analog input
AI3 v [AI3] (AI3): Analog input, if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted
AI4 v [AI4] (AI4): Analog input, if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted
LCC v [HMI] (LCC): Graphic display terminal
Mdb v [Modbus] (Mdb): Integrated Modbus
CAn v [CANopen] (CAn): Integrated CANopen
nEt v [Com. card] (nEt): Communication card (if inserted)
APP v [C.Insid. card] (APP): Controller Inside card (if inserted)
PI v [RP] (PI): Frequency input, if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted
PG v [Encoder] (PG): Encoder input, if encoder card has been inserted
AIU1 v [Network AI] (AIU1): Virtual input via communication bus, to be configured via [AI net. channel] (AIC1)
page 183.

SA3 M [Summing ref. 3] [No] (nO)

Selection of a reference to be added to [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) or [Ref.1B channel] (Fr1b).

• Possible assignments are identical to [Summing ref. 2] (SA2) above.

dA2 M [Subtract. ref. 2] [No] (nO)

Selection of a reference to be subtracted from [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) or [Ref.1B channel] (Fr1b).
• Possible assignments are identical to [Summing ref. 2] (SA2) above.

dA3 M [Subtract. ref. 3] [No] (nO)

Selection of a reference to be subtracted from [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) or [Ref.1B channel] (Fr1b).
• Possible assignments are identical to [Summing ref. 2] (SA2) above.

MA2 M [Multiplier ref. 2] [No] (nO)

Selection of a multiplier reference [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) or [Ref.1B channel] (Fr1b).

• Possible assignments are identical to [Summing ref. 2] (SA2) above.

MA3 M [Multiplier ref. 3] [No] (nO)

Selection of a multiplier reference [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) or [Ref.1B channel] (Fr1b).

• Possible assignments are identical to [Summing ref. 2] (SA2) above.

BBV19478 11/2011 223

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

rPt- [RAMP]
rPt M [Ramp type] [Linear] (LIn)

LIn v [Linear] (LIn)

S v [S ramp] (S)
U v [U ramp] (U)
CUS v [Customized] (CUS)
S ramps
f (Hz) f (Hz)
FrS FrS The rounding coefficient is fixed,
where t2 = 0.6 x t1
and t1 = set ramp time.
0 0
t t
t2 t2
t1 t1

U ramps
f (Hz) f (Hz)
FrS FrS

The rounding coefficient is fixed,

where t2 = 0.5 x t1
0 0 and t1 = set ramp time.
t t
t2 t2
t1 t1

Inr M [Ramp increment] (1) [0.1 ] (0.1)

T
0.01 v [0.01]: Ramp up to 99.99 seconds
0.1 v [0.1]: Ramp up to 999.9 seconds
1 v [1]: Ramp up to 6000 seconds
This parameter is valid for [Acceleration] (ACC), [Deceleration] (dEC), [Acceleration 2] (AC2) and
[Deceleration 2] (dE2).

ACC M [Acceleration] (1) 0.01 to 6000 s (2) 3.0 s

T Time to accelerate from 0 to the [Rated motor freq.] (FrS) page 152 for an asynchronous motor or [Nominal
freq sync.] (FrSS) page 158 for a synchronous motor. Make sure that this value is compatible with the inertia
being driven.

dEC M [Deceleration] (1) 0.01 to 6000 s (2) 3.0 s

(1) Parameter can also be accessed in the [1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu.
(2) Range 0.01 to 99.99 s or 0.1 to 999.9 s or 1 to 6000 s according to [Ramp increment] (Inr).

T Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.

224 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

[RAMP] (continued)
tA1 M [Begin Acc round] (1) 0 to 100% 10%

T - Rounding of start of acceleration ramp as a % of the [Acceleration] (ACC) or [Acceleration 2] (AC2)

ramp time.
- Can be set between 0 and 100%
- This parameter can be accessed if the [Ramp type] (rPt) is [Customized] (CUS).

tA2 M [End Acc round] (1) 10%

T - Rounding of end of acceleration ramp as a % of the [Acceleration] (ACC) or [Acceleration 2] (AC2)

ramp time.
- Can be set between 0 and (100% - [Begin Acc round] (tA1)).
- This parameter can be accessed if the [Ramp type] (rPt) is [Customized] (CUS).

tA3 M [Begin Dec round] (1) 0 to 100% 10%

T - Rounding of start of deceleration ramp as a % of the [Deceleration] (dEC) or [Deceleration 2] (dE2)

ramp time.
- Can be set between 0 and 100%.
- This parameter can be accessed if the [Ramp type] (rPt) is [Customized] (CUS).

tA4 M [End Dec round] (1) 10%

T - Rounding of end of deceleration ramp as a % of the [Deceleration] (dEC) or [Deceleration 2] (dE2) ramp
time.
- Can be set between 0 and (100% - [Begin Dec round] (tA3).
- This parameter can be accessed if the [Ramp type] (rPt) is [Customized] (CUS).

(1) Parameter can also be accessed in the [1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu.

T Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.

BBV19478 11/2011 225

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

[RAMP] (continued)
Frt M [Ramp 2 threshold] 0 to 500 or 1600 Hz
according to rating
0 Hz

Ramp switching threshold

The 2nd ramp is switched if the value of Frt is not 0 (0 deactivates the function) and the output frequency is
greater than Frt.
Threshold ramp switching can be combined with [Ramp switch ass.] (rPS) switching as follows:

LI or bit Frequency Ramp

0 <Frt ACC, dEC
0 >Frt AC2, dE2
1 <Frt AC2, dE2
1 >Frt AC2, dE2

rPS M [Ramp switch ass.] [No] (nO)

nO v [No] (nO): Not assigned.

LI1 v [LI1] (LI1)
- :
- :
- v [...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 211.
- ACC and dEC are enabled when the assigned input or bit is at inactive state.
- AC2 and dE2 are enabled when the assigned input or bit is at active state.

AC2 M [Acceleration 2] (1) 0.01 to 6000 s (2) 5.0 s

T Time to accelerate from 0 to [Rated motor freq.] (FrS) page 152 for an asynchronous motor or [Nominal freq
sync.] (FrSS) page 158 for a synchronous motor. Make sure that this value is compatible with the inertia
being driven.
The parameter can be accessed if [Ramp 2 threshold] (Frt) > 0 or if [Ramp switch ass.] (rPS) is assigned.

dE2 M [Deceleration 2] (1) 0.01 to 6000 s (2) 5.0 s

T Time to decelerate from the [Rated motor freq.] (FrS) page 152 to 0 for an asynchronous motor or [Nominal
freq sync.] (FrSS) page 158 for a synchronous motor. Make sure that this value is compatible with the inertia
being driven.
This parameter can be accessed if [Ramp 2 threshold] (Frt) > 0 or if [Ramp switch ass.] (rPS) assigned.

(1) Parameter can also be accessed in the [1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-) and [1.1 LIFT] (LIF-) menus.
(2) Range 0.01 to 99.99 s or 0.1 to 999.9 s or 1 to 6000 s according to [Ramp increment] (Inr) page 224.

T Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.

226 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

[RAMP] (continued)
brA M [Dec ramp adapt.] [Yes] (YES)

Activating this function automatically adapts the deceleration ramp, if this has been set at too low a value
for the inertia of the load, which can cause an overvoltage trip.
nO v [No] (nO): Function inactive.
YES v [Yes] (YES): Function active, for applications that do not require strong deceleration.
The following selections appear depending on the rating of the drive and [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 146.
They enable stronger deceleration to be obtained than with [Yes] (YES). Use comparative testing to
determine your selection.
dYnA v [High torq. A] (dYnA)
dYnb v [High torq. B] (dYnb)
dYnC v [High torq. C] (dYnC)
[Dec ramp adapt.] (brA) is forced to [No] (nO) if brake control [Brake assignment] (bLC) is assigned (page 240),
or if [Braking balance] (bbA) page 170 = [Yes] (YES). The factory setting changes to [High torq. A] (dYnA) with
certain ratings if [Sinus filter] (OFI) page 148 = [Yes] (YES).
The function is incompatible with applications requiring:
- Positioning on a ramp
- The use of a braking resistor (the resistor would not operate correctly)

CAUTION
RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
Do not use [High torqu. B] (dYnB) or [High torq. C] (dYnC) if the motor is a permanent magnet synchronous
motor, as it will be demagnetized.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

BBV19478 11/2011 227

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

Stt- [STOP CONFIGURATION]

Note: Some types of stop cannot be used with all other functions. Follow the instructions on
page 217.

Stt M [Type of stop] [Ramp stop] (rMP)

Stop mode on disappearance of the run command or appearance of a stop command.

rMP v [Ramp stop] (rMP): On ramp
FSt v [Fast stop] (FSt): Fast stop
nSt v [Freewheel] (nSt): Freewheel stop
dCI v [DC injection] (dCI): DC injection stop
Note: If the "brake logic function" on page 240 has been enabled, or if [Lift Speed Mgt] (LSM) page 38
is different from [No] (nO), only ramp type stops may be configured.

FFt M [Freewheel stop Thd] (1) 0.0 to 1600 Hz 0.0

T This parameter supports switching from a ramp stop or a fast stop to a freewheel stop below a low speed
threshold.
It can be accessed if [Type of stop] (Stt) = [Fast stop] (FSt) or [Ramp stop] (rMP).
v 0.0: Does not switch to freewheel stop
v 0.1 to 1600 Hz: Speed threshold below which the motor will switch to freewheel stop

nSt M [Freewheel stop ass.] [No] (nO)

nO v [No] (nO): Not assigned

FSt M [Fast stop assign.] [No] (nO)

Note: This function cannot be used with certain other functions. Follow the instructions on
page 217.
nO v [No] (nO): Not assigned
LI1 v [LI1] (LI1)
- v [...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 211.
The stop is activated when the input changes to inactive state or the bit changes to active state (bit in
[I/O profile] (IO) at 0).
If the input returns to active state and the run command is still active, the motor will only restart if [2/3
wire control] (tCC) page 174 = [2 wire] (2C) and [2 wire type] (tCt) = [Level] (LEL) or [Fwd priority] (PFO).
If not, a new run command must be sent.

dCF M [Ramp divider] (1) 0 to 10 4

T The parameter can be accessed if [Type of stop] (Stt) = [Fast stop] (FSt) and if [Fast stop assign.] (FSt)
is not [No] (nO).
The ramp that is enabled (dEC or dE2) is then divided by this coefficient when stop requests are sent.
Value 0 corresponds to a minimum ramp time.

(1) Parameter can also be accessed in the [1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu.

T Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.

228 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

[STOP CONFIGURATION] (continued)

dCI M [DC injection assign.] [No] (nO)

Note: This function cannot be used with certain other functions. Follow the instructions on page 217.

nO v [No] (nO): Not assigned

LI1 v [LI1] (LI1)
- :
- :
- v [...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 211.
DC injection braking is initiated when the assigned input or bit changes to state 1.
If the input returns to state 1 and the run command is still active, the motor will only restart if [2/3 wire control]
(tCC) page 174 = [2 wire] (2C) and [2 wire type] (tCt) = [Level] (LEL) or [Fwd priority] (PFO). If not, a new
run command must be sent.

IdC M [DC inject. level 1] (1) (3) 0.1 to 1.41 In (2) 0.64 In (2)

T Level of DC injection braking current activated via logic input or selected as stop mode.
This parameter can be accessed if [Type of stop] (Stt) = [DC injection] (dCI) or if [DC injection assign.] (dCI)
is not [No] (nO).

CAUTION
RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

tdI M [DC injection time 1] (1) (3) 0.1 to 30 s 0.5 s

T Maximum current injection time [DC inject. level 1] (IdC). After this time the injection current becomes
[DC inject. level 2] (IdC2).
This parameter can be accessed if [Type of stop] (Stt) = [DC injection] (dCI) or if [DC injection assign.] (dCI)
is not [No] (nO).

IdC2 M [DC inject. level 2] (1) (3) 0.1 In (2) to [DC inject.
level 1] (IdC)
0.5 In (2)

T Injection current activated by logic input or selected as stop mode, once period of time [DC injection time 1] (tdI)
has elapsed.
This parameter can be accessed if [Type of stop] (Stt) = [DC injection] (dCI) or if [DC injection assign.] (dCI)
is not [No] (nO).

CAUTION
RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

tdC M [DC injection time 2] (1) (3) 0.1 to 30 s 0.5 s

T Maximum injection time [DC inject. level 2] (IdC2) for injection, selected as stop mode only.
This parameter can be accessed if [Type of stop] (Stt) = [DC injection] (dCI).

(1) Parameter can also be accessed in the [1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu.
(2) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate.
(3) Note: These settings are independent of the [AUTO DC INJECTION] (AdC-) function.

T Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.

BBV19478 11/2011 229

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

AdC- [AUTO DC INJECTION]

AdC M [Auto DC injection] [Yes] (YES)

T Automatic current injection on stopping (at the end of the ramp).

nO v [No] (nO): No injection

YES v [Yes] (YES): Adjustable injection time
Ct v [Continuous] (Ct): Continuous standstill injection
Note 1: There is an interlock between this function and [Motor fluxing] (FLU) page 162. If [Motor
fluxing] (FLU) = [Continuous] (FCt), [Auto DC injection] (Adc) must be [No] (nO).
Note 2: This parameter gives rise to the injection of current even if a run command has not been
sent. It can be accessed with the drive running.

SdC1 M [Auto DC inj. level 1] (1) 0 to 1.2 In (2) 0.7 In (2)

T Level of standstill DC injection current.

This parameter can be accessed if [Auto DC injection] (AdC) is not [No] (nO) and cannot be accessed if
[Motor control type] (Ctt) page 146 = [FVC] (FUC) or [Sync.CL] (FSY).
This parameter is forced to 0 if [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 146 = [Sync. mot.] (SYn).

CAUTION
RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

tdC1 M [Auto DC inj. time 1] (1) 0.1 to 30 s 0.5 s

T Standstill injection time. This parameter can be accessed if [Auto DC injection] (AdC) is not [No] (nO).
If [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 146 = [FVC] (FUC) or [Sync. mot.] (SYn) or [Sync.CL] (FSY) this time
corresponds to the zero speed maintenance time.

SdC2 M [Auto DC inj. level 2] (1) 0 to 1.2 In (2) 0.5 In (2)

T 2nd level of standstill DC injection current.

CAUTION
RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

(1) Parameter can also be accessed in the [1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu.
(2) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate.

T Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.

230 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

[AUTO DC INJECTION] (continued)

tdC2 M [Auto DC inj. time 2] (1) 0 to 30 s 0s

T 2nd standstill injection time. This parameter can be accessed if [Auto DC injection] (AdC) = [Yes] (YES.)

AdC SdC2 Operation

Note: When [Motor control type] (Ctt)
I page 146 = [FVC] (FUC) or [Sync.CL] (FSY),
YES x SdC1
[Auto DC inj. level 1] (SdC1), [Auto DC inj.
SdC2 level 2] (SdC2) and [Auto DC inj. time 2]
tdC1 tdC1 + tdC2 t (tdC2) cannot be accessed, and only
I
Ct ≠0 SdC1
[Auto DC inj. time 1] (tdC1) can be accessed.
SdC2
This then corresponds to a zero speed
maintenance time.
tdC1 t
I
Ct SdC1
=0
t

1
Run command
0
t

speed
0
t

(1) Parameter can also be accessed in the [1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu.

T Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.

BBV19478 11/2011 231

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

PSS- [PRESET SPEEDS]

Note: This function cannot be used with certain other functions. Follow the instructions on page 217.
For details of this function, see page 112.

PS2 M [2 preset speeds] [No] (nO)

nO v [No] (nO): Function inactive

LI1 v [LI1] (LI1)
- v [...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page211.
PS4 M [4 preset speeds] [No] (nO)

nO v [No] (nO): Function inactive

LI1 v [LI1] (LI1)
- v [...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 211.
To obtain 4 speeds you must also configure 2 speeds.

PS8 M [8 preset speeds] [No] (nO)

nO v [No] (nO): Function inactive

LI1 v [LI1] (LI1)
- v [...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 211.
To obtain 8 speeds you must also configure 2 and 4 speeds.

PS16 M [16 preset speeds] [No] (nO)

nO v [No] (nO): Function inactive

LI1 v [LI1] (LI1)
- v [...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 211.
To obtain 16 speeds you must also configure 2, 4 and 8 speeds.

232 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

[PRESET SPEEDS] (continued)

SP2 M [Preset speed 2] (1) 0 to 1600 Hz 10 Hz

T
SP3 M [Preset speed 3] (1) 15 Hz

T
SP4 M [Preset speed 4] (1) 20 Hz

T
SP5 M [Preset speed 5] (1) 25 Hz

T
SP6 M [Preset speed 6] (1) 30 Hz

T
SP7 M [Preset speed 7] (1) 35 Hz

T
SP8 M [Preset speed 8] (1) 40 Hz

T
SP9 M [Preset speed 9] (1) 45 Hz

T
SP10 M [Preset speed 10] (1) 50 Hz

T
SP11 M [Preset speed 11] (1) 55 Hz

T
SP12 M [Preset speed 12] (1) 60 Hz

T
SP13 M [Preset speed 13] (1) 70 Hz

T
SP14 M [Preset speed 14] (1) 80 Hz

T
SP15 M [Preset speed 15] (1) 90 Hz

T
SP16 M [Preset speed 16] (1) 100 Hz

T The appearance of these [Preset speed x] (SPx) parameters is determined by the number of speeds
configured.

(1) Parameter can also be accessed in the [1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu.

T Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.

BBV19478 11/2011 233

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)

Limit switch management

This function can be used to manage trajectory limits using limit switches.

The stop mode is configurable.

When the stop contact is activated, startup in the other direction is authorized.

E.g.

Reverse Forward
Reverse Forward stop
stop

The stop is activated when the input is at inactive state (contact open).

234 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

LSt- [LIMIT SWITCHES]

Note: This function cannot be used with certain other functions. Follow the instructions on page 217.

LAF M [Stop FW limit sw.] [No] (nO)

nO v [No] (nO): Function inactive

Same assignments possible as for [Stop FW limit sw.] (LAF) below.

LAS M [Stop type] [Freewheel] (nSt)

rMP v [Ramp stop] (rMP)

FSt v [Fast stop] (FSt)
nSt v [Freewheel] (nSt)
When the assigned input changes to 0, the stop is controlled in accordance with the selected type.
Restarting is only authorized for the other operating direction once the motor has stopped.
If the two inputs [Stop FW limit sw.] (LAF) and [Stop RV limit sw.] (LAr) are assigned and at state 0, restarting
will be impossible.
This parameter can be accessed if [Stop FW limit sw.] (LAF) or [Stop RV limit sw.] (LAr) is assigned.

BBV19478 11/2011 235

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)

Brake logic control

Used to control an electromagnetic brake by the drive, for horizontal and vertical hoisting applications, and for unbalanced machines.

Principle:
Vertical hoisting movement:
Maintain motor torque in the driving load holding direction during brake opening and closing, in order to hold the load, start smoothly when
the brake is released and stop smoothly when the brake is engaged.

Horizontal hoisting movement:

Synchronize brake release with the build-up of torque during startup and brake engage at zero speed on stopping, to help to prevent jolting.

Recommended settings for brake logic control for a vertical hoisting application:

WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
Check that the selected settings and configurations will not result in the dropping or loss of control of the load being lifted.

Failure to follow this instruction can result in death or serious injury.

1. Brake impulse (bIP): YES. Ensure that the direction of rotation FW corresponds to lifting the load.
For applications in which the load being lowered is very different from the load being lifted, set BIP = 2 Ibr (e.g., ascent always with a
load and descent always without a load).

2. Brake release current (Ibr and Ird if BIP = 2 Ibr): Adjust the brake release current to the rated current indicated on the motor.
During testing, adjust the brake release current in order to hold the load smoothly.

3. Acceleration time: For hoisting applications it is advisable to set the acceleration ramps to more than 0.5 seconds. Ensure that the drive
does not exceed the current limit.
The same recommendation applies for deceleration.
Reminder: For a hoisting movement, a braking resistor should be used.

4. Brake release time (brt): Set according to the type of brake. It is the time required for the mechanical brake to release.

5. Brake release frequency (bIr), in open-loop mode only: Leave in [Auto], adjust if necessary.

6. Brake engage frequency (bEn): Leave in [Auto], adjust if necessary.

7. Brake engage time (bEt): Set according to the type of brake. It is the time required for the mechanical brake to engage.

Recommended settings for brake logic control for a horizontal hoisting application:
1. Brake impulse (bIP): No

2. Brake release current (Ibr): Set to 0.

3. Brake release time (brt): Set according to the type of brake. It is the time required for the mechanical brake to release.

4. Brake engage frequency (bEn), in open-loop mode only: Leave in [Auto], adjust if necessary.

5. Brake engage time (bEt): Set according to the type of brake. It is the time required for the mechanical brake to engage.

236 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)

Brake logic control, horizontal movement in open-loop mode

Frequency

Reference

t
bEn

Fluxed motor
Flux current
SdC1
Rated flux
current
t
Ibr attained
Torque current

0 attained
Ibr
t

Direction of
operation Forward Reverse
t

Relay
or logic
output
t
0

Brake contact

State of brake
Released

Engaged t
brt tbE bEt ttr

Motor
Torque

Injection

control type
Flux

Frequency
Locking

Key:
- (bEn): [Brake engage freq]
- (bEt): [Brake engage time]
- (brt): [Brake Release time]
- (Ibr): [Brake release I FW]
- (SdC1): [Auto DC inj. level 1]
- (tbE): [Brake engage delay]
- (ttr): [Time to restart]

BBV19478 11/2011 237

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)

Brake logic control, vertical movement in open-loop mode

Frequency

Reference

bIr
JdC
t
JdC
bEn

Fluxed motor
Flux current
Rated flux
current
t
Ibr attained
Torque current

0 attained
Ibr
t

Direction of
operation Ascending Descending
t

Relay
or logic
output
t
0

Brake contact

State of brake
Released

Engaged t
brt tbE bEt ttr

Motor
control type
Torque

Injection
Flux

Locking

Frequency

Key:
- (bEn): [Brake engage freq]
- (bEt): [Brake engage time]
- (bIr): [Brake release freq]
- (brt): [Brake Release time]
- (Ibr): [Brake release I FW]
- (JdC): [Jump at reversal]
- (tbE): [Brake engage delay]
- (ttr): [Time to restart]

238 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)

Brake logic control, vertical or horizontal movement in closed-loop mode

Frequency

Reference

Fluxed motor
Flux current
Rated flux
current
t
Ibr attained
Torque current

0 attained
Ibr
t

Direction of
operation Forward or Reverse or
ascending descending
t

Relay
or logic
output
t
0

Brake contact

State of brake
Released

Engaged t
brt tbE bEt ttr

Motor
control type
Torque

Injection
Flux

Locking

Frequency

Key:
- (bEt): [Brake engage time]
- (brt): [Brake Release time]
- (Ibr): [Brake release I FW]
- (tbE): [Brake engage delay]
- (ttr): [Time to restart]

BBV19478 11/2011 239

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

bLC- [BRAKE LOGIC CONTROL]

Note: This function cannot be used with certain other functions. Follow the instructions on page 217.

bLC M [Brake assignment] [R2] (R2)

Note: If the brake is assigned, only a ramp stop is possible. Check the [Type of stop] (Stt)
page 228.
Brake logic control can only be assigned if [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 146 = [SVC V] (UUC), [SVC I]
(CUC), [FVC] (FUC) or [Sync.CL] (FSY).
Logic output or control relay
nO v [No] (nO): Function not assigned (in this case, none of the function's parameters can be accessed)
r2 v [R2] (r2)
- to
r4 [R4] (r4): Relay (selection extended to R3 or R4 if I/O card has been inserted)
LO1 v [LO1] (LO1)
- to
LO4 [LO4] (LO4): Logic output (if one or two I/O cards have been inserted, LO1 to LO2 or LO4 can be selected)
dO1 v [dO1] (dO1): Analog output AO1 functioning as a logic output. Selection can be made if [AO1 assignment]
(AO1) page 198 = [No] (nO).

bSt M [Movement type] [Hoisting] (UEr)

HOr v [Traveling] (HOr): Resistive-load movement (translational motion of overhead crane, for example).
UEr v [Hoisting] (UEr): Driving-load movement (hoisting winch, for example).
If [Weight sensor ass.] (PES) page 246 is not [No] (nO) [Movement type] (bSt) is forced to [Hoisting] (UEr).

bCI M [Brake contact] [No] (nO)

If the brake has a monitoring contact (closed for released brake).

nO v [No] (nO): Function inactive
LI1 v [LI1] (LI1)
- :
- :
- v [...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 211.
bIP M [Brake impulse] [Yes] (YES)

T
This parameter can be accessed if [Weight sensor ass.] (PES) = [No] (nO) (see page 246) and if
[Movement type] (bSt) = [Hoisting] (UEr).
nO v [No] (nO): The motor torque is given in the required operating direction, at current Ibr.
YES v [Yes] (YES): The motor torque is always Forward (check that this direction corresponds to ascending), at
current Ibr.
2Ibr v [2 IBR] (2Ibr): The torque is in the required direction, at current Ibr for Forward and Ird for Reverse, for
certain specific applications.

Ibr M [Brake release I FW] (1) -1.32 In to 1.32 In (2) According to motor

T Brake release current threshold for Ascending or Forward movement.

This parameter can be accessed if [Weight sensor ass.] (PES) = [No] (nO) (see page 246).

Ird M [Brake release I Rev] (1) 0 to 1.32 In (2) 0

T Brake release current threshold for descending or reverse movement

This parameter can be accessed if [Brake impulse] (bIP) = [2 IBR] (2Ibr).

(1) Parameter can also be accessed in the [1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu.
(2) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate.

T Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.

240 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

[BRAKE LOGIC CONTROL] (continued)

brt M [Brake Release time] (1) 0.00 to 5.00 s According to
[Motor control type]
T (Ctt)
Brake release time delay

bIr M [Brake release freq] (1) [Nominal motor slip]

(nSL) /2
Brake release frequency threshold (initialization of acceleration ramp).
T This parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 146 is not [FVC] (FUC) or [Sync.CL] (FSY)
and if [Movement type] (bSt) page 240 is [Hoisting] (UEr).
AUtO v [Automatic] (AUtO): The drive takes a value equal to the nominal motor slip, calculated using the drive
parameters.
- v 0 to 10 Hz: Manual setting
bEn M [Brake engage freq] (1) [Nominal motor slip]
(nSL) /2

T Brake engage frequency threshold

This parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 146 is not [FVC] (FUC) or [Sync.CL]
(FSY).
AUtO v [Automatic] (AUtO): The drive takes a value equal to the nominal motor slip, calculated using the drive
parameters.
- v 0 to 10 Hz: Manual setting
bECd M [Brake engage at 0] [No] (nO)

Brake engages at regulated zero speed.

T Time delay before request to engage brake. To delay brake engagement, if you wish the brake to be engaged
when the drive comes to a complete stop.

bEt M [Brake engage time] (1) 0.00 to 5.00 s 0.30 s

T Brake engage time (brake response time)

SdC1 M [Auto DC inj. level 1] (1) 0 to 1.2 In (2) 0.7 In (2)

T Level of standstill DC injection current.

Note: This parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 146 is not [FVC] (FUC) or
[Sync.CL] (FSY) and if [Movement type] (bSt) page 240 is [Traveling] (HOr).

CAUTION
RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

(1) Parameter can also be accessed in the [1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu.
(2) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate.

T Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.

BBV19478 11/2011 241

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

[BRAKE LOGIC CONTROL] (continued)

bEd M [Engage at reversal] [No] (nO)

T
nO v [No] (nO): The brake does not engage.
YES v [Yes] (YES): The brake engages.
Can be used to select whether or not the brake engages on transition to zero speed when the operating
direction is reversed.

JdC M [Jump at reversal] (1) 0 to 10.0 Hz [Automatic] (AUtO)

T
This parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 146 is not [FVC] (FUC) or [Sync.CL] (FSY)
and if [Movement type] (bSt) page 240 is [Hoisting] (UEr).
AUtO v [Automatic] (AUtO): The drive takes a value equal to the nominal motor slip, calculated using the drive
parameters.
- v 0 to 10 Hz: Manual setting
When the reference direction is reversed, this parameter can be used to avoid loss of torque
(and consequential release of load) on transition to zero speed. Parameter is not applicable if
[Engage at reversal] (bEd) = [Yes] (YES).

ttr M [Time to restart] (1) 0 to 5.00 s 0

T Time between the end of a brake engage sequence and the start of a brake release sequence.

(1) Parameter can also be accessed in the [1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu.

T Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.

242 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)

Brake control logic expert parameters

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

brH0 M [BRH_b0] 0

Selection of the brake restart sequence if a run command is repeated while the brake is engaging.
0 v [0] (0): The engage/release sequence is completed.
1 v [1] (1): The brake is released immediately.
Use in open-loop and closed-loop mode.
• A run command may be requested during the brake engagement phase. Whether or not the brake release
sequence is executed depends on the value selected for [BRH b0] (brH0).

Run command

Frequency

[BRH b0] (brH0) = 0

Relay or
logic output

Frequency

bEn
[BRH b0] (brH0) = 1
Relay or
logic output

Note: If a run command is requested during the "ttr" phase, the complete brake control sequence is
initialized.

brH1 M [BRH_b1] 0

Deactivation of the brake contact in steady state fault.

0 v [0] (0): The brake contact in steady state fault is active (fault if the contact is open during operation).
The brF brake contact fault is monitored in all operating phases.
1 v [1] (1): The brake contact in steady state fault is inactive. The brF brake contact fault is only monitored
during the brake release and engage phases.

BBV19478 11/2011 243

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

brH2 M [BRH_b2] 0

Taking the brake contact into account for the brake control sequence.
0 v [0] (0): The brake contact is not taken into account.
1 v [1] (1): The brake contact is taken into account.
Use in open-loop and closed-loop mode.
• If a logic input is assigned to the brake contact.
[BRH b2] (brH2) = 0: During the brake release sequence, the reference is enabled at the end of the time
[Brake Release time] (brt). During the brake engage sequence, the current changes to 0 according to the
ramp [Current ramp time] (brr) at the end of the [Brake engage time] (bEt).
[BRH b2] (brH2) = 1: When the brake is released, the reference is enabled when the logic input changes
to 1. When the brake is engaged, the current changes to 0 according to the ramp [Current ramp time] (brr)
when the logic input changes to 0.

Run command

Relay or
logic output

brt bEt
Torque
Frequency current
Ibr brr [BRH b2] (brH2) = 0

Logic input
Brake contact
Torque
Frequency current brr
blr Ibr
[BRH b2] (brH2) = 1

brH3 M [BRH_b3] 0

In closed-loop mode only. Management of the absence of brake contact response, if it is assigned.
0 v [0] (0): During the brake engage sequence, the brake contact must be open before the end of
[Brake engage time] (bEt), otherwise the drive locks in a brF brake contact fault.
1 v [1] (1): During the brake engage sequence, the brake contact must be open before the end of
[Brake engage time] (bEt), otherwise a bCA brake contact alarm is triggered and zero speed is maintained.

brH4 M [BRH_b4] 0

In closed-loop mode only. Activation of the speed loop at zero if a movement for which no command has
been given occurs (measurement of a speed greater than a fixed min. threshold).
0 v [0] (0): No action in the event of a movement for which no command has been given.
1 v [1] (1): If a movement occurs for which no command has been given, the drive switches to zero speed
regulation, with no brake release command, and a bSA alarm is triggered.

brr M [Current ramp time] 0 to 5.00 s 0.3 s

T Torque current ramp time (increase and decrease) for a current variation equal to [Brake release I FW] (Ibr).

T Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.

244 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)

See page 89 for the details of this function.

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

rbM- [ROLLBACK MGT]

Menu accessible:
- If [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 146 = [Sync.CL] (FSY) or [FVC] (FUC)
- If brake logic control [Brake assignment] (bLC) page 240 has been assigned.

rbM M [Rollback MGT] [No] (nO)

Activation of Rollback MGT function

nO v [No] (nO)
YES v [Yes] (YES)

rbC M [Rbk Compensation] 0 to 1000 % 20 %

T This parameter can be accessed if [Rollback MGT] (rbM) = [Yes] (YES)

Rollback compensation gain.

rbd M [Rbk Damping] 0 to 1000 % 50 %

T This parameter can only be accessed when [ACCESS LEVEL] = [Expert] and if
[Rollback MGT] (rbM) = [Yes] (YES).
Rollback coefficient damping.

T Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.

BBV19478 11/2011 245

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)

See page 93 for more details of this function.

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

ELM- [EXTERNAL WEIGHT MEAS.]

PES M [Weight sensor ass.] [No] (nO)

This function can be accessed if brake logic control has been assigned (see page 240).
If [Weight sensor ass.] (PES) is not [No] (nO), [Movement type] (bSt) page 240 is forced to [Hoisting] (UEr).
nO v [No] (nO): Function inactive
AI1 v [AI1] (AI1): Analog input
AI2 v [AI2] (AI2): Analog input
AI3 v [AI3] (AI3): Analog input, if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted
AI4 v [AI4] (AI4): Analog input, if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted
PI v [RP] (PI): Frequency input, if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted
PG v [Encoder] (PG): Encoder input, if encoder card has been inserted
AIU1 v [Network AI] (AIU1): Virtual input via communication bus, to be configured via [AI net channel] (AIC1)
page 183.

LP1 M [Point 1 X] 0 to 99.99 % 0

0 to 99.99% of signal on the assigned input.

[Point 1x] (LP1) must be less than [Point 2x] (LP2).
This parameter can be accessed if [Weight sensor ass.] (PES) has been assigned.

CP1 M [Point 1Y] -1.36 to +1.36 In (1) - In

Current corresponding to the load [Point 1 X] (LP1), in A.

This parameter can be accessed if [Weight sensor ass.] (PES) has been assigned.

LP2 M [Point 2X] 0.01 to 100 % 50 %

0.01 to 100 % of signal on the assigned input.

[Point 2x] (LP2) must be greater than [Point 1x] (LP1).
This parameter can be accessed if [Weight sensor ass.] (PES) has been assigned.

CP2 M [Point 2Y] -1.36 to +1.36 In (1) 0

Current corresponding to the load [Point 2x] (LP2), in A.

This parameter can be accessed if [Weight sensor ass.] (PES) has been assigned.

IbrA M [Ibr 4-20 mA loss] 0 to 1.36 In (1) 0

T Brake release current in the event of the loss of the weight sensor information.
This parameter can be accessed if the weight sensor has been assigned to an analog current input and the
4-20 mA loss detected fault is deactivated.
Recommended settings:
- 0 for lifts
- Rated motor current for a hoisting application

(1) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate.

T Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.

246 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)

Torque regulation

Reference
Speed speed
Speed control

Torque/
current M
Catalog limitation
number Torque
[Torque ref. sign] [Torque ratio] [Torque ramp time]
(tSd) (trt) (trP)

LI LI

The function can be used to switch between operation in speed regulation mode and operation in torque control mode.
In torque control mode, the speed may vary within a configurable "deadband". When it reaches a lower or upper limit, the drive automatically
reverts to speed regulation mode (fallback) and remains at this limit speed. The regulated torque is therefore no longer maintained and two
scenarios may occur.
• If the torque returns to the required value, the drive will return to torque control mode.
• If the torque does not return to the required value at the end of a configurable period of time, the drive will switch to fault or alarm state.

WARNING
LOSS CONTROL
Check that the changes in the behavior of the motor do not present any danger.
Failure to follow this instruction can result in death or serious injury.

Torque
A
Torque
limitation

E
reference C
B
torque

Speed
dead
band

reference speed
Speed

- AB and CD: "Fallback" to speed regulation

- BC: Torque control zone
- E: Ideal operating point

The torque sign and value can be transmitted via a logic output and an analog output.

BBV19478 11/2011 247

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

tOr- [TORQUE CONTROL]

This function can only be accessed for [Motor control type] (Ctt) = [SVC I] (CUC), [FVC] (FUC) or [Sync.CL]
(FSY).
Note: This function cannot be used with certain other functions. Follow the instructions on page 217.

tSS M [Trq/spd switching] [No] (nO)

nO v [No] (nO): Function inactive, thereby preventing access to other parameters.

YES v [Yes] (YES): Permanent torque control
LI1 v [LI1] (LI1)
- :
- :
- v [...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 211.
If the assigned input or bit is at active state: Torque control
If the assigned input or bit is at inactive state: Speed regulation

tr1 M [Torque ref. channel] [No] (nO)

nO v [No] (nO): Not assigned (zero torque reference).

AI1 v [AI1] (AI1): Analog input
AI2 v [AI2] (AI2): Analog input
AI3 v [AI3] (AI3): Analog input, if VW3A3202 I/O card has been inserted
AI4 v [AI4] (AI4): Analog input, if VW3A3202 I/O card has been inserted
LCC v [HMI] (LCC): Graphic display terminal
Mdb v [Modbus] (Mdb): Integrated Modbus
CAn v [CANopen] (CAn): Integrated CANopen
nEt v [Com. card] (nEt): Communication card (if inserted)
APP v [C.Insid. card] (APP): Controller Inside card (if inserted)
PI v [RP] (PI): Frequency input, if VW3A3202 I/O card has been inserted
PG v [Encoder] (PG): Encoder input, if encoder card has been inserted
100% of the reference corresponds to 300% of the rated torque.

tSd M [Torque ref. sign] [No] (nO)

nO v [No] (nO): Function inactive

LI1 v [LI1] (LI1)
- :
- :
- v [...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 211.
If the assigned input or bit is at inactive state, the torque sign is the same as the reference.
If the assigned input or bit is at active state, the torque sign is the opposite of the reference.

trt M [Torque ratio] 0 to 1000 % 100 %

T Coefficient applied to [Torque reference] (tr1).

trP M [Torque ramp time] 0 to 99.99 s 3s

T Rise and fall time for a variation of 100% of the rated torque.

tSt M [Torque control stop] [Speed] (SPd)

SPd v [Speed] (SPd): Speed regulation stop, in accordance with the type of stop configuration (see page 228).
YES v [Freewheel] (YES): Freewheel stop
SPn v [Spin] (SPn): Zero torque stop, but maintaining the flux in the motor. This type of operation is only possible
if [Motor control type] (Ctt) = [FVC] (FUC) or [Sync.CL] (FSY).

T Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.

248 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

[TORQUE CONTROL] (continued)

SPt M [Spin time] 0 to 3600 s 1

T This parameter can be accessed if [Torque control stop] (tSt) = [Spin] (SPn)
Spin time following stop, in order to remain ready to restart quickly.

dbp M [Positive deadband] 0 to 2 x [Max

frequency] (tFr)
10 Hz

T Positive deadband.
Value added algebraically to the speed reference.
Example for dbP = 10:
• If reference = +50 Hz: + 50 + 10 = 60
• If reference = - 50 Hz: - 50 + 10 = - 40

dbn M [Negative deadband] 0 to 2 x [Max

frequency] (tFr)
10 Hz

T Negative deadband.
Value subtracted algebraically from the speed reference.
Example for dbn = 10:
• If reference = +50 Hz: + 50 - 10 = 40
• If reference = - 50 Hz: - 50 - 10 = - 60

rtO M [Torque ctrl time out] 0 to 999.9 s 60

Time following automatic exit of torque control mode in the event of a detected fault or alarm.

tOb M [Torq. ctrl fault mgt] [Alarm] (ALrM)

Response of drive once time [Torque ctrl time out] (rtO) has elapsed.
ALrM v [Alarm] (ALrM)
FLt v [Fault] (FLt): Trip in freewheel stop

Note: If the motor is equipped with an encoder assigned to speed feedback, the "torque control" function will trigger a [Load slipping]
(AnF) fault. One of the following solutions should be applied:
• Set [Load slip detection] (Sdd) page 285 = [No] (nO).
• Set both [Positive deadband] (dbP) and [Negative deadband] (dbn) to a value less than 10% of the rated motor frequency.

T Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.

BBV19478 11/2011 249

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)

Torque limitation
There are two types of torque limitation:
• With a value that is fixed by a parameter
• With a value that is set by an analog input (AI, pulse or encoder)
If both types are enabled, the lowest value is taken into account. The two types of limitation can be configured or switched remotely using
a logic input or via the communication bus.

[Torque limit. activ.] (tLA)

[Motoring torque lim] [Yes]

(tLIM) (YES)
Torque
limitation via
[LI]
parameter
[Gen. torque lim]
(tLIG)
[No]
LI (nO)

Limitation
value
[Analog limit. act.] (tLC) Lowest value
taken into account

[Yes]
Torque (YES)
limitation via [AI]
[AI.] (AI.) analog input,
RP or [LI]
[RP] (PI)
[Encoder] (PG) Encoder

[No]
(nO)
LI

[Torque ref. assign.] (tAA)

250 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

tOL- [TORQUE LIMITATION]

This function cannot be accessed in V/F profile mode.

tLA M [Torque limit. activ.] [No] (nO)

nO v [No] (nO): Function inactive

YES v [Yes] (YES): Function always active
LI1 v [LI1] (LI1)
- :
- :
- v [...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 211.
If the assigned input or bit is at inactive state, the function is inactive.
If the assigned input or bit is at active state, the function is active.

IntP M [Torque increment] [1 %] (1)

The parameter cannot be accessed if [Torque limit. activ.] (tLA) = [No] (nO).
Selection of units for the [Motoring torque lim] (tLIM) and [Gen. torque lim] (tLIG) parameters.
0.1 v [0.1%] (0.1): 0.1% unit
1 v [1%] (1): 1% unit
tLIM M [Motoring torque lim] (1) 0 to 300 % 100 %

T The parameter cannot be accessed if [Torque limit. activ.] (tLA) = [No] (nO).
Torque limitation in motor mode, as a whole % or in 0.1% increments of the rated torque in accordance with
the [Torque increment] (IntP) parameter.

tLIG M [Gen. torque lim] (1) 0 to 300 % 100 %

T The parameter cannot be accessed if [Torque limit. activ.] (tLA) = [No] (nO).
Torque limitation in generator mode, as a whole % or in 0.1% increments of the rated torque in accordance
with the [Torque increment] (IntP) parameter.

tAA M [Torque ref. assign.] [No] (nO)

If the function is assigned, the limitation varies between 0% and 300% of the rated torque on the basis of
the 0% to 100% signal applied to the assigned input.
Examples include:
- 12 mA on a 4-20 mA input results in limitation to 150% of the rated torque.
- 2.5 V on a 10 V input results in 75% of the rated torque.
nO v [No] (nO): Not assigned (function inactive)
AI1 v [AI1] (AI1)
- to
AI4 [AI4] (AI4): Analog input, if VW3A3202 I/O card has been inserted
PI v [RP] (PI): Frequency input, if VW3A3202 I/O card has been inserted
PG v [Encoder] (PG): Encoder input, if encoder card has been inserted
AIU1 v [Network AI] (AIU1): Virtual input via communication bus, to be configured via [AI net channel] (AIC1)
page 183.

(1) Parameter can also be accessed in the [1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu.

T Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.

BBV19478 11/2011 251

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

[TORQUE LIMITATION] (continued)

tLC M [Analog limit. act.] [Yes] (YES)

This parameter can be accessed if [Torque ref. assign.] (tAA) is not [No] (nO).
YES v [Yes] (YES): The limitation depends on the input assigned by [Torque ref. assign.] (tAA).
LI1 v [LI1] (LI1)
- :
- :
- v [...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 211.
If the assigned input or bit is at inactive state:
• The limitation is specified by the [Motoring torque lim] (tLIM) and [Gen. torque lim] (tLIG) parameters if
[Torque limit. activ.] (tLA) is not [No] (nO).
• No limitation if [Torque limit. activ.] (tLA) = [No] (nO).
If the assigned input or bit is at active state:
• The limitation depends on the input assigned by [Torque ref. assign.] (tAA).
Note: If [Torque limitation] (tLA) and [Torque ref. assign.] (tAA) are enabled at the same time, the lowest
value will be taken into account.

252 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

CLI- [2nd CURRENT LIMIT.]

LC2 M [Current limit 2] [No] (nO)

nO v [No] (nO): Function inactive

LI1 v [LI1] (LI1)
- :
- :
- v [...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 211.
If the assigned input or bit is at inactive state, the first current limitation is active.
If the assigned input or bit is at active state, the second current limitation is active.

CL2 M [I Limit. 2 value] (1) 0 to 1.36 In (2) 1.36 In (2)

T Second current limitation This parameter can be accessed if [Current limit 2] (LC2) is not [No] (nO).
Note: If the setting is less than 0.25 In, the drive may lock in [Output Phase Loss] (OPF) fault mode
if this has been enabled (see page 276). If it is less than the no-load motor current, the limitation no
longer has any effect.

CLI M [Current Limitation] (1) 0 to 1.36 In (2) 1.36 In (2)

T First current limitation

The adjustment range is limited to 1.36 In if [Switching freq.] (SFr) page 111 is less than 2.5 kHz.
Note: If the setting is less than 0.25 In, the drive may lock in [Output Phase Loss] (OPF) fault mode
if this has been enabled (see page 276). If it is less than the no-load motor current, the limitation no
longer has any effect.

(1) Parameter can also be accessed in the [1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu.
(2) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate.

T Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.

BBV19478 11/2011 253

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)

Line contactor command

The line contactor closes every time a run command (forward or reverse) is sent and opens after every stop, as soon as the drive is locked.
For example, if the stop mode is stop on ramp, the contactor will open when the motor reaches zero speed.

Note: The drive control power supply must be provided via an external 24 V source.

Example circuit:
Note: The "Run/Reset" button must be pressed once the
Emergency
"Emergency stop" button has been released.
stop
3 Run/Reset
a line
K11

K10

K11
KM1

L1 L2 L3
ATV LIFT
U V W 0 LIp P24 LIn LO/Rp
LIp = Run command [Forward] or [Reverse]
Forward K11 K10 LO/Rp [Line contactor ass.] (LLC)
or LIn = [Drive lock] (LES)
M reverse
3

0V 24 V
24 V power supply

CAUTION
RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
This function can only be used for a small number of consecutive operations with a cycle time longer than 60 s
(in order to avoid premature aging of the filter capacitor charging circuit).

Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

254 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

LLC- [LINE CONTACTOR COMMAND]

LLC M [Line contactor ass.] [No] (nO)

Logic output or control relay

nO v [No] (nO): Function not assigned (in this case, none of the function parameters can be accessed).
LO1 v [LO1] (LO1)
- to
LO4 [LO4] (LO4): Logic output (if one or two I/O cards have been inserted, LO1 to LO2 or LO4 can be selected).
r2 [R2] (r2)
- to
r4 [R4] (r4): Relay (selection of R2 extended to R3 or R4 if I/O card has been inserted).
dO1 v [dO1] (dO1): Analog output AO1 functioning as a logic output. Selection can be made if [AO1 assignment]
(AO1) page 198 = [No] (nO).

LES M [Drive lock] [No] (nO)

nO v [No] (nO): Function inactive

LI1 v [LI1] (LI1)
- :
- :
- v [...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 211.
The drive locks when the assigned input or bit changes to 0.

LCt M [Mains V. time out] 5 to 999 s 5s

Monitoring time for closing of line contactor. If, once this time has elapsed, there is no voltage on the drive
power circuit, the drive will lock with a "Line contactor" fault (LCF).

BBV19478 11/2011 255

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)

Output contactor command

This allows the drive to control a contactor located between the drive and the motor. The request for the contactor to close is made when
a run command is sent. The request for the contactor to open is made when there is no longer any current in the motor.

CAUTION
RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE EQUIPMENT
If a DC injection braking function has been configured it should not be left operating too long in stop mode, as the contactor only
opens at the end of braking.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Output contactor feedback

The corresponding logic input should be at active state when there is no run command and at inactive state during operation.
In the event of an inconsistency, the drive trips on an FCF2 if the output contactor does not succeed to close (LIx at 1) and on an FCF1 trip
if it is stuck (LIx at 0).
The parameter [Delay to motor run] (dbS) can be used to delay tripping when a run command is sent and the [Delay to open cont.] (dAS)
parameter delays the trip when a stop command is set.

ATV LIFT Control Feedback

U V W 0 LOp/Rp P24 LIp

K20 KM2
KM2

K20

KM2
M
3

The [Out. contactor ass.] (OCC) and [Output contact. fdbk] (rCA) functions can be used individually or together.

256 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

OCC- [OUTPUT CONTACTOR CMD]

OCC M [Out. contactor ass.] [dO1] (dO1)

Logic output or control relay

nO v [No] (nO): Function not assigned (in this case, none of the function's parameters can be accessed)
LO1 v [LO1] (LO1)
- to
LO4 [LO4] (LO4): Logic output (if one or two I/O cards have been inserted, LO1 to LO2 or LO4 can be selected)
r1 [R1] (r1)
- to
r4 [R4] (r4): Relay (selection of R1 extended to R3 or R4 if I/O card has been inserted)
dO1 v [dO1] (dO1): Analog output AO1 functioning as a logic output. Selection can be made if [AO1 assignment]
(AO1) page 198 = [No] (nO).

rCA M [Output contact. fdbk] [No] (nO)

nO v [No] (nO): Function inactive.

LI1 v [LI1] (LI1)
- :
- :
- v [...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 211.
The motor starts up when the assigned input or bit changes to inactive state.

dbS M [Delay to motor run] 0.05 to 60 s 0.15

T Time delay for:

• Motor control following the sending of a run command.
• Output contactor fault monitoring, if the feedback has been assigned. If the contactor does not succeed
to close at the end of the set time, the drive will trip in FCF2.
This parameter can be accessed if [Out. contactor ass.] (OCC) has been assigned or if [Output contact. fdbk]
(rCA) has been assigned.
The time delay must be greater than the closing time of the output contactor.

dAS M [Delay to open cont.] 0 to 5.00 s 0.10

T Time delay for output contactor opening command following motor stop.
This parameter can be accessed if [Output contact. fdbk] (rCA) has been assigned.
The time delay must be greater than the opening time of the output contactor. If it is set to 0, the detected
fault will not be monitored.
If the contactor does not succeed to open at the end of the set time, the drive will in FCF1.

T Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.

BBV19478 11/2011 257

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)

Parameter set switching [PARAM. SET SWITCHING]

Values 1 Values 2 Values 3

Parameter 1 Parameter 1 Parameter 1 Parameter 1
Parameter 2 Parameter 2 Parameter 2 Parameter 2
Parameter 3 Parameter 3 Parameter 3 Parameter 3
Parameter 4 Parameter 4 Parameter 4 Parameter 4
Parameter 5 Parameter 5 Parameter 5 Parameter 5
Parameter 6 Parameter 6 Parameter 6 Parameter 6
Parameter 7 Parameter 7 Parameter 7 Parameter 7
Parameter 8 Parameter 8 Parameter 8 Parameter 8
Parameter 9 Parameter 9 Parameter 9 Parameter 9
Parameter 10 Parameter 10 Parameter 10 Parameter 10
Parameter 11 Parameter 11 Parameter 11 Parameter 11
Parameter 12 Parameter 12 Parameter 12 Parameter 12
Parameter 13 Parameter 13 Parameter 13 Parameter 13
Parameter 14 Parameter 14 Parameter 14 Parameter 14
Parameter 15 Parameter 15 Parameter 15 Parameter 15
Input LI or bit or frequency threshold 0 1 0 or 1
2 values
Input LI or bit or frequency threshold 0 0 1
3 values

Note: Do not modify the parameters in the [1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu, because any modifications made in this menu
[1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-)) will be lost on the next power-up. The parameters can be adjusted during operation in the
[PARAM. SET SWITCHING] (MLP-) menu, on the active configuration.

258 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

MLP- [PARAM. SET SWITCHING]

CHA1 M [2 Parameter sets] [No] (nO)

nO v [No] (nO): Function inactive.

FtA v [Freq.Th.att.] (FtA): Switching via [Freq. threshold] (Ftd) page 144.
F2A v [FreqTh.att.2] (F2A): Switching via [Freq. threshold 2] (Ftd) page 144.
tAP v [Ramp Mode] (tAP): Switching during the brake sequence. This new assignment can be used, for
example, to set high gains on brake release before starting the ramp (useful in lift applications).
Frequency

Reference

t
[Brake engage freq]
(bEN)

Motor

Injection
Torque
Flux

control type Frequency

Parameter set 2 Parameter set 1

LI1 v [LI1] (LI1)

- :
- :
- v [...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 211.
Switching 2 parameter sets

CHA2 M [3 Parameter sets] [No] (nO)

nO v [No] (nO): Function inactive

FtA v [Freq.Th.att.] (FtA): Switching via [Freq. threshold] (Ftd) page 144
F2A v [FreqTh.att.2] (F2A): Switching via [Freq. threshold 2] (Ftd) page 144
tAP v [Ramp Mode] (tAP): Switching during the brake sequence. This new assignment can be used, for
example, to set high gains on brake release before starting the ramp (useful in lift applications).
Frequency

Reference

t
[Brake engage freq]
(bEN)

Motor
Injection
Torque
Flux

control type Frequency

Parameter set 2 Parameter set 3

LI1 v [LI1] (LI1)

- :
- :
- v [...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 211.
Switching 3 parameter sets
Note: In order to obtain 3 parameter sets, [2 parameter sets] must also be configured.

BBV19478 11/2011 259

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

[PARAM. SET SWITCHING] (continued)

SPS v [PARAMETER SELECTION]

PARAMETER SELECTION
1.3 SETTINGS
Ramp increment
---------
---------
---------

PS1- M [SET 1]
This parameter can be accessed if at least 1 parameter has been selected in [PARAMETER SELECTION].
Making an entry in this parameter opens a settings window containing the selected parameters in the order
in which they were selected.
With the graphic display terminal: :

RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A

SET1 Acceleration
Acceleration: 9.51 s ENT
Deceleration: 9.67 s
Acceleration 2: 12.58 s 9.51 s
Deceleration 2 : 13.45 s
Begin Acc round: 2.3 s Min = 0.1 Max = 999.9
Code Quick << >> Quick

With the integrated display terminal:

Proceed as in the Settings menu using the parameters that appear.

PS2- M [SET 2]
This parameter can be accessed if at least 1 parameter has been selected in [PARAMETER SELECTION].
Procedure identical to [SET 1] (PS1-).

PS3- M [SET 3]
This parameter can be accessed if [3 parameter sets] is not [No] and if at least 1 parameter has been
selected in [PARAMETER SELECTION].
Procedure identical to [SET 1] (PS1-).

Note: We recommend that a parameter set switching test is carried out while stopped and a check is made to help to help to ensure
that it has been performed correctly.
Some parameters are interdependent and in this case may be restricted at the time of switching.

Interdependencies between parameters must be respected, even between different sets.

For example: The highest [Low speed] (LSP) must be below the lowest [High speed] (HSP).

260 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)

Motor or configuration switching [MULTIMOTORS/CONFIG.]

The drive may contain up to 3 configurations, which can be saved using the [1.12 FACTORY SETTINGS] (FCS-) menu, page 299.
Each of these configurations can be activated remotely, enabling adaptation to:
• 2 or 3 different motors or mechanisms (multimotor mode)
• 2 or 3 different configurations for a single motor (multiconfiguration mode)

The two switching modes cannot be combined.

Note: The following conditions MUST be observed:
•Switching may only take place when stopped (drive locked). If a switching request is sent during operation, it will not be executed
until the next stop.
•In the event of motor switching, the following additional conditions apply:
-When the motors are switched, the power and control terminals concerned must also be switched as appropriate.
-The maximum power of the drive must not be exceeded by any of the motors.
•All the configurations to be switched must be set and saved in advance in the same hardware configuration, this being the definitive
configuration (option and communication cards). If this intruction is not followed, it can cause the drive to trip in [Incorrect config.]
(CFF).

Menu and parameters switched in multimotor mode

• [1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-)
• [1.4 MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-)
• [1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I-O-)
• [1.6 COMMAND] (CtL-)
• [1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-) with the exception of the [MULTIMOTORS/CONFIG.] function (to be configured once only)
• [1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT] (FLt)
• [1.13 USER MENU]
• [USER CONFIG.]: The name of the configuration specified by the user in the [1.12 FACTORY SETTINGS] (FCS-) menu

Menu and parameters switched in multiconfiguration mode

As in multimotor mode, except for the motor parameters that are common to the three configurations:
- Rated current
- Thermal current
- Rated voltage
- Rated frequency
- Rated speed
- Rated power
- IR compensation
- Slip compensation
- Synchronous motor parameters
- Type of thermal protection
- Thermal state
- The auto-tuning parameters and motor parameters that can be accessed in Expert mode
- Type of motor control

Note: No other menus or parameters can be switched.

BBV19478 11/2011 261

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)

Switching command
Depending on the number of motors or selected configuration (2 or 3), the switching command is sent using one or two logic inputs.
The table below lists the possible combinations.

LI LI Number of configuration
2 motors or configurations 3 motors or configurations or active motor
0 0 0
1 0 1
0 1 2
1 1 2

Schematic diagram for multimotor mode

ATV LIFT

LI Configuration 0 LO or R

Configuration 1
Configuration 0
LO or R
if the 2 contacts + 24 V Configuration 1
are open. Configuration 2
LO or R
LI Configuration 2

M0 M1 M2

Auto-tuning in multimotor mode

This auto-tuning can be performed:
• Manually using a logic input when the motor changes
• Automatically each time the motor is activated for the 1st time after turning on the drive, if the [Automatic autotune] (AUt) parameter
on page 163 = [Yes] (YES).

Motor thermal states in multimotor mode:

The drive protects the three motors individually. Each thermal state takes into account all stop times, including drive shutdowns.
It is, therefore, not necessary to perform auto-tuning every time the power is turned on. It is sufficient to auto-tune each motor at least once.

Configuration information output

In the [1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I-O-) menu, a logic output can be assigned to each configuration or motor (2 or 3) for remote
information transmission.

Note: As the [1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I-O-) menu is switched, these outputs must be assigned in all configurations in which
information is required.

262 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

MMC- [MULTIMOTORS/CONFIG.]
CHM M [Multimotors] [No] (nO)

nO v [No] (nO): Multiconfiguration possible

YES v [Yes] (YES): Multimotor possible
Note: At each multi-motor configuration switching, the drive performs an automatic measurement of the
phase-shift angle at next run order.

CnF1 M [2 Configurations] [No] (nO)

nO v [No] (nO): No switching.

CnF2 M [3 Configurations] [No] (nO)

nO v [No] (nO): No switching

Note: In order to obtain 3 motors or 3 configurations, [2 Configurations] (CnF1) must also be configured.

BBV19478 11/2011 263

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

ISP- [INSPECTION MODE]

See details page 96

ACC M [Acceleration] 0.01 to 6000 s (1) 3.0 s

Time to accelerate from 0 to the [Rated motor freq.] (FrS) page 152 for an asynchronous motor or [Nominal
freq sync.] (FrSS) page 158 for a synchronous motor. Make sure that this value is compatible with the inertia
being driven..

dEC M [Deceleration] 0.01 to 6000 s (1) 3.0 s

ISP M [Inspection] [LI5] (LI5)

This parameter can be accessed if brake logic control [Brake assignment] (bLC) page 240 has been
assigned.
nO v [No] (nO): Function not assigned
LI1 v [LI1] (LI1) to [LI6] (LI6)
- v [LI7] (LI7) to [LI10] (LI10): If VW3A3201 logic I/O card has been inserted
LI14 v [LI11] (LI11) to [LI14] (LI14): If VW3A3202 extended I/O card has been inserted.
Inspection mode is activated when the assigned input changes to active state.
If evacuation function is activated at the same time and [Opt. rescue mode] (OrM) (see page 265) is set to
[Automatic] (AUtO), the drive can only start in the direction allowed by evacuation function.

ISrF M [Inspection speed] 0 to 25 Hz According to drive

rating

T Value of the "inspection" mode frequency reference. This parameter can be accessed if [Inspection] (ISP)
is not set to [No] (nO) or [ISP selection] (ISPS) is not set to [No] (nO).

SttL M [Stop type ISP] [FreeWheel] (nSt)

rFt- M [Evacuation assign.] [No] (nO)

nO v [No] (nO): Function not assigned

LI1 v [LI1] (LI1) to [LI6] (LI6)
- v [LI7] (LI7) to [LI10] (LI10): If VW3A3201 logic I/O card has been inserted
LI14 v [LI11] (LI11) to [LI14] (LI14): If VW3A3202 extended I/O card has been inserted
Evacuation is activated when the assigned input is at active state, if the drive is stationary.
Evacuation is activated when the assigned input is at inactive state, as soon as the drive stops.

rSU M [Evacuation Input V.] 200 to 480 V 220 V

AC voltage value of the emergency power supply.

This parameter can be accessed if [Evacuation assign.] (rFt) is not [No] (nO).

T Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.

264 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

ISP- [INSPECTION MODE]

See details page 96

rSP M [Evacuation freq.] 5 Hz

T Value of the "Standard evacuation" mode frequency reference.

This parameter can be accessed if [Evacuation assign.] (rFt) is not [No] (nO) and [Opt.rescue mode] (OrM)
is set to [Standard] (Std).
The adjustment range is determined by the [Low speed] (LSP) (page 135), [Rated motor freq.] (FrS)
page 152 for an asynchronous motor or [Nominal freq sync.] (FrSS) page 158 for a synchronous motor and
[Rated motor volt.] (UnS) (page 152) parameters and by [Evacuation Input V.] (rSU) above.
Example with an asynchronous motor:
• If LSP < (FrS x rSU/UnS): rSP min. = LSP, rSP max. = (Frs x rSU/UnS)
• If LSP u (FrS x rSU/UnS): rSP = (Frs x rSU/UnS)
With a synchronous motor: Same formula using FrSS in place of FrS and 400 V in place of UnS.

OrM M [Opt. rescue mode] [Standard] (Std)

Optimized rescue mode, visible if [Evacuation assign.] (rFt) is not set to [No] (nO).

Std v [Standard] (Std) Standard evacuation mode.

MAnU v [Manual] (MAnU) Optimized evacuation mode.

Note: When [Opt. rescue mode] (OrM) is set to [Automatic] (AutO), if the inspection mode is activated and
the requested direction is not optimized one, the drive will not start.

OrSP M [Cust. rescue speed] 0 m/s to [Nominal car

speed] (CSP)
0.100 m/s

PMC M [Calc. rescue power]

Requested UPS power in KVA, visible if [Evacuation assign.] (rFt) is not set to [No] (nO) and [Opt. rescue
mode] (OrM) is not set to [Standard] (Std).This is the power needed by the drive only during evacuation,
this does not inculde third party devices powered by the UPS. The calculated value depends on other
parameters value, see page 98 for more details.

(1) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate.

T Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.

BBV19478 11/2011 265

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

rFt- [EVACUATION] continued

For details of this function, see page 98.

rACC M [Acc. time rescue] 0.01 s to 99.99 s [Automatic] (AUtO)

0.01
- v 0.01 to 99.9
99.9

rCLI M [Resc max current ] 0.0 A to 1.36 In (1) [Automatic] (AUtO)

AUtO v [Automatic] (AUtO): Current limitation during rescue visible if [Evacuation assign.] (rFt) is not set to [No]
(nO). When [Resc max current ] (rCLI) is set to [Automatic] (AUtO), [Resc max current ] (rCLI) takes the
value of [Rated mot. current] (NCr) (or [Nominal I sync.] (NCrS) if a synchronous motor law is configured)
each time the parameter is modifed.
0.1
- v 0.1 to 1.36 In
1.36

HFF- [HALF FLOOR]

For details of this function, see page 104.

HLS M [Half-floor speed] [No] (nO)

(1) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate.

T Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.

266 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)

Direct power supply via DC bus

This function is only accessible for ATV71LD48N4Z drives.

Direct power supply via the DC bus requires a protected direct current source with adequate power and voltage as well as a suitably
dimensioned resistor and capacitor precharging contactor. Consult Schneider Electric for information about specifying these components.

The "direct power supply via DC bus" function can be used to control the precharging contactor via a relay or a logic input on the drive.

Example circuit using R2 relay:

DC power
supply
- +

Contactor power
supply

A1
- KM1
A2

A1
R2A

R2C
PA /+

P0
PC /-

ATV LIFTppp
W / T3
U / T1

V / T2
W1
U1

M
3a

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

dCO- [DC BUS SUPPLY]

This function is only accessible for ATV71LD48N4Z drives.

dCO M [Precharge cont. ass.] [No] (nO)

Logic output or control relay

nO v [No] (nO): Function not assigned
LO1 v [LO1] (LO1)
- to
LO4 [LO4] (LO4): Logic output (if one or two I/O cards have been inserted, LO1 to LO2 or LO4 can be selected).
r1 [R1] (r1)
- to
r4 [R4] (r4): Relay (selection of R1 extended to R3 or R4 if I/O card has been inserted).
dO1 v [dO1] (dO1): Analog output AO1 functioning as a logic output. Selection can be made if [AO1 assignment]
(AO1) page 198 = [No] (nO).

BBV19478 11/2011 267

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)

Top Z management
This function can be accessed only if a VW3 A3 411 card has been inserted and if [Encoder type] (EnS) = [AABB] (AAbb).

This function can be used for homing, but the leveling speed must be low, or the drive will trip in [Overbraking] (ObF).

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

tOp- [TOP Z MANAGEMENT]

This function can be accessed only if a VW3 A3 411 card has been inserted and if
[Encoder type] (EnS) = [AABB] (AAbb).

tOSt M [Stop on top Z] [No] (nO)

Note: This function cannot be used with certain other functions. Follow the instructions on page 217.

nO v [No] (nO): Not assigned

LI1 v [LI1] (LI1)
- :
- :
- v [...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 211.
The fast stop is activated when the input changes to 1 or the bit changes to 1 and after the detection of the
next Top Z. If the input returns to state 0 and the run command is still active, the motor will only restart if
[2/3 wire control] (tCC) page 174 = [2 wire] (2C) and the [2 wire type] (tCt) = [Level] (LEL) or [Fwd priority]
(PFO). If not, a new run command must be sent.

268 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT] (FLt-)

With graphic display terminal:

RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A

1 DRIVE MENU
1.1 LIFT
1.2 MONITORING
1.3 SETTINGS
1.4 MOTOR CONTROL
1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG
Code << >> Quick
RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A 1.6 COMMAND RUN Term +50.00Hz 80A
MAIN MENU 1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT. 1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT
ENT ENT
1 DRIVE MENU 1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT PTC MANAGEMENT
2 ACCESS LEVEL 1.9 COMMUNICATION FAULT RESET
3 OPEN / SAVE AS 1.10 DIAGNOSTICS AUTOMATIC RESTART
4 PASSWORD 1.11 IDENTIFICATION MOTOR THERMAL PROT
5 LANGUAGE 1.12 FACTORY SETTINGS OUTPUT PHASE LOSS.
Code Quick 1.13 USER MENU Code << >> Quick
1.14 CONTROL. INSIDE CARD

With integrated display terminal: Contents

Turn on
Code Name Page
PtC- [PTC MANAGEMENT] 271
XXX Displays the state of the drive rSt- [FAULT RESET] 272

ENT
Atr- [AUTOMATIC RESTART] 273
tHt- [MOTOR THERMAL PROT.] 275
ESC OPL- [OUTPUT PHASE LOSS] 276
LIF-
IPL- [INPUT PHASE LOSS] 276
OHL- [DRIVE OVERHEAT] 277
SAt- [THERMAL ALARM STOP] 278
ESC EtF- [EXTERNAL FAULT] 279
FUn-
USb- [UNDERVOLTAGE MGT] 280
ENT
ESC
tIt- [IGBT TESTS] 281
FLt- FAULT MANAGEMENT
ESC
LFL- [4-20mA LOSS] 282
ESC

CON- InH- [FAULT INHIBITION] 283

CLL- [COM. FAULT MANAGEMENT] 284
Sdd- [ENCODER FAULT] 285
tId- [TORQUE OR I LIM. DETECT] 285
ESC FqF- [FREQUENCY METER] 287
LAC-
brP- [DB RES. PROTECTION] 288
tnF- [AUTO TUNING FAULT] 288
PPI- [CARDS PAIRING] 289
LFF- [FALLBACK SPEED] 290
FSt- [RAMP DIVIDER] 290
dCI- [DC INJECTION] 290

BBV19478 11/2011 269

[1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT] (FLt-)

The parameters in the [1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT] (FLt-) menu can only be modified when the drive is stopped and there is no run
command, except for parameters with a T symbol in the code column, which can be modified with the drive running or stopped.

PTC probes
3 sets of PTC probes can be managed by the drive in order to help to protect the motors:

• 1 on logic input LI6 converted for this use by switch "SW2" on the control card.
• 1 on each of the 2 option cards VW3A3201 and VW3A3202.

Each of these sets of PTC probes is monitored for the following detected faults:

• Motor overheating.
• Sensor break.
• Sensor short-circuit.

Protection via PTC probes does not disable protection via I2t calculation performed by the drive (the two types of protection can be
combined).

270 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT] (FLt-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

PtC- [PTC MANAGEMENT]

PtCL M [LI6 = PTC probe] [No] (nO)

Can be accessed if switch SW2 on the control card is set to PTC.

nO v [No] (nO): Not used

AS v [Always] (AS): "PTC probe" faults are monitored permanently, even if the power supply is not connected
(as long as the control remains connected to the power supply).
rdS v [Power ON] (rdS): "PTC probe" faults are monitored while the drive power supply is connected.
rS v [Motor ON] (rS): "PTC probe" faults are monitored while the motor power supply is connected.
Note 1: If [Thermal alarm stop] (SAt) is set to [PTC] (PtC) or [ALL] (ALL), and [LI6 = PTC probe] (PtCL) is set to
[Motor ON] (rS), then [LI6 = PTC probe] (PtCL) is automatically set to [Always] (AS).

PtC1 M [PTC1 probe] [No] (nO)

Can be accessed if a VW3A3201 option card has been inserted.

nO v [No] (nO): Not used

AS v [Always] (AS): "PTC probe" faults are monitored permanently, even if the power supply is not connected
(as long as the control remains connected to the power supply).
rdS v [Power ON] (rdS): "PTC probe" faults are monitored while the drive power supply is connected.
rS v [Motor ON] (rS): "PTC probe" faults are monitored while the motor power supply is connected.+
Note 1: If [Thermal alarm stop] (SAt) is set to [PTC] (PtC) or [ALL] (ALL), and [PTC1 probe] (PtC1) is set to
[Motor ON] (rS) ou [Power ON] (rdS), then [PTC1 probe] (PtC1) is automatically set to [Always] (AS).
Note 2: If [Thermal alarm stop] (SAt) is set to [PTC] (PtC) and [PTC1 probe] (PtC1) is not set to [No] (nO), then
[PTC1 probe] (PtC1) is forced to [Always] (AS).

PtC2 M [PTC2 probe] [No] (nO)

Can be accessed if a VW3A3202 option card has been inserted.

nO v [No] (nO): Not used

AS v [Always] (AS): "PTC probe" faults are monitored permanently, even if the power supply is not connected
(as long as the control remains connected to the power supply).
rdS v [Power ON] (rdS): "PTC probe" faults are monitored while the drive power supply is connected.
rS v [Motor ON] (rS): "PTC probe" faults are monitored while the motor power supply is connected.
Note 1: If [Thermal alarm stop] (SAt) is set to [PTC] (PtC) or [ALL] (ALL), and [PTC2 probe] (PtC2) is set to
[Motor ON] (rS), then [PTC2 probe] (PtC2) is automatically set to [Always] (AS).
Note 2: If [Thermal alarm stop] (SAt) is set to [PTC] (PtC) and [PTC2 probe] (PtC2) is not set to [No] (nO), then
[PTC2 probe] (PtC2) is forced to [Always] (AS).

BBV19478 11/2011 271

[1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT] (FLt-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

rSt- [FAULT RESET]

rSF M [Fault reset] [No] (nO)

nO v [No] (nO): Function inactive.

rP M [Product reset] [No] (nO)

Parameter can only be accessed in [ACCESS LEVEL] = [Expert] mode.

Drive reinitialization. Can be used to clear all detected faults without having to disconnect the drive from the
power supply.
nO v [No] (nO): Function inactive
YES v [Yes] (YES): Reinitialization. Press and hold down the "ENT" key for 2 s. The parameter changes back to
[No] (nO) automatically as soon as the operation is complete. The drive can only be reinitialized when locked.

DANGER
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Your are going to reset the drive.
Check this action will not endanger personnel or equipment in any way.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

rPA M [Product reset assig.] [No] (nO)

Parameter can only be modified in [ACCESS LEVEL] = [Expert] mode.

Drive reinitialization via logic input. Can be used to clear all detected faults without having to disconnect the
drive from the power supply. The drive is reinitialized on a rising edge (change from 0 to 1) of the assigned
input. The drive can only be reinitialized when locked.
nO v [No] (nO): Function inactive
LI1 v [LI1] (LI1) to [LI6] (LI6)
- v [LI7] (LI7) to [LI10] (LI10): If VW3A3201 logic I/O card has been inserted
LI14 v [LI11] (LI11) to [LI14] (LI14): If VW3A3202 extended I/O card has been inserted
To assign reinitialization, press and hold down the "ENT" key for 2 s.

DANGER
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
This configuration enables to reset the drive.
Check this action will not endanger personnel or equipment damage.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

272 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT] (FLt-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

Atr- [AUTOMATIC RESTART]

Atr M [Automatic restart] [No] (nO)

nO v [No] (nO): Function inactive

YES v [Yes] (YES): Automatic restart, after tripping, if the detected fault has disappeared and the other operating
conditions permit the restart. The restart is performed by a series of automatic attempts separated by
increasingly longer waiting periods: 1 s, 5 s, 10 s, then 1 minute for the following attempts.
The drive fault relay remains activated if this function is active. The speed reference and the operating
direction must be maintained.
Use 2-wire control ([2/3 wire control] (tCC) = [2 wire] (2C) and [2 wire type] (tCt) = [Level] (LEL) see page 174).

DANGER
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Check that an automatic restart will not endanger personnel or equipment in any way.

Failure to follow this instruction can result in death or serious injury.

If the restart has not taken place once the configurable time tAr has elapsed, the procedure is aborted and
the drive remains locked until it is turned off and then on again.
The detected faults, which permit this function, are listed on page 322:

tAr M [Max. restart time] [5 min] (5)

5 v [5 min] (5): 5 minutes

10 v [10 min] (10): 10 minutes
30 v [30 min] (30): 30 minutes
1h v [1 hour] (1h): 1 hour
2h v [2 hours] (2h): 2 hours
3h v [3 hours] (3h): 3 hours
Ct v [Unlimited] (Ct): Unlimited
This parameter appears if [Automatic restart] (Atr) = [Yes] (YES). It can be used to limit the number of
consecutive restarts on a recurrent detected fault.

BBV19478 11/2011 273

[1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT] (FLt-)

Motor thermal protection

Function:
Thermal protection by calculating the I2t.

Note: The memory of the motor thermal state is saved when the drive is switched off. The power-off time is used to recalculate the
thermal state the next time the drive is turned on.

• Naturally-cooled motors:
The tripping curves depend on the motor frequency.

• Force-cooled motors:
Only the 50 Hz tripping curve needs to be considered, regardless of the motor frequency.

Trip time in seconds

1 Hz 3 Hz 5 Hz
10 Hz 20 Hz 50 Hz
10 000

1 000

100
0,7 0,8 0,9 1 1,1 1,2 1,3 1,4 1,5 1,6
Motor current/ItH

274 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT] (FLt-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

tHt- [MOTOR THERMAL PROT.]

tHt M [Motor protect. type] [Self cooled] (ACL)

nO v [No] (nO): No protection.

ACL v [Self cooled] (ACL): For self-cooled motors
FCL v [Force-cool] (FCL): For force-cooled motors
Note: A trip will occur when the thermal state reaches 118% of the rated state and reactivation will occur
when the state falls back below 100 %.

ttd M [Motor therm. level] (1) 0 to 118 % 100 %

T Trip threshold for motor thermal alarm (logic output or relay)

ttd2 M [Motor2 therm. level] 0 to 118 % 100 %

T Trip threshold for motor 2 thermal alarm (logic output or relay)

ttd3 M [Motor3 therm. level] 0 to 118 % 100 %

T Trip threshold for motor 3 thermal alarm (logic output or relay)

OLL M [Overload fault mgt] [Freewheel] (YES)

Type of stop in the event of a motor thermal fault.

nO v [Ignore] (nO): Detected fault ignored.
YES v [Freewheel] (YES): Freewheel stop
Stt v [Per STT] (Stt): Stop according to configuration of [Type of stop] (Stt) page 228, without tripping.
In this case the fault relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the detected fault
disappears, according to the restart conditions of the active command channel (e.g. according to [2/3 wire
control] (tCC) and [2 wire type] (tCt) page 174 if control is via the terminals). It is advisable to configure an
alarm for this detected fault (assigned to a logic output, for example) in order to indicate the cause of the
LFF stop.
v [fallback spd] (LFF): Change to fallback speed, maintained as long as the detected fault persists and
rLS the run command has not been removed (2).
v [Spd maint.] (rLS): The drive maintains the speed being applied when the detected fault occurred, as
rMP long as the detected fault is present and the run command has not been removed (2).
FSt v [Ramp stop] (rMP): Stop on ramp.
dCI v [Fast stop] (FSt): Fast stop
v [DC injection] (dCI): DC injection stop. This type of stop cannot be used with certain other functions.
See table on page 217.

(1) Parameter can also be accessed in the [1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu.
(2) Because, in this case, the detected fault does not trigger a stop, it is required essential to assign a relay or logic output to its indication.

T Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.

BBV19478 11/2011 275

[1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT] (FLt-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

OPL- [OUTPUT PHASE LOSS]

OPL M [Output Phase Loss] [Yes] (YES)

nO v [No] (nO): Function inactive.

YES v [Yes] (YES): Tripping in [Mot. phase] (OPF) fault with freewheel stop.
Note: [Output Phase Loss] (OPL) is forced to [No] (nO) if [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 146 = [Sync. mot.]
(SYn) or [Sync.CL] (FSY).

Odt M [OutPh time detect] 0.5 to 10 s 0.5 s

T Time delay for taking the [Output Phase Loss] (OPL) detected fault into account.

IPL- [INPUT PHASE LOSS]

IPL M [Input phase loss] [Freewheel] (YES)

nO v [Ignore] (nO): Detected fault ignored, to be used when the drive is supplied via a single-phase supply or by
YES the DC bus.
v [Freewheel] (YES): Detected fault, with freewheel stop.
If one phase disappears, the drive trips [Input phase loss] (IPL), but if 2 or 3 phases disappear, the drive
continues to operate until it trips in undervoltage.

T Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.

276 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT] (FLt-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

OHL- [DRIVE OVERHEAT]

OHL M [Overtemp fault mgt] [Freewheel] (YES)

Behavior in the event of the drive overheating

nO v [Ignore] (nO): Detected fault ignored.

CAUTION
RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE DRIVE
Inhibiting faults results in the drive not being protected. This invalidates the warranty.
Check that the possible consequences do not present any risk.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

YES v [Freewheel] (YES): Freewheel stop

Stt v [Per STT] (Stt): Stop according to configuration of [Type of stop] (Stt) page 228, without tripping.
In this case the fault relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the detected fault
disappears, according to the restart conditions of the active command channel (e.g. according to [2/3 wire
control] (tCC) and [2 wire type] (tCt) page 174 if control is via the terminals). It is advisable to configure an
alarm for this detected fault (assigned to a logic output, for example) in order to indicate the cause of the
stop.
LFF v [fallback spd] (LFF): Change to fallback speed, maintained as long as the detected fault persists and
the run command has not been removed (1).
rLS v [Spd maint.] (rLS): The drive maintains the speed being applied when the detected fault occurred, as
long as the detected fault is present and the run command has not been removed (1).
rMP v [Ramp stop] (rMP): Stop on ramp.
FSt v [Fast stop] (FSt): Fast stop
dCI v [DC injection] (dCI): DC injection stop. This type of stop cannot be used with certain other functions.
See table on page 217.
Note: A trip will occur when the thermal state reaches 118% of the rated state and reactivation will occur
when the state falls back below 90%.

tHA M [Drv therm. state al] 0 to 118 % 100 %

T Trip threshold for drive thermal alarm (logic output or relay)

T Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.

(1) Because, in this case, the detected fault does not trigger a stop, it is required to assign a relay or logic output to its indication.

BBV19478 11/2011 277

[1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT] (FLt-)

Deferred stop on thermal alarm

This function is designed in particular for elevator applications. It helps to prevent the elevator stopping between two floors if the drive or
motor overheats, by authorizing operation until the next stop. At the next stop, the drive is locked until the thermal state falls back to a value,
which undershoots the set threshold by 20%. E.g. A trip threshold set at 80% enables reactivation at 60%.
One thermal state threshold must be defined for the drive, and one thermal state threshold for the motor(s), which will trip the deferred stop.

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

SAt- [THERMAL ALARM STOP]

SAt M [Thermal alarm stop] [No] (nO)

nO v [No] (nO): Function inactive (in this case, the following parameters cannot be accessed)
tH v [Th. mot drv] (tH): Stop on drive thermal alarm or motor thermal alarm
ptC v [PTC] (PtC): Defered stop on PTC alarm
ALL v [All] (ALL): Defered stop on drive thermal alarm, motor thermal alarm or PTC alarm

dth M [Delay thermal fault] 0 to 1000,0 s 5.0 s

Tripping time delay after the drive stops in case of thermal alarm occurs.

tHA M [Drv therm. state al] 0 to 118 % 100 %

T Thermal state threshold of the drive tripping the deferred stop.

ttd M [Motor therm. level] 0 to 118 % 100 %

T Thermal state threshold of the motor tripping the deferred stop.

ttd2 M [Motor2 therm. level] 0 to 118 % 100 %

T Thermal state threshold of the motor 2 tripping the deferred stop.

ttd3 M [Motor3 therm. level] 0 to 118 % 100 %

T Thermal state threshold of the motor 3 tripping the deferred stop.

T Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.

278 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT] (FLt-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

EtF- [EXTERNAL FAULT]

EtF M [External fault ass.] [No] (nO)

nO v [No] (nO): Function inactive.

LI1 v [LI1] (LI1)
- :
- :
- v [...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 211.
If the assigned bit is at inactice state, there is no external detected fault.
If the assigned bit is at active state, there is an external detected fault.
Logic can be configured via [External fault config] (LEt) if a logic input has been assigned.

LEt M [External fault config] [Active high] (HIG)

Parameter can be accessed if the external detected fault has been assigned to a logic input. It defines the
positive or negative logic of the input assigned to the detected fault.
LO v [Active low] (LO): Trip on falling edge (change from 1 to 0) of the assigned input
HIG v [Active high] (HIG): Trip on rising edge (change from 0 to 1) of the assigned input

EPL M [External fault mgt] [Freewheel] (YES)

Type of stop in the event of an external detected fault

nO v [Ignore] (nO): Detected fault ignored.
YES v [Freewheel] (YES): Freewheel stop
Stt v [Per STT] (Stt): Stop according to configuration of [Type of stop] (Stt) page 228, without tripping.
In this case the fault relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the detected fault
disappears, according to the restart conditions of the active command channel (e.g. according to [2/3 wire
control] (tCC) and [2 wire type] (tCt) page 174 if control is via the terminals). It is advisable to configure an
alarm for this detected fault (assigned to a logic output, for example) in order to indicate the cause of the
LFF stop.
v [fallback spd] (LFF): Change to fallback speed, maintained as long as the detected fault persists and
rLS the run command has not been removed (1).
v [Spd maint.] (rLS): The drive maintains the speed being applied when the detected fault occurred, as
rMP long as the detected fault is present and the run command has not been removed (1).
FSt v [Ramp stop] (rMP): Stop on ramp.
dCI v [Fast stop] (FSt): Fast stop
v [DC injection] (dCI): DC injection stop. This type of stop cannot be used with certain other functions.
See table on page 217.

(1) Because, in this case, the detected fault does not trigger a stop, it is required to assign a relay or logic output to its indication.

BBV19478 11/2011 279

[1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT] (FLt-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

USb- [UNDERVOLTAGE MGT]

USb M [UnderV. fault mgt] [Flt&R1open] (0)

Behavior of the drive in the event of an undervoltage

0 v [Flt&R1open] (0): Fault detected and fault relay open.
1 v [Flt&R1close] (1): Fault detected and fault relay closed.
2 v [Alarm] (2): Alarm and fault relay remains closed. The alarm can be assigned to a logic output or a relay.
UrES M [Mains voltage] According to drive
voltage rating
According to drive
voltage rating
Rated voltage of the line supply in V.
For ATV71LpppM3Z:
200 v [200V ac] (200): 200 Volts AC
220 v [220V ac] (220): 220 Volts AC
240 v [240V ac] (240): 240 Volts AC
260 v [260V ac] (260): 260 Volts AC (factory setting)
For ATV71LpppN4Z:
380 v [380V ac] (380): 380 Volts AC
400 v [400V ac] (400): 400 Volts AC
440 v [440V ac] (440): 440 Volts AC
460 v [460V ac] (460): 460 Volts AC
480 v [480V ac] (480): 480 Volts AC (factory setting)
USL M [Undervoltage level]
Undervoltage trip level setting in V. The adjustment range and factory setting are determined by the drive
voltage rating and the [Mains voltage] (UrES) value.

USt M [Undervolt. time out] 0.2 s to 999.9 s 0.2 s

Time delay for taking undervoltage trip into account

StP M [UnderV. prevention] [No] (nO)

Behavior in the event of the undervoltage trip prevention level being reached
nO v [No] (nO): No action
MMS v [DC Maintain] (MMS): This stop mode uses the inertia to maintain the DC bus voltage as long as
possible.
rMP v [Ramp stop] (rMP): Stop following an adjustable ramp [Max stop time] (StM).
LnF v [Lock-out] (LnF): Lock (freewheel stop) without trip
tSM M [UnderV. restart tm] 1.0 s to 999.9 s 1.0 s

Time delay before authorizing the restart after a complete stop for [UnderV. prevention] (StP) = [Ramp stop]
(rMP), if the voltage has returned to normal.

UPL M [Prevention level]

Undervoltage trip prevention level setting in V, which can be accessed if [UnderV. prevention] (StP) is not
[No] (nO). The adjustment range and factory setting are determined by the drive voltage rating and the
[Mains voltage] (UrES) value.

StM M [Max stop time] 0.01 to 60.00 s 1.00 s

T Ramp time if [UnderV. prevention] (StP) = [Ramp stop] (rMP).

tbS M [DC bus maintain tm] 1 to 9999 s 9999 s

T DC bus maintain time if [UnderV. prevention] (StP) = [DC Maintain] (MMS).

T Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.

280 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT] (FLt-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

tIt- [IGBT TESTS]

Strt M [IGBT test] [No] (nO)

nO v [No] (nO): No test

YES v [Yes] (YES): The IGBTs are tested on power up; drive output short-circuit is tested every time a run
command is sent. These tests cause a slight delay (a few ms). In the event of a trip, the drive will lock. The
following faults can be detected:
- Drive output short-circuit (terminals U-V-W): SCF display.
- Inoperable IGBT: xtF, where x indicates the number of the IGBT concerned.
- IGBT short-circuited: x2F, where x indicates the number of the IGBT concerned.

BBV19478 11/2011 281

[1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT] (FLt-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

LFL- [4-20mA LOSS]

LFL2 M [AI2 4-20mA loss] [Ignore] (nO)

nO v [Ignore] (nO): Detected fault ignored. This configuration is the only one possible if [AI2 min. value] (CrL2)
page 180 is not greater than 3 mA or if [AI2 Type] (AI2t) page 180 = [Voltage] (10U).
YES v [Freewheel] (YES): Freewheel stop
Stt v [Per STT] (Stt): Stop according to configuration of [Type of stop] (Stt) page 228, without tripping.
In this case the fault relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the cause disappears,
according to the restart conditions of the active command channel (e.g. according to [2/3 wire control] (tCC)
and [2 wire type] (tCt) page 174 if control is via the terminals). It is advisable to configure an alarm for this
detected fault (assigned to a logic output, for example) in order to indicate the cause of the stop.
LFF v [fallback spd] (LFF): Change to fallback speed, maintained as long as the cause persists and the run
command has not been removed (1).
rLS v [Spd maint.] (rLS): The drive maintains the speed being applied when the trip occurred, as long as the
cause is present and the run command has not been removed (1).
rMP v [Ramp stop] (rMP): Stop on ramp.
FSt v [Fast stop] (FSt): Fast stop
dCI v [DC injection] (dCI): DC injection stop. This type of stop cannot be used with certain other functions.
See table on page 217.

LFL3 M [AI3 4-20mA loss] [Ignore] (nO)

nO v [Ignore] (nO): Detected fault ignored. This configuration is the only one possible if [AI3 min. value] (CrL3)
page 181 is not greater than 3 mA.
YES v [Freewheel] (YES): Freewheel stop
Stt v [Per STT] (Stt): Stop according to configuration of [Type of stop] (Stt) page 228, without tripping. In this
case the fault relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the cause disappears,
according to the restart conditions of the active command channel (e.g. according to [2/3 wire control] (tCC)
and [2 wire type] (tCt) page 174 if control is via the terminals). It is advisable to configure an alarm for this
detected fault (assigned to a logic output, for example) in order to indicate the cause of the stop.
LFF v [fallback spd] (LFF): Change to fallback speed, maintained as long as the cause persists and the run
command has not been removed (1).
rLS v [Spd maint.] (rLS): The drive maintains the speed being applied when the trip occurred, as long as the
cause is present and the run command has not been removed (1).
rMP v [Ramp stop] (rMP): Stop on ramp.
FSt v [Fast stop] (FSt): Fast stop
dCI v [DC injection] (dCI): DC injection stop. This type of stop cannot be used with certain other functions.
See table on page 217.

LFL4 M [AI4 4-20mA loss] [Ignore] (nO)

nO v [Ignore] (nO): Detected fault ignored. This configuration is the only one possible if [AI4 min. value] (CrL4)
page 182 is not greater than 3 mA or if [AI4 Type] (AI4t) page 182 = [Voltage] (10U).
YES v [Freewheel] (YES): Freewheel stop
Stt v [Per STT] (Stt): Stop according to configuration of [Type of stop] (Stt) page 228, without tripping. In this
case the fault relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the cause disappears,
according to the restart conditions of the active command channel (e.g. according to [2/3 wire control] (tCC)
and [2 wire type] (tCt) page 174 if control is via the terminals). It is advisable to configure an alarm for this
detected fault (assigned to a logic output, for example) in order to indicate the cause of the stop.
LFF v [fallback spd] (LFF): Change to fallback speed, maintained as long as the cause persists and the run
command has not been removed (1).
rLS v [Spd maint.] (rLS): The drive maintains the speed being applied when the trip occurred, as long as the
cause is present and the run command has not been removed (1).
rMP v [Ramp stop] (rMP): Stop on ramp.
FSt v [Fast stop] (FSt): Fast stop
dCI v [DC injection] (dCI): DC injection stop. This type of stop cannot be used with certain other functions.
See table on page 217.

(1) Because, in this case, the detected fault does not trigger a stop, it is required to assign a relay or logic output to its indication.

282 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT] (FLt-)

Parameter can be accessed in [Expert] mode.

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

InH- [FAULT INHIBITION]

InH M [Fault inhibit assign.] [No] (nO)

To assign fault inhibit, press and hold down the “ENT” key for 2 s.

DANGER
LOSS OF PERSONNEL AND EQUIPMENT PROTECTION
Enabling [Fault inhibit assign.] (InH) will disable the drive controller protection features.
• [Fault inhibit assign.] (InH) should not be enabled for typical applications of this
equipment.
• [Fault inhibit assign.] (InH) should be enabled only in extraordinary situations where a
thorough risk analysis demonstrates that the presence of adjustable speed drive protection
poses a greater risk than personnel injury or equipment damage.

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

nO v [No] (nO): Function inactive

LI1 v [LI1] (LI1)
- :
- :
- v [...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 211.
If the assigned input or bit is at inactive state, fault monitoring is active. If the assigned input or bit is at active
state, fault monitoring is inactive. Active detected faults are reset on a rising edge (change from 0 to 1) of
the assigned input or bit.

Note: The "Power Removal" function and some detected faults are not affected by this function.
A list of detected faults affected by this function appears on pages 319 to 324.

BBV19478 11/2011 283

[1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT] (FLt-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

CLL- [COM. FAULT MANAGEMENT]

CLL M [Network fault mgt] [Freewheel] (YES)

Behavior of the drive in the event of a communication interruption with a communication card.
nO v [Ignore] (nO): Detected fault ignored.
YES v [Freewheel] (YES): Freewheel stop
Stt v [Per STT] (Stt): Stop according to configuration of [Type of stop] (Stt) page 228, without tripping.
In this case the fault relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the cause disappears,
according to the restart conditions of the active command channel (e.g. according to [2/3 wire control] (tCC)
and [2 wire type] (tCt) page 174 if control is via the terminals).
LFF v [fallback spd] (LFF): Change to fallback speed, maintained as long as the cause persists and the run
command has not been removed (1).
rLS v [Spd maint.] (rLS): The drive maintains the speed being applied when the trip occurred, as long as the
cause is present and the run command has not been removed (1).
rMP v [Ramp stop] (rMP): Stop on ramp.
FSt v [Fast stop] (FSt): Fast stop
dCI v [DC injection] (dCI): DC injection stop. This type of stop cannot be used with certain other functions.
See table on page 217.

COL M [CANopen fault mgt] [Freewheel] (YES)

Behavior of the drive in the event of a communication interruption with integrated CANopen.
nO v [Ignore] (nO): Detected fault ignored.
YES v [Freewheel] (YES): Freewheel stop
Stt v [Per STT] (Stt): Stop according to configuration of [Type of stop] (Stt) page 228, without tripping.
In this case the fault relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the cause disappears,
according to the restart conditions of the active command channel (e.g. according to [2/3 wire control] (tCC)
and [2 wire type] (tCt) page 174 if control is via the terminals).
LFF v [fallback spd] (LFF): Change to fallback speed, maintained as long as the cause persists and the run
command has not been removed (1).
rLS v [Spd maint.] (rLS): The drive maintains the speed being applied when the trip occurred, as long as the
cause is present and the run command has not been removed (1).
rMP v [Ramp stop] (rMP): Stop on ramp.
FSt v [Fast stop] (FSt): Fast stop
dCI v [DC injection] (dCI): DC injection stop. This type of stop cannot be used with certain other functions.
See table on page 217.

SLL M [Modbus fault mgt] [Freewheel] (YES)

Behavior of the drive in the event of a communication interruption with integrated Modbus
nO v [Ignore] (nO): Detected fault ignored.
YES v [Freewheel] (YES): Freewheel stop
Stt v [Per STT] (Stt): Stop according to configuration of [Type of stop] (Stt) page 228, without tripping.
In this case the fault relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the cause disappears,
according to the restart conditions of the active command channel (e.g. according to [2/3 wire control] (tCC)
and [2 wire type] (tCt) page 174 if control is via the terminals).
v [fallback spd] (LFF): Change to fallback speed, maintained as long as the cause persists and the run
LFF command has not been removed (1).
v [Spd maint.] (rLS): The drive maintains the speed being applied when the trip occurred, as long as the
rLS cause is present and the run command has not been removed (1).
v [Ramp stop] (rMP): Stop on ramp.
rMP v [Fast stop] (FSt): Fast stop
FSt v [DC injection] (dCI): DC injection stop. This type of stop cannot be used with certain other functions.
dCI See table on page 217.

(1) Because, in this case, the detected fault does not trigger a stop, it is required to assign a relay or logic output to its indication.

284 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT] (FLt-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

Sdd- [ENCODER FAULT]

Can be accessed if the encoder option card has been inserted and the encoder is used for speed feedback
(see page 151).

Sdd M [Load slip detection] [No] (nO)

no v [No] (nO): Detected fault not monitored. Only the alarm may be assigned to a logic output or a relay.
YES v [Yes] (YES): Detected fault monitored.
[Load slip detection] (Sdd) is forced to [Yes] (YES) if [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 146 = [FVC] (FUC) or
[Sync.CL] (FSY).
The trip is triggered by comparison with the ramp output and the speed feedback, and is only effective for
speeds greater than 10% of the [Rated motor freq.] (FrS), see page 152.
In the event of a trip, the drive will switch to a freewheel stop, and if the brake logic control function has been
configured, the brake command will be set to 0.

ECC M [Encoder coupling] [No] (nO)

nO v [No] (nO): Detected fault not monitored.

YES v [Yes] (YES): Detected fault monitored.
If the brake logic control function has been configured, the factory setting changes to [Yes] (YES).
[Encoder coupling] (ECC) = [Yes] (YES) is only possible if [Load slip detection] (Sdd) = [Yes] (YES) and
[Motor control type] (Ctt) page 146 = [FVC] (FUC) or [Sync.CL] (FSY) and [Brake assignment] (bLC)
page 240 is not [No] (nO).
The fault monitored is the break in the mechanical coupling of the encoder.
In the event of a trip, the drive will switch to a freewheel stop, and if the brake logic control function has been
configured, the brake command will be set to 0.

ECt M [Encoder check time] 2 to 10 s 2s

Encoder faults filtering time.

This parameter can be accessed if [Encoder coupling] (ECC) = [Yes] (YES)

tId- [TORQUE OR I LIM. DETECT]

SSb M [Trq/I limit. stop] [Ignore] (nO)

Behavior in the event of switching to torque or current limitation

nO v [Ignore] (nO): Detected fault ignored.
YES v [Freewheel] (YES): Freewheel stop
Stt v [Per STT] (Stt): Stop according to configuration of [Type of stop] (Stt) page 228, without tripping.
In this case the fault relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the fault disappears,
according to the restart conditions of the active command channel (e.g. according to [2/3 wire control] (tCC)
and [2 wire type] (tCt) page 174 if control is via the terminals). It is advisable to configure an alarm for this
cause (assigned to a logic output, for example) in order to indicate the cause of the stop.
LFF v [fallback spd] (LFF): Change to fallback speed, maintained as long as the cause persists and the run
command has not been removed (1).
rLS v [Spd maint.] (rLS): The drive maintains the speed being applied when the trip occurred, as long as the
fault is present and the run command has not been removed (1).
rMP v [Ramp stop] (rMP): Stop on ramp.
FSt v [Fast stop] (FSt): Fast stop
dCI v [DC injection] (dCI): DC injection stop. This type of stop cannot be used with certain other functions.
See table on page 217.

StO M [Trq/I limit. time out] 0 to 9999 ms 1000 ms

T (If fault has been configured).

Time delay for taking SSF "Limitation" fault into account.

T Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.

(1) Because, in this case, the detected fault does not trigger a stop, it is required to assign a relay or logic output to its indication.

BBV19478 11/2011 285

[1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT] (FLt-)

Use of the "Pulse input" to measure the speed of rotation of the motor
This function uses the "Pulse input" from the VW3A3202 extension card and can, therefore, only be used if this card has been inserted and
if the "Pulse input" is not being used for another function.

Example of use
A notched disc driven by the motor and connected to a proximity sensor can be used to generate a frequency signal that is proportional to
the speed of rotation of the motor.

Time, in seconds

When applied to the "Pulse input", this signal supports:

• Measurement and display of the motor speed: signal frequency = 1/T. This frequency is displayed by means of the [Pulse in. work. freq.]
(FqS) parameter, page 130 or 132.
• Overspeed detection (if the measured speed exceeds a preset threshold, the drive will trip).
• Brake failure detection, if brake logic control has been configured: If the speed does not drop sufficiently quickly following a command
to engage the brake, the drive will tri. This function can be used to detect worn brake linings.
• Detection of a speed threshold that can be adjusted using [Pulse warning thd.] (FqL) page 144 and is assignable to a relay or logic
output, see page 190.

286 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT] (FLt-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

FqF- [FREQUENCY METER]

Can be accessed if a VW3A3202 option card has been inserted

FqF M [Frequency meter] [No] (nO)

Activation of the speed measurement function.

nO v [No] (nO): Function inactive, In this case, none of the function parameters can be accessed.
YES v [Yes] (YES): Function active, assignment only possible if no other functions have been assigned to the
"Pulse input".

FqC M [Pulse scal. divisor] 1.0 to 100.0 1.0

• Scaling factor for the "Pulse input" (divisor). The frequency measured is displayed by means of the
[Pulse in. work. freq.] (FqS) parameter, page 130 or 132.

FqA M [Overspd. pulse thd.] [No] (nO)

Activation and adjustment of overspeed monitoring: [Overspeed] (SOF) trip.

nO v [No] (nO): No overspeed monitoring
- v 1 Hz to 30.00 Hz: Adjustment of the frequency tripping threshold on the "Pulse input" divided by
[Pulse scal. divisor] (FqC)

tdS M [Pulse overspd delay] 0.0 s to 10.0 s 0.0 s

Time delay for taking overspeed trip into account

Fdt M [Level fr. pulse ctrl] [No] (nO)

Activation and adjustment of monitoring for the Pulse input (speed feedback): [Speed fdback loss] (SPF) trip.
nO v [No] (nO): No monitoring of speed feedback
- v 0.1 Hz to 500.0 Hz: Adjustment of the motor frequency threshold for tripping a speed feedback detected
fault (difference between the estimated frequency and the measured speed)

Fqt M [Pulse thd. wo Run] [No] (nO)

Activation and adjustment of brake malfunction, monitoring: [Brake feedback] (brF). If brake logic control
[Brake assignment] (bLC) page 240 is not configured, this parameter is forced to [No] (nO).
nO v [No] (nO): No brake monitoring
- v 1 Hz to 1000 Hz: Adjustment of the motor frequency threshold for tripping in brake detected fault (detection
of speeds other than zero).

tqb M [Pulse thd. wo Run] 0.0 s to 10.0 s 0.0 s

Time delay for taking brake failure fault into account.

BBV19478 11/2011 287

[1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT] (FLt-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

brP- [DB RES. PROTECTION]

brO M [DB res. protection] [No] (nO)

nO v [No] (nO): No braking resistor protection (thereby preventing access to the other function parameters).
YES v [Alarm] (YES): Alarm. The alarm may be assigned to a logic output or a relay (see page 190).
FLt v [Fault] (FLt): Switch to (bOF) state with locking of drive (freewheel stop).
Note: The thermal state of the resistor can be displayed on the graphic display terminal.
It is calculated for as long as the drive control remains connected to the power supply.

brP M [DB Resistor Power] 0.1 kW (0.13 HP) to

1000 kW (1333 HP)
0.1 kW (0.5 HP)

T This parameter can be accessed if [DB res. protection] (brO) is not [No] (nO).
Rated power of the resistor used.

brU M [DB Resistor value] 0.1 to 200 ohms 0.1 ohms

T This parameter can be accessed if [DB res. protection] (brO) is not [No] (nO).
Rated value of the braking resistor in ohms.

tnF- [AUTO TUNING FAULT]

tnL M [Autotune fault mgt] [Freewheel] (YES)

nO v [Ignore] (nO): Detected fault ignored.

YES v [Freewheel] (YES): Freewheel stop
Stt v [Per STT] (Stt): Stop according to the type of stop selected by [Type of stop] (Stt) page 228.
LFF v [fallback spd] (LFF): Fallback speed
rLS v [Spd maint.] (rLS): Maintain speed
rMP v [Ramp stop] (rMP): Stop on ramp.
FSt v [Fast stop] (FSt): Fast stop.
dCI v [DC injection] (dCI): DC injection stop

T Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.

288 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT] (FLt-)

Card pairing
Function can only be accessed in [Expert] mode.
This function is used to detect whenever a card has been replaced or the software has been modified in any way.
When a pairing password is entered, the parameters of the cards currently inserted are stored. On every subsequent power-up these
parameters are verified and in the event of a discrepancy the drive in HCF trips mode. Before the drive can be restarted you must revert to
the original situation or re-enter the pairing password.

The following parameters are verified:

• The type of card for: all cards.
• The software version for: the two control cards, the VW3A3202 extension card, the Controller Inside card and the communication cards.
• The serial number for: both control cards.

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

PPI- [CARDS PAIRING]

PPI M [Pairing password] OFF to 9999 [OFF] (OFF)

The [OFF] (OFF) value signifies that the card pairing function is inactive.
The [ON] (On) value signifies that card pairing is active and that an access code must be entered in order to
start the drive in the event of a card pairing detected fault.
As soon as the code has been entered the drive is unlocked and the code changes to [ON] (On).
- The PPI code is an unlock code known only to Schneider Electric Product Support.

BBV19478 11/2011 289

[1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT] (FLt-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

LFF- [FALLBACK SPEED]

LFF M [Fallback speed] 0 to 1600 Hz 0 Hz

Selection of the fallback speed.

FSt- [RAMP DIVIDER]

dCF M [Ramp divider] (1) 0 to 10 4

T The ramp that is enabled (dEC or dE2) is then divided by this coefficient when stop requests are sent.
Value 0 corresponds to a minimum ramp time.

dCI- [DC INJECTION]

IdC M [DC inject. level 1] (1) (3) 0.1 to 1.41 In (2) 0.64 In (2)

T Level of DC injection braking current activated via logic input or selected as stop mode.

CAUTION
RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

tdI M [DC injection time 1] (1) (3) 0.1 to 30 s 0.5 s

T Maximum current injection time [DC inject. level 1] (IdC). After this time the injection current becomes
[DC inject. level 2] (IdC2).

IdC2 M [DC inject. level 2] (1) (3) 0.1 In (2) to [DC inject.
level 1] (IdC)
0.5 In (2)

T Injection current activated by logic input or selected as stop mode, once period of time [DC injection time 1] (tdI)
has elapsed.

CAUTION
RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

tdC M [DC injection time 2] (1) (3) 0.1 to 30 s 0.5 s

T Maximum injection time [DC inject. level 2] (IdC2) for injection, selected as stop mode only.
(Can be accessed if [Type of stop] (Stt) = [DC injection] (dCI)).

(1) Parameter can also be accessed in the [1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-) and [1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-) menus.
(2) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate.
(3) Note: These settings are independent of the [AUTO DC INJECTION] (AdC-) function.

T Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.

290 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.9 COMMUNICATION] (COM-)

With graphic display terminal:

RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A

1 DRIVE MENU
1.1 LIFT
1.2 MONITORING
1.3 SETTINGS
1.4 MOTOR CONTROL
1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG
Code << >> Quick
1.6 COMMAND
RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A 1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT. RUN Term +50.00Hz 80A
MAIN MENU 1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT 1.9 COMMUNICATION
ENT ENT
1 DRIVE MENU 1.9 COMMUNICATION COM. SCANNER INPUT
2 ACCESS LEVEL 1.10 DIAGNOSTICS COM. SCANNER OUTPUT
3 OPEN / SAVE AS 1.11 IDENTIFICATION MODBUS HMI
4 PASSWORD 1.12 FACTORY SETTINGS MODBUS NETWORK
5 LANGUAGE 1.13 USER MENU CANopen
Code Quick 1.14 CONTROL. INSIDE CARD Code << >> Quick

With integrated display terminal:

Turn on

XXX Displays the state of the drive

ENT

ESC

LIF-

ESC

FLt-
ENT
ESC

CON- COMMUNICATION
ESC

ESC

FCS-

ESC

LAC-

BBV19478 11/2011 291

[1.9 COMMUNICATION] (COM-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

[COM. SCANNER INPUT]

Only accessible via graphic display terminal

nMA1 M [Scan. IN1 address] 3201

Address of the 1st input word

nMA2 M [Scan. IN2 address] 8604

Address of the 2nd input word.

nMA3 M [Scan. IN3 address] 0

Address of the 3rd input word.

nMA4 M [Scan. IN4 address] 0

Address of the 4th input word.

nMA5 M [Scan. IN5 address] 0

Address of the 5th input word.

nMA6 M [Scan. IN6 address] 0

Address of the 6th input word.

nMA7 M [Scan. IN7 address] 0

Address of the 7th input word.

nMA8 M [Scan. IN8 address] 0

Address of the 8th input word.

[COM. SCANNER OUTPUT]

Only accessible via graphic display terminal

nCA1 M [Scan.Out1 address] 8501

Address of the 1st output word

nCA2 M [Scan.Out2 address] 8602

Address of the 2nd output word.

nCA3 M [Scan.Out3 address] 0

Address of the 3rd output word.

nCA4 M [Scan.Out4 address] 0

Address of the 4th output word.

nCA5 M [Scan.Out5 address] 0

Address of the 5th output word.

nCA6 M [Scan.Out6 address] 0

Address of the 6th output word.

nCA7 M [Scan.Out7 address] 0

Address of the 7th output word.

nCA8 M [Scan.Out8 address] 0

Address of the 8th output word.

292 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.9 COMMUNICATION] (COM-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

Md2- [MODBUS HMI]

Communication with the graphic display terminal

tbr2 M [HMI baud rate] 19.2 kbps

9.6 or 19.2 kbps via the integrated display terminal.

9600 or 19200 bauds via the graphic display terminal.
The graphic display terminal only operates if [HMI baud rate] (tbr2) = 19200 bauds (19.2 kbps).
In order for any change in the assignment of [HMI baud rate] (tbr2) to be taken into account you must:
- Provide confirmation in a confirmation window if using the graphic display terminal
- Press the ENT key for 2 s if using the integrated display terminal

tFO2 M [HMI format] 8E1

Read-only parameter, cannot be modified.

Md1- [MODBUS NETWORK]

Add M [Modbus Address] OFF

OFF to 247

AMOA M [Modbus add Prg C.] OFF

Modbus address of the Controller Inside card

OFF at 247
This parameter can be accessed if the Controller Inside card has been inserted and depending on its
configuration (please consult the specific documentation).

AMOC M [Modbus add Com.C.] OFF

Modbus address of the communication card

OFF to 247
This parameter can be accessed if a communication card has been inserted and depending on its
configuration (please consult the specific documentation).

tbr M [Modbus baud rate] 19.2 kbps

4.8 - 9.6 - 19.2 - 38.4 kbps on the integrated display terminal.

4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400 bauds on the graphic display terminal.

tFO M [Modbus format] 8E1

8O1 - 8E1 - 8n1, 8n2

ttO M [Modbus time out] 10.0 s

0.1 to 30 s

CnO- [CANopen]
AdCO M [CANopen address] 0

0 to 127

bdCO M [CANopen bit rate] 125 kbps

50 - 125 - 250 - 500 kbps - 1 Mbps

ErCO M [Error code]

Read-only parameter, cannot be modified.

BBV19478 11/2011 293

[1.9 COMMUNICATION] (COM-)

- [COMMUNICATION CARD]
See the specific documentation for the card used.

LCF- [FORCED LOCAL]

FLO M [Forced local assign.] [No] (nO)

nO v [No] (nO): Function inactive

LI1 v [LI1] (LI1) to [LI6] (LI6)
- v [LI7] (LI7) to [LI10] (LI10): If VW3A3201 logic I/O card has been inserted
LI14 v [LI11] (LI11) to [LI14] (LI14): If VW3A3202 extended I/O card has been inserted
Forced local mode is active when the input is at active state.
[Forced local assign.] (FLO) is forced to [No] (nO) if [Profile] (CHCF) page 212 = [I/O profile] (IO).

FLOC M [Forced local Ref.] [No] (nO)

nO v [No] (nO): Not assigned (control via the terminals with zero reference).
AI1 v [AI1] (AI1): Analog input
AI2 v [AI2] (AI2): Analog input
AI3 v [AI3] (AI3): Analog input, if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted.
AI4 v [AI4] (AI4): Analog input, if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted.
LCC v [HMI] (LCC): Assignment of the reference and command to the graphic display terminal.
Reference: [HMI Frequency ref.] (LFr), page 130, control: RUN/STOP/FWD/REV buttons.
PI v [RP] (PI): Frequency input, if VW3A3202 card has been inserted.
PG v [Encoder] (PG): Encoder input, if encoder card has been inserted.
If the reference is assigned to an analog input, [RP] (PI) or [Encoder] (PG) the command is automatically
assigned to the terminals as well (logic inputs).

FLOt M [Time-out forc. local] 10.0 s

0.1 to 30 s
This parameter can be accessed if [Forced local assign.] (FLO) is not [No] (nO).
Time delay before communication monitoring is resumed on leaving forced local mode.

294 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.10 DIAGNOSTICS]

This menu can only be accessed with the graphic display terminal.

RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A

1 DRIVE MENU
1.1 LIFT
1.2 MONITORING
1.3 SETTINGS
1.4 MOTOR CONTROL
1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG
Code << >> Quick
1.6 COMMAND
1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.
RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A 1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT RUN Term +50.00Hz 80A
MAIN MENU 1.9 COMMUNICATION 1.10 DIAGNOSTICS
ENT ENT
1 DRIVE MENU 1.10 DIAGNOSTICS FAULT HISTORY
2 ACCESS LEVEL 1.11 IDENTIFICATION CURRENT FAULT LIST
3 OPEN / SAVE AS 1.12 FACTORY SETTINGS MORE FAULT INFO
4 PASSWORD 1.13 USER MENU TEST PROCEDURES
5 LANGUAGE 1.14 CONTROL. INSIDE CARD SERVICE MESSAGE
Code Quick Code << >> Quick

RUN Term +50.00Hz 80A RUN Term +50.00Hz 80A This screen indicates the state of the drive at the
FAULT HISTORY ENT internal com. link moment the selected trip occurred.
internal com. link Drive state RDY
----- ETA status word ...
----- ETI status word ...
----- Cmd word ...
----- Motor current ...
Code Quick HELP Quick
Output frequency ...
Elapsed time ...
RUN Term +50.00Hz 80A Line supply voltage ...
CURRENT FAULT LIST ENT Motor thermal state ...
internal com. link Command Channel ...
----- Channel ref. active ...
-----
-----
-----
Code Quick

RUN Term +50.00Hz 80A This screen indicates the number of

MORE FAULT INFO communication interruptions, for example, with
Network fault 0 the option cards.
Application fault 0 Number: from 0 to 65535
Internal link fault 1 0
Internal link fault 2 0
For [Encoder Fault], which is only visible if a VW3
Encoder Fault 0
A3 408, VW3 A3 409,VW3 A3 410 or VW3 A3 411
Code Quick
card has been inserted, the figure displayed is one
of the fault codes summarized in the table on the
next page.

BBV19478 11/2011 295

[1.10 DIAGNOSTICS]

Summary table of types of [Encoder Fault]

Code Description of the error

0 No error, except if the control section has a separate power supply, in which case the power section must be turned on to
display the actual code.
1 Internal UE/MC communication interruption (CRC error).
2 Internal UE/MC communication interruption (time out).
16 Synchronization error (PLL error).
17 Encoder signal cut or short-circuited.
18 PUC emulation detected fault.
19 Resolver: Unstable feedback signal.
20 Internal card communication interruption.
21 Resolver: Feedback signal too weak.
22 Resolver: Feedback signal too strong.
23 Encoder overcurrent.
32 EnDAT: CRC error.
33 EnDAT: Start bit not detected.
34 EnDAT: EEP access error.
35 EnDAT: Incorrect EEP value.
48 Hiperface: Incoherent SinCos signal.
49 Hiperface: Time out.
50 Hiperface: Unknown encoder.
51 Hiperface: CRC error.
64 SinCos: Incoherent SinCos signal.
80 SSI: Parity error.
81 SSI: Invalid data.
96 The position is not available.

296 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.10 DIAGNOSTICS]

[THYRISTORS TEST] is only accessible for ATV71LD48N4Z drives.

RDY Term +50.00Hz 0A RDY Term +50.00Hz 0A RDY Term +50.00Hz 0A

TEST PROCEDURES ENT THYRISTORS TEST TEST IN PROGRESS
THYRISTORS TEST
ENT
TRANSISTOR TEST 2s
ENT to perform the test
ESC to cancel

Quick

RDY Term +50.00Hz 0A

THYRISTORS RESULT
Thyristor 1 Failed
Thyristor 2 OK
Thyristor 3 OK

Quick

RDY Term +50.00Hz 0A RDY Term +50.00Hz 0A

ENT TRANSISTOR TEST TEST IN PROGRESS
ENT
Check that a motor is connected. 2s
Enter the motor nameplate data.

ENT to perform the test

ESC to cancel

RDY Term +50.00Hz 0A

TRANSISTOR RESULT
The result for each IGBT is displayed IGBT 1 OK
on 2 lines: IGBT 1 OK
IGBT 2 OK
- The first line shows whether or not it
IGBT 2 Open
has short-circuited
IGBT 3 OK
- The second line shows whether or not Quick
it is open IGBT 3 OK
IGBT 4 OK
IGBT 4 OK
IGBT 5 OK
IGBT 5 OK
IGBT 6 short-circuit
IGBT 6 OK

Note: To start the tests, press and hold down (2 s) the ENT key.

BBV19478 11/2011 297

[1.11 IDENTIFICATION]

RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A

1 DRIVE MENU
1.1 LIFT
1.2 MONITORING
1.3 SETTINGS
1.4 MOTOR CONTROL
1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG
Code << >> Quick
1.6 COMMAND
1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.
1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT
RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A 1.9 COMMUNICATION RUN Term 1,250 +50.00Hz
1.10 DIAGNOSTICS A
MAIN MENU ENT ENT 1.11 IDENTIFICATION
1 DRIVE MENU 1.11 IDENTIFICATION
1.12 FACTORY SETTINGS ATV71LD10N4Z
2 ACCESS LEVEL
1.13 USER MENU xx.x kW / yy.y HP
3 OPEN / SAVE AS
1.14 CONTROL. INSIDE CARD 380/480 V
4 PASSWORD
Appli. Software Vx.x IE xx
5 LANGUAGE
MC Software Vx.x IE xx
Code Quick
<< >> Quick
6W0410xxxxxxxxxx
product Vx.x
OPTION 1
I/O EXTENSION CARD
Vx.x IE xx
OPTION 2
FIPIO CARD
Vx.x IE xx
KEYPAD
GRAPHIC S
Vx.x IE xx
ENCODER
RS 422

The [1.11 IDENTIFICATION] menu can only be accessed on the graphic display terminal.
This is a read-only menu that cannot be configured. It enables the following information to be displayed:
• Drive reference, power rating and voltage
• Drive software version
• Drive serial number
• Type of options present, with their software version.

298 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.12 FACTORY SETTINGS] (FCS-)

With graphic display terminal:

RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A

1 DRIVE MENU
1.1 LIFT
1.2 MONITORING
1.3 SETTINGS
1.4 MOTOR CONTROL
1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG
Code << >> Quick
1.6 COMMAND
1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.
1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT
1.9 COMMUNICATION
RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A 1.10 DIAGNOSTICS RUN Term +50.00Hz 80A
MAIN MENU 1.11 IDENTIFICATION ENT 1.12 FACTORY SETTINGS
ENT
1 DRIVE MENU 1.12 FACTORY SETTINGS Config. Source : Macro-Conf
2 ACCESS LEVEL 1.13 USER MENU PARAMETER GROUP LIST
3 OPEN / SAVE AS 1.14 CONTROL. INSIDE CARD Goto FACTORY SETTINGS
4 PASSWORD Save config : No
5 LANGUAGE
Code Quick Code << >> Quick

With integrated display terminal:

Turn on

Displays the state of the drive

XXX

ENT

ESC

LIF-

ESC

CON-
ENT
ESC

FCS- FACTORY SETTINGS

ESC

LAC-

The [1.12 FACTORY SETTINGS] (FCS-) menu is used to:

• Replace the current configuration with the factory configuration or a configuration saved previously.
All or part of the current configuration can be replaced: Select a group of parameters in order to select the menus you wish to load
with the selected source configuration.

• Save the current configuration to a file.

BBV19478 11/2011 299

[1.12 FACTORY SETTINGS] (FCS-)

RUN Term 1,250 +50.00Hz RUN Term 1,250 +50.00Hz Selection of source configuration
A A
1.12 FACTORY SETTINGS ENT Config. Source
Config. Source : Macro-Conf Macro-Conf
PARAMETER GROUP LIST Config 1
Goto FACTORY SETTINGS Config 2
Save config : No

Code << >> Quick Quick

ENT
RUN Term 1,250 +50.00Hz Selection of the menus to be
A
PARAMETER GROUP LIST
replaced
All
Drive configuration Note: In factory configuration
Settings and after a return to "factory
Motor parameters settings", [PARAMETER
Communication GROUP LIST] will be empty.
Code Quick

RUN Term 1,250 +50.00Hz Command to return to "factory

ENT A
settings"
Goto FACTORY SETTINGS

PLEASE CHECK THAT

THE DRIVE WIRING IS OK

ESC=abort ENT=validate

RUN Term 1,250 +50.00Hz

A
This window appears if no group
Goto FACTORY SETTINGS
of parameters is selected.
First select the
parameter group(s)
Press ENT or ESC
to continue

ENT

RUN Term 1,250 +50.00Hz

A
Save config
No
Config 0
Config 1
Config 2

Quick

300 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.12 FACTORY SETTINGS] (FCS-)

Code Name/Description

FCSI M [Config. Source]

Choice of source configuration.
InI v [Macro-Conf] (InI) Factory configuration, return to selected macro configuration.
CFG1 v [Config 1] (CFG1)
CFG2 v [Config 2] (CFG2)
If the configuration switching function is configured, it will not be possible to access [Config 1] (CFG1) and
[Config 2] (CFG2).
FrY-
M [PARAMETER GROUP LIST]
Selection of menus to be loaded
ALL v [All] (ALL): All parameters
drU v [Drive configuration] (drV): The [1 DRIVE MENU] menu without [1.9 COMMUNICATION] and [1.14
CONTROL INSIDE MENU]. In the [7 DISPLAY CONFIG.] menu, [Return Std name] page 313 returns to [No].
SEt v [Settings] (SEt): The [1.3 SETTINGS] menu without the [IR compensation] (UFr), [Slip compensation] (SLP)
and [Mot. therm. current] (ItH) parameters.
MOt v [Motor parameters] (MOt): Motor parameters, see list below.
The following options can only be accessed if [Config. Source] (FCSI) = [Macro-Conf] (InI):
COM v [Communication] (COM): The [1.9 COMMUNICATION] menu without either [Scan. IN1 address] (nMA1)
to [Scan. IN8 address] (nMA8) or [Scan.Out1 address] (nCA1) to [Scan.Out8 address] (nCA8).
PLC v [Control Inside menu] (PLC): The [1.14 CONTROL INSIDE MENU] menu.
MOn v [Monitor config.] (MOn): The [6 MONITORING CONFIG.] menu.
dIS v [Display config.] (dIS): The [7 DISPLAY CONFIG.] menu.
See the multiple selection procedure on page 26 for the integrated display terminal and page 17 for the graphic
display terminal.
Note: In factory configuration and after a return to "factory settings", [PARAMETER GROUP LIST]
will be empty.

GFS M [Goto FACTORY SETTINGS]

It is only possible to revert to the factory settings if at least one group of parameters has previously been selected.
With the integrated display terminal:
- No
nO - Yes: The parameter changes back to nO automatically as soon as the operation is complete.
YES With the graphic display terminal: See the previous page.

SCSI M [Save config]

nO v [No] (nO):
Str0 v [Config 0] (Str0): Press the "ENT" key for 2 s.
Str1 v [Config 1] (Str1): Press the "ENT" key for 2 s.
Str2 v [Config 2] (Str2): Press the "ENT" key for 2 s.
The active configuration to be saved does not appear for selection. For example, if the active configuration is
[Config 0] (Str0), only [Config 1] (Str1) and [Config 2] (Str2) appear. The parameter changes back to [No] (nO)
automatically as soon as the operation is complete.

List of motor parameters

[1.4 MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-) menu:
[Rated motor power] (nPr) - [Rated motor volt.] (UnS) - [Rated mot. current] (nCr) - [Rated motor freq.] (FrS) - [Rated motor speed] (nSP) -
[Auto-tuning] (tUn) - [Auto tuning status] (tUS) - [Angle auto-test] (ASA) - [Angle offset value] (ASU) - [U0] (U0) à [U5] (U5) - [Freq pt 1on
5pt V/F] (F1) to [F5] (F5) - [V. constant power] (UCP) - [Freq. Const. Power] (FCP) - [Nominal I sync.] (nCrS) - [Nom motor spdsync] (nSPS)
- [Pole pairs] (PPnS) - [Syn. EMF constant] (PHS) - [Autotune L d-axis] (LdS) - [Autotune L q-axis] (LqS) - [Cust. stator R syn] (rSAS) -
[IR compensation] (UFr) - [Slip compensation] (SLP) - motor parameters that can be accessed in [Expert] mode, pages 155, 156 and 158.

[1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu:

[Mot. therm. current] (ItH)

Example of total return to factory settings

1. [Config. Source] (FCSI) = [Macro-conf] (InI)
2. [PARAMETER GROUP LIST] (FrY-) = [All] (ALL)
3. [Goto FACTORY SETTINGS] (GFS = YES)

BBV19478 11/2011 301

[1.13 USER MENU] (USr-)

This menu contains the parameters selected in the [7 DISPLAY CONFIG.] menu on page 312.

With graphic display terminal:

RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A

1 DRIVE MENU
1.1 LIFT
1.2 MONITORING
1.3 SETTINGS
1.4 MOTOR CONTROL
1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG
Code << >> Quick
1.6 COMMAND
1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.
1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT
1.9 COMMUNICATION
1.10 DIAGNOSTICS
RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A 1.11 IDENTIFICATION RUN Term 1,250 +50.00Hz
MAIN MENU 1.12 FACTORY SETTINGS A
ENT ENT
1 DRIVE MENU 1.13 USER MENU 1.13 USER MENU
2 ACCESS LEVEL 1.14 CONTROL. INSIDE CARD
3 OPEN / SAVE AS
4 PASSWORD
5 LANGUAGE
Code Quick
<< >> Quick

With integrated display terminal:

Turn on

XXX Displays the state of the drive

ENT

ESC

LIF-

ESC

FCS-
ENT
ESC

USr- USER MENU

ESC

LAC-

302 BBV19478 11/2011

[1.14 CONTROL. INSIDE CARD] (PLC-)

This menu can only be accessed if a Controller Inside card has been inserted. Refer to the documentation specific to this card.

With graphic display terminal:

RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A

1 DRIVE MENU
1.1 LIFT
1.2 MONITORING
1.3 SETTINGS
1.4 MOTOR CONTROL
1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG
Code << >> Quick
1.6 COMMAND
1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.
1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT
1.9 COMMUNICATION
1.10 DIAGNOSTICS
1.11 IDENTIFICATION
RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A 1.12 FACTORY SETTINGS RUN Term 1,250 +50.00Hz
A
MAIN MENU 1.13 USER MENU ENT
ENT 1.14 CONTROL. INSIDE CARD
1 DRIVE MENU 1.14 CONTROL. INSIDE CARD
2 ACCESS LEVEL
3 OPEN / SAVE AS
4 PASSWORD
5 LANGUAGE
Code Quick
<< >> Quick

With integrated display terminal:

Turn on

Displays the state of the drive

XXX

ENT

ESC

LIF-

ESC

USr-
ENT
ESC

PLC- Controller Inside menu

ESC

COd-

ESC

LAC-

BBV19478 11/2011 303

[3 OPEN/SAVE AS]

This menu can only be accessed with the graphic display terminal.

RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A

MAIN MENU
1 DRIVE MENU RUN Term 1,250 +50.00Hz
A
2 ACCESS LEVEL ENT 3. OPEN / SAVE AS
3 OPEN / SAVE AS
OPEN
4 PASSWORD
SAVE AS
5 LANGUAGE
Code Quick

Code << >> Quick

[OPEN]: To download one of the 4 files from the graphic display terminal to the drive.
[SAVE AS]: To download the current drive configuration to the graphic display terminal.
Note: The transfer from the graphic display terminal to the drive (and vice versa) can only be carried out while the motor is stopped.

RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A

3. OPEN / SAVE AS AS OPEN DOWNLOAD GROUP
ENT ENT See details on
OPEN File 1 Used None
the next page
SAVE AS File 2 Empty All
File 3 Empty Drive configuration
File 4 Empty Motor parameters
Communication
Code << >> Quick Code << >> Quick Code Quick
Controller Inside card
Note: Opening an empty
file has no effect. ENT

RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A

DOWNLOAD

PLEASE CHECK THAT

THE DRIVE WIRING IS OK

ESC = abort ENT = continue

Code Quick
ENT ENT

RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A

SAVE AS DOWNLOAD
File 1 Used ENT
File 2 Free
IN PROGRESS
File 3 Free
File 4 Free

Code Quick Code Quick

ENT
Saving to a used file
deletes and RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A
replaces the configuration DOWNLOAD
contained in this file.
DONE

ENT or ESC to continue

Code Quick

Various messages may appear when the download is requested:

• [IN PROGRESS]
• [DONE]
• Error messages if download not possible
• [Motor parameters are NOT COMPATIBLE. Do you want to continue?]: In this case the download is possible, but the parameters will
be restricted.

304 BBV19478 11/2011

[3 OPEN/SAVE AS]

[DOWNLOAD GROUP]

[None]: No parameters
[All]: All parameters in all menus
[Drive configuration]: The entire [1 DRIVE MENU] without [1.9 COMMUNICATION] and
[1.14 CONTROL. INSIDE CARD].
[Motor parameters]: [Rated motor power] (nPr) In the [1.4 MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-) menu
[Rated motor volt.] (UnS)
[Rated mot. current] (nCr)
[Rated motor freq.] (FrS)
[Rated motor speed] (nSP)
[Auto tuning] (tUn)
[Auto tuning status] (tUS)
[Angle auto-test] (ASA)
[Angle offset value] (ASU)
[U0] (U0) to [U5] (U5)
[F1] (F1) to [F5] (F5)
[V. constant power] (UCP)
[Freq. Const Power] (FCP)
[Nominal I sync.] (nCrS)
[Nom motor spdsync] (nSPS)
[Pole pairs] (PPnS)
[Syn. EMF constant] (PHS)
[Autotune L d-axis] (LdS)
[Autotune L q-axis] (LqS)
[Cust. stator R syn] (rSAS)
[Motor torque] (tqS)
[Measured Ld-axis] (LdMS)
[Measured Lq-axis] (LqMS)
[IR compensation] (UFr)
[Slip compensation] (SLP)
The motor parameters that can
be accessed in [Expert] mode,
pages 155, 156 and 158.
[Mot. therm. current] (ItH) In the [1.3 SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu
[Communication]: All the parameters in the [1.9 COMMUNICATION] menu
[Control Inside card]: All the parameters in the [1.14 CONTROL. INSIDE CARD] menu

BBV19478 11/2011 305

[4. PASSWORD] (COd-)

With graphic display terminal:

RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A

MAIN MENU
1 DRIVE MENU
RUN Term +50.00Hz 80A
2 ACCESS LEVEL
4 PASSWORD
3 OPEN / SAVE AS ENT Status : Unlocked
4 PASSWORD
PIN code 1 : Unlocked
5 LANGUAGE
PIN code 2 : Unlocked
Code Quick
Upload rights : Permitted
Download rights : Unlock. drv
Code << >> Quick

With integrated display terminal:

Turn on

XXX Displays the state of the drive

ENT

ESC

LIF-

ENT
ESC

COd- PASSWORD
ESC

ESC

LAC-

Enables the configuration to be protected with an access code or a password to be entered in order to access a protected configuration.

Example with graphic display terminal:

RUN Term +50.00Hz 80A RUN Term +50.00Hz 80A

4 PASSWORD PIN code 1
Status : Unlocked
PIN code 1 : Unlocked
PIN code 2 : Unlocked 9520
Upload rights : Permitted
Download rights : Unlock. drv Min = Unlocked Max = 9999
Code << >> Quick << >> Quick

• The drive is unlocked when the PIN codes are set to [unlocked] (OFF) (no password) or when the correct code has been entered.
• Before protecting the configuration with an access code, you must:
- Define the [Upload rights] (ULr) and [Download rights] (dLr).
- Make a careful note of the code and keep it in a place where you will always be able to find it.
• The drive has 2 access codes, enabling 2 access levels to be set up.
- PIN code 1 is a public unlock code: 6969.
- PIN code 2 is an unlock code known only to Schneider Electric Product Support. It can only be accessed in [Expert] mode.
- Only one PIN1 or PIN2 code can be used - the other must remain set to [OFF] (OFF).

Note: When the unlock code is entered, the user access code appears.

The following items are access-protected:

• Return to factory settings ([1.12 FACTORY SETTINGS] (FCS-) menu).
• The channels and parameters protected by the [1.13 USER MENU] as well as the menu itself.
• The custom display settings ([7 DISPLAY CONFIG.] menu).

306 BBV19478 11/2011

[4. PASSWORD] (COd-)

Code Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

CSt M [Status] [Unlocked] (ULC)

Information parameter, cannot be modified.

LC v [Locked] (LC): The drive is locked by a password.
ULC v [Unlocked] (ULC): The drive is not locked by a password.
COd M [PIN code 1] OFF to 9999 [OFF] (OFF)

1st access code. The value [OFF] (OFF) indicates that no password has been set [Unlocked]. The value
[ON] (On) indicates that the drive is protected and an access code must be entered in order to unlock it. Once
the correct code has been entered, it remains on the display and the drive is unlocked until the next time the
power supply is disconnected.
- PIN code 1 is a public unlock code: 6969.

COd2 M [PIN code 2] OFF to 9999 [OFF] (OFF)

Parameter can only be accessed in [Expert] mode.

2nd access code. The value [OFF] (OFF) indicates that no password has been set [Unlocked]. The value
[ON] (On) indicates that the drive is protected and an access code must be entered in order to unlock it. Once
the correct code has been entered, it remains on the display and the drive is unlocked until the next time the
power supply is disconnected.
- PIN code 2 is an unlock code known only to Schneider Electric Product Support.

ULr M [Upload rights] [Permitted] (ULr0)

Read or copy the current configuration to the drive.

ULr0 v [Permitted] (ULr0): The current drive configuration can always be uploaded to the graphic display terminal
or PC-Software.
ULr1 v [Not allowed] (ULr1): The current drive configuration can only be uploaded to the graphic display terminal
or PC-Software if the drive is not protected by an access code or if the correct code has been entered.

dLr M [Download rights] [Unlock. drv] (dLr1)

Writes the current configuration to the drive or downloads a configuration to the drive
dLr0 v [Locked drv] (dLr0): A configuration file can only be downloaded to the drive if the drive is protected by an
access code, which is the same as the access code for the configuration to be downloaded.
dLr1 v [Unlock. drv] (dLr1): A configuration file can be downloaded to the drive or a configuration in the drive can
be modified if the drive is unlocked (access code entered) or is not protected by an access code.
dLr2 v [not allowed] (dLr2): Download not authorized.
dLr3 v [Lock/unlock] (dLr3): Combination of [Locked drv] (dLr0) and [Unlock. drv] (dLr1).

BBV19478 11/2011 307

[6 MONITORING CONFIG.]

This menu can only be accessed with the graphic display terminal.

RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A

MAIN MENU
1 DRIVE MENU
2 ACCESS LEVEL
3 OPEN / SAVE AS
4 PASSWORD
5 LANGUAGE RUN Term +40.00Hz 80A
Code Quick ENT 6 MONITORING CONFIG.
6 MONITORING CONFIG. 6.1 PARAM. BAR SELECT
7 DISPLAY CONFIG. 6.2 MONITOR SCREEN TYPE
8 International unit 6.3 COM. MAP CONFIG.

Code << >> Quick

This can be used to configure the information displayed on the graphic display screen during operation.

RUN Term +40.00Hz 80A

6 MONITORING CONFIG.
6.1 PARAM. BAR SELECT
6.2 MONITOR SCREEN TYPE
6.3 COM. MAP CONFIG.

Code << >> Quick

[6.1. PARAM. BAR SELECT]: Selection of 1 to 2 parameters displayed on the top line (the first 2 cannot be modified).

[6.2. MONITOR SCREEN TYPE]: Selection of parameters displayed in the centre of the screen and the display mode (digital values or bar
graph format).

[6.3. COM. MAP CONFIG.]: Selection of the words displayed and their format.

308 BBV19478 11/2011

[6 MONITORING CONFIG.]

Name/Description

[6.1 PARAM. BAR SELECT]

v [Alarm groups]
v [Frequency ref.] in Hz: parameter displayed in factory configuration.
v [Torque reference] as a %
v [Output frequency] in Hz
v [Motor current] in A: parameter displayed in factory configuration.
v [ENA avg speed] in Hz
v [Vitesse ascenseur] in m/s
v [Motor speed] in rpm
v [Motor voltage] in V
v [Motor power] in W
v [Motor torque] as a %
v [Mains voltage] in V
v [Travel distance]
v [Number of travels]
v [Motor thermal as a %
state] as a %
v [Drv. thermal state] as a %
v [DBR thermal state] in Wh or kWh depending on drive rating
v [Consumption] in hours (length of time the motor has been switched on)
v [Run time] in hours (length of time the drive has been switched on)
v [Power on time] in seconds (total time of IGBT overheating alarms)
v [IGBT alarm Word generated by the Controller Inside card (can be accessed if the card has been inserted)
counter]
v [- - - - 02] Word generated by the Controller Inside card (can be accessed if the card has been inserted)
to CNFO, 1 or 2 (see page 261)
v [- - - - 06] SET1, 2 or 3 (see page 110)
v [Config. active]
v [Utilised param. set]
Select the parameter using ENT (a then appears next to the parameter). Parameter(s) can also be deselected using ENT.
1 or 2 parameters can be selected.

E.g.

PARAM. BAR SELECT

MONITORING
---------
---------
---------
---------

BBV19478 11/2011 309

[6 MONITORING CONFIG.]

Name/Description

[6.2. MONITOR SCREEN TYPE]

M [Display value type]
v [Digital]: Display of one or two digital values on the screen (factory configuration).
v [Bar graph]: Display of one or two bar graphs on the screen.
v [List]: Display a list of between one and five values on the screen.
M [PARAMETER SELECTION]
v [Alarm groups] can only be accessed if [Display value type] = [List]
v [Frequency ref.] in Hz: parameter displayed in factory configuration.
v [Torque reference] as a %
v [Output frequency] in Hz
v [Motor current] in A
v [ENA avg speed] in Hz
v [Vitesse ascenseur] in m/s
v [Motor speed] in rpm
v [Motor voltage] in V
v [Motor power] in W
v [Motor torque] as a %
v [Mains voltage] in V
v [Travel distance]
v [Number of travels]
v [Motor thermal state] as a %
v [Drv. thermal state] as a %
v [DBR thermal state] as a %
v [Consumption] in Wh or kWh depending on drive rating
v [Run time] in hours (length of time the motor has been switched on)
v [Power on time] in hours (length of time the drive has been switched on)
v [IGBT alarm counter] in seconds (total time of IGBT overheating alarms)
v [- - - - 02] Word generated by the Controller Inside card (can be accessed if the card has been inserted)
to
v [- - - - 06] Word generated by the Controller Inside card (can be accessed if the card has been inserted)
v [Config. active] CNFO, 1 or 2 (see page 261), can only be accessed if [Display value type] = [List]
v [Utilised param. set] SET1, 2 or 3 (see page 110), can only be accessed if [Display value type] = [List]

Select the parameter(s) using ENT (a then appears next to the parameter). Parameter(s) can also be deselected using
ENT.

PARAMETER SELECTION
MONITORING
---------
---------
---------
---------

Examples include

Display of 2 digital values Display of 2 bar graphs Display of a list of 5

values

RUN Term +35.00Hz 80A RUN Term +35.00Hz 80A RUN Term +35.00Hz 80A
Motor speed Min Motor speed max MONITORING
0 1250 rpm 1500 Frequency ref. : 50.1 Hz
1250 rpm Motor current : 80 A
Motor current Min Motor current max Motor speed : 1250 rpm
0 80 A 150 Motor thermal state : 80%
80 A Drv thermal state : 80%
Quick Quick Quick

310 BBV19478 11/2011

[6 MONITORING CONFIG.]

Name/Description

[6.3. COM. MAP CONFIG.]

M [Word 1 add. select.]
Select the address of the word to be displayed by pressing the <<, >> (F2 and F3) keys and rotating the navigation button.

M [Format word 1]
Format of word 1.
v [Hex]: Hexadecimal
v [Signed]: Decimal with sign
v [Unsigned]: Decimal without sign
M [Word 2 add. select.]
Select the address of the word to be displayed by pressing the <<, >> (F2 and F3) keys and rotating the navigation button.

M [Format word 2]
Format of word 2.
v [Hex]: Hexadecimal
v [Signed]: Decimal with sign
v [Unsigned]: Decimal without sign
M [Word 3 add. select.]
Select the address of the word to be displayed by pressing the <<, >> (F2 and F3) keys and rotating the navigation button.

M [Format word 3]
Format of word 3.
v [Hex]: Hexadecimal
v [Signed]: Decimal with sign
v [Unsigned]: Decimal without sign
M [Word 4 add. select.]
Select the address of the word to be displayed by pressing the <<, >> (F2 and F3) keys and rotating the navigation button.

M [Format word 4]
Format of word 4.
v [Hex]: Hexadecimal
v [Signed]: Decimal with sign
v [Unsigned]: Decimal without sign
It will then be possible to view the selected words in the [COMMUNICATION MAP] submenu of the [1.2 MONITORING] menu.
Example:

RUN Term +35.00Hz 80A

COMMUNICATION MAP
- - - - - - - -- -
- - - - -- - - - -
W3141 : F230 Hex

<< >> Quick

BBV19478 11/2011 311

[7 DISPLAY CONFIG.]

This menu can only be accessed with the graphic display terminal. It can be used to customize parameters or a menu and to access
parameters.

RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A

MAIN MENU
1 DRIVE MENU
2 ACCESS LEVEL
3 OPEN / SAVE AS
4 PASSWORD
5 LANGUAGE
Code Quick Rdy Term +0.00Hz 0A
6 MONITORING CONFIG. ENT 7 DISPLAY CONFIG.
7 DISPLAY CONFIG. 7.1 USER PARAMETERS
8 International unit 7.2 USER MENU
7.3 PARAMETER ACCESS
7.4 KEYPAD PARAMETERS

Code << >> Quick

7.1 USER PARAMETERS: Customization of 1 to 15 parameters.

7.2 USER MENU: Creation of a customized menu.

7.3 PARAMETER ACCESS: Customization of the visibility and protection mechanisms of menus and parameters.

7.4 KEYPAD PARAMETERS: Adjustment of the contrast and stand-by mode of the graphic display terminal (parameters stored in the
terminal rather than in the drive).

312 BBV19478 11/2011

[7 DISPLAY CONFIG.]

If [Return Std name] = [Yes] the display reverts to standard but the custom settings remain stored.

RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A PARAMETER SELECTION PARAMETER SELECTION

7.1 USER PARAMETERS 1 DRIVE MENU 1.3 SETTINGS Selection of 1 to 15 parameters
Return Std name : No ENT 1.1 LIFT Ramp increment to be customized
PARAMETER SELECTION 1.2 MONITORING ENT Acceleration
CUSTOMIZED SELECTION 1.3 SETTINGS Deceleration
USER MENU NAME 1.4 MOTOR CONTROL Acceleration 2
DEVICE NAME 1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG Deceleration 2
Code << >> Quick Code << >> Quick List
SERVICE MESSAGE List
CONFIGURATION 0
CONFIGURATION 1 Note: The 1st line is [PARAMETER SELECTION] or
CONFIGURATION 2 RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A [RDY Term +0.00 Hz 0A] depending on the path (ENT or List).
ATV SERIAL NUMBER CUSTOMIZED SELECTION
ENT Ramp increment List of customized parameters
Acceleration

Delete

ENT

RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A If no custom settings have

Ramp increment ENT User name been made, the
User name 1. DRIVE MENU standard value appears
Unit FLOW REFERENCE
(names, units, etc.).
Multiplier
Divisor
Offset Nb characters max. 13
Display on 1 or 2 lines of
ABC << >> characters.

Offsets and coefficients are Use F1 to change to ABC, abc, 123, *[-.
numerical values. Do not use Use the navigation selector button to increment the character
too high a multiplier (99999 - (alphabetical order) and << and >> (F2 and F3) to switch to the
max display). next or previous character respectively.

ENT RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A

Unit Customized
- Standard: use of the factory set Standard 1. DRIVE MENU
unit Customized LBS
- Customized: customization of
%
the unit
mA Nb characters max. 3
-%, mA, etc. : select from drop-
Quick ABC << >>
down list
Once you have entered the unit, if you press ENT, the Ramp
increment screen will re-appear in order to display the name.
Press ESC to return to Unit.

The message entered appears RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A

RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A LINE 2
while the "View" button is pressed.
SERVICE MESSAGE 1. DRIVE MENU
LINE 1 For any service, dial:
LINE 2
ENT
LINE 3
LINE 4 Nb characters max. 23
LINE 5 ABC << >> Quick
View Quick

Names (USER MENU NAME, DRIVE NAME, configuration, serial no., lines of messages, names of
RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A units, etc.) are customized as in the example of the parameter name shown opposite.
USER MENU NAME If no custom settings have been made, the standard value appears (names, units, etc.).
1. DRIVE MENU Display on 1 or 2 lines of characters.
FLOW REFERENCE
Use F1 to change to ABC, abc, 123, *[-.
Use the navigation selector button to increment the character (alphabetical order) and << and >>
Nb characters max. 18
(F2 and F3) to switch to the next or previous character respectively.
ABC << >> Quick

BBV19478 11/2011 313

[7 DISPLAY CONFIG.]

RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A PARAMETER SELECTION PARAMETER SELECTION Selection of parameters

7.2 USER MENU ENT 1 DRIVE MENU 1.3 SETTINGS included in the user menu.
PARAMETER SELECTION 1.1 LIFT Ramp increment
SELECTED LIST 1.2 MONITORING ENT Acceleration
1.3 SETTINGS Deceleration
1.4 MOTOR CONTROL Acceleration 2
1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG Deceleration 2
Code << >> Quick Code << >> Quick List

List Note: The 1st line is

[PARAMETER SELECTION]
or
[RDY Term +0.00 Hz 0A]
depending on the path
ENT (ENT or List).

RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A Parameter list

SELECTED LIST making up the user menu.
Ramp increment
Acceleration

Delete Up Down

Use the F2 and F3 keys to

arrange the parameters in the
list (example below using F3).

RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A

SELECTED LIST
Acceleration
Ramp increment

Delete Up Down

314 BBV19478 11/2011

[7 DISPLAY CONFIG.]

RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A

7.3 PARAMETER ACCESS
PROTECTION ENT
VISIBILITY

Code << >> Quick

RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A

Selection to display all
VISIBILITY PARAMETERS parameters or only the
ENT
PARAMETERS Active active parameters.
MENUS All Press ESC to exit this screen.

Code Quick Quick

ENT
ENT MENUS You remain exclusively in the
1. DRIVE MENU [1. DRIVE MENU] menu. All
1.1 LIFT menus are selected by default.
1.2 MONITORING Press ENT to deselect a menu.
1.3 SETTINGS
Press ENT to reselect a menu.
1.4 MOTOR CONTROL
1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG

RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A IMPORTANT: The protected channel (or channels) must be
PROTECTION PROTECTED CHANNELS
selected, as a protected parameter on a selected channel
PROTECTED CHANNELS HMI
remains accessible on the channels that are not selected.
PROTECTED PARAMS PC TOOL
ENT MODBUS
CANopen
COM. CARD
Code Quick Code Quick
C. INSIDE CARD

PROTECTED PARAMS PROTECTED PARAMS In these screens all parameters in the

ENT 1 DRIVE MENU 1.3 SETTINGS [1. DRIVE MENU] menu can be
1.1 LIFT protected and are displayed for
Ramp increment
ENT selection, except for the Expert
1.2 MONITORING Acceleration parameters.
1.3 SETTINGS Deceleration
Press the All button to select all the
1.4 MOTOR CONTROL Acceleration 2 parameters. Press the All button again to
1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG Deceleration 2 deselect all the parameters.
All
1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.

No selections can be made in this

screen if there are no parameters.

PROTECTED PARAMS
1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.
REF. OPERATIONS
RAMP
STOP CONFIGURATION
AUTO DC INJECTION
ENT PROTECTED PARAMS
PRESET SPEED
PRESET SPEED
2 preset speeds
4 preset speeds
8 preset speeds
16 preset speeds
Preset speed 2

Note: The protected parameters are no longer accessible and are not, therefore, displayed for the selected channels.

BBV19478 11/2011 315

[7 DISPLAY CONFIG.]

RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A

7.4 KEYPAD PARAMETERS
Keypad contrast
Keypad stand-by

Code << >> Quick

Name/Description Adjustment range Factory setting

M [Keypad contrast] 0 to 100 % 50 %

Adjustment of contrast on the graphic display unit.

M [Keypad stand-by] [5]

Configuration and adjustment of the graphic display unit's stand-by mode.

v [No]: No stand-by mode
v [1] to [10]: Number of minutes during which the terminal is to remain idle before stand-by mode is triggered.
After this idle time, the display backlight turns off and the contrast is reduced. The screen returns to normal operation when a
key or the navigation button is pressed. It also returns to normal operation if the terminal exits the normal display mode, for
example, if a trip occurs.

316 BBV19478 11/2011

[MULTIPOINT SCREEN]

Communication is possible between a graphic display terminal and a number of drives connected on the same bus. The addresses of the
drives must be configured in advance in the [1.9 COMMUNICATION] menu using the [Modbus Address] (Add) parameter, page 293.

When a number of drives are connected to the same display terminal, the terminal automatically displays the following screens:

CONNECTION IN PROGRESS

Vxxxxxx

ENT
MULTIPOINT ADDRESSES Selection of drives for multipoint dialog (select each address and check the box by
Address 1 pressing ENT).
Address 2 This screen only appears the first time the drive is powered up, or if the "Cfg Add"
Address 3
function key on the MULTIPOINT SCREEN is pressed (see below).
Address 4
Address 5
Address 6

ESC

MULTIPOINT SCREEN
ESC
RUN +952 Rpm 101 A 3
Rdy 0 Rpm 0A 2 Motor speed Selection of a drive for multipoint dialog
ENT
RUN +952 Rpm 101 A 3
NLP +1500 Rpm 1,250 A 4 +952 rpm
Not connected 5 Motor current
Rdy + 0 Rpm 0A 6
101 A
Cfg Add HOME T/K

Cfg Add

In multipoint mode, the command channel is not displayed. From left

to right, the state, then the 2 selected parameters and finally the drive
address appear.

All menus can be accessed in multipoint mode. Only drive control via the graphic display terminal is not authorized, apart from
the Stop key, which locks all the drives.
If there is a trip on a drive, this drive is displayed.

BBV19478 11/2011 317

Maintenance

Servicing

Notice
RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE DRIVE
Adapt the following recommendations according to the environment conditions: temperature, chemical, dust.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

It is recommended to do the following in order to optimize continuity of operation.

Environment Part concerned Action Periodicity
Knock on the product Housing - control block Check the drive visual aspect At least each year
(led - display)
Corrosion Terminals - connector - screws - Inspect and clean if required
EMC plate
Dust Terminals - fans - blowholes
Temperature Around the product Check and correct if required
Cooling Fan Check the fan operation
Replace the fan After 3 to 5 years, depending
on the operating conditions
Vibration Terminal connections Check tightening at recom- At least each year
mended torque

• Note: The fan operation depends on the drive thermal state. The drive may be running and the fan not.

Assistance with maintenance, detected fault display

If a trip arises during setup or operation, first check that the recommendations relating to the environment, mounting and connections have
been observed.

The first fault detected is saved and displayed, and the drive locks.
The trip can be indicated remotely via a logic output or a relay, which can be configured in the
[1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I-O-) menu, see, for example, [R1 CONFIGURATION] (r1-) page 190.

Menu [1.10 DIAGNOSTICS]

This menu can only be accessed with the graphic display terminal. It displays detected faults and their cause in plain text and can be used
to carry out tests, see page 295.

Clearing the detected fault

In the event of a non resettable detected fault:
• Disconnect all power, including external control power that may be present.
• Lock all power disconnects in the open position.
• Wait 15 minutes to allow the DC bus capacitors to discharge (the drive LEDs are not indicators of the absence of DC bus voltage).
• Measure the voltage of the DC bus between the PA/+ and PC/– terminals to ensure that the voltage is less than 42 Vdc.
• If the DC bus capacitors do not discharge completely, contact your local Schneider Electric representative.
• Do not repair or operate the drive.
• Find and correct the detected fault.
• Restore power to the drive to confirm the detected fault has been rectified.
In the event of a resettable detected fault, the drive can be reset after the cause is cleared:
- By switching off the drive until the display disappears completely, then switching on again.
- Automatically in the scenarios described for the [AUTOMATIC RESTART] (Atr-) function, page 273.
- By means of a logic input or control bit assigned to the [FAULT RESET] (rSt-) function, page 272.
- By pressing the STOP/RESET key on the graphic display keypad if the active channel command is the HMI
(see [Cmd channel 1] (Cd1) page 213).

Menu [1.2 MONITORING] (SUP-):

This is used to prevent and find the causes of trips by displaying the drive state and its current values.
It can be accessed with the integrated display terminal.

Spares and repairs:

Consult Schneider Electric product support.

318 BBV19478 11/2011

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Drive does not start, no fault displayed

• If the display does not light up, check the power supply to the drive.
• The assignment of the Fast stop or Freewheel functions will help to prevent the drive starting if the corresponding logic inputs are not
powered up. The ATVLIFT then displays [Freewheel] (nSt) in freewheel stop and [Fast stop] (FSt) in fast stop. This is normal since
these functions are active at zero so that the drive will be stopped if there is a wire break.
• Check that the run command input is activated in accordance with the selected control mode ([2/3 wire control] (tCC) and [2 wire type]
(tCt) parameters, page page 174).
• If an input is assigned to the limit switch function and this input is at zero, the drive can only be started up by sending a command for
the opposite direction (see page 98)
• If the reference channel or command channel is assigned to a communication bus, when the power supply is connected, the drive
will display [Freewheel] (nSt) and remain in stop mode until the communication bus sends a command.
• When an encoder is used with a VW3 A3 409 card, if the encoder is not fully configured, the drive remains locked in stop mode
(displays [NST] (nSt) or [NLP] (nLP)).

Fault detection codes which require a power reset after the detected fault is cleared
The cause of the detected fault must be removed before resetting by turning off and then back on.
AnF, ASF, brF, ECF, EnF, SOF, SPF and tnF detected faults can also be cleared remotely by means of a logic inputor control bit ([Fault
reset] (rSF) parameter, page 272).

Code Name Probable cause Remedy

AI2F [AI2 input] • Non-conforming signal on analog input • Check the wiring of analog input AI2 and the value of the
AI2 signal.
AnF [Load slipping] • The encoder speed feedback does not • Check the motor, gain and stability parameters
match the reference • Add a braking resistor
• Check the size of the motor/drive/load.
• Increase [Acceleration time] (ACt) and decrease
[Lift leveling time] (LLt).
• Check the encoder’s mechanical coupling and its wiring.
In case a using a synchronous motor, if the drive trips while
running, you may try to set [Motor control type] (Ctt) to
[Sync.CL] (FSY) and [Encoder usage] (EnU) to [Slip comp.]
(COr).
• If the "torque control" function is used, see "Note" on
page 249.
ASF [Angle Error] • A modification has changed the • See comments on page 159.
phase-shift angle between the motor • Repeat the "Procedure for measuring the phase-shift angle
and the encoder. between the motor and the encoder" page 159.
• The "Procedure for measuring the • Check the speed loop parameters
phase-shift angle between the motor
and the encoder" page 159 has not
succeeded or has not been performed
• In [Sync. mot. (SYn) mode,
inappropriate settings of the speed
loop, when the speed reference
switches to 0
bOF [DBR overload] • The braking resistor is under excessive • Check the size of the resistor and wait for it to cool down
stress • Check the [DB Resistor Power] (brP) and [DB Resistor value]
(brU) parameters, page 288.
brF [Brake feedback] • The brake feedback contact does not • Check the feedback circuit and the brake logic control circuit.
match the brake logic control • Check the mechanical state of the brake.
• The brake does not stop the motor • Check the brake linings
quickly enough (detected by measuring
the speed on the "Pulse input").
CrF1 [Precharge] • Precharge relay control detected fault • Turn the drive off and then back on again.
or damaged precharge resistor • Contact Schneider Electric Product Support.
CrF2 [Thyr. soft charge] • DC bus charging detected fault
(thyristors)
ECF [Encoder coupling] • Break in encoder’s mechanical coupling • Check the encoder’s mechanical coupling. In case a using a
synchronous motor, if the drive trips while running, you may
try to set [Motor control type] (Ctt) to [Sync.CL] (FSY) and
[Encoder usage] (EnU) to [Slip comp.] (COr).

BBV19478 11/2011 319

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Fault detection codes which require a power reset after the detected fault is cleared (continued)

Code Name Probable cause Remedy

EEF1 [Control Eeprom] • Internal memory, control card • Check the environment (electromagnetic compatibility).
• Turn off, reset, return to factory settings
• Contact Schneider Electric Product Support.
EEF2 [Power Eeprom] • Internal memory, power card

EnF [Encoder] • Encoder feedback • Check all the configuration parameters for the encoder used.
• Refer to the [1.10 DIAGNOSTICS] menu for the value of
parameter RESE.
• Check that the encoder’s mechanical and electrical
operation, its power supply and connections are all correct.
• If necessary, reverse the direction of rotation of the motor
([Output Ph rotation] (PHr) parameter, page 147) or the
encoder signals.
FCF1 [Out. contact. stuck] • The output contactor remains closed • Check the contactor and its wiring.
while open conditions are OK • Check the feedback circuit.
HdF [IGBT • Short-circuit or grounding at the drive • Check the cables connecting the drive to the motor, and the
desaturation] output motor insulation.
• Perform the diagnostic tests via the [1.10 DIAGNOSTICS]
menu.
ILF [internal com. link] • Communication interruption between • Check the environment (electromagnetic compatibility)
option card and drive • Check the connections.
• Check that no more than two option cards (max. permitted)
have been installed on the drive
• Replace the option card
• Contact Schneider Electric Product Support.
InF1 [Rating error] • The power card is different from the • Check the power card's catalog number.
card stored
InF2 [Incompatible PB] • The power card is incompatible with the • Check the power card’s part number and compatibility.
control card
InF3 [Internal serial link] • Communication interruption between • Check the internal connections.
the internal cards • Contact Schneider Electric Product Support.
InF4 [Internal-mftg zone] • Internal data inconsistent • Recalibrate the drive (performed by Schneider Electric
Product Support).
InF6 [Internal - fault • The option installed in the drive is not • Check the reference and compatibility of the option.
option] recognized
InF7 [Internal-hard init.] • Initialization of the drive is incomplete • Remove and restore power to reset the drive.
InF8 [Internal-ctrl supply] • The control power supply is incorrect • Check the control section power supply.

InF9 [Internal- I measure] • The current measurements are incorrect • Replace the current sensors, or the power card.
• Contact Schneider Electric Product Support..
InFA [Internal-mains • The input stage is not operating • Perform the diagnostic tests via the [1.10 DIAGNOSTICS]
circuit] correctly menu.
• Contact Schneider Electric Product Support.
InFb [Internal-Th. • The drive temperature sensor is not • Replace the drive temperature sensor
sensor] operating correctly • Contact Schneider Electric Product Support..
• The braking unit's temperature sensor • Replace the braking unit's temperature sensor
is not operating correctly • Inspect/repair the braking unit
InFC [Internal-time • Detected fault on the electronic time • Contact Schneider Electric Product Support.
meas.] measurement component
InFE [internal- CPU] • Internal microprocessor • Turn off and reset. Contact Schneider Electric Product
Support

320 BBV19478 11/2011

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Fault detection codes which require a power reset after the detected fault is cleared (continued)

Code Name Probable cause Remedy

OCF [Overcurrent] • Parameters in the [SETTINGS] (SEt-) • Check the parameters

and [1.4 MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-) • Check the size of the motor/drive/load.
menus are not correct. • Check the state of the mechanism.
• Inertia or load too high
• Mechanical locking
PrF [Power removal] • Drive’s "Power removal" safety function • Contact Schneider Electric Product Support.
PrtF [Power Ident] • Control card replaced by a control card • Check that there are no card errors.
configured on a drive with a different • In the event of the control card being changed deliberately,
rating see the remark below
SCF1 [Motor short circuit] • Short-circuit or grounding at the drive • Check the cables connecting the drive to the motor, and the
output motor insulation.
SCF2 [Impedant sh. circuit] • Perform the diagnostic tests via the [1.10 DIAGNOSTICS]
menu.
SCF3 [Ground short circuit]
• Significant earth leakage current at the • Reduce the switching frequency.
drive output if several motors are • Connect chokes in series with the motor.
connected in parallel • Check the speed loop and brake settings.
SOF [Overspeed] • Instability or driving load too high • Check the motor, gain and stability parameters
• Add a braking resistor
• Check the size of the motor/drive/load.
• Check the parameter settings for the [FREQUENCY
METER] (FqF-) function, page 287, if it is configured.
SPF [Speed fdback loss] • Encoder feedback signal missing • Check the wiring between the encoder and the drive.
• No Top Z signal after activation of the • Check the encoder.
Top Z function and 2 rotations. • Check all the configuration parameters for the encoder used.
• Refer to the [1.10 DIAGNOSTICS] menu for the value of
parameter RESE.
• No signal on "Pulse input", if the input is • Check the wiring of the input and the detector used
used for speed measurement
tnF [Auto-tuning] • Special motor or motor whose power is • Check that the motor/drive are compatible.
not suitable for the drive • Check that the motor is present during auto-tuning.
• Motor not connected to the drive • If an output contactor is being used, close it during
auto-tuning.

Control card changed

When a control card is replaced by a control card configured on a drive with a different rating, the drive trips in [Power Ident] (PrtF) mode
on power-up. If the card has been deliberately changed, the detected fault can be cleared by selecting the good power rating manually.

BBV19478 11/2011 321

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Fault detection codes that can be cleared with the automatic restart function after the cause has dis-
appeared

The cause of the detected fault must be removed before resetting by turning off and then back on.
APF, CnF, COF, EPF1, EPF2, FCF2, LFF2, LFF3, LFF4, ObF, OHF, OLF, OPF1, OPF2, OSF, OtF1, OtF2, OtFL, PHF, PtF1, PtF2, PtFL,
SLF1, SLF2, SLF3, SrF, SSF and tJF detected faults can also be cleared remotely by means of a logic input or control bit ([Fault reset] (rSF)
parameter, page 272).

Code Name Probable cause Remedy

APF [Application fault] • Controller Inside card • Please refer to the card documentation
bLF [Brake control] • Brake release current not reached • Check the drive/motor connection.
• Check the motor windings.
• Check the [Brake release I FW] (Ibr) and [Brake release I Rev]
(Ird) settings, page 240
• Brake engage frequency threshold • Apply the recommended settings for [Brake engage freq]
[Brake engage freq] (bEn) only (bEn).
regulated when brake logic control is
assigned
CnF [Com. network] • Communication interruption on • Check the environment (electromagnetic compatibility)
communication card • Check the wiring.
• Check the time-out.
• Replace the option card
• Contact Schneider Electric Product Support.
COF [CANopen com.] • Interruption in communication on the • Check the communication bus.
CANopen bus • Check the time-out.
• Refer to the CANopen User's Manual.
EPF1 [External flt-LI/Bit] • Fault triggered by an external device, • Check the device which caused the fault, and reset.
depending on user
EPF2 [External fault com.] • Fault triggered by a communication • Check for the cause of the fault and reset.
network
FCF2 [Out. contact. • The output contactor remains open • Check the contactor and its wiring.
open.] although the closing conditions have • Check the feedback circuit.
been met
LCF [Input contactor] • The drive is not turned on even though • Check the contactor and its wiring.
[Mains V. time out ] (LCt) has elapsed. • Check the time-out.
• Check the AC supply/contactor/drive connection.
LFF2 [AI2 4-20mA loss] • Loss of the 4-20 mA reference on • Check the connection on the analog inputs.
[AI3 4-20mA loss] analog input AI2, AI3 or AI4
LFF3 [AI4 4-20mA loss]

LFF4
ObF [Overbraking] • Braking too sudden or driving load • Increase the deceleration time.
• Add a braking resistor if necessary.
• Activate the [Dec ramp adapt.] (brA) function, page 227, if it
is compatible with the application.
OHF [Drive overheat] • Drive temperature too high • Check the motor load, the drive ventilation and the ambient
temperature. Wait for the drive to cool down before
restarting.
OLF [Motor overload] • Triggered by excessive motor current • Check the setting of the motor thermal protection, check the
motor load. Wait for the drive to cool down before restarting.
OPF1 [1 motor phase loss] • Loss of one phase at drive output • Check the connections from the drive to the motor.

322 BBV19478 11/2011

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Fault detection codes that can be cleared with the automatic restart function after the cause has dis-
appeared (continued)

Code Name Probable cause Remedy

OPF2 [3 motor phase loss] • Motor not connected or motor • Check the connections from the drive to the motor.
power too low • Test on a low power motor or without a motor: In factory
• Output contactor open settings mode, motor output phase loss detection is active
• Instantaneous instability in the [Output Phase Loss] (OPL) = [Yes] (YES). To check the drive
motor current in a test or maintenance environment, without having to use
a motor with the same rating as the drive (in particular for high
power drives), deactivate output phase loss detection
[Output Phase Loss] (OPL) = [No] (nO)
• Check and optimize the following parameters: [IR
compensation] (UFr), page 168, [Rated motor volt.] (UnS)
and [Rated mot. current] (nCr), page 152, and perform
[Auto tuning] (tUn), page 163
OSF [Mains overvoltage] • Mains supply is too high • Check the line voltage.
• Disturbed mains supply
OtF1 [PTC1 overheat] • Overheating of the PTC1 probes • Check the motor load and motor size.
detected • Check the motor ventilation.
• Overheating of the PTC2 probes • Wait for the motor to cool before restarting.
OtF2 [PTC2 overheat]
detected • Check the type and state of the PTC probes.

OtFL [LI6=PTC overheat] • Overheating of PTC probes

detected on input LI6
PtF1 [PTC1 probe] • PTC1 probes open or short- • Check the PTC probes and the wiring between them and the
circuited motor/drive.
PtF2 [PTC2 probe] • PTC2 probes open or short-
circuited
PtFL [LI6=PTC probe] • PTC probes on input LI6 open or
short-circuited
SCF4 [IGBT short circuit] • Power component • Perform a test via the [1.10 DIAGNOSTICS] menu.
• Contact Schneider Electric Product Support.
SCF5 [Motor short circuit] • Short-circuit at drive output • Check the cables connecting the drive to the motor and the
motor insulation.
• Perform tests via the [1.10 DIAGNOSTICS] menu.
• Contact Schneider Electric Product Support.
SLF1 [Modbus com.] • Communication interruption on the • Check the communication bus.
Modbus bus • Check the time-out.
• Refer to the Modbus User's Manual.
SLF2 [PC com.] • Communication interruption with • Check the PC-Software connecting cable.
PC-Software • Check the time-out.
SLF3 [HMI com.] • Communication interruption with • Check the terminal connection.
the graphic display terminal • Check the time-out.
SrF [Torque time-out] • The time-out of the torque control • Check the function’s settings.
function is attained • Check the state of the mechanism.
SSF [Torque/current lim] • Switch to torque limitation • Check if there are any mechanical problems.
• Check the parameters of [TORQUE LIMITATION]
(tLA-) page 251 and the parameters of the
[TORQUE OR I LIM. DETECT.] (tId-), page 285).
tJF [IGBT overheat] • Drive overload • Check the size of the load/motor/drive.
• Decrease the switching frequency.
• Wait for the motor to cool before restarting

BBV19478 11/2011 323

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Fault detection codes that are cleared as soon as their cause disappears.

Code Name Probable cause Remedy

CFF [Incorrect config.] • Option card changed or removed • Check that there are no card errors.
• In the event of the option card being changed/removed
deliberately, see the remarks below.
• Control card replaced by a control
card configured on a drive with a • Check that there are no card errors.
different rating • In the event of the control card being changed deliberately,
see the remarks below.
• The current configuration is
inconsistent • Return to factory settings or retrieve the backup
configuration, if it is valid (see page 301).
CFI [Invalid config.] • Invalid configuration • Check the configuration loaded previously.
The configuration loaded in the drive • Load a compatible configuration.
via the bus or communication network
is inconsistent.
dLF [Dynamic load • Abnormal load variation • Check that the load is not blocked by an obstacle
fault] • Removal of a run command causes a reset.

HCF [Cards pairing] • The [CARDS PAIRING] (PPI-) • In the event of a card error, reinsert the original card.
function, page 289, has been • Confirm the configuration by entering the [Pairing password]
configured and a drive card has been (PPI) if the card was changed deliberately.
changed
PHF [Input phase loss] • Drive incorrectly supplied or a fuse • Check the power connection and the fuses.
blown
• One phase missing
• Three-phase ATV LIFT used on a • Use a three-phase line supply.
single-phase line supply
• Unbalanced load • Disable the detected fault by setting [Input phase loss] (IPL)
This protection only operates with the = [No] (nO). (page 276).
drive on load.
USF [Undervoltage] • Line supply is too low • Check the voltage and the parameters of [UNDERVOLTAGE
• Transient voltage dip MGT] (USb-), page 280.

Option card changed or removed

When an option card is removed or replaced by another, the drive locks in [Incorrect config.] (CFF) fault mode on power-up. If the card has
been deliberately changed or removed, the detected fault can be cleared by pressing the ENT key twice, which causes the factory settings
to be restored (see page 301) for the parameter groups affected by the card. These are as follows:

Card replaced by a card of the same type

• I/O cards: [Drive configuration] (drV)
• Encoder cards: [Drive configuration] (drV)
• Communication cards: Only the parameters that are specific to communication cards
• Controller Inside cards: [Control Inside menu] (PLC)

Card removed (or replaced by a different type of card)

• I/O card: [Drive configuration] (drV)
• Encoder card: [Drive configuration] (drV)
• Communication card: [Drive configuration] (drV) and parameters specific to communication cards
• Controller Inside card: [Drive configuration] (drV) and [Control. insid. menu] (PLC)

Control card changed

When a control card is replaced by a control card configured on a drive with a different rating, the drive locks in [Power Ident] (PrtF) fault
mode on power-up. If the card has been deliberately changed, the detected fault can be cleared by selecting the good power rating
manually.

324 BBV19478 11/2011

User settings tables

Functions assigned to I/O

Inputs Functions assigned Inputs Functions assigned
Outputs Outputs
LI1 LO1
LI2 LO2
LI3 LO3
LI4 LO4
LI5 AI1
LI6 AI2
LI7 AI3
LI8 AI4
LI9 R1
LI10 R2
LI11 R3
LI12 R4
LI13 RP
LI14 Encoder

BBV19478 11/2011 325

User settings tables

Other parameters (table to be created by the user)

Code Name Customer setting Code Name Customer setting

326 BBV19478 11/2011

Index of functions

Direct power supply via DC bus 267

Deferred stop on thermal alarm 278
[Auto tuning] 54
Command and reference channels 204
[2/3 wire control] 174
Output contactor command 256
Line contactor command 254
Brake logic control 236
Motor or configuration switching [MULTIMOTORS/CONFIG.] 261
Parameter set switching [PARAM. SET SWITCHING] 258
[REFERENCE SWITCH.] 222
[STOP CONFIGURATION] 228
[ENCODER CONFIGURATION] 186
[RP CONFIGURATION] 184
Torque regulation 247
Half floor 104
[ENA SYSTEM] 166
[Load sharing] 170
Evacuation function 98
[FLUXING BY LI] 162
Limit switch management 234
[ROLLBACK MGT] 89
[TOP Z MANAGEMENT] 268
[AUTO DC INJECTION] 230
[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-) 216
Torque limitation 250
External weight measurement 93
Use of the "Pulse input" to measure the speed of rotation of the motor 286
Inspection 96
[4. PASSWORD] (COd-) 306
Motor thermal protection 274
[RAMP] 224
[FAULT RESET] 272
[AUTOMATIC RESTART] 273
[Noise reduction] 168
[1.12 FACTORY SETTINGS] (FCS-) 299
[2nd CURRENT LIMIT.] 253
Summing input/Subtracting input/Multiplier 221
PTC probes 270
[DRIVE OVERHEAT] 277

BBV19478 11/2011 327

Index of parameter codes

Code Page

[1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG]

[1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT]

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.]

[1.12 FACTORY SETTINGS]

[1.4 MOTOR CONTROL]

[1.9 COMMUNICATION]
[1.2 MONITORING]

[1.6 COMMAND]

[4 PASSWORD]
[1.3 SETTINGS]
[1.1 LIFT]
(LIF-)

(SUP-)

(SEt-)

(drC-)

(I-O-)

(CtL-)

(FUn-)

(FLt-)

(COM-)

(FCS-)

(COd-)
A1C- 202
A2C- 202
A3C- 202
AC2 65 134 226
ACC 63, 97 134 224
ACM 57
ACt 60
AdC 230
AdCO 293
Add 293
AI1A 131 179
AI1E 179
AI1F 179
AI1S 179
AI1t 179
AI2A 131 180
AI2E 180
AI2F 180
AI2L 180
AI2S 180
AI2t 180
AI3A 131 181
AI3E 181
AI3F 181
AI3L 181
AI3S 181
AI3t 181
AI4A 131 182
AI4E 182
AI4F 182
AI4L 182
AI4S 182
AI4t 182
AIC1 183
ALGr 130,
132

328 BBV19478 11/2011

Index of parameter codes

Code Page

[1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG]

[1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT]

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.]

[1.12 FACTORY SETTINGS]

[1.4 MOTOR CONTROL]

[1.9 COMMUNICATION]
[1.2 MONITORING]

[1.6 COMMAND]

[4 PASSWORD]
[1.3 SETTINGS]
[1.1 LIFT]
(LIF-)

(SUP-)

(SEt-)

(drC-)

(I-O-)

(CtL-)

(FUn-)

(FLt-)

(COM-)

(FCS-)

(COd-)
AMOA 293
AMOC 293
AO1 45 198
AO1F 199
AO1t 198
AO2 200
AO2F 200
AO2t 200
AO3 201
AO3F 201
AO3t 201
AOH1 198
AOH2 200
AOH3 201
AOL1 198
AOL2 200
AOL3 201
APH 130,
132
ASA 160
ASH1 199
ASH2 200
ASH3 201
ASL 160
ASL1 199
ASL2 200
ASL3 201
ASt 160,162
AStS 161
ASU 161
AtA 161
Atr 273
AU1- 183
AUt 163
bbA 170
bCI 39 240

BBV19478 11/2011 329

Index of parameter codes

Code Page

[1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG]

[1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT]

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.]

[1.12 FACTORY SETTINGS]

[1.4 MOTOR CONTROL]

[1.9 COMMUNICATION]
[1.2 MONITORING]

[1.6 COMMAND]

[4 PASSWORD]
[1.3 SETTINGS]
[1.1 LIFT]
(LIF-)

(SUP-)

(SEt-)

(drC-)

(I-O-)

(CtL-)

(FUn-)

(FLt-)

(COM-)

(FCS-)

(COd-)
bdCO 293
bECd 241
bEd 242
bEn 95 142 241
bEt 95 143 241
bFr 146
bIP 88 240
bIr 88 142 241
bLC 43 240
bOO 68 168
bMP 215
brA 227
brH0 243
brH1 243
brH2 244
brH3 244
brH4 244
brO 288
brP 288
brr 244
brS- 88
brt 88 142 241
brU 288
bSP 177
bSt 240
CCS 213
Cd1 213
Cd2 213
CFPS 130,
132
CHA1 109 259
CHA2 109 259
CHCF 212
CHM 263
CL2 138 253
CLI 53 138 149 253

330 BBV19478 11/2011

Index of parameter codes

Code Page

[1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG]

[1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT]

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.]

[1.12 FACTORY SETTINGS]

[1.4 MOTOR CONTROL]

[1.9 COMMUNICATION]
[1.2 MONITORING]

[1.6 COMMAND]

[4 PASSWORD]
[1.3 SETTINGS]
[1.1 LIFT]
(LIF-)

(SUP-)

(SEt-)

(drC-)

(I-O-)

(CtL-)

(FUn-)

(FLt-)

(COM-)

(FCS-)

(COd-)
CLL 284
CMA 57
CnF1 263
CnF2 263
CnFS 130,
132
COd 307
COd2 307
COL 284
COP 214
CP1 94 246
CP2 94 246
CrH2 180
CrH3 181
CrH4 182
CrL2 180
CrL3 181
CrL4 182
CSp 56
CSt 307
Ctd 143
CtM 57
Ctt 146 146
dA2 223
dA3 223
dAS 103 257
dbn 249
dbp 249
dbS 103 257
dCF 136 228 290
dCI 229
dCO 267
dE2 65 134 226
dEC 63 134 224
dEL 61
dLr 307

BBV19478 11/2011 331

Index of parameter codes

Code Page

[1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG]

[1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT]

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.]

[1.12 FACTORY SETTINGS]

[1.4 MOTOR CONTROL]

[1.9 COMMUNICATION]
[1.2 MONITORING]

[1.6 COMMAND]

[4 PASSWORD]
[1.3 SETTINGS]
[1.1 LIFT]
(LIF-)

(SUP-)

(SEt-)

(drC-)

(I-O-)

(CtL-)

(FUn-)

(FLt-)

(COM-)

(FCS-)

(COd-)
dO1 45 195
dO1d 195
dO1H 195
dO1S 195
dOt 115 130,
132
dOtd 137
dth 106 278
ECC 285
ECt 285
EFI 47 187
EFr 46 187
EIL 46 187
EnA 167
EnC 151 186
End- 47
EnMr 48 188
EnrI 46 186
EnS 46 186
EnSP 48 189
Entr 48 188
EnU 46 151 186
EPL 279
ErCO 293
ESp 115 130,
132
EtF 279
F1 153
F2 153
F2d 105 144
F3 153
F4 153
F5 153
FAb 68 168
FCP 154
FCSI 301
Fdt 287

332 BBV19478 11/2011

Index of parameter codes

Code Page

[1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG]

[1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT]

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.]

[1.12 FACTORY SETTINGS]

[1.4 MOTOR CONTROL]

[1.9 COMMUNICATION]
[1.2 MONITORING]

[1.6 COMMAND]

[4 PASSWORD]
[1.3 SETTINGS]
[1.1 LIFT]
(LIF-)

(SUP-)

(SEt-)

(drC-)

(I-O-)

(CtL-)

(FUn-)

(FLt-)

(COM-)

(FCS-)

(COd-)
FFA 48, 83 189
FFP 83 165
FFr 48, 83 189
FFt 144 228
FFU 83 165
FLG 82 135 164
FLO 294
FLOC 294
FLOt 294
FLU 139 162
FN1 215
FN2 215
FN3 215
FN4 215
Ftd- 105
Ftd 105 144
FFt 144
FqA 287
FqC 287
FqF 287
FqL 144
FqS 130,
132
Fqt 287
Fr1 39 212
Fr1b 222
Fr2 213
FrES 47 187
FrH 130,
132
FrS 51 152
FrSS 158
Frt 65 226
FrY- 301
FSt 228
Ftd 144
GFS 301

BBV19478 11/2011 333

Index of parameter codes

Code Page

[1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG]

[1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT]

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.]

[1.12 FACTORY SETTINGS]

[1.4 MOTOR CONTROL]

[1.9 COMMUNICATION]
[1.2 MONITORING]

[1.6 COMMAND]

[4 PASSWORD]
[1.3 SETTINGS]
[1.1 LIFT]
(LIF-)

(SUP-)

(SEt-)

(drC-)

(I-O-)

(CtL-)

(FUn-)

(FLt-)

(COM-)

(FCS-)

(COd-)
GIE 136 167
GPE 136 167
HFF- 104 266
HLS 104 266
HSP 135
Ibr 88 142 240
IbrA 94 246
IdA 66 156
IdC 136 229 290
IdC2 136 229 290
IdM 66 155
InH 283
InP- 36
Inr 63 134 224
InSP 152
IntP 251
IPHS 67 157
IPL 276
Ird 142 240
ISP 97 264
ISPS 42
ISrF 97 264
ItH 53 135
JApL 82
JAr1 62
JAr2 62
JAr3 62
JAr4 62
JAr5 62
JAr6 62
JCAL 82
JdC 143 242
JMOt 82
L1A to L14A 131 175
L1d to L14d 175
LAF 235

334 BBV19478 11/2011

Index of parameter codes

Code Page

[1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG]

[1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT]

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.]

[1.12 FACTORY SETTINGS]

[1.4 MOTOR CONTROL]

[1.9 COMMUNICATION]
[1.2 MONITORING]

[1.6 COMMAND]

[4 PASSWORD]
[1.3 SETTINGS]
[1.1 LIFT]
(LIF-)

(SUP-)

(SEt-)

(drC-)

(I-O-)

(CtL-)

(FUn-)

(FLt-)

(COM-)

(FCS-)

(COd-)
LAr 235
LAS 235
LbA 170
LbC 144 170
LbC1 172
LbC2 172
LbC3 172
LbF 172
LC2 253
LCA 57
LCO- 36
LCr 130,
132
LCt 255
LdA- 56
LdMS 67
LdS 67 157
LES 255
LEt 279
LFA 66 156
LFF 290
LFL2 282
LFL3
LFL4
LFM 66 155
LFn- 97
L1O- 36
LIS1 131
LIS2 131
LLC 255
LLS 61
LLSL 115
LLSS 42
LLt 61
LMO- 115
LO1 193
LO1d 193

BBV19478 11/2011 335

Index of parameter codes

Code Page

[1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG]

[1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT]

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.]

[1.12 FACTORY SETTINGS]

[1.4 MOTOR CONTROL]

[1.9 COMMUNICATION]
[1.2 MONITORING]

[1.6 COMMAND]

[4 PASSWORD]
[1.3 SETTINGS]
[1.1 LIFT]
(LIF-)

(SUP-)

(SEt-)

(drC-)

(I-O-)

(CtL-)

(FUn-)

(FLt-)

(COM-)

(FCS-)

(COd-)
LO1H 193
LO1S 193
LO2 193
LO2d 193
LO2H 193
LO2S 193
LO3 194
LO3d 194
LO3H 194
LO3S 194
LO4 194
LO4d 194
LO4H 194
LO4S 194
LFn- 97
LOP- 66
LP1 94 246
LP2 94 246
LqMS 67
LqS 67 157
LSM 38
LSP 135
LtS 60
LtSS 42
LLSS 42
MA2 223
MA3 223
MCO- 66
MFr 130, 141
132
MMF 130,
132
MOt- 52
nCA1 292
nCA2 292
nCA3 292
nCA4 292

336 BBV19478 11/2011

Index of parameter codes

Code Page

[1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG]

[1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT]

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.]

[1.12 FACTORY SETTINGS]

[1.4 MOTOR CONTROL]

[1.9 COMMUNICATION]
[1.2 MONITORING]

[1.6 COMMAND]

[4 PASSWORD]
[1.3 SETTINGS]
[1.1 LIFT]
(LIF-)

(SUP-)

(SEt-)

(drC-)

(I-O-)

(CtL-)

(FUn-)

(FLt-)

(COM-)

(FCS-)

(COd-)
nCA5 292
nCA6 292
nCA7 292
nCA8 292
nCr 51 152
nCrS 52 157
nMA1 292
nMA2 292
nMA3 292
nMA4 292
nMA5 292
nMA6 292
nMA7 292
nMA8 292
nOt 115 130,
132
nPr 51 152
nrd 111 168
nSL 155
nSP 51 152
nSPS 52 157
nSt 36 228
o02 ... 130,
o06 132
o03 130,
132
o04 130,
132
o05 130,
132
o06 130,
132
OCC 43, 103 257
Odt 107 276
OFI 148
OHL 277
OLL 275
OPL 107 276

BBV19478 11/2011 337

Index of parameter codes

Code Page

[1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG]

[1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT]

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.]

[1.12 FACTORY SETTINGS]

[1.4 MOTOR CONTROL]

[1.9 COMMUNICATION]
[1.2 MONITORING]

[1.6 COMMAND]

[4 PASSWORD]
[1.3 SETTINGS]
[1.1 LIFT]
(LIF-)

(SUP-)

(SEt-)

(drC-)

(I-O-)

(CtL-)

(FUn-)

(FLt-)

(COM-)

(FCS-)

(COd-)
OPr 130,
132
OrM 101 265
OrSP 102 265
OUt- 43
PES 39, 94 246
PFI 184
PFr 184
PGA 46 187
PGI 46 187
PHS 67 157
PHr 147
PIA 184
PIL 184
PMC 103 265
PPI 289
PPn 155
PPnS 52 157
PS1- 110 260
PS2- 110 260
PS3- 110 260
PS2 113 232
PS4 113 232
PS8 113 232
PSEn 42
PS16 113 232
PSt 212
PtC1 271
PtC2 271
PtCL 271
PtH 130,
132
r1 44 190
r1d 191
r1H 191
r1S 191
r2 45 191

338 BBV19478 11/2011

Index of parameter codes

Code Page

[1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG]

[1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT]

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.]

[1.12 FACTORY SETTINGS]

[1.4 MOTOR CONTROL]

[1.9 COMMUNICATION]
[1.2 MONITORING]

[1.6 COMMAND]

[4 PASSWORD]
[1.3 SETTINGS]
[1.1 LIFT]
(LIF-)

(SUP-)

(SEt-)

(drC-)

(I-O-)

(CtL-)

(FUn-)

(FLt-)

(COM-)

(FCS-)

(COd-)
r2d 191
r2H 191
r2S 191
r3 192
r3d 192
r3H 192
r3S 192
r4 192
r4d 192
r4H 192
r4S 192
rACC 103 266
rAP 167
rbM 90 245
rbC 90 245
rbd 90 245
rCA 38, 103 257
rCb 222
rCLI 102 266
rEqP 50 158
rEtP 50 158
rFC 213
rFr 130,
132
rFt- 101 264
rFt 38, 101 264
rIn 212
rOP- 62
rP 272
rPA 272
rPPn 47 187
rPS 65 226
rPt 64 224
rrS 36 174
rSA 66 156
rSAS 67 157

BBV19478 11/2011 339

Index of parameter codes

Code Page

[1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG]

[1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT]

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.]

[1.12 FACTORY SETTINGS]

[1.4 MOTOR CONTROL]

[1.9 COMMUNICATION]
[1.2 MONITORING]

[1.6 COMMAND]

[4 PASSWORD]
[1.3 SETTINGS]
[1.1 LIFT]
(LIF-)

(SUP-)

(SEt-)

(drC-)

(I-O-)

(CtL-)

(FUn-)

(FLt-)

(COM-)

(FCS-)

(COd-)
rSF 272
rSM 66 155
rSMS 67 158
rSP 101 265
rSU 101 264
rtH 130,
132
rtO 249
SA2 223
SA3 223
SAt 106 278
SCSI 301
SdC1 137 230,
241
SdC2 137 230
Sdd 285
SFC 83 135 164
SFr 111 138 148
SIU 119
SLL 284
SLP 68 136 154
SOP 169
SP2 114 140 233
SP3 114 140 233
SP4 114 140 233
SP5 114 140 233
SP6 114 140 233
SP7 114 140 233
SP8 114 140 233
SP9 114 140 233
SP10 114 140 233
SP11 114 140 233
SP12 114 140 233
SP13 114 140 233
SP14 114 140 233
SP15 114 141 233
SP16 114 141 233

340 BBV19478 11/2011

Index of parameter codes

Code Page

[1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG]

[1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT]

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.]

[1.12 FACTORY SETTINGS]

[1.4 MOTOR CONTROL]

[1.9 COMMUNICATION]
[1.2 MONITORING]

[1.6 COMMAND]

[4 PASSWORD]
[1.3 SETTINGS]
[1.1 LIFT]
(LIF-)

(SUP-)

(SEt-)

(drC-)

(I-O-)

(CtL-)

(FUn-)

(FLt-)

(COM-)

(FCS-)

(COd-)
SPd 130,
132
SPL- 82
SpS 110 260
SPSA 42
SPSb 42
SPt 249
SSb 285
SSCd 48 189
SSCP 47 188
SSFS 48 188
StA- 88
StA 82 135 164
StL 60
StM 280
StO- 95
StO 285
StP 280
StPS 42
Strt 281
Stt 228
SUL 169
tA1 64 134 225
tA2 64 134 225
tA3 64 134 225
tA4 64 135 225
tAA 251
tAC 130,
132
tAr 273
tbE 95 142 241
tbr 293
tbr2 293
tbS 280
tCC 174
tCt 174
tdI 136 229 290

BBV19478 11/2011 341

Index of parameter codes

Code Page

[1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG]

[1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT]

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.]

[1.12 FACTORY SETTINGS]

[1.4 MOTOR CONTROL]

[1.9 COMMUNICATION]
[1.2 MONITORING]

[1.6 COMMAND]

[4 PASSWORD]
[1.3 SETTINGS]
[1.1 LIFT]
(LIF-)

(SUP-)

(SEt-)

(drC-)

(I-O-)

(CtL-)

(FUn-)

(FLt-)

(COM-)

(FCS-)

(COd-)
tdC 136 229 290
tdC1 137 230
tdC2 137 231
tdS 287
tFO 293
tFO2 293
tFr 147
tHA 106 277,
278
tHd 130,
132
tHr 130,
132
tHt 275
tLA 251
tLC 252
tLIG 143 251
tLIM 143 251
tLS 139
tnL 288
tOb 249
tOSt 268
tqb 287
tqS 52
tr1 248
trA 66 156
trM 66 155
trP 248
trr 130,
132
trt 248
tSd 248
tSM 280
tSS 248
tSt 248
ttd 106 144 275,
278

342 BBV19478 11/2011

Index of parameter codes

Code Page

[1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG]

[1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT]

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.]

[1.12 FACTORY SETTINGS]

[1.4 MOTOR CONTROL]

[1.9 COMMUNICATION]
[1.2 MONITORING]

[1.6 COMMAND]

[4 PASSWORD]
[1.3 SETTINGS]
[1.1 LIFT]
(LIF-)

(SUP-)

(SEt-)

(drC-)

(I-O-)

(CtL-)

(FUn-)

(FLt-)

(COM-)

(FCS-)

(COd-)
ttd2 106 275,
278
ttd3 106 275,
278
ttH 143
ttL 143
ttO 293
ttr 143 242
tUL 163 163
tUn 54 163
tUS 66 163
U0 153
U1 153
U2 153
U3 153
U4 153
U5 153
Ubr 170
UC2 154
UCP 154
UECP 47 188
UECU 47 188
UELC 47 188
UFr 136 168
UIH1 179
UIH2 180
UIH4 182
UIL1 179
UIL2 180
UIL4 182
ULn 130,
132
ULr 307
UnS 51 152
UOH1 198
UOH2 200
UOH3 201

BBV19478 11/2011 343

344
USt
USL
USb
UPL
UOP

UrES
UOL3
UOL2
UOL1
Code

[1.1 LIFT]
(LIF-)

[1.2 MONITORING]

132
130,
(SUP-)

[1.3 SETTINGS]
Index of parameter codes

(SEt-)

[1.4 MOTOR CONTROL]

(drC-)

[1.5 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG]

201
200
198

(I-O-)

[1.6 COMMAND]
Page

(CtL-)

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.]

(FUn-)

[1.8 FAULT MANAGEMENT]

280
280
280
280
280

(FLt-)

[1.9 COMMUNICATION]
(COM-)

[1.12 FACTORY SETTINGS]

(FCS-)

[4 PASSWORD]
(COd-)

BBV19478 11/2011
ATV_LIFT_programming_manual_EN_BBV19478_04
11/2011

MCQ On MATERIAL HANDLING
100% (3)
MCQ On MATERIAL HANDLING
3 pages
Manual de Operacion de Faresin 10-70 PDF
100% (1)
Manual de Operacion de Faresin 10-70 PDF
85 pages
Hydraulic Lifts: Technical Specifications
No ratings yet
Hydraulic Lifts: Technical Specifications
12 pages
High Rise Building 2
100% (1)
High Rise Building 2
168 pages
Controlador de Empilhadeira
100% (5)
Controlador de Empilhadeira
76 pages
8 Persons Stannah Passlifts Datasheets
50% (2)
8 Persons Stannah Passlifts Datasheets
9 pages
Technical Specifications For Lifts Part - V
100% (1)
Technical Specifications For Lifts Part - V
16 pages
Bee08e1 01 PDF
100% (3)
Bee08e1 01 PDF
319 pages
Vacon NXS NXP User Manual DPD01220D ES
No ratings yet
Vacon NXS NXP User Manual DPD01220D ES
177 pages
Vega
100% (1)
Vega
8 pages
MP3 Bangladesh Affairs PDF
No ratings yet
MP3 Bangladesh Affairs PDF
778 pages
Sicor Motor MR14 Manual Ingles
No ratings yet
Sicor Motor MR14 Manual Ingles
32 pages
Wheel Loaders
100% (2)
Wheel Loaders
32 pages
Powernet Elevators Broucher
0% (1)
Powernet Elevators Broucher
16 pages
WEG ADL500 User Manual Hardware Start Up 1S95QSEN en
No ratings yet
WEG ADL500 User Manual Hardware Start Up 1S95QSEN en
100 pages
Tender For Lift For NLT
100% (1)
Tender For Lift For NLT
112 pages
Mushak-9.1 VAT Return On 19.NOV.2020 PDF
100% (1)
Mushak-9.1 VAT Return On 19.NOV.2020 PDF
6 pages
Mushak-9.1 VAT Return On 19.NOV.2020 PDF
100% (1)
Mushak-9.1 VAT Return On 19.NOV.2020 PDF
6 pages
Mushak-9.1 VAT Return On 19.NOV.2020 PDF
100% (1)
Mushak-9.1 VAT Return On 19.NOV.2020 PDF
6 pages
Crane Safety and Awareness Presentation
100% (1)
Crane Safety and Awareness Presentation
99 pages
Quadro SMART MRL 001
No ratings yet
Quadro SMART MRL 001
76 pages
ETR 314 - 320 - Jungheinrich
No ratings yet
ETR 314 - 320 - Jungheinrich
261 pages
Nice 3000
No ratings yet
Nice 3000
98 pages
Lifetime Homes Checklist
No ratings yet
Lifetime Homes Checklist
4 pages
Supra Linea User Manual Rev 01
No ratings yet
Supra Linea User Manual Rev 01
30 pages
F2K Config COP (Version DCL)
No ratings yet
F2K Config COP (Version DCL)
1 page
Fuji Lm2a Errors 1
No ratings yet
Fuji Lm2a Errors 1
1 page
INOVANCE SINCOS 1387 Encoder by InovaAutomaion
No ratings yet
INOVANCE SINCOS 1387 Encoder by InovaAutomaion
5 pages
Service and Repair Manual: Z - 45 DC Z - 45 FE
No ratings yet
Service and Repair Manual: Z - 45 DC Z - 45 FE
143 pages
R04 EST3 Smoke Management Application Manual
No ratings yet
R04 EST3 Smoke Management Application Manual
164 pages
Yaskawa j1000 Installation Startup Manual
No ratings yet
Yaskawa j1000 Installation Startup Manual
248 pages
Pe Mium 02 10991487en 103
No ratings yet
Pe Mium 02 10991487en 103
96 pages
Manual Mitsubishi fx3g
100% (1)
Manual Mitsubishi fx3g
532 pages
Yaskawa GPD 515 Manual
No ratings yet
Yaskawa GPD 515 Manual
297 pages
ETS Johnson - Brochure - V4
No ratings yet
ETS Johnson - Brochure - V4
20 pages
Fassi Crane: Use and Maintenance
No ratings yet
Fassi Crane: Use and Maintenance
46 pages
Monarch MCTC-AFE User Manual
No ratings yet
Monarch MCTC-AFE User Manual
75 pages
PAX AT120 Door Operator
No ratings yet
PAX AT120 Door Operator
17 pages
Instruccion VARIADOR OMRON L7
No ratings yet
Instruccion VARIADOR OMRON L7
116 pages
Microlift
No ratings yet
Microlift
12 pages
872G
No ratings yet
872G
23 pages
e-GP System User Manual For
No ratings yet
e-GP System User Manual For
87 pages
Director: Electrical Documentation
No ratings yet
Director: Electrical Documentation
53 pages
® Elevator: Kunshan KOYO Elevator LTD
No ratings yet
® Elevator: Kunshan KOYO Elevator LTD
18 pages
Group Description of Item Item No. Item Code (If Any) Measurement Unit
No ratings yet
Group Description of Item Item No. Item Code (If Any) Measurement Unit
20 pages
GMD 602 - 702 Multidisc Mower: Assembly / Operator'S Manual
100% (1)
GMD 602 - 702 Multidisc Mower: Assembly / Operator'S Manual
44 pages
Fuji FRENIC Lift LM2 Catalogues CEN LM2EN15.10 English
No ratings yet
Fuji FRENIC Lift LM2 Catalogues CEN LM2EN15.10 English
8 pages
Sms Mpu2in 02
No ratings yet
Sms Mpu2in 02
51 pages
Final Drywall Lift Manual
100% (1)
Final Drywall Lift Manual
48 pages
Parametros Yaskawa Parameters
100% (1)
Parametros Yaskawa Parameters
14 pages
DIDO Pitagora 4.0 English
No ratings yet
DIDO Pitagora 4.0 English
119 pages
Unit 9 Machines. Naturall Science 3. ANAYA
No ratings yet
Unit 9 Machines. Naturall Science 3. ANAYA
8 pages
Rive Motor: CQD16RVH/ Reach Truck1.6/2.0t 16RV/16RVF/20RV/20RVF
No ratings yet
Rive Motor: CQD16RVH/ Reach Truck1.6/2.0t 16RV/16RVF/20RV/20RVF
4 pages
Jerr Dan HDR1000 50TonRotatorPartsManual
No ratings yet
Jerr Dan HDR1000 50TonRotatorPartsManual
281 pages
Macdonald 2020
No ratings yet
Macdonald 2020
14 pages
Operation Manual
No ratings yet
Operation Manual
15 pages
Stairfriend: Stairlift
No ratings yet
Stairfriend: Stairlift
16 pages
Technical Specification: Supply, Delivery and Installation of 4 Units Machine Room-Less (MRL) Hospital Bed Elevator
No ratings yet
Technical Specification: Supply, Delivery and Installation of 4 Units Machine Room-Less (MRL) Hospital Bed Elevator
8 pages
Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings: 00 Drive Parameters
No ratings yet
Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings: 00 Drive Parameters
47 pages
L6160 L6170 L6190brochure
No ratings yet
L6160 L6170 L6190brochure
2 pages
L6160 L6170 L6190brochure
No ratings yet
L6160 L6170 L6190brochure
2 pages
Manual Ba - wsgs3 - E10 Maquinas Wittur SICOR
No ratings yet
Manual Ba - wsgs3 - E10 Maquinas Wittur SICOR
50 pages
Item No. Group Ite M Cod e (If Any)
No ratings yet
Item No. Group Ite M Cod e (If Any)
3 pages
Instruction Manual: LM2A Series
No ratings yet
Instruction Manual: LM2A Series
73 pages
IE368 Facilties Layout and Material Handling PDF
No ratings yet
IE368 Facilties Layout and Material Handling PDF
2 pages
Mtmtacmicrobasic4404gb 135fxx PDF Free Compressed 1 50
100% (1)
Mtmtacmicrobasic4404gb 135fxx PDF Free Compressed 1 50
50 pages
Design Guidelines and Performance Standards March 2016
No ratings yet
Design Guidelines and Performance Standards March 2016
144 pages
Service and Maitenance Agreement: of The Other Part
No ratings yet
Service and Maitenance Agreement: of The Other Part
3 pages
Vacancy Announcement - 2020-HSD
No ratings yet
Vacancy Announcement - 2020-HSD
2 pages
Savaria Manual Usuario
No ratings yet
Savaria Manual Usuario
20 pages
ME-1-20-ME - FWD-G - 438 - Admission Policy - 2
No ratings yet
ME-1-20-ME - FWD-G - 438 - Admission Policy - 2
5 pages
ASP116 Evo User Manual For Hydraulic Lifts 4.00ed10
No ratings yet
ASP116 Evo User Manual For Hydraulic Lifts 4.00ed10
82 pages
Ax Man e PDF
No ratings yet
Ax Man e PDF
14 pages
Notice (Online Evening Shift Classes For Certificate Level) : Icab/Sad/Ac/Oc/Cl 01 October 2020
No ratings yet
Notice (Online Evening Shift Classes For Certificate Level) : Icab/Sad/Ac/Oc/Cl 01 October 2020
1 page
Vacon NXL Local Remote Control ALFIFF27 Applicatio
100% (2)
Vacon NXL Local Remote Control ALFIFF27 Applicatio
52 pages
Optima MRL PL
No ratings yet
Optima MRL PL
36 pages
SERVAS
No ratings yet
SERVAS
10 pages
Fuji Frenic Mini c1 PDF
No ratings yet
Fuji Frenic Mini c1 PDF
32 pages
Mechanical Building Permit Forms
No ratings yet
Mechanical Building Permit Forms
2 pages
Aljotronic 2 Reference Manual
No ratings yet
Aljotronic 2 Reference Manual
32 pages
客梯诺电气原理图（无机房老国标默纳克）中性英文图纸20230407
No ratings yet
客梯诺电气原理图（无机房老国标默纳克）中性英文图纸20230407
29 pages
Selector Electronico
No ratings yet
Selector Electronico
36 pages
01$$ Guide LVA FOD France V4
No ratings yet
01$$ Guide LVA FOD France V4
20 pages
Question Papers - Advanced Services
No ratings yet
Question Papers - Advanced Services
8 pages
Inversors Manual Asc800
No ratings yet
Inversors Manual Asc800
46 pages
Stannah Stairiser SR User Manual March 21
No ratings yet
Stannah Stairiser SR User Manual March 21
28 pages
Libpruio Tutorial
100% (1)
Libpruio Tutorial
3 pages
EM3000
No ratings yet
EM3000
59 pages
Macpuarsa Microbasic Manual
No ratings yet
Macpuarsa Microbasic Manual
26 pages
TS Site Progress Report 5
No ratings yet
TS Site Progress Report 5
2 pages
Vacon OPT A2 Manual
No ratings yet
Vacon OPT A2 Manual
2 pages
OMRON FV Interflite OL Manual
No ratings yet
OMRON FV Interflite OL Manual
33 pages
Jaguar
No ratings yet
Jaguar
36 pages
Manuale Utente SNV200 V2.3 Manual Talenhet
No ratings yet
Manuale Utente SNV200 V2.3 Manual Talenhet
14 pages
AMETAL-b Utona
No ratings yet
AMETAL-b Utona
5 pages
Kone High Performance Door Systems - tcm25 18817 PDF
No ratings yet
Kone High Performance Door Systems - tcm25 18817 PDF
8 pages
Pobo - Athenea
No ratings yet
Pobo - Athenea
8 pages
Combivert F5-General / Basic Hardware
No ratings yet
Combivert F5-General / Basic Hardware
48 pages
Esquemas Fox Sistel PDF
No ratings yet
Esquemas Fox Sistel PDF
19 pages
Transformer: 5 Amps
No ratings yet
Transformer: 5 Amps
8 pages
ACMA Cabling Pathways Document (November 2023)
No ratings yet
ACMA Cabling Pathways Document (November 2023)
29 pages
Uc1 Uc2 Adjustment Procedure
No ratings yet
Uc1 Uc2 Adjustment Procedure
2 pages
Service Manual: Tumble Dryer Condensation AWZ 8992
No ratings yet
Service Manual: Tumble Dryer Condensation AWZ 8992
14 pages
Manual Averia V.22
No ratings yet
Manual Averia V.22
16 pages
HSC-date-notice-www NCTB Gov BD PDF
No ratings yet
HSC-date-notice-www NCTB Gov BD PDF
1 page
Datasheet - Variador Omron Sysdrive 3g3jx
No ratings yet
Datasheet - Variador Omron Sysdrive 3g3jx
10 pages
Vacon NXL Lift ALFIFF28 Application Manual UD00973
No ratings yet
Vacon NXL Lift ALFIFF28 Application Manual UD00973
44 pages
Starting Guide For G11S-UDP Synchronous Motor Software: Date - Revision 14/12/05 - 4
No ratings yet
Starting Guide For G11S-UDP Synchronous Motor Software: Date - Revision 14/12/05 - 4
12 pages
Fermator PDF
No ratings yet
Fermator PDF
2 pages
Eachine E013 Manual
No ratings yet
Eachine E013 Manual
1 page
Stair Lifts: Move Up, Not Out!
From Everand
Stair Lifts: Move Up, Not Out!
Andy Darnley
No ratings yet

ATV LIFT Programming Manual EN BBV19478 04 PDF

Uploaded by

ATV LIFT Programming Manual EN BBV19478 04 PDF

Uploaded by

2354235 11/2008

Before you begin _____________________________________________________________________________________________ 4

• Before servicing the variable speed drive

The following Altivar LIFT technical documents are available on www.schneider-electric.com

Communication parameters manual

• The operating modes specific to communication (state chart).

• The interaction between communication and local control.

Manuals for Modbus®, CANopen®, Ethernet™, Profibus®, INTERBUS, Uni-Telway

Enhancements made to version V5.4 in comparison to V5.3

New parameters and functions

Menu [1.1 LIFT] (LIF-)

Menu [1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)

ATV LIFT can only be used with lifts.

Power Current Catalog part number Mechanical Size

7,5kW 33A ATV71LU75M3Z ATV71LD33M3Z 210*295*187 230*400*187

11kW 54A ATV71LD11M3XZ ATV71LD54M3Z 230*400*187 240*420*210

15kW 66A ATV71LD15M3XZ ATV71LD66M3Z 230*400*187 240*420*210

3-phase supply voltage : 380...480V

5,5kW 14A ATV71LU55N4Z ATV71LD14N4Z 175*295*161 175*295*161

7,5kW 17A ATV71LU75N4Z ATV71LD17N4Z 175*295*161 210*295*187

11kW 27A ATV71LD11N4Z ATV71LD27N4Z 210*295*187 230*400*187

15kW 33A ATV71LD15N4Z ATV71LD33N4Z 230*400*187 230*400*187

22kW 48A ATV71LD22N4Z ATV71LD48N4Z 240*420*210 240*550*230

EUROPEAN STANDARD EN 81-1 (Ref. No. EN 81-1:1998 E)

K01 K01 K01 K01

The ATV LIFT is in place of the power contactor K1.

- The contactor interrupting the current at all poles is K2

b 2 Power up without run command

b 3 Select the language, if the drive

b 4 Configure the menu

• Perform an auto-tuning operation to

• If you get lost, return to the factory

Drive factory settings

Option card factory settings

Turning on and configuring the drive

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Separate control section power supply

Power switching via line contactor

Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

User adjustment and extension of functions

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Test on a low power motor or without a motor

Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Use of the LIFT menu

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Description of the terminal

6 Button for reversing the direction

Description of the graphic screen

1 RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A

4 Code << >> Quick 5

2. Menu line. Indicates the name of the current menu or submenu.

• HELP F1 : Contextual help

• Quick F4 : Quick navigation, see page 21.

The function keys are dynamic and contextual.

Drive state codes:

Example configuration windows:

Example configuration window for one value:

RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A

First power-up - [5. LANGUAGE] menu

ATV71LD10N4Z Display for 3 seconds following power-up

RDY Term 0.00m/s 0.0A

RDY Term 0.00 m/s 0.0 A

RDY Term 0.00 m/s 0.0 A

Subsequent power ups

RDY Term 0.00 m/s 0.0 A

RDY Term 2.00 m/s 0.0 A

If no operator inputs are made, switches to "Display"

RDY Term 0.00 m/s 0.0 A

Programming: Example of accessing a parameter

RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A

RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A

Accessing the nominal car speed

• To cancel the modification:

• To save the modification:

RDY Term +0.00Hz 0A

7,5kW 33A ATV71LU75M3Z ATV71LD33M3Z 210295187 230400187

11kW 54A ATV71LD11M3XZ ATV71LD54M3Z 230400187 240420210

15kW 66A ATV71LD15M3XZ ATV71LD66M3Z 230400187 240420210

5,5kW 14A ATV71LU55N4Z ATV71LD14N4Z 175295161 175295161

7,5kW 17A ATV71LU75N4Z ATV71LD17N4Z 175295161 210295187

11kW 27A ATV71LD11N4Z ATV71LD27N4Z 210295187 230400187

15kW 33A ATV71LD15N4Z ATV71LD33N4Z 230400187 230400187

22kW 48A ATV71LD22N4Z ATV71LD48N4Z 240420210 240550230